JP6804137B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a game machine.

Conventionally, there is known a gaming machine provided adjacent to a hopper device and provided with a medal auxiliary storage for storing medals overflowing from the hopper device (see Patent Document 1). In such a game machine, when the amount of medals stored in the medal auxiliary storage reaches a certain amount, the stored medals are automatically stored under the control of the game machine or manually by the clerk of the game store. It is discharged to the outside of the game machine.

In automatic ejection, the openings formed at the bottom of the medal auxiliary storage and the openings formed at the bottom of the cabinet are communicated with each other, and the medals stored in the medal auxiliary storage are passed through these openings. It can be discharged to the outside of the game machine. In a game store where an automatic medal collection system is introduced, medals discharged from the medal auxiliary storage can be collected by a medal transfer device such as a belt conveyor installed under the game machine.

On the other hand, in the manual discharge, the medal auxiliary storage is taken out from the cabinet with the door open by the clerk of the game store, the medals stored in the medal auxiliary storage are removed, and then the medal auxiliary storage is removed. Is put back in place in the cabinet.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2013-188399

As mentioned above, when the medals stored in the medal auxiliary storage are manually ejected by the clerk of the game store, it takes time and effort to return the medal auxiliary storage to the original position in the cabinet. There is a possibility that labor efficiency will decrease and it will not be possible to fully meet the needs of customers (players). Further, since the player cannot play the game while the manual discharge work is being performed, if the work takes a long time, the operating rate of the game machine may decrease. ..

The present invention has been made in view of the above problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of easily performing the work of arranging the medal auxiliary storage in a regular position. ..

In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.
(I) A medal auxiliary storage for storing medals overflowing from the hopper device for storing medals,
A main body that houses the medal auxiliary storage and has an opening on the front,
An opening / closing door that can be opened / closed with respect to the main body
A speaker cover attached to the opening / closing door so as to cover the speaker provided on the opening / closing door from the back side is provided.
The medal auxiliary storage is arranged at a predetermined distance from the side wall of the main body.
A medal spill prevention member is provided so as to fill the gap between the medal auxiliary storage and the side wall.
The speaker cover is provided at a position facing the medal auxiliary storage in a state where the opening / closing door is closed with respect to the main body portion.
In a state where the opening / closing door is closed with respect to the main body, the medal auxiliary storage and the speaker cover come into contact with each other or come close to each other.
The medal spill prevention member has a first surface having an inclination that rises toward the side wall side.
A game machine characterized by that.
(II) A medal auxiliary storage for storing medals overflowing from the hopper device for storing medals,
A main body that houses the medal auxiliary storage and has an opening on the front,
An opening / closing door that can be opened / closed with respect to the main body
A speaker cover attached to the opening / closing door so as to cover the speaker provided on the opening / closing door from the back side is provided.
The medal auxiliary storage is arranged at a predetermined distance from the side wall of the main body.
A medal spill prevention member is provided so as to fill the gap between the medal auxiliary storage and the side wall.
The speaker cover is provided at a position facing the medal auxiliary storage in a state where the opening / closing door is closed with respect to the main body portion.
In a state where the opening / closing door is closed with respect to the main body, the medal auxiliary storage and the speaker cover come into contact with each other or come close to each other.
The medal spill prevention member projects from a first surface in contact with or close to the medal auxiliary storage and above the medal auxiliary storage with respect to the first surface on the side opposite to the side wall. With a second surface formed so as to:
A game machine characterized by that.

(1) A medal auxiliary storage (for example, overflow bucket OF) for storing medals overflowing from a hopper device for storing medals (for example, hopper mechanism HP), and
A main body (for example, cabinet G) that houses the medal auxiliary storage and has an opening on the front surface,
An opening / closing door (for example, a lower door mechanism DD) that can be opened / closed with respect to the main body
A speaker cover (for example, speaker cover DD25R1) attached to the opening / closing door so as to cover the speaker (for example, speaker DD25R) provided on the opening / closing door from the back side is provided.
The medal auxiliary storage (for example, the overflow bucket OF) is arranged at a predetermined distance from the side wall (for example, the side wall G2) of the main body portion.
A medal spill prevention member (for example, overflow guide 8020) is provided so as to fill the gap between the medal auxiliary storage and the side wall.
The speaker cover (for example, the speaker cover DD25R1) is provided at a position facing the medal auxiliary storage (for example, the overflow bucket OF) in a state where the opening / closing door is closed with respect to the main body portion.
The medal auxiliary storage and the speaker cover are in contact with or close to each other in a state where the opening / closing door is closed with respect to the main body.
A game machine characterized by that.

According to the invention of (1), the medal auxiliary storage is arranged at a predetermined distance from the side wall of the main body. A medal spill prevention member is provided so as to fill the gap between the medal auxiliary storage and the side wall. That is, in a state where the medal auxiliary storage is arranged at a regular position, the medal spill prevention member is arranged so as to come into contact with the medal auxiliary storage.

Therefore, after the medals stored in the medal auxiliary storage are manually ejected by the clerk of the game store, when the medal auxiliary storage is returned to the proper position in the main body, the medals should come into contact with the medal spill prevention member. The medal auxiliary storage should be placed near the entrance of the main body (in front of the regular position). If the opening / closing door is closed in this state, the speaker cover hits the medal auxiliary storage, and the medal auxiliary storage is pushed to the rear of the main body. As a result, the medal auxiliary storage is housed in the regular position, so that the work of arranging the medal auxiliary storage in the regular position can be easily performed.

Here, in a state where the opening / closing door is closed with respect to the main body, the medal auxiliary storage and the speaker cover are in contact with or close to each other, but the medal auxiliary storage and the speaker cover are temporarily separated from each other. Then, the state where the medal auxiliary storage and the speaker cover are in contact with each other is released before the opening / closing door is completely closed. As a result, the medal auxiliary storage may not be sufficiently pushed by the speaker cover, and the medal auxiliary storage may stop in front of the normal position. According to the invention of (1), it is possible to continue pushing the medal auxiliary storage by the speaker cover until the medal auxiliary storage reaches the normal position. Therefore, while avoiding such a situation, The medal auxiliary storage can be arranged in a regular position.

(2) The game machine of (1) above.
The medal spill prevention member (for example, the overflow guide 8020) has a first surface (for example, a contact surface 8020a) that is in contact with or is close to the medal auxiliary storage, and the first surface above the medal auxiliary storage. It has a second surface (for example, an upper side surface 8020b) formed so as to project to the side opposite to the side wall with respect to the surface of the surface.
It is characterized by that.

As described above, if the opening / closing door is closed with the medal auxiliary storage placed near the entrance of the main body (in front of the regular position), the speaker cover will hit the medal auxiliary storage, and the speaker cover will be used for the medal auxiliary storage. If the medal auxiliary storage pops out upward due to the impact when it hits the storage, the medal auxiliary storage may not be arranged in the proper position. In this regard, according to the invention of (2), the medal spill prevention member has a second surface formed above the medal auxiliary storage in addition to the first surface that is in contact with or is close to the medal auxiliary storage. have. Therefore, when the medal auxiliary storage tries to pop out upward, the upward movement of the medal auxiliary storage is restricted by the second surface of the medal spill prevention member, and the medal auxiliary storage can be prevented from popping out. ..

According to the present invention, the work of arranging the medal auxiliary storage at a regular position can be easily performed.

It is a perspective view of a game machine. It is a perspective view of a game machine. It is a front view of a game machine. It is a schematic layout drawing inside the housing of a game machine. It is an exploded perspective view of a game machine. It is an exploded perspective view of a game machine. It is an exploded perspective view of a mirror mechanism. It is explanatory drawing which shows the positional relationship between a projector mechanism and a mirror mechanism. It is explanatory drawing which shows the mounting state of a mirror mechanism. It is a vertical sectional view of a display unit. It is a perspective view of the front screen mechanism. It is a perspective view of the front screen mechanism. It is a front view of a display unit. It is a perspective view of a display unit. It is an exploded perspective view of a display unit. It is an exploded perspective view of a display unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the state of the opening for operation. It is a perspective view of a display unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the irradiation state to the fixed screen mechanism. It is explanatory drawing which shows the irradiation state to the front screen mechanism. It is explanatory drawing which shows the irradiation state to the rear screen mechanism. It is an exploded perspective view of the front screen mechanism. It is explanatory drawing which shows the state which removed the right side plate of the screen housing. It is a perspective view of the right front screen drive mechanism. It is explanatory drawing which shows the operating state of the right front screen drive mechanism. It is explanatory drawing which shows the operation process of the right front screen drive mechanism. It is explanatory drawing which shows the operation process of the right front screen drive mechanism. It is explanatory drawing which shows the operation process of the right front screen drive mechanism. It is a perspective view of a game machine. It is a perspective view of a game machine. It is a front view of a game machine. It is a front view of the game machine when the upper door mechanism and the lower door mechanism are in the open state. It is an exploded perspective view of a game machine. It is an exploded perspective view of a game machine. It is an exploded perspective view of a mirror mechanism. It is explanatory drawing which shows the positional relationship between a projector mechanism and a mirror mechanism. It is explanatory drawing which shows the mounting state of a mirror mechanism. It is a vertical sectional view of a display unit. It is a perspective view of a projector mechanism. It is a perspective view when the display unit is attached to a cabinet. It is a schematic partial cross-sectional view taken along the line ZZ in FIG. 40 in which the functional parts housed in the housing of the display unit are omitted, and is arranged above the game machine when the game machine is installed on the island facility. It is also a diagram showing the fixing plate member of the island facility. It is a perspective view of a projector mechanism. It is a front view of a display unit. It is a perspective view of a display unit. It is an exploded perspective view of a display unit. It is an exploded perspective view of a display unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the state of the opening for operation. It is a perspective view of a display unit. It is a perspective sectional view of a display unit and a cabinet. It is explanatory drawing which shows the irradiation state to the fixed screen mechanism. It is explanatory drawing which shows the irradiation state to the front screen mechanism. It is explanatory drawing which shows the irradiation state to the reel screen mechanism. It is explanatory drawing which shows the operating range of a front screen mechanism and the operating range of a reel screen mechanism. It is an exploded perspective view of the front screen mechanism. It is explanatory drawing which shows the state which removed the right side plate of the screen housing. It is a perspective view of the right front screen drive mechanism. It is explanatory drawing which shows the operating state of the right front screen drive mechanism. It is explanatory drawing which shows the operation process of the right front screen drive mechanism. It is explanatory drawing which shows the operation process of the right front screen drive mechanism. It is explanatory drawing which shows the operation process of the right front screen drive mechanism. It is a perspective view of the front screen mechanism and the front screen drive mechanism. It is a perspective view of a reel screen mechanism, a reel screen drive mechanism, and a movable body base. It is a perspective view of the reel screen mechanism and the reel screen drive mechanism. It is a perspective view for demonstrating the sensor mechanism. It is explanatory drawing which shows the detection state of a sensor mechanism. It is explanatory drawing which shows the detection state of a sensor mechanism. It is explanatory drawing which shows the detection state of a sensor mechanism. It is a sequence diagram which concerns on the operation of the front screen mechanism. It is a figure explaining the control sequence of the drive motor of the front screen drive mechanism when driving the front screen mechanism from the front standby position to the front exposure position. It is a sequence diagram which concerns on the operation of a reel screen mechanism. It is a figure explaining the control sequence of the drive motor of the reel screen drive mechanism when driving a reel screen mechanism from a reel standby position to a reel exposed position. It is a figure explaining the driving procedure of the front screen mechanism and the reel screen mechanism which concerns on origin return operation. It is a perspective view of a cabinet and a medal supply port. It is a perspective view of a cabinet, a medal supply port, and a medal supply mechanism. It is a perspective view of the medal supply mechanism. It is an exploded perspective view of the medal supply mechanism. It is explanatory drawing which shows the arrangement of the back wall, the medal supply port, the medal supply mechanism, and the scaler device. It is a front view of the game machine with the lower door mechanism open. It is a perspective view of the lower space of a cabinet. It is a perspective view of the lower space of a cabinet. It is sectional drawing of the lower space of a cabinet. It is a front view, a top view, and a right side view of a coin guard. It is a front view of the game machine with the lower door mechanism open. It is explanatory drawing of the state which the hopper guide mechanism is attached to the bottom plate. It is a top view and a front view of a hopper guide mechanism. It is a perspective view of the hopper mechanism HP. It is explanatory drawing when the hopper mechanism HP is attached normally. It is explanatory drawing when the hopper mechanism HP is attached normally. It is explanatory drawing when the hopper mechanism HP is erroneously entered. It is a detailed view of the inside of a cabinet. It is a perspective view of the lower space of a cabinet. It is explanatory drawing of sheet metal. It is explanatory drawing of sheet metal. It is a front view of the cabinet with the upper door mechanism and the lower door mechanism open. It is a side view of the cabinet with the upper door mechanism and the lower door mechanism open. It is a perspective view of the cabinet with the lower dora mechanism open. It is explanatory drawing of the upper door lock mechanism. It is explanatory drawing of the upper door lock mechanism in a locked state. It is a perspective view of the game machine with the lower door mechanism removed from the cabinet. It is a perspective view of the game machine with the lower door mechanism open. It is a detailed view of the lower space of a cabinet. It is a side view of the state which the speaker DD25 and a power-source device face each other. It is a perspective view of the upper door mechanism. It is an exploded view of the operation part and the locking part of the maximum BET button. It is the figure which looked at the maximum BET button fixed to the 2nd pedestal part from the inside of a cabinet. It is sectional drawing of the 2nd pedestal part. It is an exploded view of the operation part. It is a front view of a game machine. It is a front view of the game machine with the lower door mechanism open. It is a rear perspective view of the lower door mechanism. It is an exploded view of the lower door DD1, the reel unit RU, and the main control board MS. It is explanatory drawing of attachment of the main control board to a reel unit. It is explanatory drawing of installation of a reel unit to a lower door mechanism. It is an exploded perspective view of a reel device. It is an exploded perspective view of a reel unit. It is a perspective view of a motor mounting plate, a reel index, and a sensor part. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the detection piece and the detection state. It is a perspective view of a motor mounting plate and a sensor part. It is an exploded perspective view of a motor mounting plate and a sensor part. It is an exploded perspective view of a motor mounting plate and a sensor part. It is explanatory drawing which shows the mounting position of the pedestal member with respect to the motor mounting plate. It is explanatory drawing which shows the attachment position of the sensor with respect to a pedestal member. It is the top view of the game machine with the upper door mechanism open. It is a perspective view of the game machine in a state where the upper door mechanism is removed from a cabinet. It is explanatory drawing of the upper hinge mechanism. It is a perspective view of the upper door mechanism. It is an exploded perspective view of the upper door mechanism. It is an exploded perspective view of a decorative unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the positional relationship between an irradiation light apparatus and a decoration unit. It is sectional drawing of a decorative unit. It is a front view which shows the internal structure of the upper door mechanism. It is a perspective view of the upper door mechanism. It is an enlarged perspective view of the main part of the upper door mechanism. It is an enlarged sectional view of the main part of the upper door mechanism. It is a perspective view of the left panel mechanism. It is a perspective view of the left panel mechanism. It is an exploded perspective view of the left panel mechanism. It is an exploded perspective view of the left panel mechanism. It is a partially disassembled perspective view of the left panel mechanism. It is sectional drawing of the left panel mechanism. It is explanatory drawing which shows the light guide structure of the left light guide plate. It is a perspective view of a panel base, a top lens cover, and an upper left panel mechanism. It is a perspective view of the upper left panel mechanism. It is a perspective view of the upper left panel mechanism. It is a perspective view of the top lens cover and the upper left panel mechanism. It is a figure which shows the functional flow of a pachislot. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of a main control circuit. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the sub-control circuit. It is an exploded perspective view of a sub control device. It is a perspective view of a base member. It is a perspective view which looked at the cover member from the bottom side. It is a front view of the sub control unit. It is a top view of the sub control unit. It is a bottom view of the sub control unit. It is a perspective view of the base side adhesive part. It is a front view of the base side adhesive part. It is a perspective view which looked at the base side adhesive part from the rear. It is a right side view of the base side adhesive part. It is a top view of the base side adhesive part. It is a perspective view of the cover side adhesive part. It is a right side view of the cover side adhesive part. It is a perspective view which looked at the cover side adhesive part from below. It is a perspective view which looked at the cover side adhesive part from below. It is a bottom view of the cover side adhesive part. It is a figure which shows the state when the base member and the cover member are aligned. It is a bottom view of the base side adhesive part and the cover side adhesive part in a state where a base member and a cover member are screwed. It is sectional drawing which follows the arrow view AA of the sub-control device shown in FIG. 152A. It is a perspective view of a display unit. It is an exploded perspective view of the screen device. It is an exploded perspective view of the screen device. It is an exploded perspective view of the screen device. It is an exploded perspective view of the front screen mechanism. It is a front view of the front screen support base. It is sectional drawing which follows the arrow view BB of the front screen support base shown in FIG. 171. It is a figure which shows the state which the front screen member was adhered to the front screen support stand shown in FIG. 172. It is sectional drawing which follows the arrow CC of the front screen support stand shown in FIG. 171. It is a figure which shows the state which the front screen member was adhered to the front screen support stand shown in FIG. 174. It is a rear view of the front screen support base. It is sectional drawing which follows the arrow view DD of the front screen support stand shown in FIG. 176. It is sectional drawing which follows the arrow view EE of the front screen support base shown in FIG. 176. It is explanatory drawing which shows the state which the right side plate and the left side plate of the screen housing were removed. It is a perspective view of the right front screen drive mechanism. It is explanatory drawing which shows the state which the crank gear of the right front screen drive mechanism is removed. It is a top view of the crank gear of the right front screen drive mechanism. It is a perspective view of the right front screen mechanism and the left front screen drive mechanism. It is the right side view of the crank gear of the right front screen drive mechanism. It is a right side view of the intermediate gear of the right front screen drive mechanism. It is a right side view of the crank gear and the intermediate gear of the right front screen drive mechanism when the front screen mechanism is arranged in the front exposed position. It is a right side view of the right side plate. It is a right side view of the screen apparatus when the front screen mechanism is arranged in the front exposed position. It is a left side view of the crank gear of the right front screen drive mechanism when the front screen mechanism is arranged in the front exposed position. It is a figure which shows the crank gear in the state before assembling the crank gear and the crank member. It is a figure which shows the crank member in the state before assembling the crank gear and the crank member. It is a right side view which shows the state which attached the crank gear to the right side plate. It is a figure which shows the state which attached the intermediate gear to the right side plate and the crank gear shown in FIG. It is a perspective view of the reel screen mechanism when it is arranged in a reel standby position. It is a perspective view of the reel screen mechanism when it is arranged in a reel exposed position. It is a perspective view of a reel screen mechanism, a reel screen drive mechanism, and a movable body base. It is a perspective view of the reel screen mechanism and the reel screen drive mechanism. It is a perspective view which shows the arm member and the movable body base when the reel screen mechanism is arranged in a reel standby position. It is a right side view of a reel screen mechanism and an arm member. It is a bottom view of a reel screen mechanism and an arm member. It is a perspective view which looked at the reel screen mechanism and an arm member from below. It is a perspective view of the right movable body base. It is a figure which shows the state which the position of the arm member and the movable body base shown in FIG. 198 is slightly shifted in the vertical direction. It is a top view near the reference plane in a movable body base. It is sectional drawing which follows the arrow view FF of the movable body base shown in FIG. 204. It is the figure which looked at the shock absorbing member installation part from the right side. It is a figure which shows the state which installed the cushioning member in the cushioning member installation part shown in FIG. 206. It is a figure which shows the state which the arm member and the cushioning member are in contact with each other in the cross section along the arrow view GG of the movable body base shown in FIG. 204. It is a perspective view which shows the front screen mechanism and the bottom plate when the front screen mechanism is arranged in the front exposed position. It is a perspective view of the front screen support base. It is a partially enlarged view of the protrusion formed on the front screen support base shown in FIG. 210. It is a perspective view of a bottom plate. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing a state in which the positions of the front screen mechanism and the bottom plate shown in FIG. 209 are slightly shifted in the vertical direction. It is the figure which looked at the bottom plate from diagonally below. It is a top view of the bottom plate. It is a partially enlarged view of the cushioning member installation part in the cross section along the arrow view HH of the bottom plate shown in FIG. 215. It is a figure which shows the state which attached the cover for the cushioning member to the cushioning member installation part formed in the bottom plate shown in FIG. 214. It is a perspective view of the cover for a shock absorber. It is a figure which shows the state which put the cushioning member on the cover for cushioning member shown in FIG. 218. It is a figure which shows the state which the front screen support base and the cushioning member are in contact with each other in the cross section of the bottom plate which is shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the state which the cushioning member and the cover for a cushioning member are installed in the cross section along the arrow view I-I of the bottom plate shown in FIG. 215. It is a right side view of the arcuate gear shown in FIG. 197. It is a perspective view of the arcuate gear shown in FIG. 222. It is a left side view of the crank member of the right front screen drive mechanism. It is a perspective view of the crank member shown in FIG. 224. FIG. 5 is a perspective view of a cross section of a screen device when the front screen mechanism is arranged at the front exposed position and the reel screen mechanism is arranged at the reel standby position. FIG. 5 is a right side view of a cross section of an arcuate gear and a crank member when the front screen mechanism is arranged at the front exposed position and the reel screen mechanism is arranged at the reel standby position. It is a perspective view of the cross section of the screen apparatus in the case where a reel screen mechanism is arranged in a reel exposed position, and the front screen mechanism is arranged in a front standby position. FIG. 5 is a right side view of a cross section of an arcuate gear and a crank member when the reel screen mechanism is arranged at the reel exposed position and the front screen mechanism is arranged at the front standby position. It is an exploded perspective view of the irradiation light device. It is a block diagram which shows the circuit structure of a projector mechanism. It is an exploded perspective view of the projector mechanism. It is an exploded perspective view of the upper pedestal and the lower pedestal for fixing a projector mechanism. It is a top view of the state where the upper pedestal and the lower pedestal are connected. It is a figure for demonstrating the positioning method of the upper pedestal. FIG. 3 is a cross-sectional view taken along the arrow JJ of the upper pedestal and the lower pedestal shown in FIG. 234. It is a figure for demonstrating the posture adjustment method of the lower pedestal. It is a figure which shows the connection form of a projector mechanism and an adjustment PC. It is a perspective view which shows the state which the upper wall part of a projector cover is removed. It is a top view of the state where the projector cover, the relay plate, and the upper pedestal are connected. FIG. 4 is a cross-sectional view taken along the arrow KK of the projector cover, the relay plate, and the upper pedestal shown in FIG. 240. It is a perspective view which shows the state which removed the projector cover from the state shown in FIG. 240. It is an exploded perspective view which shows a relay plate and a cushioning member. It is a perspective view of the upper pedestal and the lower pedestal. It is a top view of the upper pedestal and the lower pedestal. It is the figure which looked at the upper pedestal and the lower pedestal diagonally from the front. It is the figure which looked at the upper pedestal and the lower pedestal diagonally from the rear. It is a perspective view of the case which accommodates the internal component of a projector mechanism. It is a perspective view which shows the state which attached the case to the lower pedestal. It is a perspective view which shows the state which the upper wall part of a projector cover is removed. It is a top view of the projector cover with the upper wall part removed. FIG. 251 is an exploded view showing a cross-sectional view taken along the arrow LL of the projector cover shown in FIG. 251 and a perspective view of a relay plate attached to the projector cover. It is the figure which looked at the projector cover with the upper wall part removed from diagonally above. It is a front view of the projector cover with the upper wall part removed. It is sectional drawing which follows the arrow MM of the projector cover shown in FIG. 254. It is a perspective view of a blind. It is a top view of the irradiation light device in a state where the upper wall part of a projector cover is removed. It is sectional drawing which follows the arrow view NN of the irradiation light apparatus shown in FIG. It is a right side view of the cross section along the arrow view NN of the irradiation light device shown in FIG. 257. It is a figure for demonstrating the arrangement position of the intake fan and the exhaust fan. It is a figure which shows the air flow path which can be formed inside a projector cover. It is a perspective view which shows the appearance of a pachinko gaming machine. It is an exploded perspective view of a pachinko gaming machine. It is an exploded perspective view which shows the decorative unit and the frame member of a pachinko game machine from the front. It is a perspective view which shows the appearance of a pachinko gaming machine. It is an exploded perspective view of a pachinko gaming machine. It is a perspective view which looked at the upper door mechanism with the inner frame attached from the rear. It is an exploded perspective view of the upper door mechanism and the inner frame. It is a perspective view of an inner frame. It is an exploded perspective view of the inner frame. It is an exploded perspective view of the inner frame. It is an exploded perspective view of the right side part, the left side part, and the lower side part of the inner frame. It is an exploded perspective view of the right side part, the left side part, and the lower side part of the inner frame. It is a front view of the game machine with the transparent panel removed. It is a perspective view which looked at the upper door mechanism, the inner frame, and the bottom plate of a screen housing from the rear. It is a partially enlarged view around the upper display window in the game machine in the state which the inner frame is removed from the state shown in FIG. 274. It is a perspective view of the right side part of the inner frame, the right movable body base, and the right hidden wall. It is a perspective view which shows the lower part of the inner frame, the lower cover, and the center frame in an exploded manner. It is a perspective view which looked at the center frame, the lower part of the inner frame, the bottom plate of a screen housing, and the intermediate support plate from the side. It is a perspective view which looked at the center frame, the bottom plate of the screen housing, and the intermediate support plate from the side. It is a perspective view of the game machine in the state which the lower door mechanism is opened. It is a perspective view which shows the state which the overflow bucket was removed from the game machine shown in FIG. 280. It is a perspective view which shows the state which the overflow flap was removed from the state shown in FIG. 281. It is a perspective view which looked at the state shown in FIG. 282 from a different direction. FIG. 3 is a perspective view showing a state in which the overflow cover and the recovery device fixing plate are removed from the state shown in FIG. 283. It is a perspective view which shows the state which removed the overflow cover from the state shown in FIG. 283. It is a partial enlarged view which shows the state which the overflow bucket is installed in the overflow bucket installation part. It is sectional drawing which shows the state of cutting in the vertical plane in the front-rear direction in the state shown in FIG. 286. It is sectional drawing which shows the state of cutting in the vertical plane in the left-right direction in the state shown in FIG. 286. It is a perspective view of an overflow guide. It is a partially enlarged view of the overflow bucket and the overflow guide in the state where the lower door mechanism is opened. It is a partially enlarged view of the overflow bucket and the overflow guide which shows the state which the overflow guide was cut in the horizontal plane. It is a perspective view which shows the overflow bucket and the overflow guide. It is a perspective view which shows the back side of the lower door mechanism. FIG. 3 is a partially enlarged view showing a state in which the speaker cover is removed from the lower door mechanism shown in FIG. 293. It is sectional drawing which shows the inside of the cabinet in the state which the lower door mechanism is closed. It is sectional drawing which shows the state which the overflow bucket was cut in the vertical plane in the front-rear direction in a state where it was placed in an inclined posture near the entrance of a cabinet.

(First Embodiment)
Hereinafter, the first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.
The game machine is a so-called pachislot machine. The game machine is a game machine that uses coins, medals, game balls, tokens, and other game media such as cards that are given or given to the player and that store game value information. Hereinafter, it will be described assuming that a medal is used.

In the following description, the side (direction) from the game machine 1 toward the player is referred to as the front side (front direction) of the game machine 1, and the side opposite to the front side is referred to as the rear side (rear direction, depth direction). The right side and the left side when viewed from the player are referred to as the right side (right direction) and the left side (left direction) of the game machine 1, respectively. Further, the direction including the front side and the rear side is referred to as a front-rear direction or a thickness direction, and the direction including the right side and the left side is referred to as a left-right direction or a width direction. The direction orthogonal to the front-back direction (thickness direction) and the left-right direction (width direction) is referred to as a vertical direction or a height direction.

As shown in FIGS. 1 and 2, the appearance of the game machine 1 is composed of a rectangular box-shaped housing 2. The housing 2 has a cabinet 21 having a rectangular opening on the front side, an upper door mechanism UD arranged in the upper part of the front surface of the cabinet 21, and a lower door mechanism DD arranged in the lower part of the front surface of the cabinet 21. ing. The cabinet 21 houses equipment used for the game (for example, a reel (or a drum)). As also shown in FIG. 3, the upper door mechanism UD and the lower door mechanism DD are formed so as to correspond to the shape and size of the opening of the cabinet 21. The upper door mechanism UD and the lower door mechanism DD are provided so as to be able to close the upper part and the lower part of the opening in the cabinet 21. The upper door mechanism UD has an upper display window UD1 in the center. The upper display window UD1 is provided with a transparent panel UD11 that transmits light.

(Display unit A)
As shown in FIG. 4, a display unit A is provided inside the cabinet 21 on the rear side of the upper door mechanism UD. As shown in FIG. 5, the display unit A is detachably provided on the intermediate support plate 211 in the cabinet 21. The intermediate support plate 211 functions as a partition wall between the upper space and the lower space in the cabinet 21. The display unit A is a so-called projection mapping device having an irradiation light device B that emits irradiation light including an image and a screen device C that causes an image to appear when the irradiation light from the irradiation light device B is irradiated. ..

Here, the projection mapping device is for projecting an image on the surface of a three-dimensional object such as a building or a natural object, and for example, the position (projection distance or angle) of an accessory which is a screen described later. By projecting an image according to the production information, which is generated based on the shape and shape, it is possible to produce an advanced and powerful production.

(Display unit A: Illumination light device B)
As shown in FIG. 6, the irradiation light device B is arranged in front of the projector mechanism B2 that emits the irradiation light forward and the projector mechanism B2, and the irradiation light from the projector mechanism B2 is arranged diagonally downward and rearward. It has a mirror mechanism B3 that reflects in the device C direction, and a projector cover B1 that houses the projector mechanism B2 and the mirror mechanism B3.

(Display unit A: Illumination light device B: Projector mechanism B2)
The projector mechanism B2 is arranged at the rear part in the cabinet 21. The projector mechanism B2 has a horizontally arranged flat plate-shaped base member B22. A lens mechanism B21 and a light source (not shown) are provided on the lower surface of the base member B22. The lens mechanism B21 is arranged so as to emit the irradiation light emitted from the light source toward the front mirror mechanism B3.

Further, heat exhaust mechanisms B23 and B24 are provided on the lower surface of the base member B22. The heat exhaust mechanisms B23 and B24 are arranged on the right side and the left side of the lens mechanism B21 and the light source, respectively. The heat exhaust mechanisms B23 and B24 have a duct for circulating air and a fan for sending out air, and by blowing the air backward, the heat generated when the irradiation light is generated is forcibly pushed backward. It is designed to flow. As shown in FIG. 2, the ventilation holes 21a of the cabinet 21 are arranged in the air flow direction in the heat exhaust mechanisms B23 and B24. As a result, the heat exhaust mechanisms B23 and B24 can forcibly discharge the heat of the projector mechanism B2 together with the air to the outside of the machine through the ventilation hole 21a.

(Display unit A: Illumination light device B: Mirror mechanism B3)
As shown in FIG. 6, the mirror mechanism B3 is arranged in front of the projector mechanism B2 (the emission direction of the irradiation light). As shown in FIG. 7, the mirror mechanism B3 includes a mirror holder B31, an optical mirror B32 housed in the mirror holder B31, and mirror stoppers B33 and B34 for fixing both ends of the optical mirror B32 to the mirror holder B31. doing. As shown in FIG. 8, the mirror holder B31 is formed in the shape of a rectangular plate on the front surface. An angle adjusting hole B311 is formed at each corner of the mirror holder B31, and a recess B312 is formed on the front surface centering on the angle adjusting hole B311. Further, mounting holes B314 and B314 are formed vertically symmetrically between the angle adjusting holes B311 and B311 in the vertical direction.

On the other hand, a mirror holding portion B313 is formed on the rear surface of the mirror holder B31. The mirror holding portion B313 is formed in the central portion, and is formed in a size that does not overlap the angle adjusting hole B311 and the mounting hole B314. Mirror stoppers B33 and B34 are provided on the left side and the right side of the mirror holding portion B313, respectively. The mirror stoppers B33 and B34 have angle adjusting holes B331 and B341 and mounting holes B334 and B344, respectively. The angle adjusting holes B331 and B341 and the mounting holes B334 and B344 in the mirror stoppers B33 and B34 are arranged so as to correspond to the angle adjusting holes B311 and B311 and the mounting holes B314 and B314 in the mirror holder B31.

The mirror stoppers B33 and B34 are partially formed so as to overlap the mirror holding portion B313. As a result, the mirror stoppers B33 and B34 come into contact with both left and right sides of the optical mirror B32 fitted to the mirror holding portion B313, and are screwed to the mirror holder B31 by the mounting holes B314, B334, and B344. , The optical mirror B32 is held by the mirror holder B31.

As shown in FIG. 9, the mirror mechanism B3 configured as described above is provided on the inner surface of the reflector holding portion B11 in the projector cover B1. The reflector holding portion B11 is formed in the front central portion of the projector cover B1 and is arranged so as to be exposed to the front side when the upper door mechanism UD is opened. The reflector holding portion B11 has an angle adjusting hole B111. The angle adjusting hole B111 is formed at a position corresponding to the angle adjusting hole B311 of the mirror mechanism B3.

A screw (not shown) is inserted into the angle adjusting hole B111 of the reflector holding portion B11 from the front side, and this screw penetrates the angle adjusting hole B311 of the mirror holder B31. The angle adjusting holes B331 and B341 of the mirror stoppers B33 and B34 are formed as screw holes into which screws can be screwed, and the screws penetrating the angle adjusting holes B311 of the mirror holder B31 are the mirror stoppers B33 and B34. It is screwed into the angle adjusting holes B331 and B341.

Then, when the screw is rotated in the direction in which the screw with the angle adjusting holes B331 / B341 is loosened, the distance between the reflector holding portion B11 and the mirror stoppers B33 / B34 is increased. On the other hand, when the screw is rotated in the direction in which the screw with the angle adjusting holes B331 / B341 is tightened, the distance between the reflector holding portion B11 and the mirror stoppers B33 / B34 is shortened.

As described above, the mirror holder B31 and the mirror stoppers B33 / B34 are screwed together via the mounting holes B314 / B334 / B344, whereby the optical mirror is between the mirror holder B31 and the mirror stoppers B33 / B34. B32 is sandwiched. In this way, the mirror holder B31, the optical mirror B32, and the mirror stoppers B33 / B34 are integrated as a mirror mechanism B3, and the distance between the reflector holding portion B11 and the mirror stoppers B33 / B34 is changed by the rotation of the screw. As a result, the distance between the reflector holding portion B11 and the mirror mechanism B3 can be increased or decreased. Since the angle adjusting holes B311, 331, and B341 are arranged in four directions corresponding to the corners of the mirror mechanism B3, the reflector holding portion B11 and the mirror mechanism at the arrangement positions of the angle adjusting holes B311, 331, and B341 are arranged. By increasing or decreasing the distance from B3, it is possible to finely adjust the reflection angle of the optical mirror B32 with respect to the traveling direction of the irradiation light emitted from the projector mechanism B2.

Further, a spring (not shown) is provided between the reflector holding portion B11 and the mirror holder B31. The rear end surface of the spring is in contact with the recess B312 of the mirror holder B31, and the front end surface is in contact with the inner wall surface (rear wall surface) of the reflector holding portion B11, so that the reflector holding portion B11 and the mirror holder B31 It is sandwiched between. Then, a screw inserted through the angle adjusting hole B111 of the reflector holding portion B11 penetrates the spring. As a result, even if the distance between the reflector holding portion B11 and the mirror mechanism B3 increases as the screw rotates, the screw head comes into contact with the angle adjusting hole B111 of the reflector holding portion B11 due to the urging force of the spring. It is possible to prevent the screw head from protruding from the angle adjusting hole B111 and breaking the positional relationship between the reflector holding portion B11 and the screw.

(Display unit A: Illumination light device B: Projector cover B1)
As shown in FIG. 10, the projector mechanism B2 and the mirror mechanism B3 configured as described above are housed in the projector cover B1. The projector cover B1 includes a horizontally arranged upper wall portion B12, a reflector holding portion B11 arranged on the front side of the upper wall portion B12, and side wall portions B13 and B13 arranged symmetrically in the left-right direction of the upper wall portion B12. And have. The front portion of the upper wall portion B12 projects forward from the cabinet 21 of FIG. A reflector holding portion B11 is formed in a form protruding forward in the central portion of the front side of the upper wall portion B12, and the above-mentioned mirror mechanism B3 is held in a space formed by the protrusion so that the angle can be adjusted. ..

Further, the side wall portions B13 and B13 have protruding portions B131 protruding in the horizontal direction from the lower end portion. The protruding portion B131 has a first protruding portion B131a on the front side and a second protruding portion B131b on the rear side. The first protrusion B131a is formed at a position corresponding to the opening of the cabinet 21 when the projector cover B1 is mounted on the cabinet 21, and is set to a width slightly smaller than the width of the opening of the cabinet 21. Has been done. On the other hand, the second protruding portion B131b is formed at a position corresponding to the space behind the opening of the cabinet 21 when the projector cover B1 is mounted on the cabinet 21, and is wider than the width of the space behind. It is set to a slightly smaller width. That is, each of the side wall portions B13 and B13 is formed so that the width of the second protruding portion B131b is wider than the width of the first protruding portion B131a. As a result, the projector cover B1 can cover most of the internal space in the cabinet 21.

A perforated plate B15 having a plurality of holes B151 is provided on the lower surface side of the projector cover B1. The perforated plate B15 is a punching metal in which a plurality of holes are formed by punching a plate made of metal (for example, stainless steel, iron, steel, aluminum, etc.). The plurality of holes B151 are formed so as to be substantially evenly dispersed on the entire surface of the perforated plate B15. The perforated plate B15 allows air to flow over the entire surface of the perforated plate B15, and enables air to flow from the lower side to the upper side by suction by the heat exhaust mechanisms B23 and B24 of the projector mechanism B2. The size and number of holes B151 are set so that the inside of the projector cover B1 cannot be visually recognized from the outside. The hole B151 is formed in a shape such as a circle, a square, or a hexagon, and the hole diameter is about 3 to 5 mm.

The perforated plate B15 is formed so as to cover the first protruding portion B131a and the second protruding portion B131b of the projector cover B1 from the lower position. As shown in FIG. 12, the perforated plate B15 has an upper portion B15a on the front side, an inclined portion B15b on the middle side, and a lower portion B15c on the rear side. The upper portion B15a is horizontally arranged. The inclined portion B15b is formed by being bent diagonally downward and rearward from the rear side of the upper portion B15a. The lower side portion B15c is formed by being bent in the horizontal direction from the rear side of the inclined portion B15b.

The upper portion B15a of the perforated plate B15 is attached to the side wall portions B13 and B13 of the projector cover B1. As a result, the perforated plate B15 is arranged so that the front portion of the projector cover B1 is covered from the lower side by the upper portion B15a, and the inclined portion B15b and the lower portion B15c cover the front portion of the projector cover B1 from the lower portion to the rear portion. There is. As shown in FIG. 10, a front screen mechanism E1 in the screen device C is arranged below the perforated plate B15.

Although the details will be described later, the front screen mechanism E1 has a front standby position arranged on the upper side, which is a standby posture for prohibiting the appearance of an image due to irradiation light, and a lower side, which is an exposure posture for allowing the appearance of an image due to irradiation light. The front screen mechanism E1 in the standby posture is tilted so as to be substantially parallel to the tilted portion B15b of the perforated plate B15 so as to be rotatable between the front exposed position and the exposed position. On the other hand, when the front screen mechanism E1 is in the exposed posture, a large space portion appears below the perforated plate B15, and the air existing in this space reaches the perforated plate B15 without flow resistance, and a plurality of spaces are present. By passing through the hole B151, it is possible to facilitate the inflow of air into the screen device C and improve the cooling efficiency.

Further, by providing the perforated plate B15 so as to cover the lower surface of the projector cover B1, for example, as shown in FIG. 13, the position of the player's line of sight located on the front side is the center of the screen device C in the vertical direction and the horizontal direction. Even if it exists on the horizontal line of the portion and looks up at the irradiation light device B from this line-of-sight position, the perforated plate B15 prevents the inside of the irradiation light device B from being visually observed.

(Display unit A: Screen device C)
As shown in FIG. 14, the irradiation light device B configured as described above is connected to the upper surface of the screen device C by screwing. As a result, the display unit A can unite the irradiation light device B and the screen device C and handle them integrally.

(Display unit A: Screen device C: Screen housing C10)
The screen device C has a box-shaped screen housing C10. As shown in FIG. 15, the screen housing C10 includes a horizontally arranged bottom plate C1, a right side plate C2 erected at the right end of the bottom plate C1, and a left side plate C3 erected at the left end of the bottom plate C1. And a back plate C4 erected at the rear end of the bottom plate C1. As a result, the right side plate C2, the left side plate C3, and the back plate C4 are connected to the bottom plate C1 by screwing, so that the front side where the player is located and the upper surface side where the irradiation light device B is located are connected. An open box-shaped screen housing C10 is formed.

The bottom plate C1, the right side plate C2, the left side plate C3, and the back plate C4 constituting the screen housing C10 are each independently formed into a predetermined shape, and a predetermined functional component such as a fixed screen mechanism D can be attached. Has been made. As a result, even if the unit of the screen device C cannot be standardized as a whole, the bottom plate C1, the right side plate C2, the left side plate C3, and the back plate C4 can be standardized for each plate member. Further, since it is possible to partially change each plate member, it is possible to easily change the specifications for each model of the game machine 1.

(Display unit A: Screen device C: Screen housing C10: Bottom plate C1)
Specifically, the bottom plate C1 of the screen housing C10 is formed in a flat plate shape having a rectangular top view. The upper surface of the bottom plate C1 has a central mounting portion C11 arranged in the central portion, and a right mounting portion C12 and a left mounting portion C13 arranged in the left-right direction about the central mounting portion C11. There is. These mounting portions C11, C12, and C13 are formed in a concave shape. The central mounting portion C11 mounts the fixed screen mechanism D so that it can be positioned by fitting the lower end portion of the fixed screen mechanism D. The right mounting portion C12 and the left mounting portion C13 position the right movable body base C5 and the left movable body base C6, respectively, by fitting the lower ends of the right movable body base C5 and the left movable body base C6, respectively. It is placed as possible.

Further, the front side portion C14 of the bottom plate C1 is bent downward so that the tip portion thereof is positioned below the lower surface of the bottom plate C1. A plurality of through holes C141 are formed in the front side portion C14. As shown in FIG. 5, when the display unit A is mounted on the intermediate support plate 211 of the cabinet 21 and incorporated, the front side portion C14 abuts on the front surface of the intermediate support plate 211 in the cabinet 21. It is possible to perform rearward positioning. Then, the display unit A can be screwed to the front surface of the cabinet 21 via the through hole C141 of the front side portion C14 to perform the installation work and the installation work of the display unit A from the front side of the cabinet 21. It is possible.

(Display unit A: Screen device C: Screen housing C10: Right side plate C2, Left side plate C3)
As shown in FIGS. 15 and 16, the right side plate C2 and the left side plate C3 of the screen housing C10 have operation openings C21 and C31. The operation openings C21 and C31 are formed as handles, and the display unit A can be carried by hooking a hand on the operation openings C21 and C31. The operation openings C21 and C31 are arranged on the side of the crank gears E21 and E21 of the front screen drive mechanism E2. The operating openings C21 and C31 are formed in a rectangular shape in which the longitudinal directions are aligned in the horizontal direction. The opening areas of the operating openings C21 and C31 are set so that the crank gears E21 and E21 can be manually operated from the outside.

As a result, when manually moving the front screen mechanism E1 in the standby position after incorporating the display unit A into the cabinet 21, the display unit A is first taken out from the front side of the cabinet 21 in which the upper door mechanism UD is opened. .. Specifically, an operator located on the front side of the cabinet 21 releases the screw of the display unit A to the cabinet 21 and removes the screw. Then, the display unit A is taken out of the cabinet 21 by reaching into the cabinet 21 and grasping the operating openings C21 and C31 of the display unit A with both hands. After that, as shown in FIG. 17, for example, reaching into the screen device C from one of the operating openings C21 of the removed display unit A, and rotating the crank gear E21 that can be seen in the horizontal direction from the operating opening C21. As a result, the locked front screen mechanism E1 can be easily moved from the standby position. The locked state of the front screen mechanism E1 will be described later. When the locked state is released by moving from the standby position, the front screen mechanism E1 can be quickly rotated to a desired position.

With the upper door mechanism UD open, reach out from the front of the opening of the cabinet 21 into the space between the side wall 212 of the cabinet 21 and the right side plate C2 of the screen device C, and reach for the operation opening C21. By operating the crank gear E21 from the door, the crank gear E21 can be rotated. In this case, the locked state of the front screen mechanism E1 can be released without removing the display unit A from the outside of the cabinet 21.

Further, a motor accommodating portion C22 is formed on the right side plate C2. The motor accommodating portion C22 accommodates the drive motor F21 of the reel screen drive mechanism F2.

(Display unit A: Screen device C: Screen housing C10: Back plate C4)
As shown in FIG. 18, the back plate C4 of the screen housing C10 is formed in a flat plate shape, and a relay board CK is provided on the back surface. The relay board CK makes it possible to collect a plurality of signal lines in the display unit A and perform wiring to the outside of the display unit A at one place. The relay board CK is provided on the back surface of the back plate C4 so that it is arranged in front of the back wall 213 of the cabinet 21. That is, the relay board CK is arranged in the gap between the back wall 213 of the cabinet 21 and the back plate C4 of the screen housing C10. As shown in FIG. 5, a through hole 2111 of the intermediate support plate 211 that supports the display unit A is arranged below the relay board CK, and the signal line of the relay board CK is inserted therethrough.

As a result, the relay board is arranged outside the screen device C, which facilitates the wiring work and eliminates the need to secure an installation space for the relay board CK in the screen device C. The degree of freedom of design in the device C is expanded.

Further, as shown in FIG. 18, an operation opening C41 is formed in the back plate C4. The operation opening C41 is arranged at the lower right side and faces the intermediate gear E23 of the front screen drive mechanism E2. The operation opening C41 is formed in a size that allows the intermediate gear E23 to be manually operated. As a result, when the front screen mechanism E1 in the standby position is manually moved after the display unit A is assembled in the cabinet 21, the display unit A is first removed from the cabinet 21. After that, by reaching into the screen device C from the operation opening C41 and rotating the intermediate gear E23 that can be seen horizontally from the operation opening C41, the locked front screen mechanism E1 can be easily moved from the standby position. Can be moved.

(Display unit A: Screen device C: Screen mechanism)
Inside the screen housing C10, a plurality of screen mechanisms for displaying an image by irradiating the irradiation light from the irradiation light device B are provided so that the irradiation target can be switched. Specifically, a fixed screen mechanism D, a front screen mechanism E1, and a reel screen mechanism F1 are provided as a plurality of screen mechanisms. The detailed structure of each screen mechanism D, E1 and F1 will be described later.

(Display unit A: Screen device C: Screen positional relationship)
As shown in FIG. 19, the fixed screen mechanism D is provided in a fixed state at a fixed exposure position existing in the irradiation direction of the irradiation light. As shown in FIG. 20, the front screen mechanism E1 is rotatably provided between the front exposed position and the front standby position. The positional relationship between the fixed exposure position and the front exposure position is set so that the front exposure position is in the irradiation direction of the irradiation light and exists in front of the fixed exposure position. As a result, when the front screen mechanism E1 moves to the front exposed position, the front screen mechanism E1 covers the fixed screen mechanism D from the front, so that the image due to the irradiation light appears only in the front screen mechanism E1. It is possible. When the front screen mechanism E1 moves to the front standby position, the fixed screen mechanism D is exposed so that the image due to the irradiation light can appear on the fixed screen mechanism D.

Further, as shown in FIG. 21, the reel screen mechanism F1 is rotatably provided between the reel exposed position and the reel standby position. The positional relationship between the reel exposed position and the fixed exposed position is set so that the reel exposed position is in the irradiation direction of the irradiation light and exists in front of the fixed exposed position. As a result, when the reel screen mechanism F1 moves to the reel exposed position, the reel screen mechanism F1 covers the fixed screen mechanism D from the front, so that the image due to the irradiation light appears only in the reel screen mechanism F1. It is possible. When the reel screen mechanism F1 moves to the reel standby position, the fixed screen mechanism D is exposed so that the image due to the irradiation light can appear on the fixed screen mechanism D.

The positional relationship between the front standby position and the reel standby position is set so that the front screen mechanism E1 existing in the front standby position and the reel screen mechanism F1 existing in the reel standby position do not interfere with each other. That is, the front standby position is arranged above the fixed screen mechanism D, while the reel standby position is arranged behind the fixed screen mechanism D. As a result, the rotation distance of the front screen mechanism E1 is shorter than the rotation distance of the reel screen mechanism F1.

The front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 are different from each other in the rotation center axis of the front screen mechanism E1 and the rotation center axis of the reel screen mechanism F1 so as to minimize the overlap of the operating regions due to rotation. ing. Specifically, the rotation center axis of the front screen mechanism E1 is set above the rotation center axis of the reel screen mechanism F1 in the front standby position direction. As a result, the movement of the front screen mechanism E1 is set to the minimum.

Further, the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 are rotatable on condition that at least one of the screen mechanisms E1 and F1 is present at the standby position. As a result, interference between the screen mechanisms E1 and F1 during rotation is prevented.

(Display unit A: Screen device C: Fixed screen mechanism D)
As shown in FIGS. 15 and 16, the fixing screen mechanism D is fixed on the bottom plate C1 of the screen housing C10 by screwing. The fixed screen mechanism D includes a front reflection unit D1, a right surface reflection unit D2, a left surface reflection unit D3, and a bottom surface reflection unit D4. The reflecting surfaces of these reflecting units D1 to D4 are set at different angles with respect to the optical axis of the irradiation light from the irradiation light device B.

The fixed screen mechanism D may have, for example, two, three, or five reflecting portions as long as it has a plurality of reflecting surfaces having different angles with respect to the optical axis of the irradiation light. Alternatively, it may be provided with a reflecting portion of a curved or arc-shaped reflecting surface in which the center point of curvature is located on the front side at continuously different angles with respect to the optical axis.

The front reflecting portion D1 has a reflecting surface arranged so as to face the player on the front side, and reflects most of the reflected light from the irradiation light device B arranged in the front upper part of the fixed screen mechanism D forward. It is set to do. The right side reflecting portion D2 and the left side reflecting portion D3 are joined to the right side portion and the left side portion of the front reflecting portion D1, and are arranged symmetrically with respect to the front reflecting portion D1. The right-side reflecting portion D2 and the left-side reflecting portion D3 are arranged so that the width between the front end portions is larger than the width in the left-right direction of the front reflecting portion D1. As a result, the right-side reflection unit D2 and the left-side reflection unit D3 make it easier for the reflection direction of the irradiation light with respect to the reflection surface to be in the direction of the front reflection portion D1, so that a part of the irradiation light is frontal while displaying an image by the irradiation light. It is designed to reflect in the direction of the reflecting portion D1. Further, also for the bottom surface reflecting portion D4, the direction of reflection of the irradiation light on the reflecting surface tends to be directed toward the front reflecting portion D1, so that a part of the irradiation light is directed toward the front reflecting portion D1 while the image of the irradiation light appears. It is designed to reflect.

In the above-mentioned fixed screen mechanism D, the brightness of the reflecting surface is set to be lower than the brightness of each reflecting surface of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 described later. That is, in the fixed screen mechanism D, the amount of light reflected by the irradiation light on the reflecting surface is smaller than the amount of light reflected on the reflecting surface of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1. As a result, the fixed screen mechanism D prevents blurring due to mixing of light due to diffused reflection of the reflecting portions D1 to D4. In the fixed screen mechanism D, the brightness of the other reflecting portions D2, D3, and D4 may be lower than the brightness of the front reflecting portion D1. In this case, since the reflection of the irradiation light by the other reflecting portions D2, D3, and D4 to the front reflecting portion D1 can be reduced, it is possible to reduce the white blur while making the image strongly appear in the front reflecting portion D1.

As the brightness, Brightness in the L ^* a ^* b ^* color system (L ^* a ^* b ^* color space) and the L ^* u ^* v ^* color system (L ^* u ^* v ^* color space) is adopted. However, if white can be used as a reference and other colors can be represented by relative values, it can be defined in any way.

The brightness of the reflective surface of the fixed screen mechanism D and the brightness of the reflective surface of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 are such that the brightness of the reflective surface of the fixed screen mechanism D is the reflection of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1. It is not particularly limited as long as it is lower than the brightness of the surface. For example, the brightness of the reflecting surface of the fixed screen mechanism D may be set to a value about 5 to 25% (or 10 to 20%) lower than the brightness of the reflecting surface of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1.

In order to make the brightness of the reflective surface of the fixed screen mechanism D lower than the brightness of the reflective surface of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1, the color of the paint applied to the base material of the fixed screen mechanism D is changed to the front screen. The color may be blacker than the color of the paint applied to the base material of the mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1. For example, a white paint is used as the paint to be applied to the base material of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1, and the paint to be applied to the base material of the fixed screen mechanism D is the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1. A paint to which a black pigment is added to the paint to be applied to the base material may be used.

In such a paint, the brightness of the reflective surface of the screen mechanism can be changed by changing the ratio of the white pigment (for example, titanium oxide) and the black pigment (for example, carbon black). For example, the paint applied to the base material of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 contains only the white pigment among the white pigment and the black pigment, and the paint applied to the base material of the fixed screen mechanism D includes Both white and black pigments may be included. Further, the ratio of the black pigment to the white pigment is (for example, 5 to 25% (or, for example)) in the paint applied to the fixed screen mechanism D than in the paint applied to the base material of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1. It may be increased by about 10 to 20%). As the paint to be applied to the base material of these screen mechanisms, conventionally known screen paints can be appropriately adopted, and can be adjusted according to the screen type (for example, diffusion type or reflection type). ..

The paint applied to the base material of the fixed screen mechanism D does not contain the black pigment, but the black pigment is dispersed in the resin used as the material of the base material before molding the base material of the fixed screen mechanism D. By doing so, the base material itself may be colored and the brightness of the base material itself may be lowered.

Further, from the viewpoint of preventing diffused reflection of light, the members constituting the screen housing C10 such as the peripheral walls (bottom plate C1, right side plate C2, left side plate C3, and back plate C4) and the inside of the screen housing C10. It is also desirable to reduce the brightness of other members (members other than the screen) arranged in. It is desirable that the brightness of these members is lower than the brightness of the reflective surface of the fixed screen mechanism D. For example, if the brightness is low, it is not necessary to consider that the image is projected as a screen on the surrounding wall. The lower the better. That is, the closer the color of the surrounding wall is to black, the more desirable it is.

(Display unit A: Screen device C: Front screen mechanism E1)
As shown in FIG. 22, the front screen mechanism E1 includes a rectangular front screen member E11 having a projection surface E11a on the entire surface and a front screen support base E12 having a pattern such as a first pattern surface E12a on both sides. Have. The front screen member E11 is formed by applying a screen paint to a thin plate-shaped flat panel. As a result, the front screen member E11 has the projection surface E11a formed flat so that an image without distortion appears when irradiated with the irradiation light.

On the other hand, the front screen support base E12 has a holding recess E121 for holding the front screen member E11. The holding recess E121 has an opening shape similar to that of the projection surface E11a of the front screen member E11 in a slightly enlarged state, and accommodates the entire front screen member E11. Further, the holding recess E121 is set in two stages of depth, a deep portion and a shallow portion. The shallow portion is realized by a step portion E121a formed on the peripheral edge portion of the front screen support base E12 and a step portion E121b formed linearly to both ends in the lateral direction passing through the central portion.

As a result, the front screen member E11 housed in the holding recess E121 is brought into contact with and supported by the stepped portion E121a of the peripheral edge portion and the linear stepped portion E121b passing through the central portion, and is separated from the remaining deep portion. It is in a state. As a result, it is prevented that the deformation of the front screen support base E12 in the deep portion deforms the front screen member E11 and causes distortion in the projection surface E11a.

Further, the front screen support base E12 has a first pattern surface E12a in a part of a region around the projection surface E11a. The first pattern surface E12a is made visible to the player in front when the front screen mechanism E1 is positioned at the front exposed position. Further, the front screen support base E12 has a second pattern surface E12b on the entire surface opposite to the first pattern surface E12a. The second pattern surface E12b is made visible to the player in front when the front screen mechanism E1 is positioned at the front standby position. In these first pattern surface E12a and second pattern surface E12b, for example, a pattern related to the production of a game is three-dimensionally formed by unevenness.

The front screen member E11 and the front screen support base E12 configured as described above are integrally formed by being formed separately and then bonded with an adhesive. As a result, even if a sink mark may occur due to molding shrinkage or the like when the front screen mechanism E1 forms a pattern or the like on the front screen support base E12, the sink mark is mechanically separated from the front screen member E11. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the front screen member E11 from being distorted due to the sinking of the projection surface E11a.

The method of fixing the front screen member E11 and the front screen support base E12 is not limited to the bonding with an adhesive, and any method such as screw fastening can be adopted.

The flat panel constituting the front screen member E11 and the front screen support base E12 are each manufactured by injection molding. As the material of the flat panel constituting the front screen member E11 and the front screen support base E12, a thermoplastic resin (for example, ABS resin or the like) that may cause sink marks when injection molding is performed may be appropriately adopted. it can.

(Display unit A: Screen device C: Front screen drive mechanism E2)
The front screen mechanism E1 is rotatable by the driving force of the front screen drive mechanism E2. As shown in FIGS. 15 and 16, the front screen drive mechanism E2 has a left front screen drive mechanism E2A connected to the lower surface of the left end portion of the front screen mechanism E1 and a right connected to the lower surface of the right end portion of the front screen mechanism E1. It has a front screen drive mechanism E2B.

As shown in FIGS. 23 and 24, the right front screen drive mechanism E2B includes a crank member E22, a crank gear E21, an intermediate gear E23, a motor shaft gear E24, and a drive motor E25. The upper end (one end) of the crank member E22 in the right front screen drive mechanism E2B is connected to the lower surface of the right end of the front screen mechanism E1. As shown in FIG. 25, the crank member E22 is rotatably supported by the right movable body base C5 of FIG. 15 at the intermediate position E22a. As a result, the crank member E22 makes the upper end portion and the lower end portion (the other end portion) rotatable around the intermediate position E22a as the center of rotation.

The crank member E22 has an upper region on the upper end side from the intermediate position E22a and a lower region on the lower end side from the intermediate position E22a. When the crank member E22 is viewed from the side as shown in FIG. 25, the center line in the upper region (the straight line passing between the intermediate position E22a and the midpoint on the upper end side of the crank member E22) is in the vertical direction in the standby posture. Is set to. On the other hand, the center line in the lower region (a straight line passing through the intermediate position E22a and the midpoint at the lower end side of the crank member E22) is set so that the lower side inclines toward the front side rather than the upper side in the standby posture.

A slide groove E22b is formed in the lower region of the crank member E22. The slide groove E22b is formed so that the groove wall surface E22b1 has a U-shape in a side view. The U-shape is composed of two straight portions and a curved portion connecting the ends of the two straight portions. The two straight portions are formed in parallel, and the slide groove E22b has a surface corresponding to the straight portion of the groove wall surface E22b1 set parallel to the center line of the lower region. A slide member E26 is movably engaged with the slide groove E22b. The groove width of the slide groove E22b (distance between the two straight portions) is substantially the same as the member width of the slide member E26, and is set to slide during movement. That is, the slide member E26 is always in contact with the groove wall surface E22b1 of the slide groove E22b. Further, the upper end portion of the slide groove E22b is set so that the slide member E26 comes into contact with the upper end surface (the surface corresponding to the curved portion) when the front screen mechanism E1 is in the standby posture. On the other hand, the lower end of the slide groove E22b is open so that a part of the slide member E26 can be exposed.

The slide member E26 is rotatably supported at the eccentric position E21b of the crank gear E21. The rotation center position E21a of the crank gear E21 is rotatably supported by the right movable body base C5 in FIG. 24. In the rotation center position E21a of the crank gear E21, when the front screen mechanism E1 is in the standby posture or the exposed posture, the line segment connecting the rotation center position E21a and the eccentric position E21b is the intermediate position E22a in the crank member E22 and the slide member. It is set to have a relationship orthogonal to the line segment connecting the center point of E26.

As a result, when the front screen mechanism E1 is in the standby posture or the exposed posture, even if a force acts in the direction of rotating the lower region of the crank member E22, the rotation center position is in the direction of applying all the components of this force. Since E21a exists and acts as a fixed end, the slide member E26 does not move. As a result, a truss structure is formed by a three-node link with 0 degrees of freedom, with the intermediate position E22a of the crank member E22 and the rotation center position E21a of the crank gear E21 as fixed ends and the slide member E26 as the free end. Even when the mechanism E1 is pushed by hand, the front screen mechanism E1 does not move because the crank member E22 and the crank gear E21 act as a strong brake.

An intermediate gear E23 is meshed with the crank gear E21. A motor shaft gear E24 is meshed with the intermediate gear E23. The drive shaft of the drive motor E25 is connected to the motor shaft gear E24. As a result, the right front screen drive mechanism E2B can transmit the rotational driving force of the drive motor E25 to the crank gear E21 via the motor shaft gear E24 and the intermediate gear E23.

Here, all the components of the rotational driving force applied to the crank gear E21 coincide with the tangential direction of the turning locus of the slide member E26. Further, as shown in FIGS. 26 and 28, when the front screen mechanism E1 is in the standby posture or the exposed posture, the line segment connecting the rotation center position E21a and the eccentric position E21b is the intermediate position E22a in the crank member E22. Since it is set to have a relationship orthogonal to the line segment connecting the center point of the slide member E26, the tangential direction of the turning locus is parallel to the groove wall surface of the slide groove E22b of the crank member E22. As a result, when the front screen mechanism E1 is in the standby posture or the exposed posture, when a rotational driving force is applied to the crank gear E21, there is a groove wall surface that becomes a reaction force in the moving direction (tangential direction) of the slide member E26. Therefore, the crank gear E21 easily starts rotating.

When a rotational driving force is applied to the crank gear E21, the slide member E26 provided at the eccentric position E21b is made movable along the slide groove E22b by sliding with the slide groove E22b, so that the crank member E22 A two-node link with one degree of freedom is formed in which the intermediate position E22a and the rotation center position E21a of the crank gear E21 are fixed ends, and the slide member E26 is a free end that can be moved along the groove wall surface. Then, when the slide member E26 rotates, the crank member E22 provided with the slide groove E22b with which the slide member E26 is engaged rotates with the intermediate position E22a as a fulcrum, and the upper region of the crank member E22 is rotated. Become. As a result, the front screen mechanism E1 moves between the front standby position and the front exposed position.

Further, the moving speed of the front screen mechanism E1 is 0 in the stopped state when the front screen mechanism E1 is in the standby posture or the exposed posture, and gradually increases to an intermediate posture between the standby posture and the exposed posture (FIG. 27). After reaching the maximum speed in, the vehicle gradually decelerates, and when the exposed posture and the standby posture are reached, the stopped state becomes 0. As a result, the rotation of the crank gear E21 can be started and stopped in a state where the angular acceleration is small (moment of inertia), so that the torque required for the crank gear E21 can be reduced, and as a result, the drive mechanism ( It is possible to reduce failure and wear due to overload of the intermediate gear E23, the motor shaft gear E24, and the drive motor E25).

As shown in FIG. 15, the right front screen drive mechanism E2B configured as described above has the same configuration as the left front screen drive mechanism E2A except for the motor shaft gear E24 and the drive motor E25. The left front screen drive mechanism E2A and the right front screen drive mechanism E2B are arranged symmetrically. The crank gear E21 of the left front screen drive mechanism E2A and the crank gear E21 of the right front screen drive mechanism E2B are connected via a shaft member E3, so that the rotational driving force of the drive motor E25 is evenly applied. There is.

(Display unit A: Screen device C: Reel screen mechanism F1)
As shown in FIGS. 15 and 16, the reel screen mechanism F1 includes a reel screen portion F11 made of a curved flat plate, a left reel screen support portion F12 connected to the left end of the reel screen portion F11, and a reel screen portion F11. It has a right reel screen support portion F13 connected to the right end of the screen.

The reel screen portion F11 is curved in a shape similar to the rotation direction, and a pattern is formed on the back surface on the rotation center side. The pattern on the back surface is visible to the player in front when the reel screen mechanism F1 is positioned at the reel standby position. Further, on the surface of the reel screen portion F11, a pattern is formed on the peripheral edge portion, and the inner peripheral region of the peripheral edge portion is a projection surface. When the reel screen mechanism F1 is positioned at the reel exposure position, the projection surface can appear as an image by irradiating the irradiation light.

One ends of the left and right reel screen support portions F12 and F13 are connected to the reel screen portion F11. On the other hand, the other ends of the reel screen support portions F12 and F13 each have a protruding portion (not shown). The protruding portion is projected horizontally to the outside of the reel screen support portions F12 and F13, and is connected to the reel screen drive mechanism F2 to serve as the rotation center axis of the reel screen mechanism F1.

(Second Embodiment)
Hereinafter, a second embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.
The game machine is a so-called pachislot machine. The game machine is a game machine that uses coins, medals, game balls, tokens, and other game media such as cards that are given or given to the player and that store game value information. Hereinafter, it will be described assuming that a medal is used.

In the following description, the side (direction) from the game machine 1 toward the player is referred to as the front side (front direction) of the game machine 1, and the side opposite to the front side is referred to as the rear side (rear direction, depth direction). The right side and the left side when viewed from the player are referred to as the right side (right direction) and the left side (left direction) of the game machine 1, respectively. Further, the direction including the front side and the rear side is referred to as a front-rear direction or a thickness direction, and the direction including the right side and the left side is referred to as a left-right direction or a width direction. The direction orthogonal to the front-back direction (thickness direction) and the left-right direction (width direction) is referred to as a vertical direction or a height direction.

As shown in FIGS. 29 and 30, the appearance of the game machine 1 is composed of a rectangular box-shaped housing 2. The housing 2 includes a metal cabinet G having a rectangular opening on the front side, an upper door mechanism UD arranged on the upper front surface of the cabinet G, and a lower door mechanism DD arranged on the lower front surface of the cabinet G. have.

Further, the upper surface wall G4 of the cabinet G is formed with two openings G41 penetrating in the vertical direction at predetermined intervals in the horizontal direction. Then, a wooden plate member G42 is attached to the upper surface wall G4 so as to close each of the two openings G41.

As also shown in FIG. 31, the upper door mechanism UD and the lower door mechanism DD are formed so as to correspond to the shape and size of the opening of the cabinet G. The upper door mechanism UD and the lower door mechanism DD are provided so that the upper part and the lower part of the opening in the cabinet G can be closed. The upper door mechanism UD has an upper display window UD1 in the center. The upper display window UD1 is provided with a transparent panel UD11 that transmits light.

As shown in FIG. 32, the inside of the cabinet G is divided into an upper space and a lower space by an intermediate support plate G1. That is, the intermediate support plate G1 functions as a partition plate that divides the inside of the cabinet G into an upper space and a lower space. The upper space is a space behind the upper door mechanism UD in the cabinet G, and accommodates the display unit A and the like. The lower space is a space behind the lower door mechanism DD in the cabinet G, and accommodates the reel unit RU, the main control board MS that controls the operation of the entire game machine 1, and the like.

(Display unit A)
As shown in FIG. 33, the display unit A is replaceably mounted on the intermediate support plate G1 in the cabinet G. The display unit A is a so-called projection mapping device having an irradiation light device B that emits irradiation light including an image and a screen device C that causes an image to appear when the irradiation light from the irradiation light device B is irradiated. ..

Here, the projection mapping device is for projecting an image on the surface of a three-dimensional object such as a building or a natural object, and for example, the position (projection distance or angle) of an accessory which is a screen described later. By projecting an image according to the production information, which is generated based on the shape and shape, it is possible to produce an advanced and powerful production.

The display unit A has a housing A1 having an opening formed in the front. The housing A1 is composed of a projector cover B1 of the irradiation light device B and a screen housing C10 of the screen device C. Although the details will be described later, the screen housing C10 has a box shape having a bottom plate C1, a right side plate C2, a left side plate C3, and a back plate C4. Then, the projector cover B1 is replaceably attached to the upper surface of the screen housing C10.

(Display unit A: Illumination light device B)
As shown in FIG. 34, the irradiation light device B is arranged in front of the projector mechanism B2 that emits the irradiation light forward and the projector mechanism B2, and the irradiation light from the projector mechanism B2 is arranged diagonally downward and rearward. It has a mirror mechanism B3 that reflects in the device C direction, and a projector cover B1 that houses the projector mechanism B2 and the mirror mechanism B3.

(Display unit A: Illumination light device B: Projector mechanism B2)
The projector mechanism B2 is arranged at the rear part in the cabinet G. The projector mechanism B2 has a horizontally arranged flat plate-shaped base member B22. A lens mechanism B21 and a light source (not shown) are provided on the lower surface of the base member B22. The lens mechanism B21 is arranged so as to emit the irradiation light emitted from the light source toward the front mirror mechanism B3.

Further, heat exhaust mechanisms B23 and B24 are provided on the lower surface of the base member B22. The heat exhaust mechanisms B23 and B24 are arranged on the right side and the left side of the lens mechanism B21 and the light source, respectively. The heat exhaust mechanisms B23 and B24 have a duct for circulating air and a fan for sending out air, and by blowing the air backward, the heat generated when the irradiation light is generated is forcibly pushed backward. It is designed to flow. As shown in FIG. 30, ventilation holes G3a of the cabinet G are arranged in the air flow direction in the heat exhaust mechanisms B23 and B24. As a result, the heat exhaust mechanisms B23 and B24 can forcibly discharge the heat of the projector mechanism B2 together with the air to the outside of the machine through the ventilation holes G3a.

(Display unit A: Illumination light device B: Mirror mechanism B3)
As shown in FIG. 34, the mirror mechanism B3 is arranged in front of the projector mechanism B2 (the emission direction of the irradiation light). As shown in FIG. 35, the mirror mechanism B3 includes a mirror holder B31, an optical mirror B32 housed in the mirror holder B31, and mirror stoppers B33 and B34 for fixing both ends of the optical mirror B32 to the mirror holder B31. doing. As shown in FIG. 36, the mirror holder B31 is formed in a rectangular plate shape on the front surface. An angle adjusting hole B311 is formed at each corner of the mirror holder B31, and a recess B312 is formed on the front surface centering on the angle adjusting hole B311. Further, mounting holes B314 and B314 are formed vertically symmetrically between the angle adjusting holes B311 and B311 in the vertical direction.

On the other hand, a mirror holding portion B313 is formed on the rear surface of the mirror holder B31. The mirror holding portion B313 is formed in the central portion, and is formed in a size that does not overlap the angle adjusting hole B311 and the mounting hole B314. Mirror stoppers B33 and B34 are provided on the left side and the right side of the mirror holding portion B313, respectively. The mirror stoppers B33 and B34 have angle adjusting holes B331 and B341 and mounting holes B334 and B344, respectively. The angle adjusting holes B331 and B341 and the mounting holes B334 and B344 in the mirror stoppers B33 and B34 are arranged so as to correspond to the angle adjusting holes B311 and B311 and the mounting holes B314 and B314 in the mirror holder B31.

The mirror stoppers B33 and B34 are partially formed so as to overlap the mirror holding portion B313. As a result, the mirror stoppers B33 and B34 come into contact with both left and right sides of the optical mirror B32 fitted to the mirror holding portion B313, and are screwed to the mirror holder B31 by the mounting holes B314, B334, and B344. , The optical mirror B32 is held by the mirror holder B31.

As shown in FIG. 37, the mirror mechanism B3 configured as described above is provided on the inner surface of the reflector holding portion B11 in the projector cover B1. The reflector holding portion B11 is formed in the front central portion of the projector cover B1 and is arranged so as to be exposed to the front side when the upper door mechanism UD is opened. The reflector holding portion B11 has an angle adjusting hole B111. The angle adjusting hole B111 is formed at a position corresponding to the angle adjusting hole B311 of the mirror mechanism B3.

A screw (not shown) is inserted into the angle adjusting hole B111 of the reflector holding portion B11 from the front side, and this screw penetrates the angle adjusting hole B311 of the mirror holder B31. The angle adjusting holes B331 and B341 of the mirror stoppers B33 and B34 are formed as screw holes into which screws can be screwed, and the screws penetrating the angle adjusting holes B311 of the mirror holder B31 are the mirror stoppers B33 and B34. It is screwed into the angle adjusting holes B331 and B341.

Then, when the screw is rotated in the direction in which the screw with the angle adjusting holes B331 / B341 is loosened, the distance between the reflector holding portion B11 and the mirror stoppers B33 / B34 is increased. On the other hand, when the screw is rotated in the direction in which the screw with the angle adjusting holes B331 / B341 is tightened, the distance between the reflector holding portion B11 and the mirror stoppers B33 / B34 is shortened.

As described above, the mirror holder B31 and the mirror stoppers B33 / B34 are screwed together via the mounting holes B314 / B334 / B344, whereby the optical mirror is between the mirror holder B31 and the mirror stoppers B33 / B34. B32 is sandwiched. In this way, the mirror holder B31, the optical mirror B32, and the mirror stoppers B33 / B34 are integrated as the mirror mechanism B3, and the distance between the reflector holding portion B11 and the mirror stoppers B33 / B34 is changed by the rotation of the screw. As a result, the distance between the reflector holding portion B11 and the mirror mechanism B3 can be increased or decreased. Since the angle adjusting holes B311, 331, and B341 are arranged in four directions corresponding to the corners of the mirror mechanism B3, the reflector holding portion B11 and the mirror mechanism at the arrangement positions of the angle adjusting holes B311, 331, and B341 are arranged. By increasing or decreasing the distance from B3, it is possible to finely adjust the reflection angle of the optical mirror B32 with respect to the traveling direction of the irradiation light emitted from the projector mechanism B2.

Further, a spring (not shown) is provided between the reflector holding portion B11 and the mirror holder B31. The rear end surface of the spring is in contact with the recess B312 of the mirror holder B31, and the front end surface is in contact with the inner wall surface (rear wall surface) of the reflector holding portion B11, so that the reflector holding portion B11 and the mirror holder B31 It is sandwiched between. Then, a screw inserted through the angle adjusting hole B111 of the reflector holding portion B11 penetrates the spring. As a result, even if the distance between the reflector holding portion B11 and the mirror mechanism B3 increases as the screw rotates, the screw head comes into contact with the angle adjusting hole B111 of the reflector holding portion B11 due to the urging force of the spring. It is possible to prevent the screw head from protruding from the angle adjusting hole B111 and breaking the positional relationship between the reflector holding portion B11 and the screw.

(Display unit A: Illumination light device B: Projector cover B1)
As shown in FIG. 38, the projector mechanism B2 and the mirror mechanism B3 configured as described above are housed in the projector cover B1. The lower surface B2a of the projector mechanism B2 has an inclined surface B2a1 in front of the projector mechanism B2 that inclines upward from the rear to the front. As shown in FIG. 39, the projector cover B1 is arranged symmetrically in the left-right direction of the horizontally arranged upper wall portion B12, the reflector holding portion B11 arranged on the front side of the upper wall portion B12, and the upper wall portion B12. It has side wall portions B13 and B13. The front portion of the upper wall portion B12 projects forward of the cabinet G (see FIG. 33). A reflector holding portion B11 is formed in the central portion of the front portion of the upper wall portion B12 so as to project forward, and the above-mentioned mirror mechanism B3 is held in a space formed by the protrusion so that the angle can be adjusted. There is.

Further, the side wall portions B13 and B13 have protruding portions B131 protruding from the lower end portion in the left-right horizontal direction. The protruding portion B131 has a first protruding portion B131a on the front side and a second protruding portion B131b on the rear side. The first protrusion B131a is formed at a position corresponding to the opening of the cabinet G when the projector cover B1 is mounted on the cabinet G. The distance between the tips of the first projecting portions B131a protruding from the side wall portions B13 and B13 in the left-right direction is set to be slightly shorter than the width of the opening of the cabinet G in the left-right direction. On the other hand, the second protruding portion B131b is formed at a position corresponding to the space behind the opening of the cabinet G when the projector cover B1 is mounted on the cabinet G. The distance between the tips of the second protruding portions B131b protruding from the side wall portions B13 and B13 in the left-right direction is set to be slightly shorter than the width of the space behind the cabinet G in the left-right direction. That is, the side wall portions B13 and B13 are formed so that the distance between the tips of the first protrusions B131a in the left-right direction is larger than the distance between the tips of the first protrusions B131a in the left-right direction. As a result, the projector cover B1 can cover most of the internal space in the cabinet G.

Further, a screw hole B131C penetrating in the vertical direction is formed at the tip of the second protruding portion B131b. When fixing the projector cover B1 to the right side plate C2 and the left side plate C3 (see FIG. 33), screws are screwed into the right side plate C2 and the left side plate C3 through the screw holes B131C. Further, by projecting the projecting portion B131 in the horizontal direction from the lower ends of the side wall portions B13 and B13, the projecting portions B131 and the side wall portions B13 are recessed from the front ends on both side ends of the projector cover B1. B132 is continuously formed toward the rear.

As shown in FIG. 40, when the display unit A is mounted on the cabinet G, the space BS is defined by the recess B132 and the cabinet G. Further, in the shape of the upper wall portion B12 and the side wall portion B13 of the projector cover B1, the distance between the lower end portion of each side wall portion B13 and the tip portion of the second protruding portion B131b protruding from the lower end portion is the first. 2 The front portion is configured to be larger than the rear portion of the protruding portion B131b (see FIG. 39). As a result, the front space of the space BS becomes a larger space than the rear space. Further, when the display unit A is mounted on the cabinet G, at least a part of the opening G41 formed in the upper surface wall G4 of the cabinet G and the front space of the space BS overlap in top view. This space BS is used as a work space for installing and fixing the game machine 1 on the island facility.

As shown in FIG. 41, when the game machine is installed and fixed to the island equipment, the fixing plate member OC of the island equipment is arranged above the upper surface wall G4 of the cabinet G. The space BS is a space in which nails from the plate member G42 attached to the upper surface wall G4 to the fixed plate member OC of the island facility can be driven from inside the cabinet G.

As described above, even when the display unit A is housed in the cabinet G with almost no gap between the upper wall portion B12 of the projector cover B1 and the upper wall portion G4 of the cabinet G, the display unit A A space BS for installation and fixing work on the island facility will be secured between the cabinet G and the cabinet G. As a result, the operator can perform nailing work using this space BS from the front side of the cabinet G in which the upper door mechanism UD is opened, and as a result, the display unit A is damaged. While preventing this, the game machine 1 can be nailed to the fixing plate member OC of the island facility while the display unit A is housed in the cabinet G.

Further, since the nail that nails the game machine 1 and the fixing plate member OC is driven into the wooden plate member G42, which is softer than the cabinet, instead of the metal cabinet G, the game machine 1 can be easily nailed. Can be installed on island facilities.

As a modification, the material of the plate member G42 is not limited to wood, and various materials can be adopted as long as it is a soft member softer than the cabinet G. Further, the method of fixing the game machine 1 to the island equipment is not limited to nailing, and various fixing methods such as screwing can be adopted.

(Display unit A: Illumination light device B: Perforated plate B15)
As shown in FIG. 42, a perforated plate B15 having a plurality of holes B151 is provided on the lower surface side of the projector cover B1. The perforated plate B15 is a punching metal in which a plurality of holes are formed by punching a plate made of metal (for example, stainless steel, iron, steel, aluminum, etc.). The plurality of holes B151 are formed so as to be substantially evenly dispersed on the entire surface of the perforated plate B15. The perforated plate B15 allows air to flow over the entire surface of the perforated plate B15, and enables air to flow from the lower side to the upper side by suction by the heat exhaust mechanisms B23 and B24 of the projector mechanism B2. The size and number of holes B151 are set so that the inside of the projector cover B1 cannot be visually recognized from the outside. The hole B151 is formed in a shape such as a circle, a square, or a hexagon, and the hole diameter is about 3 to 5 mm.

The perforated plate B15 is formed so as to cover the first protruding portion B131a and the second protruding portion B131b of the projector cover B1 from the lower position. The perforated plate B15 has an upper portion B15a on the front side, an inclined portion B15b on the middle side, and a lower portion B15c on the rear side. The upper portion B15a is horizontally arranged. The inclined portion B15b is formed by being bent diagonally downward and rearward from the rear side of the upper portion B15a. The lower side portion B15c is formed by being bent in the horizontal direction from the rear side of the inclined portion B15b.

The upper portion B15a of the perforated plate B15 is attached to the side wall portions B13 and B13 of the projector cover B1. As a result, the perforated plate B15 is arranged so that the front portion of the projector cover B1 is covered from the lower side by the upper portion B15a, and the inclined portion B15b and the lower portion B15c cover the front portion of the projector cover B1 from the lower portion to the rear portion. There is. Further, the inclined portion B15b is arranged so as to surround the inclined surface B2a1 on the lower surface B2a of the projector mechanism B2 in the top view. Then, as shown in FIG. 38, the inclination angle (inclination angle with respect to the horizontal plane) of the inclined portion B15b is substantially the same as the inclination angle of the inclined surface B2a1. Below the perforated plate B15, the front screen mechanism E1 in the screen device C is arranged.

Although the details will be described later, the front screen mechanism E1 has a front standby position arranged on the upper side, which is a standby posture for prohibiting the appearance of an image due to irradiation light, and a lower side, which is an exposure posture for allowing the appearance of an image due to irradiation light. The front screen mechanism E1 in the standby posture is tilted so as to be substantially parallel to the tilted portion B15b of the perforated plate B15 so as to be rotatable between the front exposed position and the exposed position. On the other hand, when the front screen mechanism E1 is in the exposed posture, a large space portion appears below the perforated plate B15, and the air existing in this space reaches the perforated plate B15 without flow resistance, and a plurality of spaces are present. By passing through the hole B151, it is possible to facilitate the inflow of air into the screen device C and improve the cooling efficiency.

Further, by providing the perforated plate B15 so as to cover the lower surface of the projector cover B1, for example, as shown in FIG. 43, the line-of-sight position of the player located on the front side is the center of the screen device C in the vertical direction and the horizontal direction. Even if it exists on the horizontal line of the portion and looks up at the irradiation light device B from this line-of-sight position, the perforated plate B15 prevents the inside of the irradiation light device B from being visually observed.

(Display unit A: Screen device C)
As shown in FIG. 44, the irradiation light device B configured as described above is connected to the upper surface of the screen device C by screwing. For example, as described above, screws are screwed into the upper surfaces of the right side plate C2 and the left side plate C3 of the screen device C through the screw holes B131C formed in the protruding portion B131 of the projector cover B1. As a result, the display unit A can unite the irradiation light device B and the screen device C and handle them integrally.

(Display unit A: Screen device C: Screen mechanism)
Inside the screen housing C10, a plurality of screen mechanisms for displaying an image by irradiating the irradiation light from the irradiation light device B are provided so that the irradiation target can be switched. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 45, a fixed screen mechanism D, a front screen mechanism E1, and a reel screen mechanism F1 are provided as a plurality of screen mechanisms. The projection planes of the fixed screen mechanism D, the front screen mechanism E1, and the reel screen mechanism F1 each have different shapes in order to diversify the image expression. Further, the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 are movable screens, and are driven by the front screen drive mechanism E2 and the reel screen drive mechanism F2, respectively. Of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1, the front screen mechanism E1 is larger and heavier. Therefore, when driving the front screen mechanism E1, a larger driving force is required than when driving the reel screen mechanism F1. The detailed structures of the screen mechanisms D, E1, F1 and the screen drive mechanisms E2, F2 will be described later.

(Display unit A: Screen device C: Screen housing C10)
As described above, the screen device C has a box-shaped screen housing C10. As shown in FIG. 45, the screen housing C10 includes a horizontally arranged bottom plate C1, a right side plate C2 erected at the right end of the bottom plate C1, and a left side plate C3 erected at the left end of the bottom plate C1. And a back plate C4 erected at the rear end of the bottom plate C1. As a result, the right side plate C2, the left side plate C3, and the back plate C4 are connected to the bottom plate C1 by screwing, so that the front side where the player is located and the upper surface side where the irradiation light device B is located are connected. An open box-shaped screen housing C10 is formed.

The bottom plate C1, the right side plate C2, the left side plate C3, and the back plate C4 constituting the screen housing C10 are separately molded into a predetermined shape, and predetermined functional parts such as the fixed screen mechanism D can be positioned and arranged. Has been made. As a result, even if the unit of the screen device C cannot be standardized as a whole, the bottom plate C1, the right side plate C2, the left side plate C3, and the back plate C4 can be standardized for each plate member. Further, since the plate members can be partially replaced, the specifications can be easily changed for each model of the game machine 1. The functional parts positioned and arranged with respect to each plate member will be described in detail later.

(Display unit A: Screen device C: Screen housing C10: Bottom plate C1)
The bottom plate C1 of the screen housing C10 is formed in a flat plate shape having a rectangular top view. The upper surface of the bottom plate C1 has a central mounting portion C11 arranged in the central portion, and a right mounting portion C12 and a left mounting portion C13 arranged in the left-right direction about the central mounting portion C11. There is. These mounting portions C11, C12, and C13 are formed in a concave shape. The central mounting portion C11 mounts the fixed screen mechanism D so that it can be positioned by fitting the lower end portion of the fixed screen mechanism D. The right movable body base C12 is placed so that the right movable body base C5 can be positioned by fitting the lower end portion of the right movable body base C5. The left movable body base C13 is mounted so that the left movable body base C6 can be positioned by fitting the lower end portion of the left movable body base C6. A pattern is three-dimensionally formed on the inner side surfaces of the right movable body base C5 and the left movable body base C6 in the left-right direction due to unevenness. That is, the right movable body base C5 and the left movable body base C6 also function as decorative members. As described above, the fixed screen mechanism D, the right movable body base C5, and the left movable body base C6 are positioned and arranged on the bottom plate C1.

Further, the front side portion C14 of the bottom plate C1 is bent downward so that the tip portion thereof is positioned below the lower surface of the bottom plate C1. A plurality of through holes C141 are formed in the front side portion C14. When the display unit A is mounted on the intermediate support plate G1 (see FIG. 33) of the cabinet G, the front side portion C14 comes into contact with the front surface of the intermediate support plate G1 to move rearward in the cabinet G. It is possible to perform the positioning of. Then, the display unit A can be screwed to the front surface of the cabinet G through the through hole C141 of the front side portion C14 to perform the installation work and the installation work of the display unit A from the front side of the cabinet G. It is possible.

(Display unit A: Screen device C: Screen housing C10: Right side plate C2, Left side plate C3)
As shown in FIGS. 45 and 46, the right side plate C2 and the left side plate C3 of the screen housing C10 have operation openings C21 and C31. The operation openings C21 and C31 are formed as handles, and the display unit A can be carried by hooking a hand on the operation openings C21 and C31. The operation openings C21 and C31 are arranged on the side of the crank gears E21 and E21 of the front screen drive mechanism E2. The operating openings C21 and C31 are formed in a rectangular shape in which the longitudinal directions are aligned in the horizontal direction. The opening areas of the operating openings C21 and C31 are set so that the crank gears E21 and E21 can be manually operated from the outside.

As a result, when manually moving the front screen mechanism E1 in the standby position after incorporating the display unit A into the cabinet G, first, the display unit A is taken out from the front side of the cabinet G in which the upper door mechanism UD is opened. .. Specifically, an operator located on the front side of the cabinet G releases the screws of the display unit A to the cabinet G and removes the screws. Then, the display unit A is taken out of the cabinet G by reaching into the cabinet G and grasping the operating openings C21 and C31 of the display unit A with both hands. After that, for example, as shown in FIG. 47, a hand is reached into the screen device C from one of the operating openings C21 of the removed display unit A, and the crank gear E21 that can be seen in the horizontal direction is rotated from the operating opening C21. As a result, the locked front screen mechanism E1 can be easily moved from the standby position. The locked state of the front screen mechanism E1 will be described later. When the locked state is released by moving from the standby position, the front screen mechanism E1 can be quickly rotated to a desired position.

With the upper door mechanism UD open, reach out from the front of the opening of the cabinet G into the space between the side wall G2 of the cabinet G and the right side plate C2 of the screen device C, and reach the operation opening C21. By operating the crank gear E21 from the door, the crank gear E21 can be rotated. In this case, the locked state of the front screen mechanism E1 can be released without removing the display unit A from the cabinet G.

Further, a motor accommodating portion C22 is formed on the right side plate C2. The drive motor F24 of the reel screen drive mechanism F2 is positioned and arranged by the motor accommodating portion C22. Further, the right side plate C2 and the left side plate C3 each have a first support portion C23 that rotatably supports the gear shaft E21a of the crank gear E21 in the front screen drive mechanism E2, and an intermediate gear E23 in the front screen drive mechanism E2. A second support portion C24 is formed to rotatably support the shaft member E3 which is the gear shaft of the above. As described above, the front screen drive mechanism E2 and the reel screen drive mechanism F2 are positioned and arranged by the right side plate C2 and the left side plate C3. The right front screen drive mechanism E2B of the front screen drive mechanism E2 and the reel screen drive mechanism F2 are arranged between the right movable body base C5 and the right plate C2 in the left-right direction. Further, the left front screen drive mechanism E2A is arranged between the left movable body base C6 and the left plate C3 in the left-right direction.

(Display unit A: Screen device C: Screen housing C10: Back plate C4)
As shown in FIG. 48, the back plate C4 of the screen housing C10 is formed in a flat plate shape, and a recess CO for positioning and arranging the relay board CK is formed in the lower portion of the back surface thereof. The relay board CK is a relay for relaying wiring (not shown) between various functional components in the display unit A (for example, projector mechanism B2, etc.) and various functional components other than the display unit A (main control board MS, etc.). It is a board.

An operation opening C41 is formed in the back plate C4. The operation opening C41 is arranged at the lower right side and faces the intermediate gear E23 of the front screen drive mechanism E2. The operation opening C41 is formed in a size that allows the intermediate gear E23 to be manually operated. As a result, when the front screen mechanism E1 in the standby position is manually moved after the display unit A is incorporated in the cabinet G, the display unit A is first removed from the cabinet G. After that, by reaching into the screen device C from the operation opening C41 and rotating the intermediate gear E23 that can be seen horizontally from the operation opening C41, the locked front screen mechanism E1 can be easily moved from the standby position. Can be moved.

Further, the back plate C4 is arranged in front of the rear ends of the right side plate C2 and the left side plate C3, respectively. As a result, as shown in FIG. 49, when the display unit A is placed on the intermediate support plate G1 of the cabinet G, the back wall G3 of the cabinet G, and the right side plate C2, the left side plate C3 of the screen device C, and the left side plate C3. The space GS will be defined by the back plate C4. That is, a gap is secured between the back wall G3 and the back plate C4. As a result, even if the relay board CK is provided on the back surface of the back plate C4, it is possible to prevent the relay board CK from interfering with the back wall G3 of the cabinet G due to this space GS.

Further, a through hole G11 is formed at a position of the intermediate support plate G1 facing the space GS. The through hole G11 is formed so that its opening surrounds the relay board CK in a top view. The relay board CK is arranged so that the connector CK1 to which the wiring from the device (main control board MS or the like) accommodated in the lower space of the cabinet G is connected faces the through hole G11. As a result, the electrical connection between the relay board CK of the display unit A and the equipment accommodated in the lower space of the cabinet G is a connector by inserting the wiring from the equipment accommodated in the lower space into the through hole G11. This can be done by connecting to CK1.

By arranging the relay board CK outside the screen device C in this way, the wiring work is facilitated, and it is not necessary to secure an installation space for the relay board CK in the screen device C. The degree of freedom of design in the screen device C is expanded. Further, the heat generated from the relay board CK can be easily discharged to the outside of the machine through the ventilation holes G3a formed in the back wall G3 of the cabinet G.

Further, the wiring for connecting the relay board CK arranged in the upper space of the cabinet G and the equipment accommodated in the lower space of the cabinet G passes through the through hole G11 formed in the rear portion of the intermediate support plate G1. Therefore, it becomes easy to arrange the wiring behind the various devices in the cabinet G. As a result, the degree of freedom in wiring can be increased.

Since the relay board CK is arranged at the rear portion in the cabinet G, it is difficult for light to reach the relay board CK, and as a result, it is difficult to connect the wiring to the connector CK1 of the relay board CK. It is possible that Therefore, in order to facilitate the connection of the wiring from the equipment accommodated in the lower space of the cabinet G to the relay board CK, the connector CK1 of the relay board CK passes through the through hole G11 and is below the intermediate support plate G1. It may be configured to protrude into. Further, the color of the connector CK1 may be a color having a high light reflectance (for example, white).

As described above, the fixed screen mechanism D, the right movable body base C5, and the left movable body base C6 are positioned and arranged on the bottom plate C1. The drive motor F24 of the reel screen drive mechanism F2 is positioned and arranged on the right side plate C2, and the gear shaft E21a and the shaft member E3 of the front screen drive mechanism E2 are positioned and arranged on the right side plate C2 and the left side plate C3. The relay board CK is positioned and arranged with respect to the back plate C4. As described above, the fixed screen mechanism D, the drive mechanisms F2 / E2, and the relay board CK are positioned and arranged on one of the bottom plate C1, the side plates C2 / C3, and the back plate C4, respectively, and are different from each other. Positioned on the board. Therefore, even if the display unit A as a whole cannot be standardized between models, it can be standardized between models on a board-by-board basis. As a result, it becomes possible to manufacture the display unit at a lower cost than in the case of manufacturing the display unit for each model.

Further, since the plates C1 to C4 of the screen housing C10 are connected by fastening the screws, the connections between the plates C1 to C4 can be released by loosening the screws. That is, the screen housing C10 is assembled so that the plates C1 to C4 can be exchanged. As a result, the functional parts of the display unit can be replaced on a board-by-board basis, so that the specifications of the display unit A can be changed while reusing the functional parts that are not subject to replacement of the display unit A. ..

Further, as shown in FIGS. 45 and 46, the right movable body base C5 is arranged on the left inner side of the right front screen drive mechanism E2B and the reel screen drive mechanism F2. Further, the left movable body base C6 is arranged on the right inner side of the left front screen drive mechanism E2A. As a result, the right movable body base C5 and the left movable body base C6, which are decorative members, make it difficult for the player to see these drive mechanisms E2 and F2. As a result, the aesthetic appearance of the game machine 1 can be improved. Further, since the bottom plate C1 is formed with recesses for arranging the right movable body base C5 and the left movable body base C6, these can be easily positioned and arranged on the bottom plate C1.

(Display unit A: Screen device C: Screen positional relationship)
As shown in FIG. 50, the fixed screen mechanism D is provided in a fixed state at a fixed exposure position existing in the irradiation direction of the irradiation light. As shown in FIG. 51, the front screen mechanism E1 is rotatably provided between the front exposed position and the front standby position. The positional relationship between the fixed exposure position and the front exposure position is set so that the front exposure position is in the irradiation direction of the irradiation light and exists in front of the fixed exposure position. As a result, when the front screen mechanism E1 moves to the front exposed position, the front screen mechanism E1 covers the fixed screen mechanism D from the front, so that the image due to the irradiation light appears only in the front screen mechanism E1. It is possible. When the front screen mechanism E1 moves to the front standby position, the fixed screen mechanism D is exposed so that the image due to the irradiation light can appear on the fixed screen mechanism D. That is, when the front screen mechanism E1 is arranged at the front exposed position, the front screen mechanism E1 becomes a projection target of the projector mechanism B2. On the other hand, when the front screen mechanism E1 is arranged at the front standby position, the fixed screen mechanism D becomes a projection target of the projector mechanism B2.

As shown in FIG. 52, the reel screen mechanism F1 is rotatably provided between the reel exposed position and the reel standby position. The positional relationship between the reel exposed position and the fixed exposed position is set so that the reel exposed position is in the irradiation direction of the irradiation light and exists in front of the fixed exposed position. As a result, when the reel screen mechanism F1 moves to the reel exposed position, the reel screen mechanism F1 covers the fixed screen mechanism D from the front, so that the image due to the irradiation light appears only in the reel screen mechanism F1. It is possible. When the reel screen mechanism F1 moves to the reel standby position, the fixed screen mechanism D is exposed so that the image due to the irradiation light can appear on the fixed screen mechanism D. That is, when the reel screen mechanism F1 is arranged at the reel exposed position, the reel screen mechanism F1 becomes a projection target of the projector mechanism B2. On the other hand, when the reel screen mechanism F1 is arranged at the front standby position, the fixed screen mechanism D becomes a projection target of the projector mechanism B2.

As shown in FIG. 53, the axial direction of the rotation center axis FG of the front screen mechanism E1 and the axial direction of the rotation center axis RG of the reel screen mechanism F1 coincide with the left-right direction. The operating ranges of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 due to rotation partially overlap each other. Therefore, when one of the screens of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 is arranged in the overlapping range where the operating ranges overlap, if the other screen is rotated, they come into contact with each other.

The positional relationship between the front standby position and the reel standby position is set so that the front screen mechanism E1 existing in the front standby position and the reel screen mechanism F1 existing in the reel standby position do not interfere with each other. That is, the front standby position is arranged above the fixed screen mechanism D, while the reel standby position is arranged behind the fixed screen mechanism D. As a result, the rotation distance of the front screen mechanism E1 is shorter than the rotation distance of the reel screen mechanism F1.

Further, the front standby position is arranged outside the operating range of the reel screen mechanism F1, and the reel standby position is arranged outside the operating range of the front screen mechanism E1. That is, each of the front standby position and the reel standby position is arranged in a range excluding the overlapping range in the operating range.

On the other hand, the front exposed position is arranged within the operating range of the reel screen mechanism F1, and the reel exposed position is arranged within the operating range of the front screen mechanism E1. That is, the front exposed position and the reel exposed position are arranged in the overlapping range in the operating range. As a result, when the front screen mechanism E1 is arranged at the front exposed position, the reel screen mechanism F1 cannot be arranged at the reel exposed position. Further, when the reel screen mechanism F1 is arranged at the reel exposed position, the front screen mechanism E1 cannot be arranged at the front exposed position.

The rotation center axis FG of the front screen mechanism E1 and the rotation center axis RG of the reel screen mechanism F1 are arranged so that the overlap of the operating ranges due to rotation of each of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 is minimized. It is different. Specifically, the rotation center axis FG of the front screen mechanism E1 is set above the rotation center axis RG of the reel screen mechanism F1 in the front standby position direction. Specifically, the rotation center axis FG is arranged above the center position of the front screen mechanism E1 arranged at the front exposed position. As a result, the distance between the front screen mechanism E1 and the rotation center axis FG can be shortened, so that the operating range between the front standby position and the front exposed position in the front screen mechanism E1 can be reduced. By reducing the operating range in this way, it is possible to increase the size of the front screen mechanism E1 even in the limited space in the display unit A. Both the rotation center axis FG and the rotation center axis RG are arranged in front of the rear end position of the fixed screen mechanism D.

Further, the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 are rotatable on condition that one of the screen mechanisms E1 and F1 is present at the standby position. As a result, interference between the screen mechanisms E1 and F1 during rotation is prevented. Details of the operation of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 will be described later.

(Display unit A: Screen device C: Fixed screen mechanism D)
As shown in FIGS. 45 and 46, the fixing screen mechanism D is fixed on the bottom plate C1 of the screen housing C10 by screwing. The fixed screen mechanism D includes a front reflection unit D1, a right surface reflection unit D2, a left surface reflection unit D3, and a bottom surface reflection unit D4. The reflecting surfaces of these reflecting units D1 to D4 are projection surfaces on which the irradiation light from the irradiation light device B is projected, and are set at different angles with respect to the optical axis of the irradiation light from the irradiation light device B. There is.

The fixed screen mechanism D may have, for example, two, three, or five reflecting portions as long as it has a plurality of reflecting surfaces having different angles with respect to the optical axis of the irradiation light. Alternatively, it may be provided with a reflecting portion of a curved or arc-shaped reflecting surface in which the center point of curvature is located on the front side at continuously different angles with respect to the optical axis.

The front reflecting portion D1 has a reflecting surface arranged so as to face the player on the front side, and reflects most of the reflected light from the irradiation light device B arranged in the front upper part of the fixed screen mechanism D forward. It is set to do. The right side reflecting portion D2 and the left side reflecting portion D3 are joined to the right side portion and the left side portion of the front reflecting portion D1, and are arranged symmetrically with respect to the front reflecting portion D1. The right-side reflecting portion D2 and the left-side reflecting portion D3 are arranged so that the width between the front end portions is larger than the width in the left-right direction of the front reflecting portion D1. As a result, the right-side reflection unit D2 and the left-side reflection unit D3 make it easier for the reflection direction of the irradiation light with respect to the reflection surface to be in the direction of the front reflection portion D1, so that a part of the irradiation light is frontal while displaying an image by the irradiation light. It is designed to reflect in the direction of the reflecting portion D1. Further, also for the bottom surface reflecting portion D4, the direction of reflection of the irradiation light on the reflecting surface tends to be directed toward the front reflecting portion D1, so that a part of the irradiation light is directed toward the front reflecting portion D1 while the image of the irradiation light appears. It is designed to reflect.

In the above-mentioned fixed screen mechanism D, the brightness of the reflecting surface is set to be lower than the brightness of each reflecting surface of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 described later. That is, in the fixed screen mechanism D, the amount of light reflected by the irradiation light on the reflecting surface is smaller than the amount of light reflected on the reflecting surface of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1. As a result, the fixed screen mechanism D prevents blurring due to mixing of light due to diffused reflection of the reflecting portions D1 to D4. In the fixed screen mechanism D, the brightness of the other reflecting portions D2, D3, and D4 may be lower than the brightness of the front reflecting portion D1. In this case, since the reflection of the irradiation light by the other reflecting portions D2, D3, and D4 to the front reflecting portion D1 can be reduced, it is possible to reduce the white blur while making the image strongly appear in the front reflecting portion D1.

As the brightness, Brightness in the L ^* a ^* b ^* color system (L ^* a ^* b ^* color space) and the L ^* u ^* v ^* color system (L ^* u ^* v ^* color space) is adopted. However, if white can be used as a reference and other colors can be represented by relative values, it can be defined in any way.

The brightness of the reflective surface of the fixed screen mechanism D and the brightness of the reflective surface of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 are such that the brightness of the reflective surface of the fixed screen mechanism D is the reflection of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1. It is not particularly limited as long as it is lower than the brightness of the surface. For example, the brightness of the reflecting surface of the fixed screen mechanism D may be set to a value about 5 to 25% (or 10 to 20%) lower than the brightness of the reflecting surface of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1.

In order to make the brightness of the reflective surface of the fixed screen mechanism D lower than the brightness of the reflective surface of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1, the color of the paint applied to the base material of the fixed screen mechanism D is changed to the front screen. The color may be blacker than the color of the paint applied to the base material of the mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1. For example, a white paint is used as the paint to be applied to the base material of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1, and the paint to be applied to the base material of the fixed screen mechanism D is the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1. A paint to which a black pigment is added to the paint to be applied to the base material may be used.

In such a paint, the brightness of the reflective surface of the screen mechanism can be changed by changing the ratio of the white pigment (for example, titanium oxide) and the black pigment (for example, carbon black). For example, the paint applied to the base material of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 contains only the white pigment among the white pigment and the black pigment, and the paint applied to the base material of the fixed screen mechanism D includes Both white and black pigments may be included. Further, the ratio of the black pigment to the white pigment is (for example, 5 to 25% (or, for example)) in the paint applied to the fixed screen mechanism D than in the paint applied to the base material of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1. It may be increased by about 10 to 20%). As the paint to be applied to the base material of these screen mechanisms, conventionally known screen paints can be appropriately adopted, and can be adjusted according to the screen type (for example, diffusion type or reflection type). ..

The paint applied to the base material of the fixed screen mechanism D does not contain the black pigment, but the black pigment is dispersed in the resin used as the material of the base material before molding the base material of the fixed screen mechanism D. By doing so, the base material itself may be colored and the brightness of the base material itself may be lowered.

Further, from the viewpoint of preventing diffused reflection of light, the members constituting the screen housing C10 such as the peripheral walls (bottom plate C1, right side plate C2, left side plate C3, and back plate C4) and the inside of the screen housing C10. It is also desirable to reduce the brightness of other members (members other than the screen) arranged in. It is desirable that the brightness of these members is lower than the brightness of the reflective surface of the fixed screen mechanism D. For example, if the brightness is low, it is not necessary to consider that the image is projected as a screen on the surrounding wall. The lower the better. That is, the closer the color of the surrounding wall is to black, the more desirable it is.

(Display unit A: Screen device C: Front screen mechanism E1)
As shown in FIG. 54, the front screen mechanism E1 includes a rectangular front screen member E11 having a projection surface E11a on the entire surface and a front screen support base E12 having a pattern such as a first pattern surface E12a on both sides. Have. The front screen member E11 is formed by applying a screen paint to a thin plate-shaped flat panel. As a result, the projection surface E11a of the front screen member E11 is formed flat.

On the other hand, the front screen support base E12 has a holding recess E121 for holding the front screen member E11. The holding recess E121 has an opening shape similar to that of the projection surface E11a of the front screen member E11 in a slightly enlarged state, and accommodates the entire front screen member E11. Further, the holding recess E121 is set in two stages of depth, a deep portion and a shallow portion. The shallow portion is realized by a step portion E121a formed on the peripheral edge portion of the front screen support base E12 and a step portion E121b formed linearly to both ends in the lateral direction passing through the central portion.

As a result, the front screen member E11 housed in the holding recess E121 is brought into contact with and supported by the stepped portion E121a of the peripheral edge portion and the linear stepped portion E121b passing through the central portion, and is separated from the remaining deep portion. It is in a state. As a result, it is prevented that the deformation of the front screen support base E12 in the deep portion deforms the front screen member E11 and causes distortion in the projection surface E11a.

Further, the front screen support base E12 has a first pattern surface E12a in a part of a region around the projection surface E11a. The first pattern surface E12a is made visible to the player in front when the front screen mechanism E1 is positioned at the front exposed position. Further, the front screen support base E12 has a second pattern surface E12b on the entire surface opposite to the first pattern surface E12a. The second pattern surface E12b is made visible to the player in front when the front screen mechanism E1 is positioned at the front standby position. In these first pattern surface E12a and second pattern surface E12b, for example, a pattern related to the production of a game is three-dimensionally formed by unevenness.

The front screen member E11 and the front screen support base E12 configured as described above are integrally formed by being formed separately and then bonded with an adhesive. As a result, even if a sink mark may occur due to molding shrinkage or the like when the front screen mechanism E1 forms a pattern or the like on the front screen support base E12, the sink mark is mechanically separated from the front screen member E11. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the front screen member E11 from being distorted due to the sinking of the projection surface E11a.

The method of fixing the front screen member E11 and the front screen support base E12 is not limited to the bonding with an adhesive, and any method such as screw fastening can be adopted.

The flat panel constituting the front screen member E11 and the front screen support base E12 are each manufactured by injection molding. As the material of the flat panel constituting the front screen member E11 and the front screen support base E12, a thermoplastic resin (for example, ABS resin or the like) that may cause sink marks when injection molding is performed may be appropriately adopted. it can.

(Display unit A: Screen device C: Front screen drive mechanism E2)
The front screen mechanism E1 is rotatable by the driving force of the front screen drive mechanism E2. As shown in FIGS. 45 and 46, the front screen drive mechanism E2 has a left front screen drive mechanism E2A connected to the lower surface of the left end portion of the front screen mechanism E1 and a right connected to the lower surface of the right end portion of the front screen mechanism E1. It has a front screen drive mechanism E2B.

As shown in FIG. 53, when the front screen mechanism E1 is arranged in the front standby position (in the standby posture), the front screen mechanism E1 inclines upward from the rear end to the front end. It is configured as follows. The inclination of the front screen mechanism E1 is substantially parallel to the inclined portion B15b of the perforated plate B15 and the inclined surface B2a1 on the lower surface B2a of the projector mechanism B2.

As described above, the posture of the front screen mechanism E1 when it is placed in the front standby position is set to an inclined posture in which the front screen mechanism E1 is inclined upward from the rear end portion to the front end portion, so that the posture is parallel to the horizontal plane. Compared with the posture, it is possible to prevent the irradiation light emitted by the irradiation light device B from being obstructed by the front screen mechanism E1. As a result, the vertical position of the front screen mechanism E1 when arranged in the front standby position can be brought closer to the fixed screen mechanism D. As a result, the front screen mechanism E1 can be enlarged even in the limited space of the display unit A. In addition, as described above, since the lower surface B2a of the projector mechanism B2 has the inclined surface B2a1, the vertical position of the front screen mechanism E1 when arranged in the front standby position is set with respect to the projector mechanism B2. You can get closer. As a result, the front screen mechanism E1 can be further enlarged.

As shown in FIGS. 55 and 56, the right front screen drive mechanism E2B includes a crank member E22, a crank gear E21, an intermediate gear E23, a motor shaft gear E24, and a drive motor E25. The crank member E22 in the right front screen drive mechanism E2B is at a position where its upper end (one end) is on the upper side when it is arranged in the front exposed position (in the exposed posture) on the back surface of the right end of the front screen mechanism E1. Is connected to.

As shown in FIG. 57, the crank member E22 is rotatably supported by the right movable body base C5 (see FIG. 45) at the intermediate position E22a. As a result, the crank member E22 makes the upper end portion and the lower end portion (the other end portion) rotatable around the intermediate position E22a. The intermediate position E22a coincides with the rotation center axis FG of the front screen mechanism E1.

As described above, the rotation center axis FG of the front screen mechanism E1 is arranged above the center position of the front screen mechanism E1 arranged at the front exposed position. Further, the crank member E22 is connected to a position where the upper end portion (one end portion) thereof becomes an upper portion when the crank member E22 is arranged at the front exposed position (in the exposed posture) on the back surface of the right end portion of the front screen mechanism E1. .. With the above configuration, the operating range between the front standby position and the front exposed position in the front screen mechanism E1 can be reduced, so that the front screen mechanism E1 can be enlarged.

The crank member E22 has an upper region on the upper end side from the intermediate position E22a and a lower region on the lower end side from the intermediate position E22a. When the crank member E22 is viewed from the side as shown in FIG. 57, the center line in the upper region (the straight line passing between the intermediate position E22a and the midpoint on the upper end side of the crank member E22) is in the vertical direction in the standby posture. Is set to. On the other hand, the center line in the lower region (a straight line passing through the intermediate position E22a and the midpoint at the lower end side of the crank member E22) is set so that the lower side inclines toward the front side rather than the upper side in the standby posture.

A slide groove E22b is formed in the lower region of the crank member E22. The slide groove E22b is formed so that the groove wall surface E22b1 has a U-shape in a side view. The U-shape is composed of two straight portions and a curved portion connecting the ends of the two straight portions. The two straight portions are formed in parallel, and the slide groove E22b has a surface corresponding to the straight portion of the groove wall surface E22b1 set parallel to the center line of the lower region. A slide member E26 is movably engaged with the slide groove E22b. The groove width of the slide groove E22b (distance between the two straight portions) is substantially the same as the member width of the slide member E26, and is set to slide during movement. That is, the slide member E26 is always in contact with the groove wall surface E22b1 of the slide groove E22b. Further, the upper end portion of the slide groove E22b is set so that the slide member E26 comes into contact with the upper end surface (the surface corresponding to the curved portion) when the front screen mechanism E1 is in the standby posture. On the other hand, the lower end of the slide groove E22b is open so that a part of the slide member E26 can be exposed.

The slide member E26 is rotatably supported at the eccentric position E21b of the crank gear E21. As shown in FIG. 55, the gear shaft E21a of the crank gear E21 is rotatably supported by the right movable body base C5 and the first support portion C23 of the right plate C2. In the gear shaft E21a of the crank gear E21, when the front screen mechanism E1 is in the standby posture or the exposed posture, the line segment connecting the gear shaft E21a and the eccentric position E21b is the intermediate position E22a in the crank member E22 and the slide member E26. It is set to have a relationship orthogonal to the line segment connecting the center point.

As a result, when the front screen mechanism E1 is in the standby posture or the exposed posture, even if a force acts in the direction of rotating the lower region of the crank member E22, the gear shaft E21a is applied in the direction of applying all the components of this force. Exists and acts as a fixed end, so the slide member E26 does not move. As a result, a truss structure is formed by a three-bar link having 0 degrees of freedom, with the intermediate position E22a of the crank member E22 and the gear shaft E21a of the crank gear E21 as fixed ends and the slide member E26 as the free end. Even when E1 is pushed by hand, the front screen mechanism E1 does not move because the crank member E22 and the crank gear E21 act as a strong brake.

An intermediate gear E23 is meshed with the crank gear E21. The intermediate gear E23 is rotatably supported by the right movable body base C5 and the second support portion C24 of the right plate C2. A motor shaft gear E24 is meshed with the intermediate gear E23. The drive shaft of the drive motor E25 is connected to the motor shaft gear E24. As a result, the right front screen drive mechanism E2B can transmit the rotational driving force of the drive motor E25 to the crank gear E21 via the motor shaft gear E24 and the intermediate gear E23.

Here, all the components of the rotational driving force applied to the crank gear E21 coincide with the tangential direction of the turning locus of the slide member E26. Further, as shown in FIGS. 58 and 60, when the front screen mechanism E1 is in the standby posture or the exposed posture, the line segment connecting the gear shaft E21a and the eccentric position E21b slides with the intermediate position E22a in the crank member E22. Since it is set to have a relationship orthogonal to the line segment connecting the center point of the member E26, the tangential direction of the turning locus is parallel to the groove wall surface of the slide groove E22b of the crank member E22. As a result, when the front screen mechanism E1 is in the standby posture or the exposed posture, when a rotational driving force is applied to the crank gear E21, there is a groove wall surface that becomes a reaction force in the moving direction (tangential direction) of the slide member E26. Therefore, the crank gear E21 easily starts rotating.

When a rotational driving force is applied to the crank gear E21, the slide member E26 provided at the eccentric position E21b is made movable along the slide groove E22b by sliding with the slide groove E22b, so that the crank member E22 A two-node link with one degree of freedom is formed in which the intermediate position E22a and the gear shaft E21a of the crank gear E21 are fixed ends, and the slide member E26 is a free end that can be moved along the groove wall surface. Then, when the slide member E26 rotates, the crank member E22 provided with the slide groove E22b with which the slide member E26 is engaged rotates with the intermediate position E22a as a fulcrum, and the upper region of the crank member E22 is rotated. Become. As a result, the front screen mechanism E1 moves between the front standby position and the front exposed position.

The drive motor F24 is a stepping motor, which is electrically connected to the main control board MS (see FIG. 32) via the relay board CK, and is driven by the control of the main control board MS.

Further, the moving speed of the front screen mechanism E1 is 0 in the stopped state when the front screen mechanism E1 is in the standby posture or the exposed posture, gradually increases, and the intermediate posture between the standby posture and the exposed posture (see FIG. 59). ), The speed is gradually reduced, and when the exposed posture and the standby posture are reached, the stopped state becomes 0. As a result, the rotation of the crank gear E21 can be started and stopped in a state where the angular acceleration is small (moment of inertia), so that the torque required for the crank gear E21 can be reduced, and as a result, the drive mechanism ( It is possible to reduce failure and wear due to overload of the intermediate gear E23, the motor shaft gear E24, and the drive motor E25).

As shown in FIG. 61, the right front screen drive mechanism E2B configured as described above has the same configuration as the left front screen drive mechanism E2A except for the motor shaft gear E24 and the drive motor E25. The left front screen drive mechanism E2A and the right front screen drive mechanism E2B are arranged symmetrically.

The intermediate gear E23 of the left front screen drive mechanism E2A and the intermediate gear E23 of the right front screen drive mechanism E2B are connected via a shaft member E3.

Specifically, the shaft member E3 extends in the left-right direction, and intermediate gears E23 of the left front screen drive mechanism E2A and the right front screen drive mechanism E2B are connected to both ends thereof. Further, the shaft member E3 is arranged behind the fixed screen mechanism D in a space sandwiched between the back plate C4 and the fixed screen mechanism D (see FIG. 53).

In the above configuration, when the drive motor E25 is driven, the motor shaft gear E24 is rotated. With the rotation of the motor shaft gear E24, the intermediate gears E23 and E23 of the left front screen drive mechanism E2A and the right front screen drive mechanism E2B, and the shaft member E3 rotate integrally. Then, the crank gears E21 and E21 are rotated in conjunction with the rotation of the intermediate gears E23 and E23, so that the front screen mechanism E1 is rotated around the rotation center axis FG to reach the front standby position. It will move between the front exposed position.

As described above, by connecting the intermediate gears E23 and E23 of the left front screen drive mechanism E2A and the right front screen drive mechanism E2B by the shaft member E3, the rotational driving force of the drive motor E25 is transferred to the two crank members E22. It becomes possible to transmit evenly. Therefore, as compared with the case where the intermediate gears E23 and E23 are not connected by the shaft member E3, it is possible to prevent the drive load from being concentrated on one of the two crank members E22. Further, since the drive motor E25 is provided on the right front screen drive mechanism E2B arranged to the right of the fixed screen mechanism D, the arrangement of the fixed screen mechanism D is not hindered.

In addition, the shaft member E3 is not used as the rotation shaft of the front screen mechanism E1. Therefore, the degree of freedom in arranging the shaft member E3 is increased, and the shaft member E3 can be arranged so as not to interfere with the arrangement of other accessories such as the fixed screen mechanism D. As a result, it is possible to increase the degree of freedom in arranging the other accessory while maintaining the rotation range and size of the front screen mechanism E1 to a desired degree.

Further, since the shaft member E3 is arranged behind the fixed screen mechanism D, the light projected on the fixed screen mechanism D is not obstructed by the shaft member E3. Further, since the rotation center axis FG of the front screen mechanism E1 is arranged in front of the rear end position of the fixed screen mechanism D, it is compared with the case where it is arranged behind the rear end position of the fixed screen mechanism D. Therefore, the length between the front screen mechanism E1 and the rotation center axis FG (the length of the crank member E22) can be shortened. Therefore, the size of the front screen mechanism E1 can be maintained to a desired degree even when the space in the cabinet G is limited and the display unit A cannot be enlarged.

(Display unit A: Screen device C: Reel screen mechanism F1)
As shown in FIG. 52, the reel screen mechanism F1 is made of a curved flat plate. The reel screen mechanism F1 has a side view arc-shaped shape that is curved in a shape that approximates the rotation direction. The surface of the reel screen mechanism F1 has a pattern formed on the peripheral edge portion, and the inner peripheral region of the peripheral edge portion is a projection surface F1a. The projection surface F1a is an arcuate surface that becomes convex toward the upstream side in the irradiation direction of the light from the projector mechanism B2 when the reel screen mechanism F1 is arranged at the reel exposure position. Further, a pattern is formed on the back surface of the reel screen mechanism F1 on the rotation center side. The pattern on the back surface is visible to the player in front when the reel screen mechanism F1 is positioned at the reel standby position.

The reel screen mechanism F1 is rotatable between the reel standby position and the reel exposed position by the driving force of the reel screen drive mechanism F2. Then, when the reel screen mechanism F1 is positioned at the reel exposure position, the projection surface F1a can appear an image by irradiating the irradiation light.

(Display unit A: Screen device C: Reel screen drive mechanism F2)
As shown in FIGS. 62 and 63, the reel screen drive mechanism F2 has two arm members F21 and F21, an arcuate gear F22, a motor shaft gear F23, and a drive motor F24. One end of each of the two arm members F21 and F21 is connected to the back surface of the right end portion and the back surface of the left end portion of the reel screen mechanism F1. Further, support shafts F21a and F21a projecting outward in the left-right direction are formed on the outer surfaces of the other ends of the two arm members F21 and F21. These support shafts F21a and F21a are rotatably supported by the right movable body base C5 and the left movable body base C6, respectively. As a result, the two arm members F21 can rotate around the support shafts F21a and F21a. The support shafts F21a and F21a coincide with the rotation center shaft RG of the reel screen mechanism F1.

The arcuate gear F22 is fixed to the tip of the support shaft F21a arranged on the right side of the two support shafts F21a and F21a. A motor shaft gear F23 is meshed with the arcuate gear F22. The drive shaft of the drive motor F24 is connected to the motor shaft gear F23. The drive motor F24 is a stepping motor, which is electrically connected to the main control board MS (see FIG. 32) via the relay board CK, and is driven by the control of the main control board MS.

In the above configuration, when the drive motor E25 is driven under the control of the main control board MS, the motor shaft gear E24 rotates. Along with the rotation of the motor shaft gear E24, the arcuate gear F22 rotates. Then, in conjunction with the rotation of the arcuate gear F22, the arm member F21 is rotated, so that the reel screen mechanism F1 rotates around the rotation center axis RG, and the reel standby position and the reel exposed position. Will work between.

(Display unit A: Screen device C: Sensor mechanism CS)
As described above, the operating ranges of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 partially overlap each other (see FIG. 53). Further, the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 are driven by different drive mechanisms. That is, the drives of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 are not interlocked (synchronized). Therefore, in order to prevent interference (contact) between the screen mechanisms E1 and F1, it is necessary to grasp the positions of the screen mechanisms E1 and F1 respectively. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the main control board MS (see FIG. 32) grasps the position of the front screen mechanism E1 based on the number of steps of the drive motor E25 from the origin position with the front standby position as the origin position. ing. Similarly, with the reel standby position as the origin position, the position of the reel screen mechanism F1 is grasped based on the number of steps of the drive motor F24 from this origin position.

However, if the front screen mechanism E1 or the reel screen mechanism F1 is not operating normally, or if the front screen mechanism E1 or the reel screen mechanism F1 is manually moved while the power is cut off, the main control The substrate MS cannot grasp the exact positions of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1. If the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 are operated in such a situation, they may interfere with each other.

Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 64 to 67, the screen device C includes a sensor mechanism CS for detecting the positions of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1. Then, the main control board MS executes a return operation for returning the screen mechanisms E1 and F1 to the origin position (standby position) based on the detection result from the sensor mechanism CS.

The crank member E22 in the right front screen drive mechanism E2B is formed with a light-shielding portion E22d in the upper region and a light-shielding portion E22e in the lower region. Further, a light-shielding portion F1b is formed on the back surface of the right end portion of the reel screen mechanism F1.

The sensor mechanism CS has three sensors CS1 to CS3. These sensors CS1 to CS3 are transmissive optical sensors, and are formed in a substantially U shape as shown in FIG. 64. One end of the U-shaped open side is a light emitting part that emits light, and the other end is a light receiving part that receives light. Then, when the light receiving unit receives the light emitted from the light emitting unit, these sensors CS1 to CS3 output a Low signal to the main control board MS, the light emitted from the light emitting unit is blocked, and the light receiving unit emits light. It is configured to output a Hi signal to the main control board MS when light cannot be received.

The sensor CS1 is a sensor for detecting whether or not the front screen mechanism E1 is present in the front standby position. The sensor CS1 is fixedly arranged on the rotation locus of the light-shielding portion E22d in the crank member E22. Specifically, when the front screen mechanism E1 is in the front standby position (see FIG. 65), the sensor CS1 sandwiches the light-shielding portion E22d between the light emitting unit and the light receiving unit, and the front screen mechanism E1 waits in front. When it does not exist at the position (see FIG. 66), it is fixedly arranged at a position where the light emitting portion and the light receiving portion do not sandwich the light shielding portion E22d. Therefore, the sensor CS1 outputs a Hi signal when the front screen mechanism E1 is present in the front standby position and a Low signal when the front screen mechanism E1 is not present in the front standby position to the main control board MS.

The sensor CS2 is a sensor for detecting whether or not the front screen mechanism E1 is present at the front exposed position. The sensor CS2 is fixedly arranged on the rotation locus of the light-shielding portion E22e in the crank member E22. Specifically, in the sensor CS2, when the front screen mechanism E1 is present at the front exposed position (see FIG. 66), the light emitting portion and the light receiving portion sandwich the light shielding portion E22e, and the front screen mechanism E1 is at the front exposed position. When it does not exist in (see FIG. 65), it is fixedly arranged at a position where the light emitting portion and the light receiving portion do not sandwich the light shielding portion E22e. Therefore, the sensor CS2 outputs a Hi signal when the front screen mechanism E1 is present at the front exposed position and a Low signal when it is not present at the front exposed position to the main control board MS.

The sensor CS3 is a sensor for detecting whether or not the reel screen mechanism F1 is present at the reel standby position. The sensor CS3 is fixedly arranged on the rotation locus of the light-shielding portion F1b in the reel screen mechanism F1. Specifically, in the sensor CS2, when the reel screen mechanism F1 is in the reel standby position (see FIG. 65), the light emitting portion and the light receiving portion sandwich the light shielding portion F1b, and the reel screen mechanism F1 is in the reel standby position. When it does not exist in (see FIG. 67), it is fixedly arranged at a position where the light emitting portion and the light receiving portion do not sandwich the light shielding portion F1b. Therefore, the sensor CS3 outputs a Hi signal when the reel screen mechanism F1 is present in the reel standby position and a Low signal when the reel screen mechanism F1 is not present in the reel standby position to the main control board MS.

In the above configuration, the detection signals from the sensor CS1 and the sensor CS2 indicate whether the front screen mechanism E1 is located at the front standby position, the front exposed position, or the intermediate position which is a position between them. There is. Further, the detection signal from the sensor CS3 indicates whether the reel screen mechanism F1 is arranged at the reel standby position or a position other than the reel standby position.

Further, as described above, since the front standby position and the reel standby position are arranged in the overlapping range in the operating range of the screen mechanisms E1 and F1, when the front screen mechanism E1 is arranged in the front exposed position, The reel screen mechanism F1 cannot be arranged at the reel exposed position. Therefore, when the sensor CS2 detects that the front screen exists at the front exposed position, it indicates that the reel screen mechanism F1 does not exist at the reel exposed position.

(Operation control of front screen mechanism E1)
Next, prior to explaining the origin return operation, the operation control of each of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 in a normal state will be described. The main control board MS controls the drive motor E25 to rotate the front screen mechanism E1 between the front standby position and the front exposed position. The rotation operation of the front screen mechanism E1 is executed on condition that the reel screen mechanism F1 is present at the reel standby position.

As mentioned earlier, the main control board MS uses the front standby position as the origin position, and grasps the position of the front screen mechanism E1 by the number of steps of the drive motor E25 from this origin position. For example, as shown in FIG. 68, when the number of steps is 210, the front screen mechanism E1 can be grasped as being in the front exposed position. In the present embodiment, when the number of steps is 20-21, the detection signal of the sensor CS1 is switched between the Hi signal and the Low signal, and when the number of steps is 190-191, the detection of the sensor CS2 is performed. The signal switches between the Hi signal and the Low signal.

Further, the main control board MS controls the rotation direction and rotation speed of the front screen mechanism E1 by controlling the motor rotation direction and pulse width of the drive motor E25. Hereinafter, in the drive motor E25, the motor rotation direction for moving the front screen mechanism E1 from the front standby position to the front exposure position is in the + direction, and the motor rotation direction for moving the front screen mechanism E1 from the front exposure position to the front standby position is in the minus direction. And.

FIG. 69 shows an example of the control sequence of the drive motor E25 when the front screen mechanism E1 is rotated from the front standby position to the front exposed position. In this control sequence, first, the drive motor E25 is excited with a pulse width of 100 ms (procedure 1) without updating the phase from the immediately preceding excitation phase, and then the drive motor E25 has a pulse width of 2.2 ms in the + direction. Drive 210 steps with (Procedure 2). As a result, the front screen mechanism E1 rotates from the front standby position to the front exposed position. After that, the drive motor E25 is excited with a pulse width of 100 ms without updating the phase from the immediately preceding exciting phase (procedure 3). The above is the control sequence for rotating from the front standby position to the front exposed position. The control sequence for rotating the front screen mechanism E1 from the front standby position to the front exposed position is the sequence in the control sequence of FIG. 69 in which the motor rotation direction of the drive motor E25 according to step 2 is in the − direction. do it.

(Operation control of reel screen mechanism F1)
Next, the operation control of the reel screen mechanism F1 in a normal state will be described. The main control board MS controls the drive motor F24 to rotate the reel screen mechanism F1 between the reel standby position and the reel exposed position. The rotation operation of the reel screen mechanism F1 is executed on condition that the front screen mechanism E1 is present in the front standby position.

As shown in FIG. 70, the main control board MS uses the reel standby position as the origin position, and grasps the position of the reel screen mechanism F1 by the number of steps of the drive motor F24 from this origin position. For example, when the number of steps is 140, it can be grasped that the reel screen mechanism F1 is in the reel exposed position. In the present embodiment, when the number of steps is 1-2, the detection signal of the sensor CS3 is switched between the Hi signal and the Low signal.

Further, the main control board MS controls the rotation direction and rotation speed of the reel screen mechanism F1 by controlling the motor rotation direction and pulse width of the drive motor F24. Hereinafter, in the drive motor F24, the motor rotation direction for moving the reel screen mechanism F1 from the reel standby position to the reel exposed position is in the + direction, and the motor rotation direction for moving the reel screen mechanism F1 from the reel exposed position to the reel standby position is in the − direction. And.

FIG. 71 shows an example of the control sequence of the drive motor F24 when the reel screen mechanism F1 is rotated from the reel standby position to the reel exposed position. In this control sequence, first, the drive motor F24 is excited with a pulse width of 100 ms (procedure 1) without updating the phase from the immediately preceding exciting phase, and then the drive motor F24 is excited with a pulse width of 4 ms in the + direction. Drive the number of steps (procedure 2). As a result, the rotation of the reel screen mechanism F1 from the reel standby position to the reel exposed position is started, and the rotation speed of the reel screen mechanism F1 is accelerated. After that, the drive motor F24 is driven in the + direction for 122 steps with a pulse width of 3 ms (procedure 3). After that, the drive motor F24 is driven in the + direction with a pulse width of 5 ms for 122 steps (procedure 4). As a result, the rotation speed of the reel screen mechanism F1 is reduced. Then, the drive motor F24 is excited with a pulse width of 100 ms without updating the phase from the immediately preceding exciting phase (procedure 5). The above is the control sequence for rotating the reel from the reel standby position to the reel exposed position. In the control sequence when the reel screen mechanism F1 is rotated from the reel standby position to the reel exposed position, the motor rotation direction of the drive motor E25 according to steps 2 to 4 in the control sequence of FIG. 71 is set to the − direction. It can be a sequence.

As described above, the main control board MS drives the front screen mechanism E1 on the condition that the reel screen mechanism F1 is arranged in the reel standby position, and the front screen mechanism E1 is arranged in the front standby position. Since the reel screen mechanism F1 is driven on the condition that the screen mechanisms are rotated, it is possible to prevent interference between the screen mechanisms during rotation.

(Origin return operation of front screen mechanism E1 and reel screen mechanism F1)
Next, the origin return operation of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 will be described. This home-return operation is executed at a predetermined timing such as when the power is restored from the power-off state.

Here, the detection signal of the sensor CS1 is switched from the Hi signal to the Low signal when the drive motor E25 is driven in the + direction by several steps from the origin position of the front screen mechanism E1 (see FIG. 68). Therefore, even if the detection signal of the sensor CS1 is a Hi signal, the position of the front screen mechanism E1 may not match the origin position. Similarly, even if the detection signal of the sensor CS3 is a Hi signal, the position of the reel screen mechanism F1 may not match the origin position. Therefore, in the present embodiment, even if the detection signal of the sensor CS1 is a Hi signal, the origin return operation related to the front screen mechanism E1 is performed, and even if the detection signal of the sensor CS3 is a Hi signal, the reel screen mechanism F1 is used. It is configured to perform such a home return operation.

Further, the main control board MS drives the drive motor F24 and the drive motor E25 in the origin return operation, and is capable of executing four types of basic operations 1 to 4. Operations 1 and 2 are operations related to the front screen mechanism E1, and operations 3 and 4 are operations related to the reel screen mechanism F1.

The operation 1 is an operation executed when the detection signal output from the sensor CS1 is a Hi signal. Specifically, the operation 1 is an operation of driving the drive motor E25 in the + direction by about 30 to 40 steps. As a result, the detection signal output from the sensor CS1 can be reliably switched from the Hi signal to the Low signal.

The operation 2 is an operation executed when the detection signal output from the sensor CS1 is a Low signal. More specifically, the operation 2 is an operation in which the drive motor E25 is driven in the − direction, the signal output from the sensor CS1 is switched from the Low signal to the Hi signal, and then the drive motor E25 is driven for 20 steps to stop. As mentioned earlier, when the number of steps of the drive motor E25 is 20-21 when the front standby position is set to the origin position, the detection signal of the sensor CS1 switches between the Hi signal and the Low signal. Therefore, by performing this operation 2, the front screen mechanism E1 can be reliably returned to the origin position.

The operation 3 is an operation executed when the detection signal output from the sensor CS3 is a Hi signal. Specifically, it is an operation of driving the drive motor F24 in the + direction by about 10 to 20 steps. As a result, the detection signal output from the sensor CS3 can be reliably switched from the Hi signal to the Low signal.

The operation 4 is an operation executed when the detection signal output from the sensor CS3 is a Low signal. More specifically, the operation 4 is an operation in which the drive motor F24 is driven in the − direction, the signal output from the sensor CS3 is switched from the Low signal to the Hi signal, and then the drive motor F24 is driven for one step to stop. As mentioned earlier, when the number of steps of the drive motor F24 is 1-2 when the reel standby position is set to the origin position, the detection signal of the sensor CS3 switches between the Hi signal and the Low signal. Therefore, by performing this operation 4, the reel screen mechanism F1 can be reliably returned to the origin position.

As shown in FIG. 72, since the sensor mechanism CS has three sensors CS1 to CS3, there are a total of eight combinations of detection states of these sensors CS1 to CS3. Here, since the front screen mechanism E1 is not arranged at the front standby position and the front exposed position at the same time, of these eight types of sensor states, the sensor CS1 and the sensor CS2 both output Hi signals. In the sensor states (state 1 and state 2), an abnormality such as a failure of the sensor CS1 and the sensor CS2 has occurred. Therefore, when the sensor CS1 and the sensor CS2 both output the Hi signal, the main control board MS determines that an abnormality has occurred, and notifies the abnormality by voice or video through a speaker, a monitor, or the like.

The memory of the main control board MS contains the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen according to 6 types of sensor states (states 3 to 8) excluding the above 2 types of sensor states among the 8 types of sensor states of the sensor mechanism CS. Six types of driving procedures for the mechanism F1 are stored. These six types of driving procedures are determined so that the screen mechanisms do not interfere with each other as much as possible. Hereinafter, the driving procedure for each of the six types of sensor states will be described.

When the sensor CS1 and the sensor CS3 output the Hi signal and the sensor CS2 outputs the Low signal in the sensor state (state 3), both the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 are out of the operating range of the other screen mechanism. It is located in. Therefore, in the drive procedure according to the state 3, the main control board MS first returns the front screen mechanism E1 to the origin position by continuously performing the operation 1 and the operation 2. After that, the reel screen mechanism F1 is returned to the origin position by continuously performing the operation 3 and the operation 4.

When the sensor CS1 outputs a Hi signal and the sensor CS2 and the sensor CS3 output a Low signal in the sensor state (state 4), the front screen mechanism E1 is arranged outside the operating range of the reel screen mechanism F1. The screen mechanism is arranged at the reel exposed position or an intermediate position between the reel exposed position and the reel standby position. Here, the operating range of the reel screen mechanism F1 is the range on the reel standby position side (non-overlapping range) when it is outside the operating range of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel exposed position side when it is within the operating range of the front screen mechanism E1. It is divided into two ranges, a range (overlapping range). The boundary between the overlapping range and the non-overlapping range exists between the reel exposed position and the reel standby position. Therefore, when the reel screen mechanism F1 is arranged at the intermediate position, the reel screen mechanism F1 may be arranged within the overlapping range within the operating range of the front screen mechanism E1. Therefore, in the drive procedure according to the state 4, the main control board MS first returns the reel screen mechanism F1 to the origin position by performing the operation 4. After that, the front screen mechanism E1 is returned to the origin position by continuously performing the operation 1 and the operation 2.

When the sensor CS2 and the sensor CS3 output the Hi signal and the sensor CS1 outputs the Low signal in the sensor state (state 5), the front screen mechanism E1 is arranged within the operating range of the reel screen mechanism F1 and , The reel screen mechanism F1 is arranged outside the operating range of the front screen mechanism E1. Therefore, in the drive procedure according to the state 5, the main control board MS first returns the front screen mechanism E1 to the origin position by performing the operation 2. After that, the reel screen mechanism F1 is returned to the origin position by continuously performing the operation 3 and the operation 4.

When the sensor CS2 outputs the Hi signal and the sensor CS1 and the sensor CS3 output the Low signal in the sensor state (state 6), the front screen mechanism E1 is arranged at the front exposed position and the reel screen mechanism F1. Is placed in the middle position. In this state 6, the reel screen mechanism F1 may be arranged within the operating range of the front screen mechanism E1 as in the above-mentioned state 4. Therefore, in the drive procedure according to the state 6, the main control board MS first returns the reel screen mechanism F1 to the origin position by performing the operation 4. After that, by performing the operation 2, the front screen mechanism E1 is returned to the origin position.

When the sensor CS3 outputs a Hi signal and the sensor CS1 and the sensor CS2 output a Low signal in the sensor state (state 7), the front screen mechanism E1 is arranged at an intermediate position, and the reel screen mechanism F1 It is arranged outside the operating range of the front screen mechanism E1. Therefore, in the drive procedure according to the state 7, the main control board MS first returns the front screen mechanism E1 to the origin position by performing the operation 2. After that, the reel screen mechanism F1 is returned to the origin position by continuously performing the operation 3 and the operation 4.

When the sensors CS1 to 3 are in the sensor state (state 8) for outputting the Low signal, the front screen mechanism E1 is arranged at the intermediate position, and the reel screen mechanism F1 is arranged at the intermediate position or the reel exposed position. Here, regarding the operating range of the front screen mechanism E1, the range on the front standby position side (non-overlapping range) and the front exposed position side which is within the operating range of the reel screen mechanism F1 when it is outside the operating range of the reel screen mechanism F1. It is divided into two ranges, the range of (overlapping range). The boundary between the overlapping range and the non-overlapping range exists between the front exposed position and the front standby position. Therefore, in the state 8, the front screen mechanism E1 may be arranged within the operating range of the reel screen mechanism F1. Therefore, the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 may be arranged within the operating range of each other. As a result, when one of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 is driven, the other screen mechanism may move due to interference. Therefore, when the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 are driven to perform the return operation based only on the detection results of the sensors CS1 to 3 at the start of the return operation, one of the screen mechanisms is returned to the origin position. You may not be able to.

Therefore, in the drive procedure according to the state 8, the main control board MS first returns the front screen mechanism E1 to the origin position by performing the operation 2. After that, the main control board MS determines whether the detection signal of the sensor CS3 is a Hi signal or a Low signal. Then, when the detection signal of the sensor CS3 is a Low signal, the reel screen mechanism F1 is returned to the origin position by performing the operation 4. On the other hand, when the detection signal of the sensor CS3 is a Hi signal, the reel screen mechanism F1 is returned to the origin position by continuously performing operations 3 and 4.

As described above, when the sensor states of the sensor mechanism CS are in the states 3 to 7, the screen mechanisms interfere with each other by driving the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 according to the drive procedure according to each state. It is possible to return to each origin position without any problem. Further, when the sensor state of the sensor mechanism CS is the state 8, after the front screen mechanism E1 is returned to the origin position, the reel screen mechanism F1 is returned to the origin position by a driving procedure according to the detection signal of the sensor CS3. Each of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 can be reliably returned to the origin position. As a result, by appropriately driving the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 in the processing after the return operation, it is possible to reliably prevent the screen mechanisms from interfering with each other.

As a modification, when the sensor state of the sensor mechanism CS is the state 3, the main control board MS returns the reel screen mechanism F1 to the origin position by continuously performing the operation 3 and the operation 4, and then the operation 1 And the operation 2 may be continuously performed to return the front screen mechanism E1 to the origin position.

Further, when the sensor state of the sensor mechanism CS is the state 8, the main control board MS first returns the reel screen mechanism F1 to the origin position by performing the operation 4. After that, the main control board MS determines whether the detection signal of the sensor CS1 is a Hi signal or a Low signal. Then, when the detection signal of the sensor CS1 is a Low signal, the front screen mechanism E1 is returned to the origin position by performing the operation 2. On the other hand, when the detection signal of the sensor CS1 is a Hi signal, the front screen mechanism E1 may be returned to the origin position by performing operations 1 and 2 in succession.

Further, the sensors CS1 to 3 are not limited to the transmission type optical sensor, and various sensors such as a contact type sensor can be adopted. Further, the sensor mechanism CS does not necessarily have to have three sensors CS1 to 3, and detects whether or not the front screen mechanism E1 exists in the front standby position, and the front screen mechanism E1 exists in the front exposed position. If it is possible to detect whether or not the reel screen mechanism F1 is present at the reel standby position, it may be composed of one sensor.

(Cabinet G)
(Cabinet G: Medal supply mechanism MH)
As shown in FIG. 73A, the back wall G3 of the cabinet G is provided with a replenishment opening G31 for conducting the atmosphere between the inside and the outside of the housing 2. The replenishment opening G31 is arranged in the central portion of the back wall G3. When an automatic circulation replenishment device (not shown) is laid on the installation island where the game machine 1 is installed, the screw is inserted in the state where the medal supply port P, which is the replenishment path of the automatic circulation replenishment device, is inserted into the replenishment opening G31. It is stopped and fixed.

As shown in FIG. 73B, the medal supply port P inserted through the supply opening G31 reaches above the hopper mechanism HP. As a result, medals from the automatic circulation replenishment device can be supplied to the hopper mechanism HP.

As shown in FIG. 73B, the replenishment opening G31 through which the medal replenishment port P is inserted is provided with a medal replenishment mechanism MH on the inner side of the housing 2. The medal supply mechanism MH opens and closes the supply opening G31. That is, when the medal supply port P of the automatic circulation replenishment device is inserted into the replenishment opening G31, the replenishment opening G31 is opened by the medal replenishment mechanism MH. Further, when the medal supply port P of the automatic circulation replenishment device is not inserted into the replenishment opening G31, the replenishment opening G31 is shielded by the medal replenishment mechanism MH. Hereinafter, the medal supply mechanism MH will be specifically described.

As shown in FIGS. 74 and 75, the medal supply mechanism MH has a shielding member MH1 and a guide member MH2. The shielding member MH1 is slidable in the vertical direction by the guide member MH2, and it is possible to switch between a shielding state in which the replenishment opening G31 is shielded and an open state in which the replenishment opening G31 is exposed. ..

The shielding member MH1 has a flat plate portion MH11 and a protruding portion MH12. The flat plate portion MH11 is formed in a rectangular flat plate shape capable of shielding the replenishment opening G31 from the inside of the cabinet G of the housing 2. The flat plate portion MH11 has a screw hole MH13 at the upper portion and a screw hole MH14 at the lower portion. As a result, the shielding member MH1 can be screwed and fixed to the back wall G3 in a shielding state in which the replenishment opening G31 is shielded. The projecting portion MH12 is formed so as to project vertically from the center of the upper edge of the flat plate portion MH11 toward the inside of the cabinet G.

The guide member MH2 is formed in a rectangular ring shape along the edge of the shielding member MH1 in a shielded state that shields the replenishment opening G31. The guide member MH2 is screwed and fixed to the back wall G3 so as to sandwich the shielding member MH1. Specifically, the guide member MH2 has an upper edge portion MH21, two side edge portions MH22 and MH22, and a lower edge portion MH23.

The upper edge portion MH21 is formed along the outer side of the upper edge of the shielding member MH1 in the shielding state. That is, the upper edge portion MH21 is adjacent to the upper side of the shielding member MH1 in the shielding state, and restricts the movement of the shielding member MH1 in the vertically upward direction. The two side edge portions MH22 and MH22 are formed along the side edges of the shielding member MH1 in a shielded state in the vertical downward direction from each end of the upper edge portion MH21. That is, the two side edge portions MH22 and MH22 are adjacent to the side of the shielding member MH1 in the shielding state, and restrict the movement of the shielding member MH1 to the side.

The lower edge portion 23 is formed so as to connect the other ends of the two side edge portions MH22 and MH22. A holding portion MH23a, a guide groove MH23b, and a screw hole MH23c are formed in the lower edge portion 23. The holding portion MH23a is a notch formed in the center of the upper surface of the lower edge portion 23, and is formed to have a width larger than the width of the protruding portion MH12 of the shielding member MH1. As a result, when the shielding member MH1 in the shielding state is slid vertically downward, the protruding portion MH12 of the shielding member MH1 is supported by the holding portion MH23a. That is, the shielding member MH1 is held in an open state that exposes the replenishment opening G31. Further, the holding portion MH23a is formed to be thinner than the protruding length of the protruding portion MH12. Therefore, since the protruding portion MH12 of the shielding member MH1 protrudes from the holding portion MH23a, the protruding portion MH12 can be easily grasped, and the open state can be easily shifted to the shielded state.

The guide groove MH23b is a groove that engages with the shielding member MH1 formed on the back wall G3 side, and the shielding member MH1 is slid in the vertical direction. The screw hole MH23c is formed at a position where it can be screwed and fixed to the screw hole MH14 when it is in the shielded state, and at a position where it can be screwed and fixed to the screw hole MH13 when it is in the open state.

As shown in FIG. 76, the medal supply port P is obliquely inserted into the supply opening G31. A scaler device SK is arranged above the medal supply port P. The scaler device SK includes a scaler substrate SK1 that processes position information input to a touch sensor panel arranged on a liquid crystal display panel surface, and a scaler substrate case SK2 on which the scaler substrate SK1 is installed. The scaler substrate case SK2 is a support member having a concave plate as a bottom surface formed so as to surround the medal supply port P that is inclined in an oblique direction. The scaler substrate SK1 is inclinedly provided on such a scaler substrate case SK2.

(Hopper mechanism HP)
As shown in FIG. 77, a hopper mechanism HP and an overflow bucket OF are arranged below the lower space of the cabinet G.

The hopper mechanism HP is attached to the central portion of the bottom plate G91 in the cabinet G. This hopper mechanism HP has a structure capable of accommodating a large number of medals and ejecting them one by one. The hopper mechanism HP pays out medals when the number of stored medals exceeds a predetermined number or when the settlement button is pressed to settle the medals. The medals paid out by the hopper mechanism HP are discharged from the medal payout outlet DD14.

The overflow bucket OF stores medals overflowing from the hopper mechanism HP. This overflow bucket OF is arranged on the right side of the hopper mechanism HP when the inside of the cabinet G is viewed from the front. The overflow bucket OF is engaged with the bottom plate G91 of the cabinet G, and is configured to be removable from the bottom plate G91.

(Structure of hopper mechanism HP)
As shown in FIG. 78, the hopper mechanism HP includes a bucket HP1 for storing a large number of medals, a base member HP2 to which the bucket HP1 is attached, and a payout unit (not shown) housed inside the base member HP2. There is.

The payout unit has a function of paying out medals one by one in a fixed posture, and has a coin disc for sequentially paying out medals accumulated in the bucket HP1 while rotating them. The base member HP2 has a medal payout outlet DD14. By driving the coin discs of the medal payout units accumulated in the bucket HP1, the coins are ejected one by one from the medal payout outlet DD14.

As shown in FIG. 78, the bucket HP1 has an upper end opening HP 11 formed from a wall surface substantially perpendicular to a horizontal plane, and an inclined side wall portion HP 12 that is continuously inclined to the upper end opening HP 11 at a predetermined angle. doing. The upper end opening HP11 has a substantially rectangular planar shape. A discharge guide HP13 for guiding medals overflowing from the bucket HP1 to the outside of the bucket HP1 is provided at a corner portion in front of the upper end opening HP11. The discharge guide HP 13 has an inclined surface that is inclined so as to become lower from the inner side to the outer side of the bucket HP1. The medals guided by the discharge guide HP13 are stored in the overflow bucket OF.

The medal guided by the selector DD15 and colliding with the discharge guide HP13 bounces toward the inclined side wall portion HP12 of the bucket HP1. At this time, if the amount of medals stored in the bucket HP1 has not reached a certain amount, the medals move in the bucket HP1 along the inclined side wall portion HP12. As a result, the medals can be uniformly stored in the bucket HP1.

On the other hand, when the amount of medals stored in the bucket HP1 reaches a certain amount, the medals collide with the inclined surface of the discharge guide HP13 and bounce, and collide with the medals stored in the bucket HP1 to collide with the discharge guide HP13. Return to the slope of. Then, the medal moves on the inclined surface of the discharge guide HP13 by its own weight and heads toward the overflow bucket OF side.

Further, on both side surfaces of the hopper mechanism HP, guide pieces HP21 and HP22 continuously projecting from the bottom surface of the hopper mechanism HP are provided. Further, on the back surface of the hopper mechanism HP, a connector HP 41 connected to the connector G81 of the cabinet G described later is provided.

(Configuration of overflow bucket OF)
As shown in FIG. 78, the overflow bucket OF includes a storage main body OF1 and a medal guide OF2.

The storage main body OF1 is formed in the shape of a rectangular box with an open upper surface. The medal guide OF2 is configured to be removable from the storage main body OF1. The medal guide OF2 guides the medal guided from the discharge guide HP13 to the overflow bucket OF to the storage main body OF1 and prevents the medal from being biased to one side surface side of the storage main body OF1.

(Coin guard HP30)
In this game machine, as shown in FIG. 79, a medal supply mechanism MH (corresponding to a supply port) for discharging medals received from the outside is provided above the bucket HP1 of the hopper mechanism HP.

Here, there is a predetermined distance in the height direction between the medal supply mechanism MH and the bucket HP1 of the hopper mechanism HP (corresponding to the hopper device). When medals are replenished from the medal replenishment mechanism MH to the hopper mechanism HP, since there is a predetermined distance in the height direction, the medals fall and collide with the medals accumulated in the bucket HP1 to the outside due to the momentum. It may be kicked out. In this case, most of them collide with the upper end opening HP11 of the hopper mechanism HP and stay in the bucket HP1. However, in rare cases, the medal may jump over the upper end opening HP11 and jump out of the bucket HP1.

If the medal jumps out of the bucket HP1 or falls to the side with the power supply device DE of the bottom plate G91 or the side with the overflow bucket OF, open the lower door mechanism DD and collect it. do it. However, if the medal falls between the hopper mechanism HP and the back wall G3 of the cabinet G, it is necessary to remove the hopper mechanism HP, which is troublesome.
Further, since the hopper mechanism HP and the back wall G3 of the cabinet G are electrically connected by a connector, if a metal medal touches a metal part of the connector, it may cause a failure. It ends up.

Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 79 and 80, between the medal supply mechanism MH and the bucket HP1 of the hopper mechanism HP, the back wall G3 of the cabinet G (corresponding to the back surface of the housing) and the bucket HP1 of the hopper mechanism HP A coin guard HP30 (corresponding to a medal spill prevention member) is provided from the back wall G3 of the cabinet G to the edge of the bucket HP1 so as to fill the gap HPG (see FIG. 80).

As shown in FIGS. 78 and 81, the coin guard HP30 is provided at a corner on the back side of the upper end opening HP11, and has an L-shape when viewed from above. The L-shaped coin guard HP30 is formed of a first guard portion HP301 facing the back wall G3 of the cabinet G and a second guard portion HP302 facing the overflow bucket OF. In this way, the first guard portion HP301 prevents medals from falling into the gap HPG between the back wall G3 of the cabinet G and the bucket HP1 of the hopper mechanism HP, and the second guard portion HP302 is an overflow bucket. It prevents medals from falling to the OF (corresponding to the auxiliary storage) side.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 80 and 81, the first guard portion HP301 and the second guard portion HP302 of the coin guard HP30 are inclined so as to be depressed from the back wall G3 side of the cabinet G toward the bucket HP1 side. It has a surface HP301a. Further, as shown in FIG. 81, two screw holes HP301c and HP301d screwed into the back wall G3 of the cabinet G are formed on the front surface of the coin guard HP30.

According to the above configuration, since the coin guard HP30 is provided so as to fill the gap HPG between the back wall G3 of the cabinet G and the bucket HP1 of the hopper mechanism HP, the medal received from the medal supply mechanism MH is a bucket. Even if it is about to overflow from HP1, it is possible to prevent it from entering the gap HPG between the back wall G3 of the cabinet G and the bucket HP1 of the hopper mechanism HP. As a result, it is possible to prevent the overflowing medals from accumulating in the gap HPG between the back wall G3 of the cabinet G and the bucket HP1 of the hopper mechanism HP and interfering with the connector, the electronic device, or the movable member.

Further, by making the coin guard HP30 L-shaped, the second guard portion HP302 can be arranged between the overflow bucket OF and the bucket HP1. This makes it possible to prevent the medals from overflowing between the overflow bucket OF and the hopper mechanism HP.

Further, the coin guard HP30 has inclined surfaces HP301a and HP301b. As a result, even when a medal is placed on the coin guard HP30, since it is tilted toward the bucket HP1, the medal slides down to the bucket HP1 side due to its own weight, and the medal can be normally stored in the hopper mechanism HP. it can.

(Hopper guide mechanism HG)
As shown in FIGS. 82 and 83, the substrate HG1 constituting the hopper guide mechanism HG is positioned with a screw at the center of the bottom plate G91 of the cabinet G. As shown in FIG. 84, the substrate HG1 has a frame body having an opening HG11 in the center, and guide rails HG12 and HG13 formed by bending both sides of the substrate HG1 in the vertical direction are formed. Further, as shown in FIG. 83, on the front side of the substrate HG1, a lock member HG14 that locks to a locking member (not shown) provided at the bottom of the hopper mechanism HP is fixed with screws to the substrate HG1. In the back, a connector G81 on the cabinet G side (corresponding to a connector on the housing side) is arranged.

The guide rails HG12 and HG13 are guided by the guide pieces HP21 and HP22 of the hopper mechanism HP, so that the connector HP41 (see FIG. 85) provided on the back surface of the hopper mechanism HP is replaced with the connector G81 (hopper side connector). Equivalent to).

As shown in FIG. 84, the guide rails HG12 / HG13 are formed in a U shape by the lower portions HG123 / HG133, the side surfaces HG122 / HG132, and the upper portions HG121 / HG131. Further, projecting portions HG124 / HG134 projecting in the vertical direction are formed above the upper portions HG121 / HG131 of the guide rails HG12 / HG13. The protruding portions HG124 / HG134, the upper portion HG121 / HG131, the side surface HG122 / HG132, the lower portion HG123 / HG133, and the substrate HG1 are integrally formed by bending one plate.

As shown in FIG. 84, the upper portions HG121 and HG131 are formed in a tapered shape on the front side portion.

The protrusions HG124 and HG134 are formed so as to be arranged in front of the connector G81 on the cabinet G side in the upper portions HG121 and HG131. Further, the protruding portions HG124 / HG134 have a shorter length in the depth direction than the upper portions HG121 / HG131, and are arranged on the back side of the upper portions HG121 / HG131.

Further, as shown in FIG. 84, pedestal plates HG151, HG152, and HG153 are formed on the back surface of the substrate HG1 so as to come into contact with the bottom plate G91 and serve as a pedestal for the connector G81. The pedestal plates HG151, HG152, and HG153 are also formed by being integrally bent with the substrate HG1.

Further, as shown in FIG. 84, a flat space HG17 is provided on the front side of the substrate HG1 (the front side of the guide rails HG12 and HG13).

As shown in FIGS. 86 and 87, a pair of guide pieces HP21 and HP22 provided on the side surface of the hopper mechanism HP are located between the lower portions HG123 and HG133 of the guide rails HG12 and HG13 and the upper portions HG121 and HG131, respectively. The connector HP41 provided on the back surface of the hopper mechanism HP is connected to the connector G81 by sliding to the back side of the cabinet G in a state of being sandwiched and engaged with the cabinet G.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 88, for example, a pair of guide pieces HP21 / HP22 provided on the side surface of the hopper mechanism HP is between the lower portions HG123 / HG133 of the guide rails HG12 / HG13 and the upper portions HG121 / HG131. When the hopper mechanism HP is slid to the back side of the cabinet G as it is, the guide pieces HP21 and HP22 come into contact with the protrusions HG124 and HG134. The hopper mechanism HP is restricted from sliding to the back side of the protrusions HG124 and HG134. Further, as shown in FIG. 88, the hopper mechanism HP in a state where the guide pieces HP21 / HP22 are in contact with the protruding portions HG124 / HG134 is the back surface of the lower door mechanism DD when the lower door mechanism DD is closed (FIG. 88). (Refer to the two-dot chain line DDB), and if the lower door mechanism DD is closed, it comes into contact with the hopper mechanism HP.

According to the above configuration, in order to electrically connect the connector HP41 of the hopper mechanism HP to the connector G81 on the cabinet G side, when the hopper mechanism HP is slidly installed on the hopper guide mechanism HG, it is placed on both sides of the hopper mechanism HP. When the pair of guide pieces HP21 / HP22 provided are not engaged with the guide rails HG12 / HG13 and are accidentally displaced and slid above the guide rails HG12 / HG13, the guide pieces HP21 / HP22 guide the guide pieces HP21 / HP22. By contacting the protruding portions HG124 / HG134 provided above the rails HG12 / HG13 and on the front side of the connector G81, the hopper mechanism HP is slid at an erroneous position, and the hopper mechanism HP comes into contact with the connector G81. Can be prevented. That is, the hopper mechanism HP can be normally slid and installed inside the cabinet G.
As a result, it is possible to prevent the hopper mechanism HP from being slid and installed at the wrong position, the connector HP41 of the hopper mechanism HP coming into contact with the connector G81 at the wrong position, and the connector G81 and the connector HP41 being damaged.

Further, when the hopper mechanism HP is slidly installed on the bottom of the cabinet G, the pair of guide pieces HP21 / HP22 provided on both side surfaces of the hopper mechanism HP are the upper parts HG121 / HG131 and the lower parts of the guide rails HG12 / HG13. If the guide pieces HP21 and HP22 are not pinched between the HG123 and HG133 and are accidentally slid above the upper parts HG121 and HG131 of the guide rails HG12 and HG13, the guide pieces HP21 and HP22 are placed on the guide rails HG12 and HG13. By contacting the protruding portions HG124 and HG134 provided above the portions HG121 and HG131, it is possible to prevent the hopper mechanism HP from being slid and installed at an erroneous position. That is, the hopper mechanism HP can be normally slid and installed inside the cabinet G.

Further, since a part of the upper part HG121 / HG131 of the guide rail HG12 / HG13 has a tapered shape, when guiding the hopper mechanism HP to the guide rail HG12 / HG13, the upper part HG121 / HG13 of the guide rail HG12 / HG13. It is possible to prevent the HG 131 from coming into contact with the hopper mechanism HP.

Further, the manufacturing process can be simplified by producing the pair of guide rails HG12 / HG13 lower portions HG123 / HG133, upper portions HG121 / HG131, and protruding portions HG124 / HG134 with a single plate. ..

Further, since the protruding portions HG124 and HG134 are located on the back side of the cabinet G, they do not interfere with the temporary placement around the guide rails HG12 and HG13 as a preparatory step for guiding the hopper mechanism HP to the guide rails HG12 and HG13. Can be done.

Further, as a preparatory step before guiding the guide pieces HP21 / HP22 of the hopper mechanism HP to the guide rails HG12 / HG13 in the flat space HG17 provided in front of the substrate HG1 (in front of the guide rails HG12 / HG13). The hopper mechanism HP can be temporarily placed. As a result, the hopper mechanism HP can be slidably installed on the hopper guide mechanism HG.

(Sheet metal BK)
As shown in FIGS. 89 and 90, a display unit A (corresponding to an effect device) is provided in the upper space (corresponding to the upper part of the housing) of the cabinet G (corresponding to the housing). Further, a power supply device DE and a hopper mechanism HP (corresponding to a hopper device) are provided at the bottom of the lower space (corresponding to the lower part of the housing) of the cabinet G, and the back side (cabinet) of the power supply device DE and the hopper mechanism HP. A sub control device SS (corresponding to a control means) is provided on the back wall G3 side of the G. That is, the hopper mechanism HP is arranged on the front side of the sub control device SS. A sheet metal BK is installed between the hopper mechanism HP and the sub control device SS. Further, a sub relay device SN is provided between the sub control device SS and the intermediate support plate G1. Above the bucket HP1 of the hopper mechanism HP, a medal supply mechanism MH (corresponding to a supply port) for supplying metal medals from the outside is provided, and medals are dropped from the medal supply mechanism MH to the hopper mechanism HP. Will be done.

As shown in FIG. 90, the sheet metal BK is arranged above the corner on the left-hand side of the bucket HP1 of the hopper mechanism HP. Further, the sheet metal BK is arranged between the first facing surface BK1 facing the sub control device SS, the second facing surface BK2 facing the power supply device DE, the bottom surface of the sub control device SS, and the upper surface of the bucket HP1. The third facing surface BK3, the support surface BK4 protruding from the third facing surface BK3 and fixing the sheet metal BK to the back wall G3 of the cabinet G with screws, the fourth facing surface BK7 corresponding to the medal supply mechanism MH, and the sheet metal BK. Has a support surface BK7, which is fixed to the back wall G3 of the cabinet G with screws. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 91 and 92, the sheet metal BK is formed by bending one plate, and has a quadrangular third facing surface BK3, which abuts on the bottom surface of the sub control device SS. 3 A quadrangular support surface BK4 bent 90 ° downward toward the back wall G3 side of the facing surface BK3, and a quadrangular support surface BK5 bent 90 ° downward toward the power supply device DE side of the third facing surface BK3. , The first facing surface BK1 having a quadrangular shape bent 90 ° upward toward the front side of the third facing surface BK3 (a quadrangular notch BK12 is formed in the upper right of the front view), the first facing surface BK1. The medal supply mechanism MH of the square-shaped second facing surface BK2 and the first facing surface BK1 bent 90 ° toward the power supply device DE of the above, and the square-shaped fourth facing surface bent 90 ° toward the back wall G3 side. A quadrangular support surface BK7 bent 90 ° in the direction of the medal supply mechanism MH is formed on the back wall G3 of the BK6 and the fourth facing surface BK6. The sheet metal BK is screwed into the corresponding back wall G3 via the screw hole BK41 formed in the support surface BK4 and the screw hole BK71 formed in the support surface BK7. As a result, the sub control device SS is arranged so as to be sandwiched between the back wall G3 of the cabinet G and the first facing surface BK1 of the sheet metal BK. The sheet metal BK is made of metal, and may be fixed to the metal back wall G3 via the support surface BK4.

In the present embodiment, the sheet metal BK is not in contact with the sub control device SS. That is, the support surface BK4 and the first facing surface BK1 are not in contact with the sub control device SS. The sheet metal BK may be directly attached to the bottom of the sub control device SS. Further, the thin plate-shaped sub-relay device SN detachably attached to the lower surface of the intermediate support plate G1 and the thin plate-shaped sub-control device SS detachably attached to the back wall G3 of the cabinet G are viewed from the side. It is arranged in a state where the L-shape is turned upside down.

According to the above configuration, since the sheet metal BK is provided between the sub control device SS and the hopper mechanism HP, even if a medal is dropped on the hopper mechanism HP and jumps out to the sub control device SS side, the sheet metal BK It is possible to prevent the medal from physically contacting the sub control device SS. Further, since the sheet metal BK is provided between the sub control device SS and the hopper mechanism HP, the influence of radiation (electromagnetic field) due to the contact between the metal medals in the hopper mechanism HP can also be prevented by the sheet metal BK.
Further, since the sub control device SS is provided on the inner side of the lower space of the cabinet G and is sandwiched between the back wall G3 and the sheet metal BK, the sub control device SS is not removed from the cabinet G unless the sheet metal BK is removed. It cannot be removed. This enhances the security for the sub control device SS.

In addition, since medals are dropped from the medal supply mechanism MH to the hopper mechanism HP, the chances of the medals being flipped on the hopper mechanism HP increase and the playing distance increases, but the sub-control device SS and the hopper mechanism HP Since the sheet metal BK is provided between them, even if the medal is dropped on the hopper mechanism HP and greatly protrudes to the sub control device SS side, the medal is physically in contact with the sub control device SS by the sheet metal BK. Can be prevented. Further, since the sheet metal BK is provided between the sub control device SS and the hopper mechanism HP, the influence of radiation (electromagnetic field) due to the contact between the metal medals due to the dropping of the medals can be prevented by the sheet metal BK.

(Lower door mechanism DD)
(Lower door lock mechanism and upper door lock mechanism)
As shown in FIG. 93, the lower door lock mechanism G51 is provided at the right end of the cabinet G and the lower door mechanism DD (corresponding to the lower door). Further, the upper door lock mechanism G52 is provided at the right end of the cabinet G and the upper door mechanism DU (corresponding to the upper door). The lower door lock mechanism G51 serves to lock the cabinet G so as to maintain a closed state with respect to the lower space (corresponding to the lower part of the housing). Further, the upper door lock mechanism G52 plays a role of locking the cabinet G so as to maintain a closed state with respect to the upper space (corresponding to the upper part of the housing).

(Lower door lock mechanism G51)
As shown in FIG. 94, the lower door lock mechanism G51 includes a locked portion G511 fixed to the right end portion of the back wall of the lower door mechanism DD, a locking portion G512 fixed to the right end portion of the cabinet G, and the like. It has a cylinder lock G513.

The locked portion G511 has two rod-shaped locked rods G511a and G511b formed at both ends of the concave frame G511c at the upper portion and the lower portion.

The locking portion G512 has a long cylinder G5122 and a long locking plate G5121 slidably arranged in the cylinder G5122 in the vertical direction.

The locking plate G5121 has claw-shaped claw portions G5121a and G5121b that are locked to the locked rods G511a and G511b. The claw portions G5121a and G5121b slide in the cylinder G5122 in the vertical direction as the locking plate G5121 slides, so that the locked rods inserted into the openings G5122a and G5122b provided in the cylinder G5122. It locks or is released from G511a and G511b. Further, the locking plate G5121 has a spring that is urged upward.

The claw portions G5121a and G5121b are locked to the locked rods G511a and G511b when the locking plate G5121 is at a height position to lock the lower door mechanism DD, while the locking plate G5121 is locked to the lower door mechanism DD. The lock on the locked rods G511a and G511b is set to be released when the door is lowered from the height position at which the door is locked to the height position at which the lock is released. Further, the tip surfaces of the claw portions G5121a and G5121b are inclined diagonally downward, and are pushed down by contact with the locked rods G511a and G511b.

Although not shown, the locking portion G512 has a pull-down portion in the middle portion. The pull-down portion makes it possible to pull down the locking plate G5121 as the key is inserted into the cylinder lock G513 and rotated. As a result, the lock between the claw portions G5121a / G5121b and the locked rods G511a / G511b can be released by lowering according to the pulling down of the locking plate G5121.

(Upper door lock mechanism G52)
As shown in FIG. 94, the upper door lock mechanism G52 has a locked portion G521 fixed to the right end portion of the back wall of the upper door mechanism DU and a locking portion G522 fixed to the right end portion of the cabinet G. Have.

The locked portion G521 has two rod-shaped locked rods G521a and G521b formed over both ends of the concave frame G521c at the upper portion and the lower portion.

The locking portion G522 has a long cylinder G5222 (corresponding to a locking cylinder) and a long locking plate G5221 (corresponding to a locking member) slidably arranged in the cylinder G5222 in the vertical direction. doing.

The locking plate G5221 has claw-shaped claw portions G5221a and G5221b (corresponding to the locking portion) that are locked to the locked rods G521a and G521b. The claw portions G5221a and G5221b slide in the cylinder G5222 in the vertical direction as the locking plate G5221 slides, so that the locked rods inserted into the openings G5222a and G5222b provided in the cylinder G5222. It locks or is released from G521a and G521b (see FIG. 97).

The claw portions G5221a and G5221b are locked to the locked rods G521a and G521b when the locking plate G5221 is at a height position for locking the upper door mechanism DU, while the locking plate G5221 is locked to the upper door mechanism DU. The lock on the locked rods G521a and G521b is set to be released when the vehicle is lowered from the height position at which the door is locked to the height position at which the lock is released. Further, as shown in FIG. 96, the tip surfaces of the claw portions G5221a and G5221b are inclined diagonally downward, and are pushed down by contact with the locked rods G521a and G521b.

As shown in FIG. 95, the cylinder G5222 of the locking portion G522 has an opening G5222c formed below the upper door mechanism DU, and the protrusion G5221c provided on the locking plate G5221 provides the opening G5222c. It protrudes toward the inside of the cabinet G through the cabinet G. By pulling down the protrusion G5221c, the locking plate G5221 is lowered, and the locking between the claw portions G5221a / G5221b and the locked rods G521a / G521b can be released accordingly.

Here, the protrusion G5221c is slid upward, and when the locking plate G5221 is in the height position to lock the upper door mechanism DU, the protrusion G5221c is the upper DDU of the lower door mechanism DD (see FIG. 93). ) Is placed in contact with it.

According to the above configuration, when the lower door mechanism DD is closed, the upper DDU of the lower door mechanism DD physically interferes with the protrusion G5221c to prevent the locking plate G5221 from sliding, and the claws. It is possible to prevent the locking rods G521a and G521b from being unlocked from the portions G5221a and G5221b, and to lock the upper door mechanism DU so that it cannot be opened.

On the other hand, when the lower door mechanism DD is open, the physical interference of the upper DDU of the lower door mechanism DD with the protrusion G5221c is released, so that the locking plate G5221 can slide in the cylinder G5222 and the claws. The locks on the locked rods G521a and G521b of the portions G5221a and G5221b are released, and the lock on the cabinet G of the upper door mechanism DU can be released.

As a result, in order to unlock the upper door mechanism DU, it is possible to first require a procedure for unlocking the lower door mechanism DD by the lower door lock mechanism G51. That is, in order to open the upper door mechanism DU, it is necessary to unlock the lower door lock mechanism G51, open the lower door mechanism DD, and then unlock the upper door lock mechanism G52, which requires the upper space of the cabinet G. Can increase security against. Further, the upper space of the cabinet G can be more secure than the lower space of the cabinet G, and the lower space of the cabinet G can be accessed more smoothly than the upper space of the cabinet G. Can be a place.

Further, in order to unlock the lower door mechanism DD, it is necessary to unlock the cylinder lock G513 with a key. For the administrator of the game machine 1, the key has an advantage that it is easy to manage because it is compact and suitable for carrying.

Further, due to the sliding of the locking plate G5221, the claw portions G5221a and G5221b are caught by the locked rods G521a and G521b, and the hooking is released. As a result, it is possible to lock the upper space of the cabinet G of the upper door mechanism DU linked to the sliding of the locking plate G5221.

Further, since the upper door lock mechanism G52 is provided at the end opposite to the shaft-supported end and is arranged on the side where the upper door mechanism DU is opened / closed, the upper door lock mechanism G52 is unlocked. Therefore, it is not necessary to open the lower door mechanism DD widely. As a result, in order to unlock the upper door mechanism DU, it is not necessary to unnecessarily expose the lower space of the cabinet G to the outside, and security can be improved.

As shown in FIG. 98, a one-way hinge DD54 is used between the lower door mechanism DD and the cabinet G to apply a predetermined torque in the direction in which the lower door mechanism DD is closed. As a result, torque is applied when closing the lower door mechanism DD, and the lower door mechanism DD can be quietly closed with respect to the cabinet G without applying a sudden load. As a result, it is possible to prevent a sudden load from being applied to the protruding portion B131 that is physically interfered with by the lower door mechanism DD.

(Relationship between power supply device DE and speaker DD25L)
As shown in FIG. 99, the speaker DD25L (corresponding to an audio device) is located below the back side (corresponding to the lower space side of the cabinet G (corresponding to the housing)) of the lower door DD1 (corresponding to the door) of the lower door mechanism DD. Is provided. On the other hand, a power supply device DE (corresponding to the power supply device) is provided in the lower space (corresponding to the inside of the housing) of the cabinet G. The speaker DD25L and the power supply device DE are arranged so as to face each other when the lower door mechanism DD is closed with respect to the cabinet G (see FIG. 101).

The power supply device DE is arranged on the left side of the hopper mechanism HP when the inside of the cabinet G is viewed from the front. The power supply device DE plays a role of converting the power of the AC voltage supplied from the outside into the power of the DC voltage required by each unit, and supplying the converted power to each device constituting the game machine 1.

As shown in FIG. 100, a power switch DE1 for switching whether to supply power (ON / OFF) to the devices constituting the game machine 1 is provided on the front side of the power supply device DE. Further, two slide rails DE3 are provided in the vertical direction on both sides of the power switch DE1. The switch cover DE2 makes the slide rail DE3 slidable in the vertical direction. As a result, when the switch cover DE2 is slid downward along the slide rail DE3, the switch cover DE2 covers the power switch DE1 (the switch cover DE2 is closed) as shown in FIG. 99. On the other hand, when the switch cover DE2 is slid upward along the slide rail DE3, the power switch DE1 is exposed (the switch cover DE2 is open) as shown in FIG. 100. By providing the switch cover DE2 in this way, the power switch DE1 cannot be directly accessed from the outside, and the security is enhanced.

Further, as shown in FIG. 101, the switch cover DE2 has an inclined surface DE2a inclined so as to project downward from above.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 101, a convex portion DD25L1 (corresponding to an engaging portion) protruding toward the power supply device DE side is formed on the back surface side (the surface side facing the power supply device DE) of the speaker DD25L. The convex portion DD25L1 has an inclined surface DD25La inclined so as to project from the lower side to the upper side.

In the speaker DD25L, the convex portion DD25L1 interrupts the upper part (sliding path) of the switch cover DE2 when the switch cover DE2 is in the closed state when the lower door mechanism DD is closed with respect to the cabinet G, and switches. The cover DE2 is formed at a position that restricts it from sliding upward.

According to the above configuration, by closing the lower door mechanism DD, the convex portion DD25L1 of the speaker DD25L provided on the back surface of the lower door DD1 interrupts the sliding path (movement path) of the switch cover DE2, and the switch cover DE2 It can be regulated to be open. On the other hand, by opening the lower door mechanism DD, the restriction on the switch cover DE2 of the convex portion DD25L1 of the speaker DD25L provided on the back surface of the lower door DD1 is released. Therefore, the switch cover DE2 is slid upward to switch the power switch. It is possible to switch from the closed state in which the DE1 cannot be operated to the open state in which the power switch DE1 can be operated.
As a result, while ensuring the operability of the power switch DE1 with the lower door mechanism DD open, it is possible to prevent unauthorized operation of the power supply device DE and enhance security.

Further, by sliding the switch cover DE2 up and down, it is possible to switch between the open state and the closed state. This makes it possible to facilitate access to the power switch DE1 with the lower door mechanism DD opened.

Further, since the convex portion DD25L1 provided on the speaker DD25L has a convex shape, the volume of the speaker DD25L itself can be increased by the amount protruding toward the power supply device DE side, and the sound quality can be improved at the same time. ..

Further, when the lower door mechanism DD is closed when the switch cover DE2 is in the closed state, the inclined surface DE2a of the switch cover DE2 and the inclined surface DD25La of the convex portion DD25L1 are arranged at opposite positions, and the sliding of the switch cover DE2 Movement can be regulated.
On the other hand, when the lower door mechanism DD is closed while the switch cover DE2 is in the open state, the switch cover DE2 is in a position shifted upward from the closed position, so that the inclined surface DD25La of the convex portion DD25L1 is switched. Since the switch cover DE2 abuts on the inclined surface DE2a of the cover DE2 and is pushed in, the switch cover DE2 slides downward and moves to the closed position.
As a result, even if the switch cover DE2 is forgotten to be closed and the lower door mechanism DD is closed in the open state, the inclined surface DD25La of the convex portion DD25L1 becomes the inclined surface DE2a of the switch cover DE2. Since it abuts and is pushed in, the switch cover DE2 can be slid and moved to the closed position in conjunction with the operation of closing the lower door mechanism DD.

(Maximum BET button DD8)
The maximum BET button DD8 (corresponding to the button unit) is arranged on the second pedestal portion DD2b (corresponding to the pedestal portion). As shown in FIG. 102, an opening DD2ba is formed in the second pedestal portion DD2b. As shown in FIG. 105, the opening DD2ba has a predetermined depth, has a side wall DD2bc so as to surround the opening DD2ba, and a flange DD2bb is formed at the bottom of the side wall DD2bc. As shown in FIG. 102, the maximum BET button DD8 is composed of an operation unit DD81 and a locking unit DD82.

(Operation unit DD81)
As shown in FIG. 106, the operation unit DD81 includes a first member DD812, a button base DD811, a spring DD813 (corresponding to an elastic member), a photo sensor DD814, a second member DD815, and a button base cover DD816. Have.

The first member DD812 includes a button base portion DD8123, a button cover portion DD8121, and a button sheet DD8122. As shown in FIG. 106, the first member DD812 is arranged so as to be pushable downward (in the A direction).

The button cover portion DD8121 is arranged above the button base portion DD8123. The button cover portion DD8121 is engaged with and fixed to the edge of the button base portion DD8123. The button cover portion DD8121 has a function as a cover forming a surface on which the player is directly pressed.

The button sheet DD8122 is arranged between the button base DD8123 and the button cover DD8121. The button sheet DD8122 is made of a flat plate-like light-transmitting resin sheet and has a light distribution property.

The button base DD8123 is located above the button base DD811. The button base DD8123 has two cylindrical sliding portions DD8124a and DD8124b on the lower side. Cylindrical screw holes are formed on the lower side of the sliding portions DD8124a and DD8124b. Further, a spring holding portion DD8124c for holding the spring DD813 is formed between the two sliding portions DD8124a and DD8124b. The spring holding portion DD8124c is formed to have substantially the same size as the inner diameter of the spring DD813.

Between the button base DD8123 and the button base DD811, a spring DD813 having an elastic force that repels a force that pushes down the first member DD812 downward (in the A direction) is provided. The spring DD813 is formed by a coil spring formed in a cylindrical shape. One end of the spring DD813 is arranged and held on the outer circumference of the spring holding portion DD8124c. The other end of the spring DD813 is in contact with the lower portion of the button base DD811. Therefore, the spring DD813 repels the force by which the player pushes down the button cover portion DD8121 of the first member DD812 downward (in the A direction).

The button base DD811 is formed in a rectangular box shape with an open upper surface. Two through holes DD811a and DD811b are formed in the lower portion of the button base DD811. The through holes DD811a and DD811b are open in the vertical direction so that the two sliding portions DD8124a and DD8124b can be slidable, respectively. Therefore, the outer dimensions of the through holes DD811a and DD811b are formed to be larger than the inner diameter dimensions of the sliding portions DD8124a and DD8124b. Further, a flange DD8111 protruding outward is formed on the outer peripheral edge of the button base DD811. The flange DD8111 comes into contact with the upper surface of the flange DD2bb of the opening DD2ba provided in the second pedestal portion DD2b (see FIG. 105). Therefore, the flange DD8111 has a shape larger than the outer shape of the opening DD2ba, and when the operation portion DD81 is inserted from above the opening DD2ba, the bottom portion and the four side surfaces of the button base DD811 are included. The flange DD8111 portion passes through the opening DD2ba, but is regulated by abutting the upper surface of the flange DD2bb of the opening DD2ba.

Further, in the button base DD811, a restraining plate DD8112 projecting in the horizontal direction is provided on the side surface portion DD8113 extending from the side surface of the button base DD811. Further, two communication holes DD816a and DD816b are formed in the side surface portion DD8113. The shape and area of the bottom surface portion of the button cover portion DD8121 and the shape and area of the top surface portion of the button base DD811 including the flange DD8111 are the same. That is, the button cover portion DD8121 and the button base DD811 have a shape that exactly overlaps in the vertical direction.

The second member DD815 is arranged below the button base DD811 (in the A direction). Cylindrical screw holes DD815a and DD815b are formed in the second member DD815. Then, the sliding portions DD8124a / DD8124b of the button base portion DD8123 pass through the through holes DD811a / DD811b, and the lower side of the sliding portions DD8124a / DD8124b extends from the through holes DD811a / DD811b, and the sliding portions DD8124a / DD8124b. The screw hole formed on the lower side of the above and the screw holes DD815a and DD815b formed on the second member DD815 are screwed together by the screws DD8152a and DD8152b. As a result, the second member DD815 is attached between the two sliding portions DD8124a and DD8124b extending from the two through holes DD811a and DD811b. The second member DD815 has a shape larger than the through holes DD811a and DD811b.

Further, in the second member DD815, a thin plate-shaped light-shielding piece DD8151 projecting in the vertical direction is provided between the screw hole DD815a and the screw hole DD815b.

Below the second member DD815 (in the A direction), a photosensor DD814 is provided in which the light emitting unit DD814a and the light receiving unit DD814b face each other in the horizontal direction at predetermined intervals. This predetermined interval is set to be larger than the thickness of the light-shielding piece DD8151 in the horizontal direction. A transmission connector is provided on the back surface of the photosensor DD814, and is connected by an external connector DD85.

The button base cover DD816 is formed in a box shape in which the lower side of the button base DD811 and the side facing the side surface DD8113 are open. Claw-shaped locking portions DD8161 and DD8162 are formed above the button base cover DD816, and the claw-shaped locking portions DD8161 and DD8162 are provided on the lower portion of the button base DD811 to be locked portions DD8113a and DD8113b. The button base cover DD816 is fixed to the lower portion of the button base DD811 by being locked to. Further, the button base cover DD816 is formed with two screw holes DD8163a and DD8163b.

When the player presses the first member DD812 downward (A direction), the second member DD815 also moves downward (A direction). When the second member DD815 moves, the light-shielding piece DD8151 interrupts between the light-emitting unit DD814a and the light-receiving unit DD814b, and blocks the light emitted from the light-emitting unit DD814a to the light-receiving unit DD814b. As a result, it is detected that the player has operated the maximum BET button DD8.

Then, when the player stops pressing the first member DD812 downward (in the A direction), the button base DD8123 moves upward due to the repulsive force of the spring DD813 (the first member DD812 is moved to the initial position). To return). When the button base DD8123 moves upward due to the repulsive force of the spring DD813, the upper surface of the second member DD815 comes into contact with the lower surface of the restraining plate DD8112, and the second member DD815 and the first member DD812 return too upward. Regulate that.

As a result, as the second member DD815 moves upward, the light-shielding piece DD8151 interrupted between the light-emitting unit DD814a and the light-receiving unit DD814b also moves upward, and the light-emitting unit DD814a emits light to the light-receiving unit DD814b. The blocking of light is released. As a result, it is detected that the player is not operating the maximum BET button DD8.

According to the above configuration, the second member DD815 has a shape larger than the through holes DD811a and DD811b provided in the button base DD811, and the sliding portion DD8124a of the first member DD812 extending from the through holes DD811a and DD811b. -Attached to DD8124b. As a result, the second member DD815 can prevent the sliding portions DD8124a and DD8124b of the first member DD812 from coming out of the through holes DD811a and DD811b, and can prevent the maximum BET button DD8 from being illegally removed.

Further, in the light-shielding piece DD8151, two sliding portions DD8124a and DD8124b slide the two through holes DD811a and DD811b of the button base DD811 in conjunction with the pressing of the first member DD812 by the player, and the two through holes The light-shielding piece DD8151 provided in the intermediate portion of the second member DD815 attached between the two sliding portions DD8124a and DD8124b extending from the DD811a and DD811b cross-blocks between the light-emitting portion DD814a and the light-receiving portion DD814b. can do.

(Locking unit DD82)
As shown in FIG. 103, the locking portion DD82 has a box shape, and in order to connect the opening DD821 formed on the upper surface of the locking portion DD82 and the connector DD85 to the back surface of the operating portion DD81, the locking portion DD82 has a box shape. It has an opening DD822 formed on the back surface of the locking portion DD82.

A flange DD823 is formed on the outer peripheral edge of the opening DD821 of the locking portion DD82, and further projects vertically outside the flange DD823 so as to surround the flange DD823. The surrounding frame DD824 is formed. The flange DD823 abuts on the lower surface of the flange DD2bb of the opening DD2ba (see FIG. 105). Therefore, the flange DD823 has a shape larger than the outer shape of the opening DD2ba, and when the locking portion DD82 is pressed from below the opening DD2ba, the flange DD823 portion hits the lower surface of the flange DD2bb. It is regulated by contact.

On the inner wall side of the locking portion DD82, a locking piece DD825 for positioning the operating portion DD81 when the operating portion DD81 is stored is formed. Further, communication holes DD826a and DD826b provided on both sides of the opening DD822 formed on the back surface of the locking portion DD82 are formed.

With the operation unit DD81 inserted into the opening DD2ba from above and the flange DD8111 portion in contact with the upper surface of the flange DD2bb, the locking portion DD82 is mounted on the operation unit DD81 from below the opening DD2ba. , The flange DD823 is brought into contact with the lower surface of the flange DD2bb of the opening DD2ba. Then, the two screws DD83a and DD83b are screwed into the screw holes DD8163a and DD8163b via the communication holes DD826a and DD826b and the communication holes DD816a and DD816b, respectively (see FIG. 104).

According to the above configuration, the two screws DD83a and DD83b are screwed into the screw holes DD8163a and DD8163b via the communication holes DD826a and DD826b and the communication holes DD816a and DD816b, respectively, thereby locking the operation unit DD81. The portion DD82 and the portion DD82 can be fixed to the second pedestal portion DD2b via the opening DD2ba. Further, since the operation unit DD81 has a flange DD8111 larger than the opening DD2ba, it is possible to prevent the maximum BET button DD8 from falling from the outside of the opening DD2ba to the inside of the cabinet G. Further, since the locking portion DD82 also has a flange DD823 larger than the opening DD2ba, it is possible to prevent the maximum BET button DD8 from coming out of the cabinet G from the inside of the opening DD2ba. As a result, the maximum BET button DD8 can be fixed to the second pedestal portion DD2b.

Further, since the button cover portion DD8121 and the button base DD811 have a shape that exactly overlaps each other in the vertical direction, when the button cover portion DD8121 is viewed from above, the button base DD811 is hidden by the button cover portion DD8121 and is external. Only the button cover portion DD8121 pressed by the player can be shown. As a result, the appearance of the maximum BET button DD8 can be simplified, and the design of the appearance of the game machine 1 can be enhanced.
Further, the shape of the bottom surface of the button cover portion DD8121 is smaller than the shape of the top surface of the button base DD811, and the structure is such that it is easy to prevent unauthorized intrusion through the gaps between the through holes DD811a and DD811b of the button base DD811. be able to.

(Lower door mechanism DD: Reel device M1)
(Lower door mechanism DD)
As shown in FIG. 107, the lower door mechanism DD is provided with a main display window DD4 formed as a rectangular opening in a substantially central portion of the upper portion. A reel unit RU attached from the inside of the cabinet G is mounted on the back surface side of the main display window DD4. Further, a main control board MS is attached to the back surface of the reel unit RU.

The reel unit RU is mainly composed of three reels RL (left reel), RC (middle reel), and RR (right reel) in which a plurality of types of symbols are drawn on the outer peripheral surface of each reel. These reels RL, RC, and RR are arranged in parallel (horizontally in a row) so that each of them can rotate at a constant speed in the vertical direction. For the reels RL, RC, and RR, the operation of each reel RL, RC, and RR and the patterns drawn on each reel RL, RC, and RR can be visually recognized through the main display window DD4.

A transparent panel DD41 made of a rectangular acrylic plate or the like is attached and fixed to the surface of the main display window DD4 so that a player or the like cannot touch the reel unit RU. Below the main display window DD4, first, second, and third pedestals DD2a, DD2b, and DD2c on a substantially horizontal plane are formed. The first pedestal portion DD2a located on the right side of the main display window DD4 is provided with a medal insertion port DD5 for inserting medals. The medal insertion slot DD5 is an opening into which medals are inserted by the player. The medals inserted from the medal slot DD5 are credited or bet on the game.

The second pedestal portion DD2b located on the left side of the main display window DD4 is provided with a maximum BET button DD8 (also referred to as a MAXBET button) as an effective line setting means for betting a credited medal. When the maximum BET button DD8 is pressed, "3" is selected as the number of medals to be inserted.

A liquid crystal display device DD20 is provided on the third pedestal portion DD2c located on the front side of the main display window DD4. The liquid crystal display device DD20 is a so-called touch panel in which a touch sensor panel as a touch-type position input device is arranged on the panel surface of the liquid crystal display panel (liquid crystal panel). The touch sensor panel may be, for example, a capacitive type that detects contact with a part of the human body (fingertip or the like) or an electrostatic pen and outputs the detection signal. It may be of a method of detecting contact with a hard substance such as a pen tip and outputting the detection signal, or of another method or structure (in-cell structure or the like).

The liquid crystal display device DD20 functions as a SUI (smart user interface), and game information such as the number of games is displayed on the display screen as the game progresses, and is selected by the player. Alternatively, a message or input key for requesting input is displayed.

In the liquid crystal display device DD20, for example, as the game progresses, it is possible to display the content (effect information) according to the effect related to the game on the display screen. Further, as the liquid crystal display device DD20, for example, an attachment having a function as a directing accessory, a jog dial, a push button, or the like may be attached as a dedicated attachment. Further, the liquid crystal display device DD20 can be omitted by allocating the function to the display unit A or the like described later.

On the front side of the maximum BET button DD8, a start lever DD6 is provided that rotationally drives the reels RL, RC, and RR by the operation of the player and starts the variable display of the symbol in the main display window DD4. The start lever DD6 is tiltably attached within a predetermined angle range.

On the right side of the start lever DD6 and on the front side of the liquid crystal display device DD20, there are three stop buttons DD7L for stopping the rotation of the three reels RL, RC, and RR by the player's pressing operation (stop operation). , DD7C, DD7R are provided.

A C / P button DD13 is provided on the left side of the maximum BET button DD8. The C / P button DD13 switches the credit / payout of medals acquired by the player in the game by a push button operation. In the state where payout is selected by switching the C / P button DD13 (non-credit state), medals are ejected from the medal payout outlet DD14 (cancellation shoot) provided on the coin guard plate portion on the lower side of the lower door mechanism DD. The paid-out medals are collected in the medal receiving unit DD15.

A lumbar panel DD18 (lumbar light guide plate) is arranged on the lower side of the start lever DD6 and the stop buttons DD7L, DD7C, and DD7R. The lumbar panel DD18 is configured as a decorative panel using an acrylic plate or the like. On the lumbar panel DD18, a name representing the model of the game machine 1 and various patterns are drawn by printing.

Further, a speaker DD25L is provided on the left side of the medal payout outlet DD14, and a speaker DD25R is provided on the right side. The speakers DD25L and DD25R notify the player of various information about the game by sounds such as voice and music. Further, a first sub-display device DD19L and a second sub-display device DD19R are arranged on the left side and the right side of the main display window DD4, respectively. These sub-display devices DD19L and DD19R display, for example, the number of medals paid out and the number of remaining medals credited when a prize is established. Normally, the maximum number of medals credited to the game machine 1 is 50, so 50 or less credits are displayed. In the state where the maximum number of 50 medals is credited, the inserted medals are paid out as they are from the medal payout outlet DD14. Further, the sub display devices DD19L and DD19R may have a touch panel on the front surface.

(Relationship between lower door DD1, reel unit RU, and main control board MS)
As shown in FIG. 108, the lower door mechanism DD of the game machine 1 includes a lower door DD1, a reel unit RU, and a main control board MS.

As shown in FIG. 109, the lower door DD1 (corresponding to the door) is provided so as to be openable and closable with respect to the cabinet G (corresponding to the housing). Further, as shown in FIG. 110, the reel unit RU (corresponding to the symbol display means) is detachably provided on the back side (internal side (lower space side) of the cabinet G) of the lower door DD1. Further, as shown in FIG. 110, the main control board MS is detachably provided on the back side of the reel unit RU (inside the cabinet G (lower space side)).

The main control board MS rotates the reels RL, RC, RR of the reel unit RU based on the command signals output by the start lever DD6, the stop buttons DD7L, DD7C, DD7R (corresponding to the command means), and the like. Corresponds to the control means for stopping and displaying the symbols arranged on the reels RL, RC, and RR by stopping.

By integrating the lower door DD1, the reel unit RU, and the main control board MS according to the positional relationship between the lower door DD1, the reel unit RU, and the main control board MS as described above, the game machine 1 You can easily perform the work of assembling, replacing parts, and disassembling.

Further, the main control board MS is an important configuration for controlling the game, and it is necessary to take measures to prevent unauthorized removal. However, since the main control board MS is integrated with the reel unit RU, it is difficult to remove it. Can be configured.

Further, the main control board MS is provided on the back surface of the reel unit RU provided on the inner side of the lower door DD1. As a result, the main control board MS can be arranged on the back side of the cabinet G far from the lower door DD1 by the thickness of the lower door DD1 and the reel unit RU. Therefore, a physical distance can be secured between the lower door DD1 and the main control board MS, and even if an unauthorized intrusion is made through the gap of the lower door DD1, the main control board MS is reached. Is difficult, and security can be improved.

Further, since the lower door DD1, the reel unit RU, and the main control board MS are integrated, when changing the specifications of the game machine 1, the exterior of the lower door DD1 is changed, the reel RL of the reel unit RU, The RC and RR symbols and the game content can be changed all at once.

Specifically, the attachment of the main control board MS to the reel unit RU will be described with reference to FIG. 111. As shown in FIG. 111, the reel unit RU has a substrate contact portion RU9a at the rear. The substrate contact portion RU9a is a flat portion extending in the vertical direction and in the vertical direction on the back surface side of the reel unit RU. The normal direction of the plane portion substantially coincides with the front-rear direction. Further, the reel unit RU has an upper flat portion RU9b above the center right of the substrate contact portion RU9a. The upper flat surface portion RU9b is a flat surface portion whose plane direction coincides with the substrate contact portion RU9a, and has a screw hole in the upper left portion. Further, the reel unit RU has a mounting portion RU9c below the substrate contact portion RU9a whose length in the left-right direction is substantially the same as that of the substrate contact portion RU9a. The mounting portion RU9c includes a wall surface portion whose surface direction coincides with the substrate contact portion RU9a and the upper flat portion RU9b, a bottom surface portion extending horizontally and backward from the lower portion of the wall surface portion, and a rear surface portion. It has an inclined portion that is bent from the end and extended upward and rearward with an inclination. The mounting portion RU9c has screw holes at both ends in the left-right direction. Further, the reel unit RU has a substrate contact portion RU9a and a flat surface portion whose plane direction coincides with the upper flat surface portion RU9b.

The main control board MS is mounted on the bottom surface of the mounting portion RU9c, and is in surface contact with the substrate contact surface portion RU9a, the upper flat surface portion RU9b, the wall surface portion of the mounting portion RU9c, and other flat surface portions having the same surface directions. It is positioned in the position where it is. Then, in that state, the screws are screwed into the screw holes of the upper flat surface portion RU9b and the mounting portion RU9c through the through holes formed in the main control board MS. As a result, the main control board MS is stably attached to the board contact portion RU9a, the upper flat portion RU9b, and the mounting portion RU9c arranged on the same surface.

Next, the attachment of the reel unit RU to the lower door DD1 will be specifically described with reference to FIG. 112. As shown in FIG. 112, the reel unit RU has a reel hinge RU21 at the left end. The reel hinge RU21 is a flat plate member having a U-shape in a plan view, and the normal directions of the planes substantially coincide with each other in the front-rear direction. The reel hinge RU21 has an upper hinge RU21a formed downward from the upper left end portion. Further, the reel hinge RU21 has a lower hinge RU21b formed downward from the lower left end portion. The upper hinge RU21a and the lower hinge RU21b are formed so that their central axes coincide with each other.

The upper left portion on the inner side of the lower door DD1 has a reel hinge base DD18 extending from the upper end to the central portion. The reel hinge base DD18 has an upper hinge base DDR18a and an upper hinge base DDR18b at positions corresponding to the upper hinge RU21a and the lower hinge RU21b. The upper hinge base DDR18a and the lower hinge base DDR18b are capable of inserting the upper hinge RU21a and the lower hinge RU21b, respectively, and the reel unit RU is centered on the upper hinge RU21a and the lower hinge RU21b in the inserted state. Supports rotatably.

The reel unit RU has an upper right lock portion RU 22 projecting to the right at the upper right end portion. Further, the reel unit RU has a lower lock portion RU23 that projects downward from substantially the center of the lower end portion. The upper right lock portion RU22 and the lower lock portion RU23 are lockable in a state of being in contact with the inner wall surface of the lower door DD1. That is, when the reel unit RU is rotated in the direction of the lower door DD1 and brought into contact with the reel unit RU, the upper right lock portion RU22 and the lower lock portion RU23 are brought into contact with each other in a state of being engaged with the lower door DD1. By locking the upper right lock portion RU22 and the lower lock portion RU23 to the lower door DD1, the reel unit RU can be maintained in a non-rotatable state. A knob member is rotatably provided on the rear surface side of the upper right lock portion RU22 and the lower lock portion RU23. By rotating the knob member while the upper right lock portion RU22 and the lower lock portion RU23 are engaged with the lower door DD1, the reel unit RU can be switched between a rotatable state and a locked state. It has become. The reel unit RU may be locked to the lower door DD1 in the locked state. Further, the main control board MS may be locked to the reel unit RU.

(Lower door mechanism DD: Reel device RU)
As shown in FIG. 113, the reel device RU has three reel units RU1, a reel base RU2, and a reel cover RU3. The three reel units RU1 are arranged in a parallel state (horizontally in a row) in the left-right direction. The left reel unit RU1 has a reel RL, the central reel unit RU1 has a reel RC, and the right reel unit RU1 has a reel RR. Each reel unit RU1 is independently supported by the reel base RU2. The reel base RU2 is formed in a box shape having an open surface, and accommodates each reel unit 1 in a partially exposed state. The reel cover RU3 is attached to the reel base RU2 by screwing so as to cover the open surface. When the reel cover RU3 is attached to the reel base RU2, the outer peripheral surfaces of the reels RL, RC, and RR in each reel unit RU1 from the central portion to the upper portion are exposed from the reel base RU2. As a result, the symbols drawn on the outer peripheral surfaces of the reels RL, RC, and RR can be visually recognized.

Further, the reel unit RU1 has a motor mounting plate RU11 which is a support plate for supporting the shaft of the reel and mounting a motor for driving the reel. The motor mounting plate RU11 is arranged on the right side of the reel unit RU1 and rotatably supports the reel. That is, they are arranged so as to be sandwiched between the adjacent reel units RU1. The motor mounting plate RU11 has a front portion RU11a forming a front portion. The front portion RU11a is formed in a substantially arcuate shape in the side view, and is formed in substantially the same shape as the reel in the side view. The bow shape is a figure surrounded by an arc and a chord connecting the ends of the arc.

Specifically, the motor mounting plate RU11 has a front portion RU11a having a substantially bow-shaped side view and a shape formed continuously from both ends of an arc defining the bow shape toward the rear (for example, side view). It is composed of a rear portion RU11b (substantially rectangular). The motor mounting plate RU11 may directly support the reels, or may indirectly support the reels via other members.

It is desirable that the front portion of the motor mounting plate RU11 formed to have substantially the same shape as the reel in the side view has substantially the same size as the front portion of the opposing reels, and both of them overlap. That is, when viewed from one side, the front portion of the motor mounting plate RU11 is substantially completely covered by the reel, and when viewed from the other side, the portion of the reel facing the portion by the front portion of the support plate. Is desirable to be almost completely covered. As a result, it is possible to provide the motor mounting plate RU11 with a function as a partition plate and to maintain the aesthetic appearance of the game machine in a well-balanced manner.

(Lower door mechanism DD: Reel device RU: Reel unit RU1)
The reel unit RU1 will be described with reference to FIG. 114. Since each of the three reel units RU1 has the same configuration, only the right reel unit RU1 will be described.

As shown in FIG. 114, the reel index RU111, the sensor unit RU112, the motor drive unit RU113, and the drive control board RU114 are arranged on the motor mounting plate RU11 of the reel unit RU1. The reel index RU111 is arranged at the center of the motor mounting plate RU11. The sensor unit RU112 is arranged behind the reel index RU111. The motor drive unit RU 113 is arranged above the reel index RU111.

The reel RR has a reel drum RR1. The reel drum RR1 is formed in a tubular shape, and a reel band RR2 on which a plurality of symbols are arranged is wound and fixed. The reel drum RR1 has a frame for increasing rigidity arranged on the left side surface (opposite side of the motor mounting plate RU11) of the tubular portion, radially from the center and in concentric circles smaller than the outer peripheral circle. .. This frame has a shape in which the central portion is recessed to the right (inside the tubular shape). In the reel drum RR1, a rotary gear RR3 having the same central axis is arranged on the left side (frame side) inside the tubular shape. That is, inside the reel drum RR1, the reel index RU111, the sensor unit RU112, and the motor drive unit RU113 are arranged on the right side (motor mounting plate RU11) of the rotary gear RR3. Further, in the reel drum RR1, a backlight RR4 that illuminates the pattern arranged on the reel RR that is stopped and displayed from behind is arranged on the inner wall surface in the radial direction inside the tubular shape.

The motor drive unit RU113 has a stepping motor and a drive gear that meshes with the rotary gear RR3, and power from the stepping motor for rotating the reel RR is transmitted by the rotary gear RR3. The stepping motor is rotated by the number of drive pulses supplied from the drive control board RU114. That is, it is possible to specify how much the reel RR is rotated from the reference position (degree of displacement) by the number of drive pulses supplied from the drive control board RU114. The motor drive unit RU 113 is controlled to start and stop rotation by the drive control board RU 114 in accordance with a control signal from the main control board MS. Specifically, a start command signal is transmitted to the main control board MS in response to an operation by the player to the start command means such as the start lever DD6. The main control board MS transmits the start control signal to the drive control board RU 114 when the start command signal is detected. The drive control board RU 114 drives the motor drive unit RU 113 when the start control signal is detected, and the reel RR is rotated. As a result, the symbols arranged on the reel RR are displayed in a variable manner. Further, a stop command signal is transmitted to the main control board MS in response to an operation by the player to the stop command means such as the stop button DD7R. The main control board MS transmits the stop control signal to the drive control board RU 114 when the stop command signal is detected. The drive control board RU 114 drives the motor drive unit RU 113 when the stop control signal is detected, and the reel RR is stopped. As a result, the symbols arranged on the reel RR are stopped and displayed.

(Lower door mechanism DD: Reel device RU: Reel unit RU1: Reel index RU111)
The reel index RU111 has a reel shaft RU1111, a detection piece RU1112, and a connection plate RU1113. The reel shaft RU1111 is rotatable about the left-right direction as a central axis in the reel index RU111. The reel shaft RU1111 can be connected and fixed to the rotating shaft of the rotating gear RR3 at the left end portion, and is rotated with the rotation of the rotating gear RR3. That is, the reel shaft RU1111 is rotated by rotating the reel RR by the motor drive unit RU113. The detection piece RU1112 is formed in the shape of a figure surrounded by an arc-shaped outer periphery and an arc-shaped inner periphery in a side view. In the present embodiment, the angles of the arcs on the outer periphery and the inner periphery of the detection piece RU1112 are set to 180 degrees, respectively, and a disk having a concentric opening in the center is cut by a line passing through the center point. ing. A disk-shaped connecting plate RU1113 is connected to the inside of the inner periphery of the detection piece RU1112 so as to be along the inner periphery. The connection plate RU1113 is provided with a circular hole in the center, and the reel shaft RU1111 is inserted and fixed. In this way, the reel index RU111 is connected to the rotary gear RR3 via the reel shaft RU1111. Therefore, the reel index RU111 and the rotary gear RR3 are each formed of separate members. It is preferable to use a highly slidable material for the rotary gear RR3. Further, it is preferable to use a material having an excellent antistatic function for the detection piece RU1112 in the reel index RU111.

As a result, as shown in FIG. 115, the detection piece RU1112 is centered on the rotation axis of the reel shaft RU1111 as the reel shaft RU1111 (reel RR) rotates, and as shown by the arrows in the figure, the circumference RUD It is designed to be rotated along. The sensor unit RU112 is arranged on the motor mounting plate RU11 so that the detection point RUP indicated by a star in the figure on the circumferential RUD is the detection position. That is, the sensor unit RU112 detects whether or not the detection piece RU1112 exists at the detection point RUP.

The relationship between the detection piece RU1112 and the detection state will be described with reference to FIG. 116. In the following, it is assumed that the rotation of the reel RR is continued. First, in step SRU1, one end of the detection piece RU1112 reaches the detection point RUP (on-edge), and the sensor unit RU112 starts detecting the detection piece RU1112. At this time, the main control board MS detects the reference position (first reference position) of the reel RR by changing the detection piece RU1112 from the undetected state to the detected state. After that, while the detection piece RU1112 continues to exist at the detection point RUP, the state in which the detection piece RU1112 is detected by the sensor unit RU112 continues (SRU2). Then, the other end of the detection piece RU1112 reaches the detection point RUP (off-edge), and the detection of the detection piece RU1112 by the sensor unit RU112 is completed (SRU3). At this time, the main control board MS detects the reference position (second reference position) of the reel RR by changing from the state in which the detection piece RU1112 is detected to the state in which it is not detected. That is, the detection piece RU1112 is continuously detected by the sensor unit RU112 from the position of the reel RR to the second reference position. After that, the state in which the detection piece RU1112 is not detected by the sensor unit RU112 continues until one end of the detection piece RU1112 reaches the detection point RUP (SRU4).

In this way, the first reference position and the second reference position are alternately detected every time the reel RR makes a half turn, and the position of the reel RR is specified based on the detected first reference position or the second reference position. Will be done. Specifically, the main control board MS is supplied from the drive control board RU114 based on the control of the main control board MS with respect to the reference position (first reference position or the second reference position) detected immediately before. The position of the reel RR is specified by adding a displacement corresponding to the number of drive pulses. In this way, the main control board MS determines whether or not the reel RR has reached the reference position (first reference position or second reference position) based on the detection of the detection piece RU1112 by the sensor unit RU112. Functions as a specific means. Further, the main control board MS and the drive control board RU114 function as reel position specifying means for specifying the degree of displacement of the reel RR from the reference position (first reference position or second reference position) due to rotation. To do.

As described above, the detection piece RU1112 is formed in the shape of a figure surrounded by the outer periphery of the arc shape and the inner periphery of the arc shape, and the angle of the arc is set to 180 degrees, respectively. Therefore, the first reference position and the second reference position on the reel RR are arranged so as to face each other on a straight line passing through the central axis of the reel RR with the central axis interposed therebetween.

In this way, by detecting that the detection piece RU1112 has not been detected by the sensor unit RU112 to the state in which the detection piece RU1112 has been detected by the sensor unit RU112, the first reference position of the reel RR can be determined. Can be identified. Further, by detecting that the detection piece RU1112 has been detected by the sensor unit RU112 to the state in which the detection piece RU1112 has not been detected by the sensor unit RU112, the second reference of the reel RR The position can be specified. In this way, it is possible to detect the reference position of the reel twice while the reel RR makes one rotation, and the same effect as when two sensors are provided can be obtained.

In addition, on the circumferential path in which the detection piece rotates, the area from the position corresponding to the first reference position to the position corresponding to the second reference position along the circumferential path is included, and corresponds to the second reference position. The shape of the detection piece is not limited as long as it has a shape that does not include a region from the position to the position corresponding to the first reference position along the circumferential path.

(Lower door mechanism DD: Reel device RU: Reel unit RU1: Sensor unit RU112)
As shown in FIG. 117, the left side surface (reel mounting side surface) of the motor mounting plate RU11 is set as the bottom surface, and the sensor portion RU112 is screwed so as to be mounted. The sensor unit RU112 has a sensor RU1121 and a pedestal member RU1122. The sensor RU1121 is a transmissive sensor that detects a detection piece RU1112 that rotates along a predetermined circumference as the reel RR rotates. The sensor RU1121 is formed in a concave cross section with a recess in the center, and is provided so that the recessing direction and the central axis of the reel shaft RU1111 of the reel index RU111 are orthogonal to each other. The sensor RU1121 is attached to the motor mounting plate RU11 via the pedestal member RU1122 so that the edge of the rotating surface of the detection piece RU1112 of the reel index RU111 passes through the recessed inner space of the sensor RU1121.

As shown in FIGS. 118 and 119, the pedestal member RU1122 has a pedestal base portion RU1122g having a longitudinal direction in the vertical direction and a pedestal pillar portion RU1122h protruding from the center of the pedestal base portion RU1122g in the left direction. There is. The pedestal base portion RU1122g has a shape in which a semicircle is extended in the vertical direction of a rectangular flat plate. The pedestal base portion RU1122g is provided with screw holes RU1122a and RU1122b penetrating in the left-right direction at the vertical position. Further, the pedestal base portion RU1122g has a rectangular portion having a concave front side, and has a protruding portion RU1122j protruding to the right at the center of the concave side edge portion. Further, the pedestal base portion RU1122g has a rectangular portion having a convex rear side, and has a protruding portion RU1122k protruding to the right in a cylindrical shape at the center of the convex side edge portion.

The pedestal pillar portion RU1122h has a plane having a longitudinal direction in the vertical direction at the left end portion, and has screw holes RU1122c and RU1122d at the vertical positions of the plane. Further, in the pedestal pillar portion RU1122h, the plane of the left end portion projects forward from the central portion in the vertical direction. The pedestal pillar portion RU1122h has protruding portions RU1122e and RU1122f that are parallel to each other in the front-rear direction and project in a cylindrical shape to the left at this protruding portion.

(Mounting of pedestal member RU1122 to motor mounting plate RU11)
The motor mounting plate RU11 has fitting holes RU11e and RU11f formed at positions corresponding to the protrusions RU1122f and RU1122g on the pedestal member RU1122. The pedestal member RU1122 is positioned with respect to the motor mounting plate RU11 by inserting the protrusions RU1122j and RU1122k into the fitting holes RU11e and RU11f, respectively. Further, in the motor mounting plate RU11, screw holes RU11c and RU11d are formed at positions corresponding to the screw holes RU1122a and RU1122b in the pedestal member RU1122. From the pedestal member RU1122 side to the right, the screw RU1124a is screwed into the screw hole RU1122a and the screw hole RU11c, and the screw RU1124b is screwed into the screw hole RU1122b and the screw hole RU11d. The pedestal member RU1122 is screwed together.

Here, the mounting position of the pedestal member RU1122 with respect to the motor mounting plate RU11 will be described with reference to FIG. 120. As shown in FIG. 120, in the motor mounting plate RU11, the screw hole RU11c and the screw hole RU11d are arranged on a straight line RUDA. The fitting hole RU11e and the fitting hole RU11f are arranged at two points on the straight line RUDB substantially perpendicular to the straight line RUDA. Further, the fitting hole RU11e and the fitting hole RU11f are located on opposite sides of the straight line RUDA as a boundary. The straight line RUDB is a straight line that passes through the center of the line segment connecting the screw hole RU11c and the screw hole RU11d. Here, the fitting hole RU11f has a longitudinal direction in the straight line RUDB direction. As a result, it is possible to allow an error in the distance between the two positioning protrusions in the pedestal member RU1122. Further, the longitudinal direction of the fitting hole RU11f is substantially perpendicular to the tangential direction of the rotation of the detection piece RU1112 at the detection position of the sensor RU1121. As a result, even if the fitting hole RU11f having a longitudinal direction is displaced from the pedestal member RU1122, it is possible to prevent the sensor RU1121 from erroneously detecting the reference position.

(Attachment of sensor RU1121 to pedestal member RU1122)
The sensor RU1121 engages with the plane of the left end of the pedestal member RU1122, and has a plane having a shape substantially equal to the plane of the left end of the pedestal member RU1122. That is, the plane located at the right end of the sensor RU1121 has a longitudinal direction in the vertical direction and projects forward from the central portion in the vertical direction. The pedestal pillar portion RU1122h is formed with fitting holes RU1124e and RU1124f which are parallel to each other in the front-rear direction at the protruding portion. Further, screw holes RU1121a and RU1121b penetrating in the left-right direction are opened at the vertical positions of the plane. The screw hole RU1121b is formed in an elongated hole shape having a longitudinal direction in the vertical direction. The fitting holes RU1124e and RU1124f are arranged at positions corresponding to the protrusions RU1122e and RU1122f of the pedestal member RU1122, and the sensor RU1121 is positioned with respect to the pedestal member RU1122 by being fitted and inserted respectively. Further, the sensor RU1121 is a pedestal member by screwing the screw RU1123a into the screw hole RU1121a and the screw hole RU1122c and screwing the screw RU1123b into the screw hole RU1121b and the screw hole RU1122d from the sensor RU1121 side to the right. The sensor RU1121 is screwed to the RU1122.

Here, the mounting position of the sensor RU1121 with respect to the pedestal member RU1122 will be described with reference to FIG. 121. As shown in FIG. 121, in the pedestal member RU1122, the screw hole RU1122c and the screw hole RU1122d are arranged on a straight line RUDC. The protruding portion RU1122e and the protruding portion RU1122f are arranged at two points on the straight line RUDD substantially perpendicular to the straight line RUDC. Further, the protruding portion RU1122e and the protruding portion RU1122f are located on the side where the sensor RU1121 detects the detection piece RU1112 rather than the linear RUDC. The straight line RUDD is a straight line that passes through the center of the line segment connecting the screw hole RU1122c and the screw hole RU1122d. Here, the screw hole RU1122b of the sensor RU1121 screwed together with the screw hole RU1122d has a longitudinal direction in the straight line RUDC direction. As a result, it is possible to allow an error in the distance between the two screwed portions in the sensor RU1121.

(Upper door mechanism DU)
As shown in FIG. 122, the cabinet G (corresponding to the housing) rotatably supports the upper door mechanism DU (corresponding to the door) at the left end portion. The upper door mechanism DU and the cabinet G are connected by an upper hinge mechanism UH, and the upper hinge mechanism UH is a slide member UH1 attached to the left end portion of the upper door mechanism UD as shown in FIGS. 123 and 124. And a shaft member UH2 attached to the left end of the upper space of the cabinet G.

As shown in FIG. 124, a single plate of the slide member UH1 is bent at three points to form a groove UH11. The groove UH11 is provided with a bearing mechanism UH12, a positioning portion UH14, an engaging convex portion UH15, a bearing mechanism UH13, and an engaging convex portion UH16 from above (U direction).

The bearing mechanisms UH12 and UH13 have a rectangular parallelepiped shape and are attached to the slide member UH1 by screws. Bearing portions UH121 and UH131 are formed on the bottom of the bearing mechanisms UH12 and UH13 so as to be polymerized and engaged with the shaft portions UH21 and UH22 described later. The bearing portions UH121 and UH131 are opened in a substantially circular shape at the bottom of the bearing mechanisms UH12 and UH13, and have a shape in which the oral cavity is reduced upward from the peripheral edge of the opening. The direction in which the center of the openings of the bearing portions UH121 and UH131 is directed upward along the groove UH11 is defined as the axis UH121A.

The positioning portion UH14 has a curved shape so that the shaft portion UH21 can be positioned with respect to the bearing portion UH121 in contact with the curved surface of the support portion UH25 of the shaft member UH2, which will be described later.

The engaging protrusions UH15 and UH16 have a thin plate shape that protrudes horizontally from the groove UH11. The engaging protrusions UH15 and UH16 play a role of engaging with the engaging recesses UH23 and UH24 described later.

The shaft member UH2 is formed by bending a single plate. The shaft member UH2 includes a shaft portion UH21 protruding from the upper surface of the support portion UH25, a support portion UH25, an engaging recess UH23, a shaft portion UH22 protruding from the upper surface of the support portion UH26, and a support portion UH26. , The engaging recess UH24 is provided.

The shaft portions UH21 and UH22 have a conical shape. The shaft portions UH21 and UH22 serve to polymerize and engage with the bearing portions UH121 and UH131.

The support portions UH25 and UH26 are provided on the shaft member UH2, and the shaft portions UH21 and UH22 are provided on the upper surface thereof. Further, the side surface of the support portion UH25 has a curved shape, and by contacting the curved surface of the positioning portion UH14, the shaft portion UH21 can be positioned with respect to the bearing portion UH121.

The engaging plates UH27 and UH28 extending from the side surfaces of the support portions UH25 and UH26 are formed with engaging recesses UH23 and UH24 that are opened horizontally. The engaging recesses UH23 and UH24 play a role of engaging with the engaging protrusions UH15 and UH16.

Then, the bearing portions UH121 and UH131 of the slide member UH1 of the upper door mechanism DU are slid and overlapped and engaged with the shaft portions UH21 and UH22 of the shaft member UH2 of the cabinet G so as to cover them from above to below. The upper door mechanism DU can be attached to the cabinet G. At this time, it is desirable that the upper door mechanism DU be installed in a state of being opened at 90 ° with respect to the cabinet G so that the engaging convex portions UH15 / UH16 and the engaging concave portions UH23 / UH24 do not engage with each other.

Here, in the present embodiment, the engaging protrusions UH15 and UH16 project to the cabinet G side, and the protruding height is such that the upper door mechanism DU is opened at 60 ° with respect to the cabinet G (FIG. (See 122), which is the height at which the engaging protrusions UH15 / UH16 are disengaged from the engaging recesses UH23 / UH24. As a result, when the upper door mechanism DU is opened at 60 ° with respect to the cabinet G, the bearing portions UH121 and UH131 of the slide member UH1 of the upper door mechanism DU are aligned with the shaft portion UH21 of the shaft member UH2 of the cabinet G. By sliding upward of UH121A, the upper door mechanism DU can be slid upward and removed from the cabinet G in a state where the restrictions on the engaging recesses UH23 / UH24 of the engaging convex portions UH15 / UH16 are released. Will be.

If the protruding height of the engaging convex portions UH15 / UH16 is lower than that of the present embodiment, the upper door mechanism DU can be set at an angle smaller than 60 ° with respect to the cabinet G of the engaging convex portions UH15 / UH16. The restrictions on the engaging recesses UH23 and UH24 can be released, and the upper door mechanism DU can be slid upward and removed from the cabinet G. On the other hand, if the protruding height of the engaging convex portions UH15 / UH16 is made higher than that of the present embodiment, the upper door mechanism DU can be set at an angle larger than 60 ° with respect to the cabinet G of the engaging convex portions UH15 / UH16. The restrictions on the engaging recesses UH23 and UH24 can be released, and the upper door mechanism DU can be slid upward and removed from the cabinet G.

According to the above configuration, the engaging protrusions UH15 / UH16 engage with the engaging recesses UH23 / UH24 until the upper door mechanism DU opens at a predetermined angle (60 ° in this embodiment) with respect to the cabinet G. , The bearing portions UH121 and UH131 are restricted from sliding along the axis UH121A. As a result, it is possible to restrict the polymerization of the shaft portions UH21 / UH22 and the bearing portions UH121 / UH131 from being released, and to lock the upper door mechanism DU from being removed from the cabinet G.
On the other hand, when the upper door mechanism DU opens at a predetermined angle or more with respect to the cabinet G, the engaging protrusions UH15 / UH16 are disengaged from the engaging recesses UH23 / UH24, and the bearing portions UH121 / UH131 become the axis UH121A. It will be possible to slide along. As a result, the polymerization of the shaft portions UH21 / UH22 and the bearing portions UH121 / UH131 is released, and the upper door mechanism DU can be removed from the cabinet G.
That is, the upper door mechanism DU can be removed from the cabinet G only when the upper door mechanism DU is opened at a predetermined angle or more with respect to the cabinet G.
Further, the upper door mechanism DU can be removed from the cabinet G without opening the upper door mechanism DU to the open state (opened at 90 °).

As shown in FIG. 125, the upper door mechanism UD includes a mechanism for emitting light in each region on the upper side and the left and right sides of the upper display window UD1 for transmitting the image of the display unit A to the front. Specifically, the top panel mechanism HA arranged above the upper display window UD1, the upper left panel mechanism HB arranged in the upper left direction of the upper display window UD1, and the upper right arranged in the upper right direction of the upper display window UD1. The panel mechanism HC, the left horizontal panel mechanism HD arranged in the upper left direction of the upper display window UD1, the right horizontal panel mechanism HE arranged in the upper right direction of the upper display window UD1, and the left direction of the upper display window UD1. It has a left front panel mechanism HF arranged at the lower part and a right front panel mechanism HG arranged at the lower right side of the upper display window UD1. Details of each panel mechanism HA / HB / HC / HD / HE / HF / HG will be described later.

As shown in FIG. 126, it has a panel base HH that forms the skeleton of the upper door mechanism UD. The above-mentioned panel mechanisms HA, HB, HC, HD, HE, HF, and HG are provided on the front side of the panel base HH. On the other hand, on the back surface side of the panel base HH, an upper door key receiving member HK, an upper door hinge member HM, and a center frame HL are provided. The upper door key receiving member HK is screwed to the right side of the panel base HH. The upper door hinge member HM is screwed to the left side of the panel base HH. The center frame HL is arranged horizontally, and the right end portion and the left end portion are connected to the lower end portions of the upper door key receiving member HK and the upper door hinge member HM, respectively. A transparent panel UD11 is provided on the upper door key receiving member HK, the upper door hinge member HM, and the center frame HL. The transparent panel UD11 can be attached from the rear by screwing.

(Upper door mechanism UD: Top panel mechanism HA: Decorative unit HA1)
As shown in FIG. 127, the top panel mechanism HA has a decorative unit HA1 that decorates the upper part of the upper door mechanism UD while emitting light. The decorative unit HA1 forms a decorative convex portion protruding forward from the upper display window UD1. The decorative unit HA1 includes a top lens light guide plate HA14 having a seamless structure that diffuses light and uniformly emits it from the surface of the decorative convex portion. As a result, when a plurality of parts are joined to form a light guide plate of the decorative unit HA1, the load is concentrated on the joint portion of the light guide pieces between the parts, but the top lens light guide plate HA14 having a seamless structure is used. If so, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the load is concentrated on a part. As a result, the decorative convex portion formed by the decorative unit HA1 provided with the top lens light guide plate HA14 having a seamless structure has a large rigidity and strength as a whole, so that an external force is applied from a player or the like located in front of the game machine. Even if it is done, it is hard to be deformed or damaged.

The rear end of the decorative unit HA1 connected to the panel base HH substantially matches the width of the upper door mechanism UD in the left-right direction, and the width of the panel base HH in the left-right direction is widened from both ends in the left-right direction to the front end side. It is reduced and formed in a shape with an apex at the center of the front end. That is, the decoration unit HA1 has a substantially isosceles triangle shape with the panel base HH side as the base.

As a result, even if the bending moment increases as the decorative unit HA1 approaches the front end portion away from the panel base HH, the width in the left-right direction on the front end portion side is reduced to reduce the weight, thereby increasing the rigidity and rigidity. The strength is increased. As a result, the decorative unit HA1 has a large rigidity and strength in the front region, so that it is unlikely to be deformed or damaged even when an external force is applied due to contact with a player located in front of the decorative unit HA1.

The decoration unit HA1 has a top lens cover HA11, a top design seat cover HA12, a design sheet HA13, a top lens light guide plate HA14, and a top lens light guide plate base HA15 arranged in this order from the upper side. Further, the decoration unit HA1 has a top lens left LED substrate HA17 and a top lens right LED substrate HA18. The top lens left LED substrate HA17 and the top lens right LED substrate HA18 are arranged on the left side portion and the right side portion at the rear end portion of the decoration unit HA1, respectively. The top lens left LED substrate HA17 and the top lens right LED substrate HA18 have a plurality of LEDHA17a / HA18a at equal intervals in the left-right direction, and are installed so as to emit light forward from these LEDHA17a / HA18a. ..

The top lens cover HA11 constitutes the upper surface wall of the decorative unit HA1 and is formed so as to be able to transmit light. The top lens light guide plate HA14 is formed so as to take in light from the top lens left LED substrate HA17 and the top lens right LED substrate HA18 from the rear end surface and uniformly emit the light from the front end surface, and tops the design of the design sheet HA13. It is designed to be displayed on the top lens cover HA11 via the design sheet cover HA12. The top lens light guide plate base HA15 constitutes the lower surface wall of the decorative unit HA1 and is formed so as not to transmit light.

In the decorative unit HA1, a hollow portion is formed by the top lens light guide plate base HA15 and the top lens cover HA11, and the top design seat cover HA12, the design sheet HA13, and the top lens light guide plate HA14 are housed in the hollow portion. As a result, the top lens light guide plate base HA15, the top lens cover HA11, the top lens light guide plate HA14, and the like are simply laminated to form a plate, which has a higher rigidity with a large moment of inertia of area. ..

Further, an opening HA15a is formed in the top lens light guide plate base HA15. The opening HA15a is arranged to face the LED substrate HA411 in the top lens described later. The opening HA15a is provided with the LED substrate hiding member HA16 in the top lens, and the LED substrate hiding member HA16 in the top lens functions as a reflector of the LED substrate HA411 in the top lens and opens and closes the opening HA15a. It functions as a window. The LED substrate hiding member HA16 in the top lens may be formed so as to transmit a part of the light from the LED substrate HA411 in the top lens.

As shown in FIG. 128, the decorative unit HA1 has a front region curved downward. As a result, the decorative unit HA1 transmits light to the front upper side and the front side of the upper door mechanism UD so that the design can be visually recognized. Further, the lower surface of the top lens light guide plate HA14 is a reflector that reflects light. As a result, in the decorative unit HA1, when the light from the top lens left LED substrate HA17 and the top lens right LED substrate HA18 travels in the downwardly curved front region, a part of the light is reflected by the reflector on the back surface. Is made possible to change diagonally downward on the front side.

An irradiation light device B is arranged behind the decoration unit HA1. Here, since the decoration unit HA1 is projected forward from behind the decoration unit HA1, a large space is secured by the amount of protrusion. As a result, the decoration unit HA1 can expand the degree of freedom in arranging the mirrors of the light-reflecting type irradiation light device B by the above-mentioned mirror provided in a large space. Further, since the decorative unit HA1 has high rigidity and strength, it is possible to sufficiently protect the irradiation light device B.

As shown in FIG. 129, the top lens cover HA11 in the decorative unit HA1 is supported by the decorative unit support mechanism HI in which the downwardly curved front region is arranged in the horizontal direction. The decorative unit support mechanism HI includes a horizontally projecting portion HA11a projecting horizontally from the back surface of the top lens cover HA11, a horizontally projecting portion HH1 projecting horizontally from the front surface of the panel base HH to the front, and a horizontally projecting portion HH1. It has a plurality of connecting screws HH2 in which the portions HA11a and HH1 are screwed together in the left-right direction.

As a result, in the decorative unit HA1, the back surface of the front side region curved downward is connected to the panel base HH via the horizontally arranged decorative unit support mechanism HI, so that the back surface of the front side region is the decorative unit support mechanism. It will be supported horizontally by HI. Therefore, the decorative unit HA1 has a structure in which the front region has a large rigidity and strength in the front-rear direction.

(Upper door mechanism UD: Top panel mechanism HA: Left end light emitting mechanism HA2, Right end light emitting mechanism HA3)
As shown in FIG. 130, the top panel mechanism HA includes a left end light emitting mechanism HA2 that causes the left end region of the upper door mechanism UD to emit light in a planar manner, and a right end light emitting mechanism HA3 that causes the right end region of the upper door mechanism UD to emit light in a planar manner. have. Specifically, the leftmost light emitting mechanism HA2 is arranged on the left rear side of the upper left speaker device UD2. The left end light emitting mechanism HA2 has a left LED substrate HA21. The left LED substrate HA21 is set so that the substrate surface faces the front side. Two LED HA22s are arranged on the substrate surface of the left LED substrate HA21. These LEDHA22s are set to emit light in the normal direction of the substrate surface, and emit light at a light intensity equal to or higher than a predetermined value in the left region of the upper left speaker device UD2 (the left end region of the upper door mechanism UD). It has become.

On the other hand, the right end light emitting mechanism HA3 is arranged on the right rear side of the upper right speaker device UD3. The right end light emitting mechanism HA3 has a right LED substrate HA31. The right LED substrate HA31 is set so that the substrate surface faces the front side. Two LEDHA32s are arranged on the substrate surface of the right LED substrate HA31. These LEDHA32s are set to emit light in the normal direction of the substrate surface, and emit light at a light intensity equal to or higher than a predetermined value in the area on the right side of the upper right speaker device UD3 (the right end area of the upper door mechanism UD). It has become.

(Upper door mechanism UD: Top panel mechanism HA: Central light emitting mechanism HA4)
The top panel mechanism HA further has a central light emitting mechanism HA4. The central light emitting mechanism HA4 is arranged on the center side of the upper door mechanism UD between the left end light emitting mechanism HA2 and the right end light emitting mechanism HA3. The central light emitting mechanism HA4 is configured to emit light in a region where it is difficult for the left end light emitting mechanism HA2 and the right end light emitting mechanism HA3 to emit light at a light intensity equal to or higher than a predetermined value.

Specifically, the central light emitting mechanism HA4 has a first illumination mechanism HA41 that emits light from the left peripheral region on the left end region side and a right peripheral region on the right end region side, and a second illumination mechanism that emits light from the front end portion of the decoration unit HA1. It has a HA42 and a third illumination mechanism HA43 that emits light from the lower side of the decoration unit HA1. In the present embodiment, the configuration in which the first illumination mechanism HA41 emits light in both the left peripheral region on the left end region side and the right peripheral region on the right end region side will be described, but the present invention is not limited to this. The first illumination mechanism HA41 may be configured to emit light at least one of the left peripheral region on the left end region side and the right peripheral region on the right end region side.

(Upper door mechanism UD: Top panel mechanism HA: Central light emitting mechanism HA4: First illumination mechanism HA41)
As shown in FIG. 131, the first illumination mechanism HA41 has the LED substrate HA411 in the top lens arranged below the substantially central portion of the decoration unit HA1. The central light emitting mechanism HA4 guides the light emitted from the LED substrate HA411 in the top lens to the left peripheral region and the right peripheral region by the light guide mechanism, so that it is difficult for the left end light emitting mechanism HA2 and the right end light emitting mechanism HA3 to guide the light. Even in the region, it is configured so that it can emit light with a light intensity equal to or higher than a predetermined value. That is, the first illumination mechanism HA41 is included in the LEDHA4111, which is a plurality of upper light sources provided on the upper surface of the LED substrate HA411 in the top lens, and in the top lens arranged so as to cover the lower surface and the side surface of the LED substrate HA411 in the top lens. It has a reflector HA412 and. The upper surface of the LED substrate HA411 in the top lens is covered with the LED substrate hiding member HA16 in the top lens of the decorative unit HA1 of FIG. 127, and the LED substrate hiding member HA16 in the top lens reflects the light of the LED HA4111. Is functioning as.

On the upper surface of the LED substrate HA411 in the top lens, a translucent left light guide lens HA413 and a translucent right light guide lens that guide the light from the LED HA4111 to the left and right upper light guide regions to emit light in a planar manner. An upper light guide mechanism having a configuration in which the HA 414 and the HA 414 are arranged symmetrically with respect to the LED substrate HA411 in the top lens is provided. Specifically, the right end portion of the horizontally arranged left light guide lens HA413 is arranged on the upper surface of the left end portion of the LED substrate HA411 in the top lens, and the light of the LED HA4111 can be incident from the end surface of the right end portion. Has been done. The left end of the left light guide lens HA413 is located above the upper left speaker device UD2, and by emitting light upward from the middle to the left end, the upper light guide on the center side from the left end region of the upper door mechanism UD. The area is designed to emit light.

On the other hand, the left end portion of the horizontally arranged right light guide lens HA414 is arranged on the upper surface of the right end portion of the LED substrate HA411 in the top lens, and the light of the LED HA4111 can be incident from the end surface of the left end portion. The right end of the right light guide lens HA414 is located above the upper right speaker device UD3, and by emitting light upward from the middle to the right end, the area from the right end to the center of the upper door mechanism UD (upper side). The light guide region) is made to emit light.

As shown in FIG. 132, a lower light guide mechanism is provided on the lower surface of the LED substrate HA411 in the top lens to guide the light from the lower light source to the lower light guide region and emit it in a planar manner. .. Specifically, a plurality of LEDHA4112s serving as lower light sources are provided on the lower surface of the LED substrate HA411 in the top lens. The left end of the horizontally arranged translucent right downlight lens HA415 is arranged on the lower surface of the right end of the LED substrate HA411 in the top lens, and the light of the LED HA4112 can be incident from the end surface of the left end. There is. The right end of the right downlight lens HA415 is located above the upper right speaker device UD3, and by emitting light downward from the middle to the right end, the lower guide from the left end region of the upper door mechanism UD to the center side. It is designed to emit light in the light region. That is, the right downlight lens HA415 illuminates the periphery of the lower light guide region HA5d (see FIG. 125), which is the front region of the upper right speaker device UD3 of the panel base HH, and is around the non-transmissive lower light guide region HA5d. Light is emitted when the member of the above functions as a reflector. Further, the lower light guide mechanism has a left downlight lens (not shown) having the same configuration as the right downlight lens HA415. The left downlight lens and the right downlight lens HA415 are arranged symmetrically with respect to the LED substrate HA411 in the top lens.

(Upper door mechanism UD: Top panel mechanism HA: Central light emitting mechanism HA4: Second illumination mechanism HA42)
As shown in FIG. 131, the second illumination mechanism HA42 has an LED substrate HA421 on the central lens arranged below the LED substrate HA411 in the top lens. A plurality of LEDHA4211s are provided on the upper surface of the LEDHA421 on the central lens. The lower surface of the LEDHA4211 is covered with the central lens reflector HA422.

As shown in FIG. 133, the upper surface of the LED substrate HA421 on the central lens is covered with the top lens light guide plate base HA15. Further, a translucent center lens A423 is arranged below the LED substrate HA421 on the center lens. The center lens A423 is provided so that the upper end portion of the LED substrate HA421 on the center lens is exposed from the gap between the top lens light guide plate base HA15 and the panel base HH, and the light of the LED HA4211 is incident from the end surface of the upper end portion. It emits light from the lower end surface formed and arranged along the lower end of the top lens light guide plate base HA15.

(Upper door mechanism UD: Top panel mechanism HA: Central light emitting mechanism HA4: Third illumination mechanism HA43)
The third illumination mechanism HA43 has a lower center LED substrate HA431 arranged behind the LED substrate HA421 on the center lens. The lower center LED substrate HA431 is provided so that the normal direction of the front surface substantially coincides with the front direction. A plurality of LED HA4311s are provided on the front surface of the lower center LED substrate HA431. A translucent lower center lens HA432 is arranged in front of the lower center LED substrate HA431. The lower center lens HA432 is provided below the panel base HH so that the light of the LED HA4311 emits light in the lower region of the decorative unit HA1.

(Upper door mechanism UD: left horizontal panel mechanism HD, right horizontal panel mechanism HE, left front panel mechanism HF, right front panel mechanism HG)
Hereinafter, a mechanism in which the left horizontal panel mechanism HD and the left front panel mechanism HF are integrated will be referred to as a left panel mechanism HJ, and a mechanism in which the right horizontal panel mechanism HE and the right front panel mechanism HG are integrated will be referred to as a right panel mechanism HK. The left panel mechanism HJ and the right panel mechanism HK function as light emitting units arranged on the side of the front surface of the screen mechanism D as an effect device. Since the left panel mechanism HJ and the right panel mechanism K are symmetrically configured with the screen mechanism D in between, only the left panel mechanism HJ will be described.

As shown in FIGS. 134 and 135, the left panel mechanism HJ includes a partition mechanism HJ2 that functions as a partition member, an upper left side lens HJ3 that functions as a side translucent member, and a lower left lens HJ4 that functions as a front translucent member. It has an inner light guide member HJ5. The left panel mechanism HJ has a left LED substrate HJ1 as a light source device described later, and light from the left LED substrate HJ1 is emitted to the outside from the upper left side lens HJ3, the lower left lens HJ4, and the left light guide plate HJ5. It is configured to be.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 136 and 137, the left panel mechanism HJ includes an upper left side lens HJ3, a lower left lens HJ4, a partition plate HJ21 functioning as a partition mechanism HJ2, a left LED substrate case HJ22, and a left LED. It has a substrate HJ1, a left light guide plate HJ51 that functions as an inner light guide member HJ5, and a left LED substrate cover HJ52.

The left LED substrate HJ1 is set so that the normal direction of the substrate surface substantially coincides with the front direction. Four LEDHJ11s and six LEDHJ12s are arranged on the front surface of the left LED substrate HJ1. These LEDHJ11 and LEDHJ12 are set to emit light in the normal direction (forward direction) of the substrate surface. Further, six LEDHJ13s are arranged on the surface of the left LED substrate HJ1 on the opposite side to the surface on which the LEDsHJ11 and LEDHJ12 are arranged. These LEDHJ13s are set to emit light in the normal direction (rear direction) of the substrate surface.

The left LED substrate HJ1 is formed in a flat plate shape having a longitudinal direction in the vertical direction, and the upper end region is formed wide in the right direction. The LEDHJ12s are arranged in a row substantially evenly from the upper end to the center along the left edge portion in the longitudinal direction. Further, in the LEDHJ11, two sets are arranged in a row with a wider interval than the set on a straight line inclined from the central portion to the lower left portion. Further, the LEDHJ13s are arranged in a row substantially evenly from the upper end to the lower end of the central region so as to be along the right edge of the surface opposite to the LEDHJ11 and the LEDHJ12.

The left LED substrate case HJ22 is a case for accommodating the left LED substrate HJ1 having a front view formed in substantially the same shape as the left LED substrate HJ1 from the front side. In the left LED substrate case HJ22, through holes HJ221 for passing light from the LEDHJ11 in the forward direction are formed at positions corresponding to the respective LEDHJ11s. Further, in the left LED substrate case HJ22, through holes HJ222 for passing light from the LEDHJ12 in the forward direction are formed at positions corresponding to the respective LEDHJ12s. That is, the four through holes HJ221 are arranged in a straight line, and the six through holes HJ222 are arranged in a straight line. The plane region HJ22a in which the four through holes HJ221 are formed and the plane region HJ22b in which the six through holes HJ222 are formed are formed by a bending line extending from the center left end to the upper end of the surface of the left LED substrate case HJ22. It is classified. The plane region HJ22a is set higher in the front direction than the plane region HJ22b, and a step HJ22c is formed.

As shown in FIG. 138, the partition plate HJ21 has a chevron shape having an apex at the front end in a side view. Specifically, the partition plate HJ21 is formed in a substantially pyramidal shape with the plane region HJ22b as the bottom surface. The partition plate HJ21 has an open bottom surface on the plane region HJ22b side and a left side surface. Further, the upper wall surface of the partition plate HJ21 is formed so as to reach the apex with a downward inclination while the width in the left-right direction is reduced forward from the upper edge of the plane region HJ22b. Further, the right wall surface of the partition plate HJ21 is formed so as to reach the apex with an inclination to the left while the width in the vertical direction is reduced forward. As described above, the right side wall surface of the partition plate HJ21 is formed so as to extend from the step HJ22c. That is, the partition plate HJ21 and the step HJ22c can classify the light emitted from the left LED substrate HJ1 in the forward direction into the LEDHJ11 and the LEDHJ12, respectively.

The upper left side lens HJ3 is formed in a substantially triangular flat plate shape whose peripheral shape substantially coincides with the open left side surface of the partition plate HJ21. That is, the partition plate HJ21, the upper left side lens HJ3, and the left LED substrate HJ1 form an internal space HJ23 in which light is irradiated from the LEDHJ12. The upper left side lens HJ3 is made of a material capable of transmitting light, and forms a part of the left side surface of the housing 2.

As shown in FIG. 139, the right side wall surface of the partition plate HJ21 exists in the front direction of the LEDHJ12. Therefore, a part of the light emitted from the LEDHJ12 is reflected by the partition plate HJ21. Since the right wall surface of the partition plate HJ21 has an inclination, it is reflected by light having a component at least in the left direction. In this way, the light reflected by the partition plate HJ21 reaches the upper left side lens HJ3. The upper left side lens HJ3 is decorated so that the inner wall surface is arranged in a matrix of quadrangular pyramids having vertices inside. As a result, the light that reaches the upper left side lens HJ3 is diffusely refracted and transmitted to the outside. As described above, the partition mechanism HJ2 having the partition plate HJ21 and the step HJ22c can divide the light in the front direction into two and guide the light divided into one in the side direction. Further, the upper left side lens HJ3 can transmit the light divided into one side guided by the partition structure HJ2. The partition plate HJ21 is preferably white in order to increase the reflectance, but is not limited thereto.

The lower left lens HJ4 is arranged in front of the left LED substrate case HJ22 so as to form an internal space HJ41 with the plane region HJ22a of the left LED substrate case HJ22. The lower left lens HJ4 is made of a translucent material and forms a part of the left side surface of the housing 2.

As shown in FIG. 139, the front side wall surface of the lower left lens HJ4 exists in the front direction of the LEDHJ11. Therefore, the light emitted from the LEDHJ11 reaches the lower left lens HJ4. The lower left lens HJ4 is decorated with a zigzag shape on the inner wall surface and a side view cross section. As a result, the light that reaches the lower left lens HJ4 is diffusely refracted and transmitted to the outside. In this way, the lower left lens HJ4 can transmit the light divided into the other by the partition structure HJ2. The decorative structure of the inner wall surface of the upper left side lens HJ3 and the lower left lens HJ4 is not limited to this, and any incident light may be diffusely refracted and emitted to the outside.

As shown in FIG. 140, the left light guide plate HJ51 has a light incident portion HJ511, an optical path portion HJ512, and a light emitting portion HJ513. The left light guide plate HJ51 is made of a translucent material. The light incident portion HJ511 is formed in a flat plate shape having a longitudinal direction in the vertical direction. The light incident portion HJ511 has two recesses at the top and bottom, and a protrusion HJ511a having a convex cross section extending in the vertical direction is provided at the center of each of the recesses in the left-right direction. Further, the light incident portion HJ511 has a through hole HJ511b extending adjacent to the left side of the protruding portion HJ511a. The left LED substrate cover HJ52 has a shape that engages with the rear side surface of the light incident portion HJ511 of the left light guide plate HJ51. The left LED substrate cover HJ52 has a protruding portion HJ52a having a convex cross section extending in the vertical direction at the center in the horizontal direction, and is fitted into the through hole HJ511b. The left LED substrate cover HJ52 is made of a non-transmissive material.

The protruding portion HJ511a is provided so as to face the LEDHJ13 arranged on the left LED substrate HJ1. The light from the LED HJ 13 is incident from the front side of the protrusion HJ511a. The left light guide plate HJ51 has an inclined surface HJ511c whose incident surface is inclined to the right by approximately 45 degrees in the traveling direction of the incident light on the protrusion HJ511a. Since the inclined surface HJ511c is arranged so as to be in contact with the left LED substrate cover HJ52, the light incident on the protruding portion HJ511a is reflected by the inclined surface HJ511c and then travels to the right. The light traveling to the right passes through the optical path portion HJ512 and reaches the light emitting portion HJ513. The optical path portion HJ512 is formed so as to be bent backward from the right end portion of the light incident portion HJ511. The optical path portion HJ512 is set so that the normal direction is the front right direction. The light emitting portion HJ513 is formed so as to be bent from the right end portion of the optical path portion HJ512. The light emitting unit HJ513 is set so that the normal direction is the front right direction. Further, the light emitting portion HJ513 is decorated with a zigzag shape in the front view cross section at the right end portion. As a result, the light that reaches the right end of the light emitting unit HJ513 is diffusely refracted and irradiated to the front surface of the screen mechanism D or the like.

(Upper door mechanism UD: upper left panel mechanism HB, upper right panel mechanism HC)
Hereinafter, since the upper left panel mechanism HB and the upper right panel mechanism HC are symmetrically configured with the upper left panel mechanism HC in between, only the upper left panel mechanism HB will be described.

As shown in FIG. 141, the upper left panel mechanism HB is fitted into a substantially triangular gap formed between the upper left end portion of the panel base HH and the left rear end portion of the top lens cover HA11 of the top panel mechanism HA. Is placed in. The upper left panel mechanism HB has a substantially right-angled triangular shape having a right angle to the left front corner when viewed from above, and has an upper surface portion HB1 whose width in the left-right direction is expanded from the rear end to the front end. A tight screw HH4 can be screwed from the rear to the upper left end of the panel base HH. The tight screw HH4 projects to the front of the panel base HH and can be fitted to the upper left panel mechanism HB.

As shown in FIG. 142, the upper left panel mechanism HB has a fitting portion HB11 at the rear end portion, and the tight screw HH4 is fitted. Further, the upper left panel mechanism HB has a frame portion HB2 formed so as to be lowered downward from the left front end portion. The frame portion HB2 has a regulating portion HB21 at the lower end portion that projects rearward and bends downward. When the upper left panel mechanism HB is attached to the panel base HH, the regulating portion HB 21 extends to the rear position of the fitting portion HH3 of the panel base HH that engages with the frame portion HB2. That is, since the restricting portion HB21 exists at the rear position of the fitting portion HH3, the movement in the forward direction is restricted. The inner wall surface of the frame portion HB2 is decorated so that triangular pyramids protruding inward are arranged, and the light from the light source from the rear can be diffusely refracted.

As shown in FIGS. 143 and 144, the upper left panel mechanism HB has locking pieces HB12, HB13, and HB14. The locking pieces HB12, HB13, and HB14 are arranged at a position adjacent to the top lens cover HA11 on the front side of the fitting portion HH3, and are in a direction different from the fitting direction of the fitting portion HB11, and from the arrangement location to the top lens cover HA11. It is formed so as to protrude in the direction toward which it is directed. Specifically, the locking piece HB 12 is located in the rear end region of the right edge portion of the fitting portion HB 11 and projects in the right direction substantially perpendicular to the fitting direction of the fitting portion HB 11. The locking piece HB 13 is located substantially in the center of the right edge of the fitting portion HB11, and protrudes in the right rear direction at an angle of approximately 45 degrees with the fitting direction of the fitting portion HB11. The locking piece HB14 is located at the front end of the right edge of the fitting portion HB11 and projects in the right direction substantially perpendicular to the fitting direction of the fitting portion HB11. The locking pieces HB12, HB13, and HB14 are projected from a position below the outer surface of the upper surface portion HB1.

On the other hand, the top lens cover HA11 is formed with notches HA111, HA112, and HA113 having a shape engaged with the locking pieces HB12, HB13, and HB14. The notches HA111, HA112, and HA113 are notches formed on the inner wall surface of the top lens cover HA11. The locking pieces HB12, HB13, and HB14 are engaged with the notches HA111, HA112, and HA113 so as to be adjacent to the top lens cover HA11, and the tight screw HH4 is fitted into the fitting portion HB11 via the panel base HH. By combining them, the upper left panel mechanism HB is restricted from moving in the horizontal direction by the panel base HH and the top lens cover HA11. Further, the regulation unit HB21 restricts the forward movement of the upper left panel mechanism HB.

The gaming machine 1 according to the embodiment of the present invention has been described above. The gaming machine 1 according to the above-described embodiment has the following features.
(1-1) A drive mechanism (front screen drive mechanism E2) for driving a display means (front screen mechanism E1) having a display surface capable of displaying an image projected by the projection means (projector mechanism B2) is provided.
The drive mechanism (front screen drive mechanism E2) is
An arm (crank member E22) connected to the display means (front screen mechanism E1) and
A power source is provided to a pin receiving portion (slide groove E22b) formed in the arm (crank member E22) via a pin (slide member E26) that can move inside the pin receiving portion (slide groove E22b). A driving force transmission mechanism (crank gear E21) for transmitting the driving force generated from the (drive motor E25) is provided.
In the arm (crank member E22), the pin (slide member E26) moves inside the pin receiving portion (slide groove E22b), so that the pin receiving portion (slide groove) passes through the pin (slide member E26). While the display means (front screen mechanism E1) operates in conjunction with the transmission of the driving force to the E22b), the display means (front screen mechanism E1) moves to the first position (front standby) in conjunction with the operation of the arm (crank member E22). Operate between the position) and the second position (front exposed position),
When the display means (front screen mechanism E1) starts operating from the first position (front standby position) to the second position (front exposure position), the pin receiving portion (slide groove E22b) The driving force is not transmitted to the pin receiving portion (slide groove E22b) via the pin (slide member E26), and the display means (front screen mechanism E1) moves from the second position (front exposure position). It is formed along the direction in which the driving force is not transmitted to the pin receiving portion (slide groove E22b) via the pin (slide member E26) when the operation is started toward the first position (front standby position). There is.

(1-2) A drive mechanism (front screen drive mechanism E2) for driving a display means (front screen mechanism E1) having a display surface capable of displaying an image projected by the projection means (projector mechanism B2) is provided.
The drive mechanism (front screen drive mechanism E2) is
An arm (crank member E22) connected to the display means (front screen mechanism E1) and
A motor (slide member E26) is provided via a slide member (slide member E26) that can slide inside the slide groove (slide groove E22b) with respect to the slide groove (slide groove E22b) formed in the arm (crank member E22). It is equipped with a gear (crank gear E21) that transmits the driving force generated from the drive motor E25).
In the arm (crank member E22), the slide member (slide member E26) slides inside the slide groove (slide groove E22b), whereby the slide groove (slide) is passed through the slide member (slide member E26). The display means (front screen mechanism E1) operates in conjunction with the transmission of the driving force to the groove E22b), while the display means (front screen mechanism E1) operates in conjunction with the operation of the arm (crank member E22) at the first position (front). Operates between the standby position) and the second position (front exposed position),
The slide groove (slide groove E22b) is at a time when the display means (front screen mechanism E1) starts operating from the first position (front standby position) to the second position (front exposure position). The movement direction of the slide member (slide member E26) and the display means (front screen mechanism E1) operate from the second position (front exposure position) to the first position (front standby position). The groove wall surface (groove wall surface E22b1) is formed so as to be substantially parallel to the moving direction of the slide member (slide member E26) at the time of starting.

According to the gaming machine 1 according to the above-described embodiment, the slide groove E22b includes the movement direction of the slide member E26 at the time when the front screen mechanism E1 starts operating from the front standby position to the front exposure position, and the front screen. The groove wall surface E22b1 is formed so as to be substantially parallel to the moving direction of the slide member E26 at the time when the mechanism E1 starts operating from the front exposed position to the front standby position. Therefore, when the front screen mechanism E1 starts operating from the front standby position to the front exposed position, the driving force is not transmitted to the slide groove E22b via the slide member E26, and the front screen mechanism E1 moves from the front exposed position to the front. The driving force is not transmitted to the slide groove E22b via the slide member when the operation is started toward the standby position.

Therefore, when the front screen mechanism E1 starts the operation from the front standby position to the front exposed position, and when the front screen mechanism E1 starts the operation from the front exposed position to the front standby position, the front screen mechanism E1 The movement of can be made gentle. As a result, the front screen mechanism E1 can be driven smoothly, and the load on the front screen mechanism E1 and the drive motor E25 can be reduced. As a result, it is possible to prevent the front screen mechanism E1 and the drive motor E25 from being damaged. Further, since the front screen mechanism E1 can be driven smoothly without devising the pulse output, it is not necessary to perform complicated excitation control, and the control load related to the driving of the front screen mechanism E1 is suppressed to a low level. be able to.

Further, when it is necessary to perform excitation control in order to drive the front screen mechanism E1 smoothly, it is necessary to change the design of the excitation control when the size of the front screen mechanism E1 is changed. It takes time and effort. In this regard, according to the gaming machine 1 according to the above-described embodiment, the front screen mechanism E1 can be driven smoothly without performing excitation control, so that such trouble does not occur and the front is front. It is possible to easily respond to changes in specifications such as the size of the screen mechanism E1.

In the above-described embodiment, when the front screen mechanism E1 starts operating from the front standby position to the front exposed position, the driving force is not transmitted to the slide groove E22b via the slide member E26, and the front screen mechanism E1 moves to the front. It has been described that the driving force is not transmitted to the slide groove E22b via the slide member when the operation is started from the exposed position to the front standby position. That is, both when the front screen mechanism E1 starts the operation from the front standby position to the front exposure position and when the front screen mechanism E1 starts the operation from the front exposure position to the front standby position, the slide It has been described that the driving force is not transmitted to the groove E22b. However, in the present invention, one is when the front screen mechanism starts the operation from the front standby position to the front exposure position, and when the front screen mechanism starts the operation from the front exposure position to the front standby position. It is also possible that the driving force is not transmitted to the slide groove only in.

Here, the pin position (relative position with respect to the pin receiving portion) when the display means is in the first position is described as the first predetermined position, and the display means is in the second position. The pin position (relative position with respect to the pin receiving portion) is referred to as a second predetermined position. In this case, the first predetermined position in the pin receiving portion is actually the pin moving direction (regardless of the pin receiving portion) at the time when the display means starts the operation from the first position to the second position. The second predetermined position in the pin receiving portion is the moving direction of the pin at the time when the display means starts the operation from the second position to the first position. It may be formed along (the direction in which the pin actually moves regardless of the pin receiving portion). The first predetermined position and the second predetermined position may be the same position or different positions.

Further, the driving force transmission mechanism includes a driving force transmitting body (for example, a gear) that rotates about a first straight line according to the driving force generated from the power source, and the pin is fixed to the driving force transmitting body. You may be. The first predetermined position in the pin receiving portion is formed in a direction perpendicular to the pin at the first predetermined position and the straight line connecting the intersection of the first straight line and the driving force transmitter (for example, the center of the gear). The second predetermined position in the pin receiving portion is a direction perpendicular to the pin at the second predetermined position and the straight line connecting the first straight line and the intersection of the driving force transmitter (for example, the center of the gear). It may be formed in.

As a result, the direction of the first predetermined position in the pin receiving portion is the direction in which the pin tends to move when the display means starts the operation from the first position to the second position (concentric with the driving force transmitter). The tangential direction of the circle whose radius is the distance between the center of the driving force transmitter and the pin at the first predetermined position), and the second predetermined position in the pin receiving portion is displayed by the display means. The direction in which the pin tries to move when starting the operation from the position of (the circle concentric with the driving force transmitter, and the pin at the center of the driving force transmitter and the second predetermined position). The tangential direction of the circle whose radius is the distance of). Therefore, when the display means starts the operation from the first position to the second position, the driving force is not transmitted to the pin receiving portion via the pin, and the display means moves from the second position to the first position. The driving force is not transmitted to the pin receiving portion via the pin when the operation is started toward. Thereby, when the display means is in the vicinity of the first position and the second position, the operation of the display means can be made gentle.

The object driven by the drive mechanism is not particularly limited, and the drive mechanism may be the following drive mechanism.

It is a drive mechanism for driving a movable body,
An arm connected to the movable body and
A driving force transmission mechanism for transmitting a driving force generated from a power source to a pin receiving portion formed on the arm via a pin that can move inside the pin receiving portion is provided.
The arm operates in conjunction with the movement of the pin inside the pin receiving portion to transmit a driving force to the pin receiving portion via the pin, while the movable body has the movable body. The movement is performed between the first position and the second position in conjunction with the movement of the arm.
When the movable body starts operating from the first position to the second position, the pin receiving portion does not transmit a driving force to the pin receiving portion via the pin, and the movable body receives the pin. Is formed along the direction in which the driving force is not transmitted to the pin receiving portion via the pin when the operation is started from the second position to the first position.
A drive mechanism characterized by that.

It is a drive mechanism for driving a movable body,
An arm connected to the movable body and
A driving force transmission mechanism for transmitting a driving force generated from a power source to a pin receiving portion formed on the arm via a pin that can move inside the pin receiving portion is provided.
The arm operates in conjunction with the movement of the pin inside the pin receiving portion to transmit a driving force to the pin receiving portion via the pin, while the movable body has the movable body. The movement is performed between the first position and the second position in conjunction with the movement of the arm.
The pin receiving portion includes the moving direction of the pin at the time when the movable body starts the operation from the first position to the second position, and the movable body from the second position to the second position. It is formed along the moving direction of the pin at the time when the operation is started toward the position 1.
A drive mechanism characterized by that.

(2-1) A drive mechanism (front screen drive mechanism E2) for driving a display means (front screen mechanism E1) having a display surface capable of displaying an image projected by the projection means (projector mechanism B2) is provided.
The drive mechanism (front screen drive mechanism E2) is
An arm (crank member E22) connected to the display means (front screen mechanism E1) and
A power source is provided to a pin receiving portion (slide groove E22b) formed in the arm (crank member E22) via a pin (slide member E26) that can move inside the pin receiving portion (slide groove E22b). A driving force transmitter (crank gear E21) for transmitting the driving force generated from the (driving motor E25) is provided.
The driving force transmitter (crank gear E21) rotates about the first straight line in accordance with the driving force generated from the power source (drive motor E25).
The pin (slide member E26) is fixed to the driving force transmitter (crank gear E21).
In the arm (crank member E22), the pin (slide member E26) moves inside the pin receiving portion (slide groove E22b) as the driving force transmitter (crank gear E21) rotates. While the display means (front screen mechanism E1) rotates in conjunction with the transmission of the driving force to the pin receiving portion (slide groove E22b) via the pin (slide member E26), the arm (crank) In conjunction with the rotation of the member E22), it rotates between the first position (front standby position) and the second position (front exposed position).
The pin (slide member E26) when the display means (front screen mechanism E1) is in the first position (front standby position), and the first straight line and the driving force transmitter (crank gear E21). The direction of the straight line connecting the points of intersection with the crank gear E21 (the straight line connecting the rotation center position E21a of the crank gear E21 and the eccentric position E21b) is such that the display means (front screen mechanism E1) is at the first position (front standby position). In this case, the force for rotating the display means (front screen mechanism E1) is applied to the display means (front screen mechanism E1) or the arm (crank) regardless of the driving force generated from the power source (drive motor E25). This is the direction of the force applied to the pin (slide member E26) when applied to the member E22).
The pin (slide member E26) when the display means (front screen mechanism E1) is in the second position (front exposed position), and the first straight line and the driving force transmitter (crank gear E21). The direction of the straight line connecting the points of intersection with the crank gear E21 (the straight line connecting the rotation center position E21a of the crank gear E21 and the eccentric position E21b) is such that the display means (front screen mechanism E1) is at the second position (front exposed position). In this case, the force for rotating the display means (front screen mechanism E1) is applied to the display means (front screen mechanism E1) or the arm (crank) regardless of the driving force generated from the power source (drive motor E25). This is the direction of the force applied to the pin (slide member E26) when applied to the member E22).

(2-2) A drive mechanism (front screen drive mechanism E2) for driving a display means (front screen mechanism E1) having a display surface capable of displaying an image projected by the projection means (projector mechanism B2) is provided.
The drive mechanism (front screen drive mechanism E2) is
An arm (crank member E22) connected to the display means (front screen mechanism E1) and
A motor (slide member E26) is provided via a slide member (slide member E26) that can slide inside the slide groove (slide groove E22b) with respect to the slide groove (slide groove E22b) formed in the arm (crank member E22). It is equipped with a gear (crank gear E21) that transmits the driving force generated from the drive motor E25).
The gear (crank gear E21) rotates according to the driving force generated from the motor (drive motor E25).
The slide member (slide member E26) is fixed to the gear (crank gear E21).
The arm (crank member E22) is such that the slide member (slide member E26) slides inside the slide groove (slide groove E22b) as the gear (crank gear E21) rotates. While the display means (front screen mechanism E1) rotates in conjunction with the transmission of the driving force to the slide groove (slide groove E22b) via the (slide member E26), the display means (front screen mechanism E1) is the arm (crank member E22). ) Rotates between the first position (front standby position) and the second position (front exposed position).
When the display means (front screen mechanism E1) is in the first position (front standby position) and when the display means (front screen mechanism E1) is in the second position (front exposure position). , A straight line connecting the rotation center of the gear (crank gear E21) and the slide member (slide member E26) (a straight line connecting the rotation center position E21a of the crank gear E21 and the eccentric position E21b), and the arm (crank member E22). ) And the straight line connecting the slide member (slide member E26) (the straight line connecting the intermediate position E22a of the crank member E22 and the eccentric position E21b of the crank gear E21) are substantially orthogonal to each other.

(3-1) A drive mechanism (front screen drive mechanism E2) for driving a display means (front screen mechanism E1) having a display surface capable of displaying an image projected by the projection means (projector mechanism B2).
A housing unit (screen housing C10) for accommodating the drive mechanism (front screen drive mechanism E2) is provided.
The drive mechanism (front screen drive mechanism E2) is
An arm (crank member E22) connected to the display means (front screen mechanism E1) and
A power source is provided to a pin receiving portion (slide groove E22b) formed in the arm (crank member E22) via a pin (slide member E26) that can move inside the pin receiving portion (slide groove E22b). A driving force transmitter (crank gear E21) for transmitting the driving force generated from the (driving motor E25) is provided.
The driving force transmitter (crank gear E21) rotates about the first straight line in accordance with the driving force generated from the power source (drive motor E25).
The pin (slide member E26) is fixed to the driving force transmitter (crank gear E21).
In the arm (crank member E22), the pin (slide member E26) moves inside the pin receiving portion (slide groove E22b) as the driving force transmitter (crank gear E21) rotates. While the display means (front screen mechanism E1) rotates in conjunction with the transmission of the driving force to the pin receiving portion (slide groove E22b) via the pin (slide member E26), the arm (crank) In conjunction with the rotation of the member E22), it rotates between the first position (front standby position) and the second position (front exposed position).
The pin (slide member E26) when the display means (front screen mechanism E1) is in the first position (front standby position), and the first straight line and the driving force transmitter (crank gear E21). The direction of the straight line connecting the points of intersection with the crank gear E21 (the straight line connecting the rotation center position E21a of the crank gear E21 and the eccentric position E21b) is such that the display means (front screen mechanism E1) is at the first position (front standby position). In this case, the force for rotating the display means (front screen mechanism E1) is applied to the display means (front screen mechanism E1) or the arm (crank) regardless of the driving force generated from the power source (drive motor E25). This is the direction of the force applied to the pin (slide member E26) when applied to the member E22).
The pin (slide member E26) when the display means (front screen mechanism E1) is in the second position (front exposed position), and the first straight line and the driving force transmitter (crank gear E21). The direction of the straight line connecting the intersections with the crank gear E21 (the straight line connecting the rotation center position E21a of the crank gear E21 and the eccentric position E21b) is such that the display means (front screen mechanism E1) is at the second position (front exposed position). In this case, the force for rotating the display means (front screen mechanism E1) is applied to the display means (front screen mechanism E1) or the arm (crank) regardless of the driving force generated from the power source (drive motor E25). This is the direction of the force applied to the pin (slide member E26) when applied to the member E22).
The accommodating portion (screen housing C10) is provided with openings (operating openings C21 and C31) at positions where the driving force transmitter (crank gear E21) can be manually rotated.

(3-2) A drive mechanism (front screen drive mechanism E2) for driving a display means (front screen mechanism E1) having a display surface capable of displaying an image projected by the projection means (projector mechanism B2).
A drive mechanism housing (screen housing C10) that houses the drive mechanism (front screen drive mechanism E2) inside.
A main body (cabinet G) for accommodating the drive mechanism housing (screen housing C10) and
An opening / closing door (upper door mechanism UD and lower door mechanism DD) that can be opened / closed with respect to the main body (cabinet G) is provided.
The drive mechanism (front screen drive mechanism E2) is
An arm (crank member E22) connected to the display means (front screen mechanism E1) and
A motor (slide member E26) is provided via a slide member (slide member E26) that can slide inside the slide groove (slide groove E22b) with respect to the slide groove (slide groove E22b) formed in the arm (crank member E22). It is equipped with a gear (crank gear E21) that transmits the driving force generated from the drive motor E25).
The gear (crank gear E21) rotates according to the driving force generated from the motor (drive motor E25).
The slide member (slide member E26) is fixed to the gear (crank gear E21).
The arm (crank member E22) is such that the slide member (slide member E26) slides inside the slide groove (slide groove E22b) as the gear (crank gear E21) rotates. While the display means (front screen mechanism E1) rotates in conjunction with the transmission of the driving force to the slide groove (slide groove E22b) via the (slide member E26), the display means (front screen mechanism E1) is the arm (crank member E22). ) Rotates between the first position (front standby position) and the second position (front exposed position).
When the display means (front screen mechanism E1) is in the first position (front standby position) and when the display means (front screen mechanism E1) is in the second position (front exposure position). , A straight line connecting the rotation center of the gear (crank gear E21) and the slide member (slide member E26) (a straight line connecting the rotation center position E21a of the crank gear E21 and the eccentric position E21b), and the arm (crank member E22). ) And the straight line connecting the slide member (slide member E26) (the straight line connecting the intermediate position E22a of the crank member E22 and the eccentric position E21b of the crank gear E21) are substantially orthogonal to each other.
The drive mechanism housing (screen housing C10) is provided with openings (operation openings C21 and C31) at positions where the gear (crank gear E21) can be manually rotated.

(3-3) The opening (operation opening C21 / C31) is a first opening (for operation) provided on one side surface (right side plate C2) of the drive mechanism housing (screen housing C10). A second opening (operation) provided in the opening C21) and the side surface (left side plate C3) facing the one side surface (right side plate C2) of the side surfaces of the drive mechanism housing (screen housing C10). With an opening C31)
The first opening (operation opening C21) and the second opening (operation opening C31) are formed to have substantially the same size and substantially the same shape.

According to the gaming machine 1 according to the above-described embodiment, when the front screen mechanism E1 is in the front standby position and when the front screen mechanism E1 is in the front exposed position, the crank gear E21 is eccentric with the rotation center position E21a. The straight line connecting the position E21b and the straight line connecting the intermediate position E22a of the crank member E22 and the eccentric position E21b of the crank gear E21 are substantially orthogonal to each other.

As a result, when the front screen mechanism E1 is in the front standby position or the front exposed position, the force for rotating the front screen mechanism E1 (manually) regardless of the driving force generated from the drive motor E25 is applied to the front screen. When applied to the mechanism E1 or the crank member E22, the direction of the force applied to the slide member E26 coincides with the direction of the straight line connecting the rotation center position E21a and the eccentric position E21b of the crank gear E21. Therefore, the force applied to the slide member E26 is not converted into the force for rotating the crank gear E21 (the direction in which the force acts is from the direction of the straight line connecting the rotation center position E21a and the eccentric position E21b of the crank gear E21. If it deviates even a little, it is converted into a force that rotates the crank gear E21). Therefore, when the front screen mechanism E1 is in the front standby position or the front exposed position, even if the front screen mechanism E1 or the crank member E22 is manually moved to rotate the front screen mechanism E1, the front screen mechanism E1 Does not rotate. As a result, it is possible to prevent a person who handles the front screen mechanism E1 from directly touching the front screen mechanism E1 and forcibly moving the front screen mechanism E1.

Further, according to the game machine 1 according to the above-described embodiment, in realizing that the front screen mechanism E1 is not manually rotated when the front screen mechanism E1 is in the front standby position or the front exposed position. It is not necessary to separately add a member or the like for locking the rotation of the front screen mechanism E1, and it is possible to prevent the cost from increasing.

Further, according to the gaming machine 1 according to the above-described embodiment, the front screen drive mechanism E2 is housed inside the screen housing C10, and the crank gear E21 is manually rotated in the screen housing C10. Operation openings C21 and C31 are provided at positions where the operation is possible. Therefore, a person who handles the front screen mechanism E1 can rotate the front screen mechanism E1 by manually rotating the crank gear E21 from the operating openings C21 and C31. Therefore, although the front screen mechanism E1 cannot be rotated by directly touching the front screen mechanism E1, the means for rotating the front screen mechanism E1 is separately secured, which reduces convenience. Can be prevented. Further, when the front screen mechanism E1 is rotated by manually rotating the crank gear E21, the front screen mechanism E1 is not directly touched, so that a large load is applied to the front screen mechanism E1 to cause the front surface. The risk of damage to the screen mechanism E1 can be reduced.

Further, according to the game machine 1 according to the above-described embodiment, the screen housing C10 is provided with openings (operation openings C21 and C31) having substantially the same size and substantially the same shape on each of the pair of side surfaces. The screen housing C10 can be carried by hooking a hand on the two openings. As described above, the operating openings C21 and C31 are formed as handles, and according to the game machine 1 according to the above-described embodiment, the crank gear E21 is manually rotated from the opening as the handle. The front screen mechanism E1 can be rotated.

In the above-described embodiment, when the front screen mechanism E1 is in the front standby position or the front exposed position, a force for rotating the front screen mechanism E1 (manually) regardless of the driving force generated from the drive motor E25. Is applied to the front screen mechanism E1 or the crank member E22, the direction of the force applied to the slide member E26 coincides with the direction of the straight line connecting the rotation center position E21a and the eccentric position E21b of the crank gear E21. It was explained as. That is, it has been described that the front screen mechanism E1 is not manually rotated (locked) in both the front standby position and the front exposed position. However, in the present invention, the front screen mechanism may not be manually rotated (locked) only in one of the case where the front screen mechanism is in the front standby position and the case where the front screen mechanism is in the front exposed position. ..

The object driven by the drive mechanism is not particularly limited, and the drive mechanism may be the following drive mechanism.

It is a drive mechanism for driving a movable body,
An arm connected to the movable body and
A driving force transmitter that transmits a driving force generated from a power source to a pin receiving portion formed on the arm via a pin that can move inside the pin receiving portion is provided.
The driving force transmitter rotates about the first straight line according to the driving force generated from the power source.
The pin is fixed to the driving force transmitter and
The arm is interlocked with the fact that the pin moves inside the pin receiving portion with the rotation of the driving force transmitting body, so that the driving force is transmitted to the pin receiving portion via the pin. While rotating, the movable body rotates between the first position and the second position in conjunction with the rotation of the arm.
The movable body is in the first position in the direction of the pin when the movable body is in the first position and the straight line connecting the intersection of the first straight line and the driving force transmitter. In this case, it is the direction of the force applied to the pin when a force for rotating the movable body is applied to the movable body or the arm regardless of the driving force generated from the power source.
The movable body is in the second position in the direction of the pin when the movable body is in the second position and the straight line connecting the intersection of the first straight line and the driving force transmitter. In this case, it is the direction of the force applied to the pin when a force for rotating the movable body is applied to the movable body or the arm regardless of the driving force generated from the power source.
A drive mechanism characterized by that.

It is a drive mechanism for driving a movable body,
An arm connected to the movable body and
A driving force transmitter that transmits a driving force generated from a power source to a pin receiving portion formed on the arm via a pin that can move inside the pin receiving portion is provided.
The driving force transmitter rotates about the first straight line according to the driving force generated from the power source.
The pin is fixed to the driving force transmitter and
The arm is interlocked with the fact that the pin moves inside the pin receiving portion with the rotation of the driving force transmitting body, so that the driving force is transmitted to the pin receiving portion via the pin. , While rotating around the second straight line, the movable body rotates between the first position and the second position in conjunction with the rotation of the arm.
When the movable body is in the first position and when the movable body is in the second position, the intersection of the first straight line and the driving force transmitter and the straight line connecting the pins , The intersection of the second straight line with the arm and the straight line connecting the pins are orthogonal to each other.
A drive mechanism characterized by that.

The first straight line and the second straight line may be parallel to each other, and in that case, a view seen from the direction of the first straight line (direction of the second straight line) (for example, a side view of the drive mechanism). In, a straight line connecting the intersection and the pin of the first straight line and the driving force transmitter (for example, a straight line connecting the center of the gear and the pin) and a straight line connecting the intersection and the pin of the second straight line and the arm (for example,). The straight line connecting the center of rotation of the arm and the pin) may be orthogonal.

(4-1) A display unit (display unit A) for displaying images and
A main body (cabinet G) accommodating the display unit (display unit A) and having an opening on the front surface,
An opening / closing door (upper door) that is openably / closably attached to the main body (cabinet G) and provided with a display area (upper display window UD1) that allows the image displayed by the display unit (display unit A) to be visually recognized. With mechanism UD),
The display unit (display unit A) is
A projector that can project images (projector mechanism B2) and
A reflection mirror (mirror mechanism B3) that reflects the light emitted from the projector (projector mechanism B2) backward.
A first screen (front screen mechanism E1) having a display surface capable of displaying an image projected by the projector (projector mechanism B2) based on the light reflected by the reflection mirror (mirror mechanism B3).
The first screen (front screen mechanism E1) has a display surface capable of displaying an image projected by the projector (projector mechanism B2) based on the light reflected by the reflection mirror (mirror mechanism B3). With a different second screen (fixed screen mechanism D),
A screen housing (screen housing C10) for accommodating the first screen (front screen mechanism E1) and the second screen (fixed screen mechanism D) is provided.
The projector (projector mechanism B2), the reflection mirror (mirror mechanism B3), the first screen (front screen mechanism E1), the second screen (fixed screen mechanism D), and the screen housing (screen housing). It is configured by unitizing C10).
The first screen (front screen mechanism E1) is driven by a drive mechanism (front screen drive mechanism E2) between the first position (front standby position) and the second position (front exposed position). And work with
The second screen (fixed screen mechanism D) is arranged behind the second position (front exposed position), and the first screen (front screen mechanism E1) is placed at the second position (front exposed position). ), The image projected by the projector (projector mechanism B2) is displayed on the first screen (front screen mechanism E1), while the first screen (front screen mechanism E1) is in the first position. When in the (front standby position), the image projected by the projector (projector mechanism B2) is displayed on the second screen (fixed screen mechanism D).
Of the first screen (front screen mechanism E1) and the second screen (fixed screen mechanism D), the second screen (fixed screen mechanism D) has a lower brightness.

According to the game machine 1 according to the above-described embodiment, two screens, a front screen mechanism E1 and a fixed screen mechanism D, are housed in the screen housing C10. The front screen mechanism E1 operates between the front standby position and the front exposed position by being driven by the front screen drive mechanism E2, and the fixed screen mechanism D is arranged behind the front exposed position. When the front screen mechanism E1 is in the front exposure position, the image projected by the projector mechanism B2 is displayed on the front screen mechanism E1, while when the front screen mechanism E1 is in the front standby position, it is projected by the projector mechanism B2. The image is displayed on the fixed screen mechanism D.

Therefore, the position of the front screen mechanism E1 when the image projected by the projector mechanism B2 is displayed on the front screen mechanism E1 and the fixed screen when the image projected by the projector mechanism B2 is displayed on the fixed screen mechanism D. Comparing with the position of the mechanism D, the fixed screen mechanism D is located behind the screen housing C10 rather than the front screen mechanism E1.

Here, since the back side of the screen housing C10 is more affected by diffuse reflection due to the reflection of light on the wall of the screen housing C10, the fixed screen mechanism D is more so-called white than the front screen mechanism E1. Blurring is likely to occur. In view of this point, in the gaming machine 1 according to the above-described embodiment, the brightness of the fixed screen mechanism D is lower than the brightness of the front screen mechanism E1. As a result, it is possible to prevent blurring of the image displayed on the fixed screen mechanism D, and it is possible to improve the sharpness of the image.

(4-2) A display unit (display unit A) for displaying images and
A main body (cabinet G) accommodating the display unit (display unit A) and having an opening on the front surface,
An opening / closing door (upper door) that is openably / closably attached to the main body (cabinet G) and provided with a display area (upper display window UD1) that allows the image displayed by the display unit (display unit A) to be visually recognized. With mechanism UD),
The display unit (display unit A) is
A projector that can project images (projector mechanism B2) and
A reflection mirror (mirror mechanism B3) that reflects the light emitted from the projector (projector mechanism B2) backward.
A first screen (front screen mechanism E1) having one display surface capable of displaying an image projected by the projector (projector mechanism B2) based on the light reflected by the reflection mirror (mirror mechanism B3).
A second screen (fixed screen mechanism D) having a plurality of display surfaces capable of displaying an image projected by the projector (projector mechanism B2) based on the light reflected by the reflection mirror (mirror mechanism B3) is provided. ,
The projector (projector mechanism B2), the reflection mirror (mirror mechanism B3), the first screen (front screen mechanism E1), and the second screen (fixed screen mechanism D) are unitized. Ori,
The first screen (front screen mechanism E1) is driven by a drive mechanism (front screen drive mechanism E2) between the first position (front standby position) and the second position (front exposed position). And work with
When the first screen (front screen mechanism E1) is in the second position (front exposure position), the image projected by the projector (projector mechanism B2) is displayed on the first screen (front screen mechanism E1). On the other hand, when the first screen (front screen mechanism E1) is in the first position (front standby position), the image projected by the projector (projector mechanism B2) is the second screen (fixed screen mechanism). Displayed in D)
Of the first screen (front screen mechanism E1) and the second screen (fixed screen mechanism D), the second screen (fixed screen mechanism D) has a lower brightness.

According to the game machine 1 according to the above-described embodiment, the front screen mechanism E1 has one display surface, and the fixed screen mechanism D has a plurality of display surfaces. Since the fixed screen mechanism D has a plurality of display surfaces, the influence of diffuse reflection due to the reflection of light between the display surfaces is large, and so-called white blur is likely to occur. Therefore, the gaming machine 1 according to the above-described embodiment. The brightness of the fixed screen mechanism D is lower than the brightness of the front screen mechanism E1. As a result, it is possible to prevent blurring of the image displayed on the fixed screen mechanism D, and it is possible to improve the sharpness of the image.

In the present invention, a first screen whose display surface is perpendicular to the optical axis of the irradiation light and a second screen whose display surface is not perpendicular to the optical axis of the irradiation light are provided, and the brightness of the second screen is adjusted. It may be lower than the brightness of the first screen. Also in this case, it is possible to prevent the image displayed on the second screen from being blurred.

(5-1) A projector (projector mechanism B2) capable of projecting an image and a screen (front screen mechanism E1) having a display surface capable of displaying the image projected by the projector (projector mechanism B2). , A display unit (display unit A) configured by being unitized,
A main body (cabinet G) accommodating the display unit (display unit A) and having an opening on the front surface,
An opening / closing door (upper door mechanism UD) that is openably / closably attached to the main body (cabinet G) and provided with a display area (upper display window UD1) that allows the screen (front screen mechanism E1) to be visually recognized. With
The screen (front screen mechanism E1) has a first member (front screen member E11) having the display surface (projection surface E11a) and a second member having a surface provided with a convex portion (second pattern surface E12b). The member (front screen support E12) is the surface of the first member (front screen member E11) opposite to the display surface (projection surface E11a) and the second member (front screen support E12). ), It is formed by being fixed so as to be in contact with the surface on the opposite side to the surface (second pattern surface E12b) provided with the convex portion.

According to the game machine 1 according to the above-described embodiment, in the front screen mechanism E1, the front screen member E11 having the projection surface E11a and the front screen support base E12 having the second pattern surface E12b are included in the front screen member E11. It is formed by fixing the surface opposite to the projection surface E11a and the surface of the front screen support base E12 opposite to the second pattern surface E12b so as to be in contact with each other. As described above, since the member having the projection surface E11a and the member having the second pattern surface E12b are made of separate members, the convex portion of the second pattern surface E12b is caused in the process of molding the front screen mechanism E1. This prevents the projection surface E11a from being formed with a sink mark and degrading the accuracy of the screen. Therefore, according to the game machine 1 according to the above-described embodiment, it is possible to display an image on a screen with good accuracy.

(5-2) The surface (second pattern surface E12b) of the screen (front screen mechanism E1) provided with the convex portion is decorated with irregularities.
The screen (front screen mechanism E1) operates between a first position (front standby position) and a second position (front exposed position) by being driven by a drive mechanism (front screen drive mechanism E2). And
When the screen (front exposure position) is in the second position (front exposure position), the image projected by the projector (projector mechanism B2) is displayed on the screen (front screen mechanism E1), while the screen (front screen mechanism E1) is displayed. When the screen (front screen mechanism E1) is in the first position (front standby position), the screen (front screen mechanism E1) is applied to the surface (second pattern surface E12b) provided with the convex portion. The decoration is arranged so as to be visible through the display area (upper display window UD1).

According to the gaming machine 1 according to the above-described embodiment, when the front screen mechanism E1 is in the front standby position, the front screen mechanism E1 has a second pattern surface E12b (a surface opposite to the projection surface E11a, that is, a surface of the screen. The decoration on the back surface) is arranged so as to be visible through the upper display window UD1. Therefore, if the decoration is not applied, the back surface of the front screen mechanism E1 will be directly visible to the player when the front screen mechanism E1 is in the front standby position. This is not desirable because it significantly spoils the aesthetics of the gaming machine. From this point of view, in the game machine 1 according to the above-described embodiment, the back surface of the front screen mechanism E1 is decorated.

However, when an attempt is made to integrally mold the front screen mechanism E1 with such decoration, a sink mark is formed on the projection surface E11a of the front screen mechanism E1 due to the convex portion constituting the decoration, and the accuracy of the screen is improved. It will drop. In view of this point, in the game machine 1 according to the above-described embodiment, the member having the projection surface E11 and the member having the decorated surface are made of separate members, and both members are fixed to each other. The front screen mechanism E1 is molded. As a result, it is possible to prevent a sink mark from being formed on the projection surface E11 due to decoration and a decrease in accuracy as a screen. Therefore, according to the game machine 1 according to the above-described embodiment, it is possible to display an image on a screen with good accuracy.

(6-1) A projector capable of projecting an image (projector mechanism B2) and a screen capable of displaying the image projected by the projector (projector mechanism B2) (fixed screen mechanism D, front screen mechanism E1, reel). A display configured by unitizing the screen mechanism F1) and the screen housing (screen housing C10) accommodating the screen (fixed screen mechanism D, front screen mechanism E1, reel screen mechanism F1). Unit (display unit A) and
A main body (cabinet G) accommodating the display unit (display unit A) and having an opening on the front surface,
A display area (upper display window UD1) is provided which is attached to the main body (cabinet G) so as to be openable and closable so that the screen (fixed screen mechanism D, front screen mechanism E1, reel screen mechanism F1) can be visually recognized. Opening and closing door (upper door mechanism UD) and
A perforated plate (perforated plate B15) in which a plurality of holes are formed is provided.
The perforated plate (perforated plate B15) is arranged so that the projector (projector mechanism B2) is difficult to see through the display area (upper display window UD1), and the plurality of holes are formed in the perforated plate (perforated plate B15). With the perforated plate B15) as a boundary, the space in which the screen (fixed screen mechanism D, front screen mechanism E1, reel screen mechanism F1) in the screen housing (screen housing C10) is accommodated, and the projector (projector). A passage through which air can flow is formed with the space in which the mechanism B2) is arranged.

According to the game machine 1 according to the above-described embodiment, the fixed screen mechanism D, the front screen mechanism E1, and the reel screen mechanism F1 in the screen housing C10 are housed by the plurality of holes formed in the perforated plate B15. A passage through which air can flow is formed between the space and the space in which the projector mechanism B2 is arranged. Therefore, since the space (the area open for projecting the image) of the screen in the screen housing C10 can be used for heat dissipation, the heat generated by the projector mechanism B2 can be efficiently released. it can. Further, since the projector mechanism B2 is arranged so that the projector mechanism B2 is difficult to see through the upper display window UD1 provided on the upper door mechanism UD, the perforated plate B15 is difficult for the player to see the projector mechanism B2. It is possible to prevent the appearance of the game machine from being spoiled by seeing.

(6-2) The projector (projector mechanism B2) is arranged above the screen (fixed screen mechanism D) erected in the screen housing (screen housing C10), while emitting light forward. It is possible to irradiate,
The game machine further
A reflection mirror (mirror mechanism B3) arranged in front of the projector (projector mechanism B2) is provided so that the light emitted from the projector (projector mechanism B2) can be reflected diagonally downward and backward.
The perforated plate (perforated plate B15) is arranged above the screen (fixed screen mechanism D) so as to cover the lower surface of the projector (projector mechanism B2).

According to the game machine 1 according to the above-described embodiment, the fixed screen mechanism D is erected on the screen housing C10, and the projector mechanism B2 is arranged above the fixed screen mechanism D. Therefore, a relatively wide space extends below the projector mechanism B2. Then, the perforated plate B15 is arranged above the fixed screen mechanism D so as to cover the lower surface of the projector mechanism B2. Therefore, since the relatively wide space can be used for heat dissipation, the heat generated by the projector mechanism B2 can be discharged more efficiently.

(7-1) A display unit (display unit A) for displaying images and
A main body (cabinet G) accommodating the display unit (display unit A) and having an opening on the front surface,
An opening / closing door (upper door mechanism UD) that can be opened / closed with respect to the main body (cabinet G) is provided.
The display unit (display unit A) is
A projector that can project images (projector mechanism B2) and
A reflection mirror (mirror mechanism B3) that reflects the light emitted from the projector (projector mechanism B2) and
A screen (fixed screen mechanism D, front screen mechanism E1, reel screen mechanism F1) capable of displaying an image projected by the projector (projector mechanism B2) based on the light reflected by the reflection mirror (mirror mechanism B3). And with
The projector (projector mechanism B2), the reflection mirror (mirror mechanism B3), and the screen (fixed screen mechanism D, front screen mechanism E1, reel screen mechanism F1) are unitized.
The position of the reflection mirror (mirror mechanism B3) can be adjusted from the outside of the display unit (display unit A) with the opening / closing door (upper door mechanism UD) open.

According to the game machine 1 according to the above-described embodiment, the display unit A includes a projector mechanism B2, a mirror mechanism B3, a fixed screen mechanism D, a front screen mechanism E1, and a reel screen mechanism F1. However, the position of the mirror mechanism B3 can be adjusted from the outside of the display unit A with the upper door mechanism UD open. Therefore, even after the display unit A is installed in the cabinet G of the game machine 1, the position of the mirror mechanism B3 can be adjusted, so that the position of the image projected by the projector mechanism B2 is not appropriate. Even in this case, the projection position can be adjusted.

(7-2) The projector (projector mechanism B2) and the screen (fixed screen mechanism D, front screen mechanism E1, reel screen mechanism F1) are fixed at predetermined positions in the display unit (display unit A). ,
While the projector (projector mechanism B2) is arranged above the screen (fixed screen mechanism D, front screen mechanism E1, reel screen mechanism F1), it is possible to irradiate light forward.
The reflection mirror (mirror mechanism B3) is arranged in front of the projector (projector mechanism B2) so that the light emitted from the projector (projector mechanism B2) can be reflected diagonally downward and backward, and the main body thereof. It is possible to adjust the light reflection direction by changing the degree of screwing in the screw exposed toward the opening side of the portion (cabinet G).

According to the game machine 1 according to the above-described embodiment, the projector mechanism B2, the fixed screen mechanism D, the front screen mechanism E1, and the reel screen mechanism F1 are fixed at predetermined positions in the display unit A. On the other hand, the mirror mechanism B3 is provided with a screw for adjusting the light reflection direction, and the screw is exposed toward the opening side of the cabinet G. Therefore, even after the display unit A is installed in the cabinet G of the game machine 1, the light reflection direction (angle) can be changed by loosening or tightening the screw with the upper door mechanism UD open. Can be adjusted. As a result, the projection position can be adjusted even when the position of the image projected by the projector mechanism B2 is not appropriate.

In the above-described embodiment, the projector mechanism B2, the mirror mechanism B3, the fixed screen mechanism D, the front screen mechanism E1, and the reel screen mechanism F1 have been described as being unitized. However, the projector mechanism, the mirror mechanism, and various screens may be directly attached to the main body of the game machine without being unitized.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the case where the present invention is applied to a pachislot gaming machine has been described, but the present invention can also be applied to other gaming machines (for example, pachinko gaming machines, slot machines, etc.). ..

(8-1) A gaming machine provided with a display unit (display unit A) for displaying an image.
The display unit is
A projector (illumination light device B) for projecting images,
The first and second screens (front screen mechanism E1 and reel screen mechanism F1) that can be projected by the projector, each of which is outside the projection range of the projector and is different from each other for each screen. A first position that can operate between a position (front standby position / reel standby position) and a second position (front exposure position / reel exposure position) that is within the projection range of the projector and is a projection target of the projector. And the second screen,
Drive means (front screen mechanism E1, reel screen drive mechanism F2 and main control) for driving the first and second screens independently between the first position and the second position. Board MS) and
Detection of whether or not the first screen is present at the first position (front standby position), detection of whether or not the first screen is present at the second position (front exposed position), A detection means (sensor mechanism CS) for detecting whether or not the second screen is present at the first position (reel standby position) is provided.
The operating range between the first position and the second position of each of the first and second screens includes a overlapping range that overlaps with each other, and the first and second screens are overlapped with each other. The second position of each of the screens exists in the overlapping range in the operating range.
The driving means
In executing the return operation of returning each of the first and second screens to the origin position existing in the range excluding the overlap range in the operation range.
The first and second screens are driven according to the driving procedure of the first and second screens according to the positions of the first and second screens based on the detection result of the detection means.

Conventionally, a game machine equipped with an effect device capable of producing an effect by operating a movable body is known (see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-013685). According to such a game machine, through the movement of the movable body, it is possible to perform a powerful effect that cannot be obtained only by the image displayed on the liquid crystal display device. In recent years, in order to further enhance the effect of the effect, a game machine equipped with an effect device having a plurality of movable bodies has been proposed. Although the space inside the game machine is finite, it is possible to provide a plurality of movable bodies by limiting the size of each movable body or overlapping the operating range of each movable body. Here, when the operating ranges of the movable bodies are overlapped, if the plurality of movable bodies are operated at the same time, the movable bodies may come into contact (interference) with each other. Normally, appropriate control is performed so that such interference does not occur. However, if the movable body is not operating normally, or if the movable body is manually moved while the power is cut off, the movable body is not considered to be in such an abnormal situation. When is operated, the movable bodies may interfere with each other. Then, when the movable bodies come into contact with each other, there is a risk that the effect device will be damaged.

According to the gaming machine according to the above-described embodiment, the detection result of the detection means differs depending on the positions of the first and second screens. Further, the first positions of the first and second screens are different from each other. Therefore, when the detecting means detects that one screen exists in the first position, it does not interfere even if the other screen is driven. Therefore, by first returning the other screen to the origin position and then returning one screen to the origin position, the return operation can be performed without the screens interfering with each other. Further, since it is possible to arrange only one of the first and second screens in the second position, the detecting means detects that the first screen exists in the second position. When so, the second screen will not be in the second position. In this case, by first returning the second screen to the origin position and then returning the first screen to the origin position, the return operation can be performed without the screens interfering with each other. As described above, in the return operation, the screens interfere with each other by driving the first and second screens according to the drive procedure according to the position of each of the first and second screens based on the detection result of the detection means. It is possible to return to each origin position without any problem. As a result, by appropriately driving the first and second screens in the processing after the return operation, it is possible to reliably prevent the screens from interfering with each other.

(8-2) The detection means (sensor mechanism CS) is
Two first sensors (sensor CS1 and sensor CS3) corresponding to the first and second screens (front screen mechanism E1 and reel screen mechanism F1), respectively, and the corresponding screens are in the first position (front). Two first sensors for detecting whether or not they are present in the standby position / reel standby position),
A second sensor corresponding to the first screen (front screen mechanism E1) for detecting whether or not the corresponding first screen is present at the second position (front exposure position). Equipped with a second sensor
The drive means (main control board MS) is
The first sensor has detected that the first screen is present at the first position, and the second sensor is that the first screen is present at the second position. If is detected, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred.

According to the above configuration, the first screen does not exist in the first position and the second position at the same time, so that the first sensor detects that the first screen exists in the first position. If the second sensor detects that the first screen is present at the second position, it can be determined that an abnormality has occurred.

(9-1) A gaming machine provided with a display unit (display unit A) for displaying an image.
The display unit is
A projector (illumination light device B) for projecting images,
The first and second screens (front screen mechanism E1 and reel screen mechanism F1) that can be projected by the projector, each of which is outside the projection range of the projector and is different from each other for each screen. A first position that can operate between a position (front standby position / reel standby position) and a second position (front exposure position / reel exposure position) that is within the projection range of the projector and is a projection target of the projector. And the second screen,
Drive means (front screen mechanism E1, reel screen drive mechanism F2 and main control) for driving the first and second screens independently between the first position and the second position. Board MS) and
Detection of whether or not the first screen (front screen mechanism E1) is present at the first position (front standby position), and the first screen is present at the second position (front exposure position). With a detection means (sensor mechanism CS) for detecting whether or not the second screen (reel screen mechanism F1) is present at the first position (reel exposed position). With,
The operating range of each of the first and second screens includes a overlapping range that overlaps with each other, and the second position of each of the first and second screens is in the operating range. Exists in the overlapping range
The driving means
In executing the return operation of returning each of the first and second screens to the origin position existing in the range excluding the overlap range in the operation range.
The first condition in which the detection means detects that the first screen exists in either the first position or the second position, and the detection means means that the second screen When at least one of the second conditions for detecting the presence at the first position is satisfied,
The first and second screens are driven according to the driving procedure of the first and second screens according to the positions of the first and second screens based on the detection result of the detection means.
If neither of the first condition and the second condition is satisfied,
One of the first and second screens is driven to return to the origin position, and then the other screen of the first and second screens by the detection means is said. The other screen is driven so as to return to the origin position according to the driving procedure according to the detection result as to whether or not the screen exists in the first position.

Conventionally, a game machine equipped with an effect device capable of producing an effect by operating a movable body is known (see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-013685). According to such a game machine, through the movement of the movable body, it is possible to perform a powerful effect that cannot be obtained only by the image displayed on the liquid crystal display device. In recent years, in order to further enhance the effect of the effect, a game machine equipped with an effect device having a plurality of movable bodies has been proposed. Although the space inside the game machine is finite, it is possible to provide a plurality of movable bodies by limiting the size of each movable body or overlapping the operating range of each movable body. Here, when the operating ranges of the movable bodies are overlapped, if the plurality of movable bodies are operated at the same time, the movable bodies may come into contact (interference) with each other. Normally, appropriate control is performed so that such interference does not occur. However, if the movable body is not operating normally, or if the movable body is manually moved while the power is cut off, the movable body is not considered to be in such an abnormal situation. When is operated, the movable bodies may interfere with each other. Then, when the movable bodies come into contact with each other, there is a risk that the effect device will be damaged.

According to the gaming machine according to the above-described embodiment, the detection result of the detection means differs depending on the positions of the first and second screens. Further, the first positions of the first and second screens are different from each other. Therefore, when the detecting means detects that one screen exists in the first position, it does not interfere even if the other screen is driven. Therefore, by first returning the other screen to the origin position and then returning one screen to the origin position, the return operation can be performed without the screens interfering with each other. Further, since it is possible to arrange only one of the first and second screens in the second position, the detecting means detects that the first screen exists in the second position. When so, the second screen will not be in the second position. In this case, by first returning the second screen to the origin position and then returning the first screen to the origin position, the return operation can be performed without the screens interfering with each other. As described above, the first condition in which the detection means detects that the first screen exists at either the first position or the second position, and the detection means is the second screen. When at least one of the second conditions for detecting the presence at the position 1 is satisfied, the driving procedure according to the position of each of the first and second screens based on the detection result of the detection means is followed. By driving the first and second screens, it is possible to return to the respective origin positions without the screens interfering with each other.

On the other hand, when neither the first condition nor the second condition is satisfied, the first screen is located between the first position and the second position, and the first screen is located. The second screen is located at a position other than the second position. Further, in this case, the operation of one screen may be accompanied by the operation of the other screen. Therefore, according to the invention of (1), first, after returning one screen to the origin position, it depends on the detection result of whether or not the other screen exists in the first position by the detection means. According to the driving procedure, this other screen is returned to the origin position. As a result, even when neither of the first condition and the second condition is satisfied, the first and second screens can be reliably returned to the origin position.

(9-2) The detection means (sensor mechanism CS) is
Two first sensors (sensor CS1 and sensor CS3) corresponding to the first and second screens (front screen mechanism E1 and reel screen mechanism F1), respectively, and the corresponding screens are in the first position (front). Two first sensors for detecting whether or not they are present in the standby position / reel standby position),
A second sensor corresponding to the first screen (front screen mechanism E1) for detecting whether or not the corresponding first screen is present at the second position (front exposure position). Equipped with a second sensor
The drive means (main control board MS) is
The first sensor has detected that the first screen is present at the first position, and the second sensor is that the first screen is present at the second position. If is detected, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred.

According to the above configuration, the first screen does not exist in the first position and the second position at the same time, so that the first sensor detects that the first screen exists in the first position. If the second sensor detects that the first screen is present at the second position, it can be determined that an abnormality has occurred.

(10-1) A gaming machine provided with a display unit (display unit A) for displaying an image.
The display unit is
A projector (illumination light device B) for projecting images,
A first screen (fixed screen mechanism D) that is fixed at a predetermined position of the display unit and can be a projection target of the projector, and
The second and third screens (front screen mechanism E1 and reel screen mechanism F1) that can be projected by the projector, and each of them is a first position (front standby position and reel) that is outside the projection range of the projector. The standby position) and the second position (front exposed position / reel exposed position) that is in front of the first screen and is the projection target of the projector instead of the first screen are different times from each other. The second and third screens that can rotate around the moving axis (rotation center axis FG / rotation center axis RG) and
A drive mechanism (front screen drive mechanism E2, reel screen drive mechanism F2) for driving the second and third screens independently between the first position and the second position. With
The operating ranges between the first position and the second position on each of the second and third screens partially overlap each other.
The rotation axis (rotation center axis FG) of the second screen (front screen mechanism E1) is above the rotation axis (rotation center axis RG) of the third screen (reel screen mechanism F1). Yes,
The second screen is arranged at a position above the first screen at the first position (front standby position) and outside the operating range of the third screen.
The third screen is arranged at a position behind the first screen at the first position (reel standby position) and outside the operating range of the second screen.

Conventionally, a game machine equipped with an effect device capable of producing an effect by operating a movable body is known (see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-013685). According to such a game machine, through the movement of the movable body, it is possible to perform a powerful effect that cannot be obtained only by the image displayed on the liquid crystal display device. In recent years, in order to further enhance the effect of the effect, a game machine equipped with an effect device having a plurality of movable bodies has been proposed. Since the space inside the game machine is finite, it is necessary to save space when providing multiple movable bodies, but by limiting the size of each movable body or overlapping the operating range of each movable body, It is possible to provide a plurality of movable bodies. Here, when the operating ranges of the movable bodies are overlapped, if the plurality of movable bodies are operated at the same time, the movable bodies may come into contact (interference) with each other. Then, when the movable bodies come into contact with each other, there is a risk that the effect device will be damaged.

According to the gaming machine according to the above-described embodiment, the second screen and the third screen are rotated by rotation axes different from each other. As a result, the operating range of the second screen and the overlapping range of the operating range of the third screen can be reduced. Further, the rotation axis of the second screen is arranged above the rotation axis of the third screen, and the second screen is arranged above the first screen in the first position. By configuring the above, the operating range between the first position and the second position of the second screen can be reduced. In addition, the third screen is placed behind the first screen in the first position so that when the third screen is placed in the first position, it will be with the second screen. The possibility of contact can be eliminated. As described above, it is possible to efficiently arrange these three screens in the game machine while reducing the possibility that the three screens come into contact with each other.

(10-2) The drive mechanism (front screen drive mechanism E2, reel screen drive mechanism F2) is
The driving of the second screen (front screen mechanism E1) is executed on condition that the third screen (reel screen mechanism F1) is in the first position (reel standby position).
The driving of the third screen is performed on condition that the second screen is in the first position (front standby position).

According to the gaming machine according to the above-described embodiment, it is possible to reliably prevent the second screen from coming into contact with the third screen.

(10-3) Each of the first to third screens (fixed screen mechanism D, front screen mechanism E1, reel screen mechanism F1) is a projection on which an image emitted from the projector (illumination light device B) is projected. The shapes of the faces are different from each other.

According to the gaming machine according to the above-described embodiment, since the shapes of the projection surfaces of the first to third screens are different from each other, even if the same image is emitted from the projector, the image is expressed in a different manner for each screen. Because it is possible to do so, the production can be diversified.

(10-4) The projection surface on any one screen (reel screen mechanism F1) of the first to third screens (fixed screen mechanism D, front screen mechanism E1, reel screen mechanism F1) is the above. It is an arcuate surface that has a convex arc shape on the upstream side in the irradiation direction of the light emitted from the projector (irradiation light device B) in a side view when it is a projection target of the projector.
The projection surface on any one of the first to third screens (front screen mechanism E1) is a flat surface.

According to the gaming machine according to the above-described embodiment, it is possible to express images in different modes between the screen mechanism whose projection surface is an arc surface and the screen mechanism whose projection surface is a flat surface.

(11-1) A gaming machine provided with a display unit (display unit A) for displaying an image.
The display unit is
A projector (illumination light device B) for projecting images,
A movable screen (front screen mechanism E1) that can be projected by the projector, a first position (front standby position) outside the projection range of the projector, and a second position (front standby position) that can be projected by the projector. Movable screen that can be operated between (front exposed position) and
A drive mechanism (front screen drive mechanism E2) for driving the movable screen between the first position and the second position is provided.
The drive mechanism
With the motor (drive motor E25)
A shaft (shaft member E3) that rotates when the motor is driven,
Two gears (intermediate gears E23 and E23) provided at both ends of the shaft and rotating together with the shaft,
Two arms (crank members E22 and E22) that are connected to the two gears and are rotated around a rotation shaft along a predetermined direction by rotating the two gears, and the movable The screen comprises two arms connected to both ends in the predetermined direction.
The movable screen rotates between the first position and the second position in conjunction with the rotation of the center of the rotation axis (rotation center axis FG) of the two arms. ..

Conventionally, there is known a game machine equipped with an effect device capable of producing an effect by rotating a movable body around an axis (see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-013685). According to such a game machine, through the movement of the movable body, it is possible to perform a powerful effect that cannot be obtained only by the image displayed on the liquid crystal display device. In recent years, in order to further enhance the effect, it has been proposed that a display means such as a liquid crystal display device switches between a state of being shielded by the movable body and a state of being opened (exposed) before and after the movable body is rotated. There is. As a result, it is possible to create a sense of unity between the movement of the movable body and the visual state of another accessory such as a display means, and it is possible to perform a variety of effects. However, when a display means or the like (another accessory) is provided together with the movable body, there is a problem that the rotation shaft (shaft) of the movable body hinders the arrangement of the display means or the like. In this regard, it is conceivable to provide the rotation axis of the movable body above, below, sideways, etc. of the separate accessory so as not to interfere with the arrangement of the separate accessory, but in this case, the rotation of the movable body Since the shaft is arranged toward the end, there is a problem that the rotation range of the movable body is limited and the size of the movable body is also restricted.

According to the gaming machine according to the above-described embodiment, the shaft is not used as the rotation axis of the screen (two arms). As a result, the degree of freedom in arranging the shaft is increased, so that the shaft can be arranged so as not to interfere with the arrangement of the other accessory. As a result, it is possible to increase the degree of freedom in arranging the other accessory while maintaining the rotation range and size of the screen to a desired degree. Further, each of the two arms is rotated with the rotation of the two gears connected to both ends of the shaft. Therefore, this shaft can evenly transmit the driving force of the motor to each of the two arms. As a result, it is possible to prevent the drive load from being concentrated on one arm.

(11-2) The motor (drive motor E25) is connected to one of the two gears (intermediate gears E23 and E23), and the driving force is transmitted to the one gear to rotate. By causing the shaft (shaft member E3) to rotate.

According to the gaming machine according to the above-described embodiment, the motor is connected to a gear provided at one end of the shaft so as not to obstruct the arrangement of another accessory (fixed screen mechanism or the like). Can be placed near the end of the shaft. As a result, the degree of freedom in arranging the other accessory can be further increased.

(11-3) A fixed screen (fixed screen mechanism D) that is fixed at a predetermined position of the display unit (display unit A) and can be a projection target of the projector (illumination light device B) is further provided.
When the movable screen (front screen mechanism E1) is arranged at the first position (front standby position), the fixed screen becomes a projection target of the projector.
When the movable screen is arranged at the second position (front exposed position), the movable screen is arranged in front of the fixed screen and is a projection target of the projector instead of the fixed screen.
The shaft (shaft member E3) is arranged behind the fixed screen.
The rotation shafts (rotation center shaft FG) of the two arms (crank members E22 and E22) are arranged in front of the rear end position of the fixed screen.

According to the gaming machine according to the above-described embodiment, since the shaft is arranged behind the fixed screen as a separate accessory, the light projected on the fixed screen is not obstructed by the shaft. Further, since the rotation axes of the two arms can be arranged in front of the rear end position of the fixed screen, the movable screen and the rotation can be arranged as compared with the case where they are arranged behind the rear end position of the fixed screen. The length between the moving shaft and the arm (arm length) can be shortened. Therefore, the size of the movable screen can be maintained to a desired degree even when the space inside the game machine is limited and the display unit cannot be enlarged.

(12-1) A housing (cabinet G) having an opening on the front surface
A partition plate (intermediate support plate G1) that divides the inside of the housing into a first space on the upper side and a second space on the lower side.
A display unit (display unit A) that is placed on the partition plate and is interchangeably housed in the first space of the housing.
A relay board (relay board CK) for relaying wiring connecting the display unit and the device accommodated in the second space is provided.
The display unit (A1) is
An accommodating portion (screen housing C10) having a pair of side plates (right side plate C2 and left side plate C3) and a back plate (back plate C4),
It is housed in the housing unit and includes display means (fixed screen mechanism D, front screen mechanism E1, reel screen mechanism F1) for displaying an image.
The back plate in the accommodating portion is arranged in front of the rear end of the pair of side walls.
The relay board is arranged in the back surface (back wall G3) of the housing and in the third space (GS) defined by the back plate and the pair of side plates in the accommodating portion.
The partition plate is formed with an opening (through hole G11) for inserting the wiring at a position facing the third space.

Conventionally, in order to facilitate the replacement of various parts, there is known a gaming machine in which a plurality of parts are unitized and can be replaced in units. For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-183427 describes a variable display device capable of displaying a plurality of identification information, a control device for controlling the variable display device, and a variable display unit in which a unit case for accommodating these is unitized. A game machine that is detachably stored with respect to the body is disclosed. In the gaming machine disclosed in this publication, the inside of the housing is divided into upper and lower parts by a variable display unit mounting table, the variable display unit is attached to the upper half of the housing, and devices such as a power supply device are mounted on the lower half of the housing. It is installed. A relay board for relaying wiring that electrically connects the control device of the variable display unit and the device attached to the lower half of the housing is attached to the front surface of the variable display unit. By the way, if the wiring is arranged in front of the various devices in the housing, the wiring becomes an obstacle in terms of aesthetics and operation of the various devices. Therefore, it is desirable to arrange the wiring behind the various devices. However, in the game machine disclosed in the above publication, since the relay board is attached to the front surface of the variable display unit, the wiring between the relay board and the device attached to the lower half of the housing is connected to various devices. It is difficult to place it in the rear.

According to the gaming machine according to the above-described embodiment, the relay board is arranged in the third space behind the display unit in the housing. Further, the wiring connecting the relay board and the equipment accommodated in the second space inserts an opening formed at a position facing the third space in the partition plate. As a result, it becomes easy to arrange the wiring behind various devices in the housing, so that the degree of freedom in wiring can be increased. Further, since the relay board is arranged on the back surface of the housing and in the third space defined by the back plate and the pair of side plates in the accommodating portion, when the display unit is accommodated in the accommodating portion, the relay board is arranged. It is possible to prevent contact with the back surface of the housing. As a result, the possibility of failure of the relay board can be reduced.

(12-2) The relay board (relay board CK) is arranged below the third space (space GS).

According to the game machine according to the above-described embodiment, since the relay board is arranged in the lower part of the third space, the wiring is connected to the relay board from the second space through the opening formed in the partition plate. It becomes easy to do.

(13-1) Display unit (display unit A) and
A gaming machine having an opening on the front surface and having a main body housing (cabinet G) for interchangeably accommodating the display unit.
The display unit is
Display means for displaying images (fixed screen mechanism D, front screen mechanism E1, reel screen mechanism F1),
A display unit housing (housing A1) for accommodating the display means is provided.
Recesses (recesses B132) are continuously formed from the front ends of the top plate members (projector cover B1) in the display unit housing toward the rear, and the recesses and the main body housing are formed. As a result, a work space (space BS) for installing and fixing the main body housing is defined on the island equipment (fixing plate member OC) arranged above the main body housing.

Conventionally, in order to facilitate the replacement of various parts, there is known a gaming machine in which a plurality of parts are unitized and can be replaced in units. For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-183427 describes a variable display device capable of displaying a plurality of identification information, a control device for controlling the variable display device, and a variable display unit in which a unit case for accommodating these is unitized. A game machine that is detachably stored with respect to the body is disclosed. By the way, in general, gaming machines such as pachislot machines and pachinko machines are installed in island facilities at gaming facilities for business. When this game machine is installed on the island equipment, the game machine is fixed to the island equipment by driving nails or the like from the inside of the housing to the island equipment via the top plate. Here, when installing a game machine with a replaceable unit as described above on the island facility, the game machine is installed with the unit removed so as not to damage the unit. That is required of workers. However, in reality, there is a problem that the operator dislikes an increase in the amount of work and performs the installation work of the game machine with the unit housed, resulting in damage to the unit. If the unit is damaged, it may not be possible to reuse the unit, and it will be different from a normal game machine, so it will not be allowed to operate because it is not a licensed game machine. There is a risk.

According to the gaming machine according to the above-described embodiment, recesses are formed at both end portions of the top plate member in the display unit housing. As a result, even when the display unit is housed in the main body housing, a work space for installing and fixing to the island equipment is secured between the display unit and the main body housing. As a result, it is possible to install the game machine on the island facility with the display unit housed while preventing the display unit from being damaged.

(13-2) An opening (opening G41) penetrating in the vertical direction is formed in the top plate member (upper surface wall G4) of the main body housing (cabinet G).
The main body housing includes a soft member (plate member G42) that is softer than the top plate member and is attached to the top plate member so as to close the opening.
The work space (space BS) is a space in which nails from the soft member to the island facility (fixing plate member OC) can be driven from inside the main body housing.

According to the gaming machine according to the above-described embodiment, it is possible to drive a nail without interfering with the display unit in a state where the display unit is housed in the main body housing. As a result, the game machine can be securely fixed to the island equipment while preventing the display unit from being damaged. Further, the game machine can be easily installed on the island facility by driving a nail into a soft member that is softer than the top plate member of the main body housing.

(14-1) A gaming machine provided with a display unit (display unit A) for displaying an image.
The display unit is
A first screen (fixed screen mechanism D) that can be a projection target of a projector (irradiation light device B) that projects an image, and
A second screen that can be projected by the projector, a first position that is arranged in front of the first screen and is projected by the projector instead of the first screen, and the projector. A second screen (front screen mechanism E1, reel screen mechanism F1) that can operate between and a second position outside the projection range of
A drive mechanism (front screen drive mechanism E2, reel screen drive mechanism F2) for driving the second screen between the first position and the second position,
A housing (screen housing C10) accommodating the first screen, the second screen, and the drive mechanism,
A relay board (relay board CK) for relaying wiring connecting the drive mechanism and a device outside the display unit is provided.
In the housing (screen housing C10), at least the bottom plate (bottom plate C1), the side plates (right side plate C2, left side plate C3), and the back plate (back plate C4) are separately molded, and the bottom plate, the above. It consists of assembling the side plate and the back plate.
The first screen, the drive mechanism, and the relay board are each positioned and arranged on any one of the bottom plate, the side plate, and the back plate, and the positioned plates are arranged with each other. different.

Conventionally, in order to facilitate the replacement of various parts, there is known a gaming machine in which a plurality of parts are unitized and can be replaced in units. For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-183427 describes a variable display device capable of displaying a plurality of identification information, a control device for controlling the variable display device, and a variable display unit in which a unit case for accommodating these is unitized. A game machine that is detachably stored with respect to the body is disclosed. In the game machine disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-183427, the unitized variable display unit is basically a unit that is commonly mounted regardless of the model of the game machine, and is a game machine. Depending on the model of the above, the production equipment and the like that cannot be shared between the models are not unitized. Here, if the production device depending on the model is manufactured separately for each model, the burden of manufacturing cost becomes large.

According to the gaming machine according to the above-described embodiment, different functional parts are positioned and arranged with respect to each plate of the housing (screen housing C10). Therefore, even if the display unit (display unit A) as a whole cannot be standardized between models, there is a possibility that it can be standardized between models for each plate of the housing. As a result, it becomes possible to manufacture the display unit at a lower cost than in the case of manufacturing the display unit for each model.

(14-2) The housing (screen housing C10) is assembled so that the bottom plate (bottom plate C1), the side plates (right side plate C2, left side plate C3), and the back plate (back plate C4) can be exchanged. Has been done.

According to the gaming machine according to the above-described embodiment, each plate of the housing (screen housing C10) is assembled so as to be replaceable. Therefore, the members of the display unit (display unit A) can be replaced in plate units. As a result, by exchanging the members on a board-by-board basis, it is possible to change the specifications of the display unit while reusing the members that are not subject to replacement of the display unit.

(14-3) The bottom plate (bottom plate C1) is formed with a recess (center mounting portion C11) for positioning and mounting the first screen (fixed screen mechanism D).
The drive mechanism (front screen mechanism E1, reel screen mechanism F1) is positioned and arranged on the side plate (right side plate C2, left side plate C3).
The relay board (relay board CK) is positioned and arranged on the back plate (back plate C4).

According to the game machine according to the above-described embodiment, the relay board (relay board CK) for relaying the wiring is positioned and arranged on the back plate (back plate C4), which makes it difficult for the player to visually recognize the wiring. be able to. Further, since the first screen (fixed screen mechanism D) is positioned by being placed in the recess (center mounting portion C11) formed in the bottom plate (bottom plate C1), the side plates (right side plate C2 and left side plate C3) are positioned. ) Or the back plate (back plate C4), the first screen can be positioned on the housing by a simple method.

(14-4) The display unit (display unit A) is
Decorative members (right movable body base C5, left) arranged between the drive mechanism (front screen drive mechanism E2, reel screen drive mechanism F2) and the second screen (front screen mechanism E1, reel screen mechanism F1). With a movable body base C6)
The bottom plate (bottom plate C1) is formed with recesses (right mounting portion C12 and left mounting portion C13) for arranging the decorative member.

According to the gaming machine according to the above-described embodiment, by arranging the decorative member between the driving mechanism and the second screen, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to see the driving mechanism. As a result, the aesthetic appearance of the game machine can be improved. Further, since the bottom plate of the housing is formed with a recess for arranging the decorative member, the decorative member can be easily arranged in the housing.

(15-1) A gaming machine provided with a display unit (display unit A) for displaying an image.
The display unit is
A projector (illumination light device B) for projecting images,
A reflection mirror (mirror mechanism B3) arranged in front of the projector and for reflecting the light emitted from the projector diagonally downward and backward.
A first screen (fixed screen mechanism D) that can be projected by the projector,
A second screen (front screen mechanism E1) that can be projected by the projector, and a first position (front standby position) that is arranged above the first screen and is outside the projection range of the projector. A second screen, which is arranged in front of the first screen and can operate between a second position (front exposure position) to be projected by the projector instead of the first screen.
Arms (crank members E22 / E22) having a rotation shaft (rotation center shaft FG) connected to the second screen, and
By transmitting the driving force generated from the power source (drive motor E25) to the arm and rotating the arm around the rotation axis, the second screen is moved to the first position and the said. It is equipped with a driving force transmitter (crank gear E21 / E21 / intermediate gear E23 / E23) that operates between the second position.
The rotation axis (rotation center axis FG) of the arm is from the center of the second screen when the second screen (front screen mechanism E1) is in the second position (front exposure position). Is also placed above,
The arm is connected to a position that is the upper part of the second screen when the second screen is in the first position.
When the second screen is in the second position, the second screen is tilted up from the rear end far from the reflection mirror to the front end close to the reflection mirror. It is configured in.

Conventionally, a game machine that displays an image projected from a projector on a screen is known (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-147828). According to this type of gaming machine, it is possible to express an image as much as a liquid crystal display, and it is possible to reduce the cost when the size is increased as compared with the liquid crystal display. Further, by appropriately setting the shape of the screen, it is possible to perform an image expression that is impossible with a liquid crystal display. By the way, in order to widen the range of video expression, it is conceivable to provide a plurality of screens including a movable screen in the game machine. In such a game machine, when a movable screen is to be projected by a projector, it is necessary to arrange the movable screen in front of other screens. On the other hand, when a screen other than the movable screen is to be projected by the projector, the movable screen must be placed outside the projection range of the projector so as not to interfere with the projection onto the other screen. is there. However, since the space for accommodating the display unit is limited in the housing of the game machine, the display unit cannot be enlarged. For this reason, the space in which the movable screen can operate is limited, and it is difficult to increase the size of the movable screen.

According to the gaming machine according to the above-described embodiment, the rotation axis of the arm is arranged above the center of the second screen when the second screen is in the second position, and the arm is: It is connected to a position that is the upper part of the second screen when the second screen is in the second position. As a result, the operating range when operating between the first position and the second position of the second screen can be reduced. By reducing the operating range of the second screen in this way, the size of the second screen can be increased. In addition, when the second screen is in the first position, the second screen is configured to be tilted up from the rear end far from the reflection mirror to the front end closer to the reflection mirror. Has been done. As a result, the vertical distance between the first screen and the second screen can be shortened as long as the projection of the projector on the first screen is not hindered. As a result, the second screen can be made even larger.

The projector (illumination light device B) is arranged above the first screen (fixed screen mechanism D) and the second screen (front screen mechanism E1), and the lower surface of the projector is a front portion thereof. It has an inclined surface that inclines upward from the rear to the front.

According to the gaming machine according to the above-described embodiment, since the lower surface of the projector has an inclined surface that inclines upward from the rear to the front, the second screen at the second position and the projector The vertical interval can be shortened. As a result, the second screen can be made even larger.

Conventionally, a game machine provided with a plurality of doors is known (Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 10-52525). By providing multiple doors in this way, the corresponding doors can be opened according to the purpose of replenishing medals, adjusting reel equipment, repairing equipment, etc., so that the game machine can be unnecessarily exposed to the outside. There is an advantage that the inside does not have to be exposed.

However, when a plurality of doors are provided, it is necessary to provide a locking means for locking each door, which causes a problem that the unlocking work becomes complicated and the number of parts increases.
In addition, inside the game machine, there are places that are frequently accessed such as replenishing medals, and there are places that are highly secure and rarely accessed, such as control boards, depending on the security. There is also a need to adopt locking means.

Therefore, the present invention has been made in view of the above problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of smoothly unlocking work and enhancing security inside the gaming machine. To do.

(16-1) One of the present inventions is an upper space having an openable and closable upper door mechanism DU, and
A lower space with a lower door mechanism DD that can be opened and closed,
Upper door mechanism DU can be locked with the upper door lock mechanism G52,
Lower door lock mechanism G51 that can lock the upper door mechanism DU, and
With
The upper door lock mechanism G52
Cylinder G5222 provided in the upper space and
A locking plate G5221 slidable in the cylinder G5222 on which the claw portions G5221a and G5221b are formed, and
Locked portions G511 and G521 provided in the upper door mechanism DU, and
The lower door mechanism DD
When the lower door mechanism DD is closed, the lower door mechanism DD interferes with the locking plate G5221 to prevent the locking plate G5221 from sliding, the locking plate G5221 is held in the cylinder G5222, and the claw portion. When G5221a and G5221b are locked to the locked portions G511 and G521 and the lower door mechanism DD is open, the interference of the lower door mechanism DD with the locking plate G5221 is released and the locking plate G5221 is slid. The gaming machine 1 is characterized in that it is provided at a position where the locking plate G5221 is released from the locked portions G511 and G521.

According to the above configuration, when the lower door mechanism DD is closed (the lower door mechanism DD is locked), the lower door mechanism DD physically interferes with the locking plate G5221 to cause the locking plate G5221 to slide. Stop moving. Then, the locking plate G5221 whose sliding is stopped is held in the cylinder G5222, so that the claw portions G5221a and G5221b are locked to the locked rods G521a and G521b, and the upper door mechanism DU is placed in the upper space. On the other hand, it becomes locked.
On the other hand, when the lower door mechanism DD is open (the lower door mechanism DD is unlocked), the physical interference of the lower door mechanism DD with the locking plate G5221 is released, so that the locking plate G5221 is a cylinder. It becomes slidable in the G5222, the locking rods G521a and G521b of the claws G5221a and G5221b are released, and the lock on the upper space of the upper door mechanism DU can be released.
As a result, in order to unlock the upper door mechanism DU, it is possible to first require a procedure for unlocking the lower door mechanism DD by the lower door lock mechanism G51. That is, in order to open the upper door mechanism DU, the lower door lock mechanism G51 must be unlocked, the lower door mechanism DD must be opened, and then the upper door lock mechanism G52 must be unlocked to provide security for the upper space. Can be enhanced.
As a result, the upper space can be made more secure than the lower space, and the lower space can be made a place where the lower space can be accessed more smoothly than the upper space.

(16-2) In the above-mentioned game machine 1, the lower door lock mechanism G51 is a cylinder lock G513 that can be locked / unlocked with a key.
A one-way hinge DD54 that applies a predetermined torque in the closing direction of the lower door mechanism DD is provided between the lower door mechanism DD and the lower space.
The locking portion G522 has a claw shape and has a claw shape.
The locked portion G521 has a rod shape and has a rod shape.
The claw-shaped claw portions G5221a and G5221b are characterized in that they are locked by being caught by the rod-shaped locked rods G521a and G521b.

According to the above configuration, in order to unlock the lower door mechanism DD, it is necessary to unlock the cylinder lock G513 with a key. For the administrator of the game machine 1, the key has an advantage that it is easy to manage because it is compact and suitable for carrying.
Further, a one-way hinge DD54 is adopted between the lower door mechanism DD and the lower space, in which a predetermined torque is applied in the direction in which the lower door mechanism DD is closed. As a result, torque is applied when closing the lower door mechanism DD, and the lower door mechanism DD can be quietly closed with respect to the lower space without applying a sudden load. As a result, it is possible to prevent a sudden load from being applied to the locking plate G5221 which is physically interfered with by the lower door mechanism DD.
Further, due to the sliding of the locking plate G5221, the claw-shaped claw portions G5221a and G5221b are caught by the rod-shaped locked rods G521a and G521b, and the hooking is released. As a result, it is possible to lock the upper space of the upper door mechanism DU linked to the sliding of the locking plate G5221.

(16-3) The upper door mechanism DU is rotatably supported at one end of the upper space.
The upper door lock mechanism G52 is characterized in that it is provided at an end portion opposite to the shaft-supported end portion.

According to the above configuration, since the upper door lock mechanism G52 is arranged on the side where the upper door mechanism DU is opened and closed, it is not necessary to open the lower door mechanism DD widely in order to unlock the upper door lock mechanism G52. .. As a result, in order to unlock the upper door mechanism DU, it is not necessary to unnecessarily expose the inside of the lower space to the outside, and security can be improved.

Conventionally, as disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2004-24410, there is known a gaming machine in which components are divided into a plurality of units and composed of connecting members connecting the components. By dividing the configuration into a plurality of units in this way, there is an advantage that the specifications can be changed or repaired easily because the units need only be replaced when the specifications are changed or repaired.

However, if the unit is divided into a plurality of units and the number of units is large, it may take time and effort to assemble, replace, and disassemble.

Therefore, the present invention has been made in view of the above problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of easily performing operations when assembling, replacing parts, and disassembling the game machine. To do.

(17-1) One of the present inventions is a cabinet G having a lower door DD1 that can be opened and closed, and
It is provided on the inner side of the lower door DD1 and has a plurality of reels RL, RC, RR on which a plurality of types of symbols are arranged, and displays fluctuations and stops of the symbols arranged on the reels RL, RC, RR. Reel unit RU that can be used
A start lever DD6 that outputs a command signal according to the operation by the player,
A symbol provided on the back side of the reel unit RU and arranged on the reels RL, RC, RR by stopping the rotation of the reels RL, RC, RR based on the command signal output from the start lever DD6. Main control board MS that stops and displays
It is a game machine 1 characterized by being provided with.

According to the above configuration, the lower door DD1 is provided with the reel unit RU, and the reel unit RU is further provided with the main control board MS. By integrating the lower door DD1, the reel unit RU, and the main control board MS in this way, it is possible to easily perform the work of assembling, replacing parts, and disassembling the game machine 1.
Further, the main control board MS is an important configuration for controlling the game, and it is necessary to take measures to prevent unauthorized removal. However, since the main control board MS is integrated with the reel unit RU, it is difficult to remove it. Can be configured.
Further, the main control board MS is provided on the back surface of the reel unit RU provided on the inner side of the lower door DD1. As a result, the main control board MS can be arranged on the back side of the cabinet G far from the lower door DD1 by the thickness of the lower door DD1 and the reel unit RU. As a result, a physical distance can be secured between the lower door DD1 and the main control board MS, and even if an unauthorized intrusion is made through the gap of the lower door DD1, the main control board MS can be reached. It becomes difficult and security can be improved.

(17-2) The present invention is characterized in that, in the game machine 1, the lower door DD1, the reel unit RU, and the main control board MS are integrally formed.

According to the above configuration, the lower door DD1, the reel unit RU, and the main control board MS are integrally formed. Therefore, when the specifications of the game machine 1 are changed, the exterior of the lower door DD1 is changed, the reel RL, The RC and RR symbols and the game content can be changed at once.

Conventionally, as disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2004-65493, in order to prevent unauthorized operation of the operation plate provided in the power supply device, a cover covering the operation plate is provided, and the cover is further attached to the closed position. A game machine equipped with a cover urging means is known. According to such a game machine, it is possible to prevent an unauthorized operation on the power supply device.

However, if the urging force by the cover urging means is strengthened, a strong force is required to open the cover, which may reduce the operability. Further, if the urging force by the cover urging means is weakened, sufficient urging force is not applied to the operation plate, and the effect of preventing illicit operation may be reduced.

Therefore, the present invention has been made in view of the above problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of enhancing security for a power supply device without deteriorating operability for the power supply device. And.

(18-1) One of the present inventions includes a cabinet G having a lower door mechanism DD that can be opened and closed.
Power supply device DE provided in the lower space and
The speaker DD25L provided on the lower door mechanism DD and
With
The power supply DE
Power switch DE1 that selects whether to supply power and
It has a switch cover DE2 that switches between an open state in which the power switch DE1 can be operated and a closed state in which the power switch DE1 cannot be operated.
The speaker DD25L
The gaming machine 1 is characterized by having a convex portion DD25L1 that interrupts the movement path of the switch cover DE2 when the lower door mechanism DD is closed and regulates the switch cover DE2 from being opened. ..

According to the above configuration, by closing the lower door mechanism DD, the convex portion DD25L1 of the speaker DD25L provided on the lower door mechanism DD interrupts the movement path of the switch cover DE2, and the switch cover DE2 is opened. Can be regulated. On the other hand, by opening the lower door mechanism DD, the restriction on the switch cover DE2 of the convex portion DD25L1 of the speaker DD25L provided on the lower door mechanism DD is released, so that the switch cover DE2 cannot be operated by the power switch DE1. It is possible to switch from the closed state to the open state in which the power switch DE1 can be operated.
As a result, while ensuring the operability of the power switch DE1 with the lower door mechanism DD open, it is possible to prevent unauthorized operation of the power supply device DE and enhance security.

(18-2) In the game machine 1, the switch cover DE2 is switched between the closed state and the open state by sliding.
The convex portion DD25L1 has a convex shape and has a convex shape.
When the lower door mechanism DD is closed, the switch cover DE2 interrupts the sliding movement path, and the switch cover DE2 is prevented from sliding into the open state.

According to the above configuration, the switch cover DE2 can be slid to switch between the closed state and the open state. This makes it possible to facilitate access to the power switch DE1 when the lower door mechanism DD is open.
Further, since the convex portion DD25L1 provided on the convex portion DD25L1 has a convex shape, the volume of the speaker DD25L itself can be increased, and the sound quality can be improved at the same time.

(13-1) In the game machine 1, the switch cover DE2 has an inclined surface DE2a.
The convex portion DD25L1 also has an inclined surface DD25La, and has an inclined surface DD25La.
When the lower door mechanism DD is closed while the switch cover DE2 is in the open state, the inclined surface DD25La of the convex portion DD25L1 comes into contact with the inclined surface DE2a of the switch cover DE2 and is pushed in, and the switch cover DE2 is slid to close. It is characterized by being in a state.

According to the above configuration, when the lower door mechanism DD is closed when the switch cover DE2 is in the closed state, the inclined surface DE2a of the switch cover DE2 and the inclined surface DD25La of the convex portion DD25L1 are arranged at opposite positions, and the switch is switched. The slide of the cover DE2 can be regulated.
On the other hand, when the lower door mechanism DD is closed while the switch cover DE2 is in the open state, the switch cover DE2 is in a position deviated from the closed position, so that the inclined surface DD25La of the convex portion DD25L1 becomes the switch cover DE2. Since the switch cover DE2 abuts on the inclined surface DE2a and is pushed in, the switch cover DE2 slides and moves to the closed position.
As a result, even if the switch cover DE2 is forgotten to be closed and the lower door mechanism DD is closed in the open state, the inclined surface DD25La of the convex portion DD25L1 becomes the inclined surface DE2a of the switch cover DE2. Since it abuts and is pushed in, the switch cover DE2 can be slid and moved to the closed position in conjunction with the operation of closing the lower door mechanism DD.

(19-1) A housing (cabinet G) having an opening (replenishment opening G31) through which a replenishment path (medal replenishment port P) of an automatic circulation replenishment device can be inserted on the back surface (rear wall G3).
A shielding member (shielding member MH1) formed in a flat plate shape capable of shielding the opening from the inside of the housing and screw-fixed to the back surface in a shielding state in which the opening is shielded.
A guide portion that slidably guides the shielding member (shielding member MH1) from the shielding state to an open state in which the opening is exposed, and a holding portion (holding portion MH23a) capable of holding the shielding member in the open state. (Guide member MH2) and
To be equipped.

Conventionally, the game machine is installed on the island where the game hall is installed. It is known that an automatic circulation replenishment device for replenishing a game machine with a game medium such as a medal is installed on such an installed island.

Since the game medium is replenished from the automatic circulation replenishment device, an opening is generally formed on the back surface of the game machine housing. For example, in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2001-2122282, an automatic circulation replenishment device connection opening composed of four arc-shaped openings whose connection is interrupted by a cutting portion is formed on the back surface of the game machine. When installing the game machine on the installation island where the automatic circulation replenishment device is laid, an opening is formed on the back of the housing by cutting the cut part and removing the inner closing plate to replenish the automatic circulation replenishment device. The road can be passed through this opening. The supply path is provided with an outlet above the hopper tank of the pachislot machine, for example, so that medals can be appropriately supplied to the hopper tank.

By the way, it is common practice to change the location of installed game machines and move them to different game fields. However, when the automatic circulation replenishment device is not installed on the island where the game machine is newly installed, the opening on the back surface of the housing once formed in the above-mentioned conventional game machine is maintained as it is, so that the opening is maintained. Was used illegally. Therefore, when the game machine applied to the installation island on which the automatic circulation replenishment device is laid is applied to the installation island on which the automatic circulation replenishment device is not laid, there is a problem that the security property is lowered.

According to the above configuration, an opening through which the supply path of the automatic circulation supply device can be inserted is formed on the back surface of the housing, and this opening can be shielded by a shielding member. The shielding member is guided by the guide member to slide between the shielded state and the open state. Further, the shielding member is screwed and fixed to the back surface of the housing in the shielding state, and is held by the guide member in the open state. As a result, when the game machine is installed on the installation island where the automatic circulation replenishment device is laid, the shielding member is slid to open the state, and the replenishment path of the automatic circulation replenishment device is inserted through the opening on the back surface. At this time, since the shielding member is held by the holding portion, it is possible to prevent the shielding member from being lost. Further, when moving the game machine, the opening can be shielded by sliding the shielding member and screwing and fixing in the shielding state. As a result, even if the game machine is applied to the installation island where the automatic circulation replenishment device is laid after being applied to the installation island where the automatic circulation replenishment device is not laid, the opening is shielded by the holding shielding member. It is possible to maintain security.

(19-2) A housing (cabinet G) having an opening (replenishment opening G31) through which a replenishment path (medal replenishment port P) of an automatic circulation replenishment device can be inserted on the back surface (rear wall G3).
It is formed in a rectangular flat plate shape that can shield the opening from the inside of the housing, and can be screwed and fixed to the back surface in a shielded state that shields the opening, and is perpendicular to the back surface on the upper edge. A shielding member (shielding member MH1) on which a protruding portion (projecting portion MH12) is formed, and
An upper edge portion (upper edge portion MH21) formed along the outer side of the upper edge of the shielding member in the shielding state and restricting the vertical upward movement of the shielding member, and both ends of the upper edge portion are one end. Two side edge portions (side edge portions MH22 and MH22) formed along the side edges of the shielding member in the shielding state in the vertical downward direction from the one end portion, and the other end of the two side edge portions. A guide groove (guide groove MH23b) that connects the shielding members and slides the shielding member in the vertical direction is formed on the back surface side, and a lower edge that supports the protruding portion of the shielding member on the upper surface and holds the shielding member. A guide member (guide member MH2) having a portion (lower edge portion 23, holding portion MH23a), and
To be equipped.

According to the above configuration, an opening through which the supply path of the automatic circulation supply device can be inserted is formed on the back surface of the housing, and this opening can be shielded by a shielding member. The shielding member is guided to slide between the shielding state and the open state by the guide groove formed in the lower edge portion of the guide member. Further, in the sliding of the shielding member, the movement in the vertical upward direction is restricted by the upper edge portion of the guide member, and the horizontal movement is restricted by the two side edge portions and the lower edge portion. It is possible to prevent the shielding member from coming off from the guide member when sliding. Further, the shielding member is screwed and fixed to the back surface of the housing in the shielding state, and is held by the guide member in the open state. As a result, when the game machine is installed on the installation island where the automatic circulation replenishment device is laid, the shielding member is slid to open the state, and the replenishment path of the automatic circulation replenishment device is inserted through the opening on the back surface. At this time, since the shielding member is held by the holding portion, it is possible to prevent the shielding member from being lost. Further, when moving the game machine, the opening can be shielded by sliding the shielding member and screwing and fixing in the shielding state. As a result, even if the game machine is applied to the installation island where the automatic circulation replenishment device is laid after being applied to the installation island where the automatic circulation replenishment device is not laid, the opening is shielded by the holding shielding member. It is possible to maintain security.

(19-3) The protruding portion of the shielding member protrudes from the lower edge portion that holds the shielding member.

According to the above configuration, the protruding portion can be easily grasped, and the transition from the open state to the shielded state can be easily performed.

Conventionally, in order to prevent medals from overflowing from the hopper device or auxiliary storage, a medal overflow prevention member such as a guide member is provided, and medals flowing from the selector to the hopper device, and the auxiliary storage from the hopper device. There is known a gaming machine that prevents medals that flow into the hopper from overflowing from the hopper device and the auxiliary storage (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2013-188397). According to such a game machine, it is possible to prevent a problem that overflowing medals are accumulated inside the game machine and interfere with other electronic devices and movable members.

However, in recent years, there is a new flow of medals other than the above-mentioned flow of medals, such as when automatically replenishing medals from the outside, and it is necessary to take measures against these new flows of medals.

Therefore, the present invention has been made in view of the above problems, and provides a gaming machine capable of preventing medals from overflowing from a hopper device or the like even when medals are replenished from the outside. The purpose is.

(20-1) One of the present inventions is cabinet G and
A medal replenishment mechanism MH provided on the back wall G3 of the cabinet G and accepting a thin metal medal inside the cabinet G,
A hopper mechanism HP having a bucket HP1 for storing medals received from the medal supply mechanism MH, and
A coin placed below the medal supply mechanism MH and hung from the back wall G3 of the cabinet G to the bucket HP1 so as to fill the gap HPG between the back wall G3 of the cabinet G and the bucket HP1 of the hopper mechanism HP. Guard HP30 and
It is a game machine 1 characterized by being provided with.

According to the above configuration, since the coin guard HP30 is provided so as to fill the gap HPG between the back wall G3 of the cabinet G and the bucket HP1 of the hopper mechanism HP, the medal received from the medal supply mechanism MH is a bucket. Even if it is about to overflow from HP1, it is possible to prevent it from entering the gap HPG between the back wall G3 of the cabinet G and the bucket HP1 of the hopper mechanism HP. As a result, it is possible to prevent the overflowing medals from accumulating in the gap HPG between the back wall G3 of the cabinet G and the bucket HP1 of the hopper mechanism HP and interfering with other electronic devices and movable members.

(20-2) The present invention includes an overflow bucket OF provided in the game machine 1 at a predetermined distance from the back wall G3 of the cabinet G and stores medals overflowing from the bucket HP1 of the hopper mechanism HP.
The coin guard HP30 is L-shaped by combining the first guard portion HP301 provided over the bucket HP1 from the back wall G3 of the cabinet G and the second guard portion HP302 provided over the bucket HP1 from the overflow bucket OF. It is characterized in that it is formed in a shape and is inclined so as to fall toward the bucket HP1 side.

According to the above configuration, the coin guard HP30 can also be arranged between the overflow bucket OF and the bucket HP1. This makes it possible to prevent the medals from overflowing between the overflow bucket OF and the bucket HP1.
Further, even when a medal is placed on the coin guard HP30, since it is inclined toward the bucket HP1, the medal slides down to the bucket HP1 side due to its own weight, and the medal can be normally stored in the hopper mechanism HP. ..

Conventionally, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-20154, as a hopper (coin payout device) capable of accommodating a plurality of coins is slidly installed inside a housing, a connector provided behind the hopper is molded. A game machine that can be electrically connected to a connector provided inside the body is known. According to such a game machine, the physical installation of the hopper in the housing and the electrical connection can be performed at the same time, so that the work efficiency of the installation / replacement / inspection of the hopper can be improved.

However, when the hopper is slid inside the housing, if the hopper is slid in a misaligned position, the connector provided behind the hopper may come into contact with the back plate of the housing and be damaged. There is.

In this regard, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-20154 provides a guide rail for guiding the hopper to slide. However, when the hopper is in a hurry to install the slide, the slide is installed without being correctly guided by the guide portion. In some cases, the guide part alone could not sufficiently protect the connector.

Therefore, the present invention has been made in view of the above problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of normally sliding and installing a hopper inside a housing.

(21-1) The present invention is a gaming machine 1 for connecting a connector HP41 provided on the back surface of the hopper mechanism HP to a connector G81 provided on the back side of the cabinet G.
A pair of guide pieces HP21 and HP22 provided on both side surfaces of the hopper mechanism HP, and
It is provided on the bottom plate G91 of the cabinet G, has an upper part HG121 / HG131 and a lower part HG123 / HG133, and sandwiches a pair of guide pieces HP21 / HP22 between the upper part HG121 / HG131 and the lower part HG123 / HG133. A pair of guide rails HG12 and HG13 that can guide the hopper mechanism HP so as to be slidable in the depth direction of the cabinet G in the state of being engaged with.
The protrusions HG124 / HG134 provided above the upper parts HG121 / HG131 of the guide rails HG12 / HG13 and on the front side of the connector HP41,
Is a game machine 1 having the above.

According to the above configuration, when the hopper mechanism HP is slidly installed on the bottom plate G91 of the cabinet G, the pair of guide pieces HP21 / HP22 provided on both side surfaces of the hopper mechanism HP are the upper parts of the guide rails HG12 / HG13. If the guide rails HG12 / HG13 are not pinched between the HG121 / HG131 and the lower parts HG123 / HG133 and are accidentally slid above the upper parts HG121 / HG131 of the guide rails HG12 / HG13, the guide pieces HP21 / HP22 will move to the guide rails. By contacting the protruding portions HG124 / HG134 provided above the upper portions HG121 / HG131 of the HG12 / HG13, it is possible to prevent the hopper mechanism HP from being slid and installed at an erroneous position. That is, the hopper mechanism HP can be normally slid and installed inside the cabinet G.
As a result, it is possible to prevent the hopper mechanism HP from being slid and installed at an erroneous position, the hopper mechanism HP coming into contact with the connector G81, and the connector G81 being damaged.

(21-2) The present invention is a gaming machine characterized in that a portion of the upper portions HG121 / HG131 of the guide rails HG12 / HG13 arranged in front of the cabinet G has a tapered shape.

According to the above configuration, when the hopper mechanism HP is engaged with the guide rails HG12 / HG13, it is possible to prevent the upper portions HG121 / HG131 of the guide rails HG12 / HG13 from coming into contact with the hopper mechanism HP.

(21-3) In the present invention, the pair of guide rails HG12 / HG13 lower portions HG123 / HG133, upper portions HG121 / HG131, and protruding portions HG124 / HG134 are integrally formed by bending one plate. It is a game machine characterized by.

According to the above configuration, the pair of guide rails HG12 / HG13 lower portions HG123 / HG133, upper portions HG121 / HG131, and protrusions HG124 / HG134 can be produced from a single plate. As a result, the manufacturing process can be simplified.

(21-4) Since the protrusions HG124 and HG134 are located on the back side of the cabinet G, when the hopper mechanism HP is temporarily placed around the guide rails HG12 and HG13 as a preparatory step for engaging the guide rails HG12 and HG13. Can be out of the way.

(21-5) Since the flat space HG17 is provided in front of the guide rails HG12 and HG13 on the bottom plate G91 of the cabinet G, the guide pieces HP21 and HP22 of the hopper mechanism HP are provided in the flat space HG17. The hopper mechanism HP can be temporarily placed as a preparatory step before engaging with the guide rails HG12 and HG13. As a result, the hopper mechanism HP can be slidably installed on the bottom of the cabinet G.

Conventionally, there is known a game machine in which a control board for controlling lottery and production associated with a game is arranged in the upper part of a housing, and a hopper device for handling medals is arranged in the lower part of the housing (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2013-188395). Issue). According to such a game machine, since there is a distance between the control board and the hopper device, it is possible to prevent the medals from physically contacting the control board, and the influence of radiation (electromagnetic field) due to the contact between the medals is also affected. It can be made smaller.

However, in recent years, in order to simplify parts replacement and recycling, it is becoming more common to unitize operation devices and production devices and arrange them on the upper part of the housing. Then, for convenience of design, the control board may be arranged at the lower part of the housing, and the distance between the control board and the hopper device may become short.

As a result, since the distance between the control board and the hopper device becomes short, the medals may physically contact the control board, or the influence of radiation (electromagnetic field) due to the contact between the medals may increase.

Therefore, the present invention has been made in view of the above problems, and the medal physically contacts the control board even when the distance between the control board and the hopper device is short. It is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine capable of preventing the above-mentioned problems and reducing the influence of radiation (electromagnetic field) due to contact between medals.

(22-1) One of the present inventions includes a cabinet G having an upper space and a lower space.
Display unit A provided in the upper space and
The sub-control device SS, which is located in the back of the lower space and controls the game,
The hopper mechanism HP, which is located in front of the sub control device SS in the lower space and stores metal medals,
Sheet metal BK provided between the sub control device SS and the hopper mechanism HP,
With
The sub-control device SS is a gaming machine 1 characterized in that it is sandwiched between a back wall G3 of a lower space and a sheet metal BK.

According to the above configuration, since the sheet metal BK is provided between the sub control device SS and the hopper mechanism HP, even if the medal flows into the hopper mechanism HP and jumps out to the sub control device SS side, the sheet metal BK This can prevent the medal from physically contacting the sub-control device SS. Further, since the sheet metal BK is provided between the sub control device SS and the hopper mechanism HP, the influence of radiation (electromagnetic field) due to the contact between the metal medals in the hopper mechanism HP can also be prevented by the sheet metal BK.
Further, since the sub control device SS is provided on the inner side of the lower space and is sandwiched between the back wall G3 of the lower space and the sheet metal BK, the sub control device SS is not removed from the cabinet G unless the sheet metal BK is removed. It cannot be removed. This enhances the security for the sub control device SS.

(22-2) Since the sheet metal BK is connected to the metal frame of the game machine 1, radiation due to contact of medals with the sheet metal BK and radiation due to contact between metal medals due to dropping medals can be generated. Can be grounded via a metal frame.

Conventionally, as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-12239, a button unit is provided with a locking portion elastically deformed on the side surface so that the front door can be attached to the opening from the front surface. There is known a gaming machine in which a button unit is provided with a flange portion larger than the opening in order to fill a gap between the button unit and the opening. In such a game machine, the button unit can be easily fitted into the opening from the front surface by utilizing the elastic deformation of the locking portion. Further, since the flange portion fills the gap between the button unit and the opening, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts such as removing the button unit by inserting a wire or the like through the gap and elastically deforming the locking portion.

However, there are cases where the button unit cannot be sufficiently fixed to the front door only by elastically deforming and fixing the locking portion to the back of the front door. In addition, the appearance may be impaired by exposing the flange portion to the outside (front door).

Therefore, the present invention has been made in view of the above problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of firmly fixing a button to a housing.

(23-1) One of the present inventions is cabinet G and
The maximum BET button DD8 attached via the opening DD2ba formed in the second pedestal portion DD2b and the second pedestal portion DD2b provided in the cabinet G, and
With
The maximum BET button DD8
An operation unit DD81 which is arranged outside the cabinet G with respect to the opening DD2ba and has communication holes DD816a / DD816b and screw holes DD8163a / DD8163b and has a flange DD8111 larger than the opening DD2ba.
A locking portion DD82 arranged on the inner side of the cabinet G with respect to the opening DD2ba, having communication holes DD826a and DD826b, and having a flange DD823 larger than the opening DD2ba.
The gaming machine 1 is characterized by including a communication hole DD826a / DD826b, a communication hole DD816a / DD816b, and a screw DD83a / DD83b that communicates with and screwes the screw holes DD8163a / DD8163b.

According to the above configuration, the operation unit DD81 and the locking portion DD82 are opened by the screws DD83a / DD83b that communicate and screw the communication holes DD826a / DD826b, the communication holes DD816a / DD816b, and the screw holes DD8163a / DD8163b. It can be fixed to the second pedestal portion DD2b via the portion DD2ba. Further, since the operation unit DD81 has a shape portion larger than the opening DD2ba, it is possible to prevent the maximum BET button DD8 from falling from the outside of the opening DD2ba to the inside of the cabinet G. Further, since the locking portion DD82 also has a flange DD823 larger than the opening DD2ba, it is possible to prevent the maximum BET button DD8 from coming out of the cabinet G from the inside of the opening DD2ba. As a result, the maximum BET button DD8 can be fixed to the second pedestal portion DD2b.

(23-2) In the present invention, in the game machine 1, the operation unit DD81 is
A button base DD811 having through holes DD811a and DD811b,
The first member DD812 that can slide through holes DD811a and DD811b by pressing, and
A spring DD813 that returns the DD812 pushed in by pressing to the initial position, and
Have,
The shape of the bottom surface of the first member DD812 and the shape of the top surface of the button base DD811 are the same.

According to the above configuration, the shape of the bottom surface of the first member DD812 and the shape of the top surface of the button base DD811 are the same. It is hidden so that only the first member DD812 pressed by the player can be shown to the outside. As a result, the appearance of the maximum BET button DD8 can be simplified, and the design of the appearance of the game machine 1 can be enhanced.
Further, since the shape of the bottom surface of the first member DD812 and the shape of the top surface of the button base DD811 are the same, the shape of the bottom surface of the first member DD812 is smaller than the shape of the top surface of the button base DD811. The structure can be easily prevented from illegally invading through the gaps between the through holes DD811a and DD811b of the base DD811.

(24-1) A symbol display means (reel device) including reels (reels RL, RC, RR) on which a plurality of types of symbols are arranged, and capable of displaying fluctuations and stops of the symbols arranged on the reels. RU) and
Start command means (start lever DD6, etc.) that outputs a start command signal according to the operation by the player, and
When the start command signal output from the start command means is detected, the reel is rotated to display the variation of the symbols arranged on the reel (main control board MS, drive). Control board RU114, motor drive unit RU113, etc.)
Stop command means (stop buttons DD7L, DD7C, DD7R, etc.) that output a stop command signal in response to an operation by the player, and
Stop control means (main control board MS, drive control board RU114) for stopping and displaying a symbol arranged on the reel by stopping the rotation of the reel based on the stop command signal output from the stop command means. , Motor drive unit RU113, etc.)
Reel position specifying means (main control board MS, drive control board RU114, etc.) for specifying the degree of displacement of the reel from the reference position due to rotation, and
A detection piece (detection piece RU1112) that rotates along a predetermined circumference (circumference RUD) as the reel rotates,
A sensor (sensor unit RU112) whose detection position is one point (detection point RUP) on the circumference, and
Reference position specifying means (main control board MS, etc.) for specifying whether or not the reel has reached the reference position based on the detection of the detection piece by the sensor, and
With
The reference position specifying means sets the position of the reel when it detects that the detection piece has changed from the undetected state to the detected state as the first reference position, and the detection piece is detected. The position of the reel when it is detected that the state has changed from the state to the undetected state is set as the second reference position.
The detection piece is continuously detected by the sensor from the position of the reel to the second reference position after the position of the reel becomes the first reference position.

Conventionally, a plurality of reels in which a plurality of symbols are arranged on each surface, a game medal, a coin, etc. (“medal, etc.”) are inserted, and it is detected that the start lever is operated by the player, and the plurality of reels are used. Detects that the start switch requesting the start of rotation of the reel and the stop button provided corresponding to each of the multiple reels have been pressed by the player, and outputs a signal requesting the stop of the rotation of the corresponding reel. The operation of the motor is controlled based on the stop switch, the motor provided corresponding to each of the multiple reels, and the motor that transmits each driving force to each reel, and the signals output by the start switch and the stop switch. , A reel control unit that rotates and stops each reel is provided, and when it detects that the start lever has been operated, a lottery is performed based on a random number value, and the result of this lottery (“internal winning combination”) and stop There is known a so-called pachislot game machine that stops the rotation of the reel based on the timing at which it is detected that the button has been operated.

As such a conventional game machine, a game machine using a stepping motor as a motor for driving the rotation of the reel is known (see JP-A-2006-263284). In such a game machine, a detection piece (reel index) is provided at a specific position on the reel, and the position of the reel can be calculated based on the number of times a pulse is output with reference to the detection of the reel index. .. By calculating the position of the reel by using such a method, it is not necessary to provide a number of detection pieces according to the symbol, and the cost can be reduced.

However, the position of the reel calculated while the detection piece is not detected is a theoretical position obtained based on the number of times the pulse is output, and when irregularities such as stopping the reel with bare hands occur, etc. , It may not always match the actual reel position.

According to the above configuration, the detection piece that rotates along a predetermined circumference as the reel rotates is continuously detected by a sensor whose detection position is one point on the circumference. Then, the first reference position is specified by detecting that the detection piece has changed from the undetected state to the detected state (so-called on-edge), and the detection piece is detected from the detected state. The second reference position is specified by detecting the change to the absence state (so-called off-edge). Therefore, during one rotation of the reel, it is possible to perform detection twice, when the position of the reel becomes the first reference position and when the position of the reel becomes the second reference position. In this way, since the detection is performed twice while the reel rotates once, the time until the stop operation becomes effective after the rotation speed of the reel reaches the theoretically specified speed (after the acceleration process is completed). Can be shortened. As a result, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the one-round push cannot be performed due to the relationship between the position of the symbol to be pressed and the position of the detection piece, and as a result, the uneven timing at which the stop operation becomes effective can be reduced. It is possible to reduce the number and prevent the player from feeling inconvenience during the stop operation.

(24-2) The first reference position and the second reference position are arranged so as to face each other on a straight line passing through the central axis of the reel with the central axis interposed therebetween.
The detection piece includes a region on the circumferential path from a position corresponding to the first reference position to a position corresponding to the second reference position along the circumferential path, and the second reference position. It has a shape that does not include a region from the position corresponding to the position corresponding to the position corresponding to the first reference position along the circumferential path.

According to the above configuration, even if only one sensor is provided, it is possible to perform detection twice while the reel rotates once, and the same effect as when two sensors are provided can be obtained. Be done. That is, without increasing the number of sensors, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the one-round pressing cannot be performed due to the relationship between the position of the symbol to be pressed and the position of the detection piece.

(25-1) A symbol display means (reel) having a plurality of reels (reels RL, RC, RR) on which a plurality of types of symbols are arranged, and capable of displaying fluctuations and stops of the symbols arranged on the reels. Device RU) and
Start command means (start lever DD6, etc.) that outputs a start command signal according to the operation by the player, and
When the start command signal output from the start command means is detected, the reel is rotated to display the variation of the symbols arranged on the reel (main control board MS, drive). Control board RU114, motor drive unit RU113, etc.)
Stop command means (stop buttons DD7L, DD7C, DD7R, etc.) that output a stop command signal in response to an operation by the player, and
Stop control means (main control board MS, drive control board RU114) for stopping and displaying a symbol arranged on the reel by stopping the rotation of the reel based on the stop command signal output from the stop command means. , Motor drive unit RU113, etc.)
The symbol display means includes a lighting means (backlight RR4, etc.) for illuminating the stop-displayed symbol from behind.
A support plate (motor mounting plate RU11) for supporting the reels is arranged between two adjacent reels among the plurality of reels.
The front portion of the support plate is formed in a substantially bow-shaped side view.

Conventionally, a plurality of reels in which a plurality of symbols are arranged on each surface, a game medal, a coin, etc. (“medal, etc.”) are inserted, and it is detected that the start lever is operated by the player, and the plurality of reels are used. Detects that the start switch requesting the start of rotation of the reel and the stop button provided corresponding to each of the multiple reels have been pressed by the player, and outputs a signal requesting the stop of the rotation of the corresponding reel. The operation of the stepping motor is based on the stop switch, the stepping motor that is provided corresponding to each of the multiple reels and transmits each driving force to each reel, and the signals output by the start switch and the stop switch. It is equipped with a reel control unit that controls and rotates and stops each reel, and when it detects that the start lever has been operated, a lottery is performed based on a random number value, and the result of this lottery (“internal winning combination”). A so-called pachislot game machine that stops the rotation of the reel based on the timing at which it is detected that the stop button has been operated is known.

As such a conventional game machine, a game machine provided with a back lamp that irradiates a symbol from the inside of the reel is known (see JP-A-2009-178268). According to such a game machine, when the combination of symbols is stopped and displayed, it is possible to give an effect to the symbol itself, such as highlighting the symbols constituting the combination of the symbols.

However, in general, in a game machine, since a plurality of reels are provided adjacent to each other in the lateral direction, the lights of the back lamps irradiating the adjacent reels interfere with each other, resulting in a good effect. There was a problem that I couldn't expect it.

According to the above configuration, a support plate that supports the reels is arranged between two adjacent reels, and the front portion of the support plate is formed in a substantially bow-shaped side view. Therefore, since the support plate has a shape protruding forward as compared with a support plate having a rectangular shape in a side view, it has a function as a partition plate, thereby illuminating one reel. It is possible to prevent the light from reaching the adjacent reels. Moreover, the function as a partition plate is not given by simply increasing the size of the support plate, but such a function is given by forming the front part of the support plate into a substantially bow-shaped side view. Therefore, the support plate is not conspicuous from the appearance of the player, and it is possible to prevent the appearance of the game machine from being spoiled.

The support plate has a front portion having a substantially arcuate shape in a lateral view and a rear portion having a shape (for example, a substantially rectangular shape in a lateral view) formed continuously from both ends of an arc defining the bow shape in a lateral view. It can be composed of parts. The bow shape is a figure surrounded by an arc and a chord connecting the ends of the arc.

Further, the support plate may directly support the reel, or may indirectly support the reel via another member. For example, the support plate may be a motor mounting plate for mounting a motor (stepping motor) that rotationally drives the reel.

(25-2) A symbol display means (reel) having a plurality of reels (reels RL, RC, RR) on which a plurality of types of symbols are arranged, and capable of displaying fluctuations and stops of the symbols arranged on the reels. Device RU) and
Start command means (start lever DD6, etc.) that outputs a start command signal according to the operation by the player, and
When the start command signal output from the start command means is detected, the reel is rotated to display the variation of the symbols arranged on the reel (main control board MS, drive). Control board RU114, motor drive unit RU113, etc.)
Stop command means (stop buttons DD7L, DD7C, DD7R, etc.) that output a stop command signal in response to an operation by the player, and
Stop control means (main control board MS, drive control board RU114) for stopping and displaying a symbol arranged on the reel by stopping the rotation of the reel based on the stop command signal output from the stop command means. , Motor drive unit RU113, etc.)
The symbol display means includes a lighting means (backlight RR4, etc.) for illuminating the stop-displayed symbol from behind.
A support plate (motor mounting plate RU11) for supporting the reels is arranged between two adjacent reels among the plurality of reels.
The front portion of the support plate is formed to have substantially the same shape as the reel in a side view.

According to the above configuration, a support plate that supports the reels is arranged between two adjacent reels, and the front portion of the support plate is formed to have substantially the same shape as the reels in a side view. Therefore, since the support plate has a shape protruding forward as compared with a support plate having a rectangular shape in a side view, it has a function as a partition plate, thereby illuminating one reel. It is possible to prevent the light from reaching the adjacent reels. Moreover, the function as a partition plate is not given by simply increasing the size of the support plate, but such a function is given by forming the front part of the support plate into substantially the same shape as the reel in the side view. Therefore, the support plate is not conspicuous from the appearance of the player, and it is possible to prevent the game machine from being spoiled.

It is desirable that the front portion of the support plate formed in substantially the same shape as the reel in the side view has substantially the same size as the portion of the opposing reel, and both of them overlap each other. That is, when viewed from one side, the front portion of the support plate is substantially completely covered by the reel, and when viewed from the other side, the portion of the reel facing the portion by the front portion of the support plate is substantially covered. It is desirable that it is completely covered. As a result, it is possible to provide the support plate with a function as a partition plate and to maintain the aesthetic appearance of the game machine in a well-balanced manner.

For example, the support plate is formed continuously from both ends of a substantially semicircular front portion that overlaps the front half of the reel in side view and both ends of an arc that defines the semicircle in side view. It may be composed of a rear portion having a shape (for example, a substantially rectangular shape in a side view).

(26-1) A symbol display means (reel device) including reels (reels RL, RC, RR) on which a plurality of types of symbols are arranged, and capable of displaying fluctuations and stops of the symbols arranged on the reels. RU) and
Start command means (start lever DD6, etc.) that outputs a start command signal according to the operation by the player, and
When the start command signal output from the start command means is detected, the reel is rotated to display the variation of the symbols arranged on the reel (main control board MS, drive). Control board RU114, motor drive unit RU113, etc.)
Stop command means (stop buttons DD7L, DD7C, DD7R, etc.) that output a stop command signal in response to an operation by the player, and
Stop control means (main control board MS, drive control board RU114) for stopping and displaying a symbol arranged on the reel by stopping the rotation of the reel based on the stop command signal output from the stop command means. , Motor drive unit RU113, etc.)
Reel position specifying means (main control board MS, drive control board RU114, etc.) for specifying the degree of displacement of the reel from the reference position due to rotation, and
A detection piece (detection piece RU1112) that rotates along a predetermined circumference as the reel rotates,
A sensor (sensor RU1121) that detects the detection piece and
Reference position specifying means (main control board MS, etc.) for specifying whether or not the reel has reached the reference position based on the detection of the detection piece by the sensor, and
With
The sensor is attached to a motor mounting plate (motor mounting plate RU11) for mounting a motor that rotationally drives the reel via a pedestal member (pedestal member RU1122).
The motor mounting plate has first predetermined positions and screw insertion portions (screw holes RU11c, screw holes RU11d) into which screws (screws RU1124a, RU1124b) for fastening the pedestal member to the motor mounting plate can be inserted. 2 At two locations on a second straight line (straight line RUDB) that is provided at a predetermined location and is substantially perpendicular to the first straight line (straight line RUDA) connecting the first predetermined location and the second predetermined location. Positioning insertion portions (fitting holes RU11e and RU11f) are provided at the third predetermined position and the fourth predetermined position located on opposite sides of the first straight line.
The pedestal member is provided with positioning protrusions (protruding portions RU1122j and RU1122k) that can be inserted into the positioning insertion portions provided at the two locations.

Conventionally, a plurality of reels in which a plurality of symbols are arranged on each surface, a game medal, a coin, etc. (“medal, etc.”) are inserted, and it is detected that the start lever is operated by the player, and the plurality of reels are used. Detects that the start switch requesting the start of rotation of the reel and the stop button provided corresponding to each of the multiple reels have been pressed by the player, and outputs a signal requesting the stop of the rotation of the corresponding reel. The operation of the stepping motor is based on the stop switch, the stepping motor that is provided corresponding to each of the multiple reels and transmits each driving force to each reel, and the signals output by the start switch and the stop switch. It is equipped with a reel control unit that controls and rotates and stops each reel, and when it detects that the start lever has been operated, a lottery is performed based on a random number value, and the result of this lottery (“internal winning combination”). A so-called pachislot game machine that stops the rotation of the reel based on the timing at which it is detected that the stop button has been operated is known.

In such a game machine, a reel index that rotates coaxially with the reel is provided in order to accurately control the rotation of the reel (see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2006-263284). The reel index rotates along a predetermined circumference, and the passage of the reel index is detected by a sensor whose detection position is one point on the rotation path. Then, the position where the reel index is detected is set as the reference position of the reel, and the position of the reel is calculated based on this reference position and the number of exciting steps of the stepping motor.

By the way, the conventional sensor for detecting a reel index is generally arranged on a motor mounting plate on which a reel motor is mounted via a pedestal member. As a result, the sensor is placed near the rotation path of the reel index. However, if the pedestal member is not accurately positioned on the motor mounting plate, the game machine may be damaged due to erroneous judgment of the game result determined based on the reel stop position or contact between the sensor and the reel index. There was a risk of

According to the above configuration, when mounting the motor mounting plate and the pedestal member, the positioning protrusions of the pedestal member are fitted into the positioning insertion portions of the third predetermined position and the fourth predetermined position of the motor mounting plate to form the motor. The pedestal member can be positioned with respect to the mounting plate, the screw is inserted into the screw insertion portion in the positioned state, and the motor mounting plate and the pedestal member are fixed with screws. The position of the pedestal member with respect to the motor mounting plate is regulated at four points, the two screw insertion portions and the two positioning insertion portions, and the first straight line connecting the two screw insertion portions and the two positioning insertion portions. It is set so that it is perpendicular to the second straight line connecting the two. As a result, it is possible to prevent the position of the pedestal member from being displaced with respect to the motor mounting plate. Further, since the screw stoppers are provided only at two places of the two screw insertion portions, the mounting work can be simplified. As a result, the pedestal member can be easily and accurately positioned and mounted on the motor mounting plate, and it is possible to prevent erroneous determination of the game result and damage to the game machine.

(26-2) The positioning insertion portion provided at one of the third predetermined portion and the fourth predetermined portion is formed in an elongated hole shape in which the second linear direction is the longitudinal direction. ..

According to the above configuration, in the two positioning insertion portions arranged on the second straight line, one is formed in an elongated hole shape in which the second straight line direction is the longitudinal direction. As a result, it is possible to allow an error in the distance between the two positioning protrusions in the pedestal member.

The longitudinal direction of the positioning insertion portion is substantially perpendicular to the tangential direction of rotation of the detection piece at the detection position of the sensor.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to prevent the sensor from erroneously detecting the reference position of the reel even if the fitting hole having the longitudinal direction is displaced from the pedestal member.

(27-1) A symbol display means (reel device) including reels (reels RL, RC, RR) on which a plurality of types of symbols are arranged, and capable of displaying fluctuations and stops of the symbols arranged on the reels. RU) and
Start command means (start lever DD6, etc.) that outputs a start command signal according to the operation by the player, and
When the start command signal output from the start command means is detected, the reel is rotated to display the variation of the symbols arranged on the reel (main control board MS, drive). Control board RU114, motor drive unit RU113, etc.
Stop command means (stop buttons DD7L, DD7C, DD7R, etc.) that output a stop command signal in response to an operation by the player, and
Stop control means (main control board MS, drive control board RU114) for stopping and displaying a symbol arranged on the reel by stopping the rotation of the reel based on the stop command signal output from the stop command means. , Motor drive unit RU113, etc.)
Reel position specifying means (main control board MS, drive control board RU114, etc.) for specifying the degree of displacement of the reel from the reference position due to rotation, and
A detection piece that rotates along a predetermined circumference as the reel rotates,
A sensor (sensor RU1121) that detects the detection piece and
Reference position specifying means (main control board MS, etc.) for specifying whether or not the reel has reached the reference position based on the detection of the detection piece by the sensor, and
With
The reel position specifying means
The sensor is attached to a motor mounting plate (motor mounting plate RU11) for mounting a motor that rotationally drives the reel via a pedestal member (pedestal member RU1122).
In the pedestal member, screw insertion portions (screw hole RU1122c, screw hole RU1122d) into which screws (screws RU1123a, RU1123b) for fastening the sensor to the pedestal member can be inserted are first predetermined positions and second predetermined locations. On the second straight line (straight line RUDD) substantially perpendicular to the first straight line (straight line RUDC) connecting the first predetermined place and the second predetermined place. Positioning protrusions (protruding portions RU1122e and RU1122f) are provided at the third predetermined position and the fourth predetermined position located on the side where the sensor detects the detection piece from the first straight line.
The sensor is provided with positioning insertion portions (fitting holes RU1124e and RU1124f) into which the positioning protrusions provided at the two locations can be inserted.

Conventionally, a plurality of reels in which a plurality of symbols are arranged on each surface, a game medal, a coin, etc. (“medal, etc.”) are inserted, and it is detected that the start lever is operated by the player, and the plurality of reels are used. Detects that the start switch requesting the start of rotation of the reel and the stop button provided corresponding to each of the multiple reels have been pressed by the player, and outputs a signal requesting the stop of the rotation of the corresponding reel. The operation of the stepping motor is based on the stop switch, the stepping motor that is provided corresponding to each of the multiple reels and transmits each driving force to each reel, and the signals output by the start switch and the stop switch. It is equipped with a reel control unit that controls and rotates and stops each reel, and when it detects that the start lever has been operated, a lottery is performed based on a random number value, and the result of this lottery (“internal winning combination”). A so-called pachislot game machine that stops the rotation of the reel based on the timing at which it is detected that the stop button has been operated is known.

In such a game machine, a reel index that rotates coaxially with the reel is provided in order to accurately control the rotation of the reel (see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2006-263284). The reel index rotates along a predetermined circumference, and the passage of the reel index is detected by a sensor whose detection position is one point on the rotation path. Then, the position where the reel index is detected is set as the reference position of the reel, and the position of the reel is calculated based on this reference position and the number of exciting steps of the stepping motor.

By the way, the conventional sensor for detecting a reel index is generally arranged on a motor mounting plate on which a reel motor is mounted via a pedestal member. As a result, the sensor is placed near the rotation path of the reel index. However, if the sensor is not accurately positioned on the pedestal member, there is a risk that the gaming machine may be damaged due to erroneous determination of the gaming result determined based on the reel stop position or contact between the sensor and the reel index. was there.

According to the above configuration, when the pedestal member and the sensor are attached, the positioning protrusions at the third predetermined position and the fourth predetermined position of the pedestal member are fitted into the positioning insertion portion of the sensor, so that the sensor can be attached to the pedestal member. Positioning can be performed, the screw is inserted into the screw insertion portion in the positioned state, and the pedestal member and the sensor are fixed by screwing. The position of the sensor with respect to the pedestal member is regulated at four points, the two screw insertion portions and the two positioning protrusions, and further connects the first straight line connecting the two screw insertion portions and the two positioning insertion portions. It is set so that it is perpendicular to the second straight line. This makes it possible to prevent the sensor from being displaced with respect to the pedestal member. Further, since the screw stoppers are provided only at two places of the two screw insertion portions, the mounting work can be simplified. As a result, the sensor can be easily and accurately positioned and attached to the pedestal member, and it is possible to prevent erroneous determination of the game result and damage to the game machine.

(27-2) The screw insertion portion provided at one of the first predetermined portion and the second predetermined portion is formed in an elongated hole shape in which the first linear direction is the longitudinal direction. ..

According to the above configuration, in the two screw insertion portions arranged on the first straight line, one is formed in an elongated hole shape in which the first straight line direction is the longitudinal direction. As a result, it is possible to allow an error in the distance between the two screwed portions in the sensor.

Conventionally, as disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-245279, there is known a gaming machine provided with a locking member which is attached after the button unit is attached and prevents the button unit from being illegally removed. According to such a game machine, by attaching the locking member to the existing button unit, it is possible to prevent the button unit from being illegally removed without changing the existing button unit.

However, in order to prevent unauthorized removal of the button unit, it is necessary to secure a storage space for the additional parts in the game machine, and it may not be easy to apply it. ..

Therefore, the present invention has been made in view of the above problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of preventing unauthorized removal of a button unit while suppressing an increase in the size of parts. To do.

(28-1) One of the present inventions includes a button base DD811 having through holes DD811a and DD811b.
The first member DD812 that can slide through holes DD811a and DD811b by pressing, and
A spring DD813 that returns the first member DD812 pushed in by pressing to the initial position, and
A photosensor DD814 having a light emitting unit DD814a and a light receiving unit DD814b,
A second member DD815 having a light-shielding piece DD8151 that blocks between the light-emitting portion DD814a and the light-receiving portion DD814b of the photosensor DD814, and
Equipped with a maximum BET button DD8 with
The second member DD815
It has a shape larger than the through holes DD811a and DD811b.
The gaming machine 1 is characterized in that it is attached to a portion of the first member DD812 that extends from the through holes DD811a and DD811b.

According to the above configuration, the second member DD815 has a shape larger than the through holes DD811a and DD811b provided in the button base DD811, and is attached to a part of the first member DD812 extending from the through holes DD811a and DD811b. Has been done. As a result, the second member DD815 can prevent the first member DD812 from coming out of the through holes DD811a and DD811b, and can prevent the maximum BET button DD8 from being illegally removed.
Moreover, since no other member is used, it is possible to suppress the increase in size of the parts.

(28-2) According to the present invention, in the game machine 1, the button base DD811 is formed with two through holes DD811a and DD811b.
The first member DD812 has two sliding portions DD8124a and DD8124b capable of sliding two through holes DD811a and DD811b.
The second member DD815 is attached so as to connect between the two sliding portions DD8124a and DD8124b extending from the two through holes DD811a and DD811b, and the light-shielding piece DD8151 has two penetrations of the second member DD815. It is characterized in that it is provided in an intermediate portion between two sliding portions DD8124a and DD8124b extending from the holes DD811a and DD811b.

According to the above configuration, in the light-shielding piece DD8151, two sliding portions DD8124a and DD8124b slide the two through holes DD811a and DD811b of the button base DD811 in conjunction with the pressing of the first member DD812 by the player. The light-shielding piece DD8151 provided in the intermediate portion of the second member DD815 attached between the two sliding portions DD8124a and DD8124b extending from the two through holes DD811a and DD811b It can be cut off across the gap.

(28-3) Since the first member DD812 has a shape larger than the through holes DD811a and DD811b, the first member DD812 is restricted from coming out of the through holes DD811a and DD811b on the second member DD815 side. , Unauthorized removal of the maximum BET button DD8 can be further prevented.

Conventionally, as disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2007-44199, there is known a gaming machine in which a front door is separated into an upper door and a lower door so that each can be opened and closed. According to such a game machine, it is possible to open and close only necessary parts such as when replenishing medals (opening and closing the lower door) and adjusting the mechanical reel (opening and closing the upper door), and the inside of the game machine is unnecessarily external. Can be prevented from being exposed to (improved security).

By the way, in recent years, in order to simplify parts of game machines, recycling, etc., operation devices, production devices, and the like have been unitized.

Here, for example, the unitized effect device is stored in the space on the housing side corresponding to the upper door. By doing so, it is possible to easily replace the production device when changing models or recycling.

However, if the unitized production device is large, the upper door (or lower door) may become an obstacle when changing models or recycling.

Therefore, the present invention has been made in view of the above problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of smoothly putting in and taking out a device housed inside the game machine.

(29-1) One of the present inventions is
The cabinet G has shaft portions UH21 / UH22 and engaging recesses UH23 / UH24.
The upper door mechanism DU that can be opened and closed with respect to the cabinet G
Bearings UH121 / UH131 rotatably polymerized on the shafts UH21 / UH22 and slidable with respect to the shaft UH121A of the shafts UH21 / UH22.
Until the upper door mechanism DU opens at a predetermined angle with respect to the cabinet G, it engages with the engaging recesses UH23 / UH24 to restrict the sliding of the bearing portions UH121 / UH131, and the upper door mechanism DU with respect to the cabinet G. Engagement convex portions UH15 / UH16, which are disengaged from the engagement recesses UH23 / UH24 when opened at a predetermined angle or more,
It is a game machine 1 characterized by having.

According to the above configuration, until the upper door mechanism DU opens at a predetermined angle with respect to the cabinet G, the engaging protrusions UH15 / UH16 engage with the engaging recesses UH23 / UH24, and the bearing portions UH121 / UH131 are shafts. Restricts sliding along the axis UH121A of the parts UH21 and UH22. As a result, it is possible to restrict the polymerization of the shaft portions UH21 / UH22 and the bearing portions UH121 / UH131 from being released, and to lock the upper door mechanism DU from being removed from the cabinet G.
On the other hand, when the upper door mechanism DU opens at a predetermined angle or more with respect to the cabinet G, the engaging protrusions UH15 / UH16 are disengaged from the engaging recesses UH23 / UH24, and the bearing portions UH121 / UH131 become the shaft portions UH21. -It becomes possible to slide along the axis UH121A of UH22. As a result, the polymerization of the shaft portions UH21 / UH22 and the bearing portions UH121 / UH131 is released, and the upper door mechanism DU can be removed from the cabinet G.
That is, the upper door mechanism DU can be removed from the cabinet G only when the upper door mechanism DU is opened at a predetermined angle or more with respect to the cabinet G.

(29-2) According to the present invention, in the game machine 1, the upper door mechanism DU is in a closed state with respect to the cabinet G and in an open state with 90 ° open with respect to the cabinet G. The predetermined angle is larger than the angle of the upper door mechanism DU in the closed state and smaller than 90 °, which is the angle of the upper door mechanism DU in the open state.

According to the above configuration, the upper door mechanism DU can be removed from the cabinet G without opening the upper door mechanism DU to the open state (opening at 90 °).

(30-1) A door that can open and close the front side of the housing,
A left-end light emitting mechanism, which is arranged at the left-end portion of the door and guides light to the left-end region of the door to emit light.
A right-end light emitting mechanism that is arranged at the right-end portion of the door and guides light to the right-end region of the door to emit light.
A central light emitting board that is placed in the center of the door and emits light,
It has a light guide mechanism that guides the light emitted from the central light emitting substrate to at least one region of the left peripheral region on the left end region side and the right peripheral region on the right end region side.

Conventionally, there is known a game machine equipped with an effect device capable of producing an effect by operating a movable body (see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2009-178268). According to such a game machine, through the movement of the movable body, it is possible to perform a powerful effect that cannot be obtained only by the image displayed on the liquid crystal display device. In recent years, it has been required to provide a plurality of such effect devices to further enhance the effect. Generally, since the game machines are installed side by side on the islands where they are installed in the game field, the size of the game machines is limited. However, when a plurality of effect devices are provided, there is a risk that sufficient space cannot be secured for a configuration including a reflector and a transmissive plate for producing light by a conventional LED. According to the above configuration, by guiding the light emitted from the central light emitting substrate to at least one of the left peripheral region and the left peripheral region by the light guide mechanism, it is difficult for the left end light emitting mechanism and the right end light emitting mechanism to guide the light. Light can be emitted even in the region. As a result, even if the door has a limited space, it is possible to produce light at a plurality of locations with a higher effect.

(30-2) The central light emitting substrate is provided with an upper light source and a lower light source on the upper surface and the lower surface, respectively.
An upper light guide mechanism that guides the light from the upper light source to a position separated from the central portion, and a lower light guide mechanism that guides the light from the lower light source to a position separated from the central portion. Have.

According to the above configuration, the upper light source on the upper surface and the lower light source on the lower surface of the central light emitting substrate can be used to emit light in the left peripheral region and the right peripheral region by the upper light guide mechanism and the lower light guide mechanism. The left peripheral area and the right peripheral area can be expanded to a wider range and place. As a result, even if the door has a limited space, it is possible to produce light at a plurality of locations with a higher effect.

(30-3) A door (upper door mechanism UD) that can open and close the front side of the housing,
The left end light emitting mechanism HA2, which is arranged at the left end portion of the door and causes the left end region of the door to emit light in a planar manner,
The right-end light emitting mechanism HA3, which is arranged at the right-end portion of the door and causes the right-end region of the door to emit light in a planar manner,
It has a central light emitting mechanism HA4 arranged in the center of the door, and has.
The central light emitting mechanism
A central light emitting substrate (LED substrate HA411 in the top lens) in which an upper light source and a lower light source are provided on the upper surface and the lower surface, respectively.
An upper light guide mechanism (left light guide lens HA413, right light guide lens HA414) that guides light from the upper light source provided on the upper surface of the central light emitting substrate to the upper light guide region and emits light in a planar manner.
A lower light guide mechanism (right downlight lens HA415, left downlight lens) that guides light from the lower light source provided on the lower surface of the central light emitting substrate to the lower light guide region and emits light in a planar manner. And have.

According to the above configuration, the central light emitting substrate of the central light emitting mechanism has an upper light source and a lower light source on the upper surface and the lower surface, respectively, and these light sources are formed by the upper light guide mechanism and the lower light guide mechanism, respectively, in the upper light guide region and The lower light source region is made to emit light in a planar manner. As a result, in addition to the left end region by the left end light emitting mechanism and the right end region by the right end light emitting mechanism, the upper light guide region and the lower light guide region can be made to emit light by one central light emitting mechanism, so that the space is limited. Even with a door, it is possible to produce light at a plurality of locations with a higher effect.

(30-4) The upper light guide mechanism and the lower light guide mechanism are arranged symmetrically with respect to the central light emitting substrate.

According to the above configuration, the upper light guide region and the lower light guide region exist symmetrically with respect to the central light emitting substrate, so that even if the door has a limited space, light can be produced at a plurality of locations. , Can be done with a higher effect.

(30-5) The upper light guide mechanism includes an upper reflector (reflector HA412 in the top lens, LED substrate hiding member HA16 in the top lens) that covers the upper surface of the central light emitting substrate and the upper light source, and the upper reflector and the center. It has an upper light guide lens (left light guide lens HA413, right light guide lens HA414) arranged on the right side and the left side of the gap with the light emitting substrate, respectively, and arranged up to the upper light guide region.
The lower light guide mechanism includes a lower reflector that covers the lower surface of the central light emitting substrate and the lower light source, the lower reflector (reflector HA412 in the top lens, LED substrate hiding member HA16 in the top lens), and the central light emitting. It has a lower light guide lens ((right downlight lens HA415, left downlight lens)) arranged on the side of the gap with the substrate and arranged up to the lower light guide region.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to realize the effect of light at a plurality of locations by a simple configuration of a reflector and a light guide lens.

(30-6) The upper light guide mechanism is arranged so as to emit light from the left end region of the door and each region on the center side from the right end region as the upper light guide region.
The lower light guide mechanism is arranged so that each region above the upper speaker arranged on the upper left side and the upper right side of the door emits light as a lower light guide region.

According to the above configuration, the upper light guide mechanism and the lower light guide mechanism can emit light in a region that cannot be sufficiently emitted by the left end light emitting mechanism and the right end light emitting mechanism.

(31-1) A gaming machine having an effect device (screen mechanism D) arranged in the center of the front surface of the housing (housing 2) and a light emitting unit (left panel mechanism HJ) arranged on the side of the effect device. And
The light emitting unit is
A light source device (left LED substrate HJ1) capable of irradiating light to the front side and the rear side of the housing, and
A partition member (partition mechanism HJ2) that divides the light toward the front surface into two and guides the divided light toward one side surface of the housing.
A side translucent member (upper left side lens HJ3) that constitutes a part of one side surface of the housing and transmits light divided into the one side guided by the partition member.
A front translucent member (lower left lens HJ) that constitutes a part of the front surface of the housing and transmits light divided into the other by the partition member.
An inner light guide member (inner light guide member HJ5) that guides light toward the rear surface direction in the direction in which the effect device is arranged, and
Have.

Conventionally, a game machine equipped with a production device capable of producing a production by operating a movable body is known (see Patent Document 1). According to such a game machine, through the movement of the movable body, it is possible to perform a powerful effect that cannot be obtained only by the image displayed on the liquid crystal display device. In recent years, it has been required to provide a plurality of such effect devices to further enhance the effect.

Generally, since the game machines are installed side by side on the islands where they are installed in the game field, the size of the game machines is limited. However, when a plurality of effect devices or an effect device that occupies a large space is provided, there is a possibility that sufficient space cannot be secured for the configuration including the conventional reflector and transmissive plate for producing light by the LED. there were.

According to the above configuration, the light emitted from the light source device toward the front surface of the housing is divided into two, one of which is guided by the partition member toward one side surface of the housing and transmitted from the side light transmitting member. The other is transmitted from the front translucent member. Further, the light emitted from the light source device toward the rear surface of the housing is guided to the effect device side by the light guide member. As a result, by simply providing the light emitting unit on the side surface side, it is possible not only to realize the effect light from the front surface and the side surface of the game machine housing, but also to irradiate the effect device side with the light. As a result, it is possible to save space in the configuration related to the effect light in the game machine, and it is possible to allow the effect device to be expanded.

(31-2) The inner light guide member is
A translucent member (left light guide plate HJ51) that is capable of transmitting light, is incident with light toward the rear surface of the light source device, and is arranged from the incident position to the peripheral edge of the front surface of the effect device.
A reflective member (left LED substrate cover HJ52) arranged so as to engage with the back surface side of the translucent member, and
Have,
The translucent member is
A protruding portion (protruding portion HJ511a) having a shape protruding to the light source device, arranged in the traveling direction of light toward the rear surface direction of the light source device, and incident with light toward the rear surface direction of the light source device. When,
It is a wall surface of the light transmitting member that is engaged with the reflecting member, is arranged in the traveling direction of the light incident on the protruding portion, and the reflecting surface is inclined in the direction toward the effect device side and is incident on the protruding portion. An inclined surface (inclined surface HJ511c) that reflects the emitted light toward the effect device,
An optical path portion (optical path portion HJ512) having a shape in which the light reflected by the inclined surface is advanced and bent with respect to the traveling direction of the light, and
A light emitting portion (light emitting portion HJ513) formed at the end of the optical path portion in the traveling direction of the light and having a zigzag shape in the front view cross section,
have.

According to the above configuration, the traveling direction of the light toward the rear surface of the light source device is changed to the effect device side by the reflecting portion after being incident on the protruding portion. Since the reflecting member is arranged so as to engage with the reflecting member, the light is reflected in the inner light guide member. Then, the reflected light passes through the optical path portion having a bent shape and then reaches the light emitting portion having a zigzag shape. As a result, the light emitting portion is diffusely refracted. As a result, various light traveling from the light source of the light emitting device is emitted to the outside, so that the effectability can be enhanced.

(32-1) A corner translucent member (upper left panel mechanism HB) arranged at a corner position on the front surface side of the upper surface of the housing, and
A support member (panel base HH) located behind the corner translucent member and
An outer wall member (top lens cover HA11) that is adjacent to the corner translucent member and is engaged with the adjacent portion.
Have,
The corner translucent member is
At the rear surface side position, a fitting portion (fitting portion HB11) into which a protruding portion (tight screw HH4) disposed so as to project from the support member toward the front surface is fitted.
A notch formed in the outer wall member, which is arranged at the adjacent portion on the front side of the fitting portion and projects in a direction different from the fitting direction of the fitting portion and in a direction toward the outer wall member. Locking pieces (locking pieces HB12, HB13, HB14) that engage with (notch HA111, HA112, HA113) and
have.

Conventionally, a game machine equipped with a production device capable of performing various effects is known. For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-013685 aims at a powerful effect that cannot be obtained only by an image or the like displayed on a liquid crystal display device through the movement of a movable body. In such a game machine, it is known that a part of the side surface or the front surface of the game machine is composed of a translucent member, and the effect is further enhanced by irradiating this with a light source from the inside of the game machine. ..

However, when it is simply fixed by a fixing member such as a screw, the light transmitting member transmits light, so that the fixing member is visually recognized from the outside, and there is a problem that the aesthetic appearance of the game machine is significantly impaired. Further, when the translucent member is extended to a place where it is difficult to see from the outside and fixed by the fixing member, there is a problem that the installation of a plurality of the above-mentioned conventional effect devices and the effect device occupying a large space is restricted. there were.

According to the above configuration, the translucent member is adjacent to the outer wall member in an engaged state, and the locking piece of the translucent member is engaged with the notch portion of the outer wall member. Then, by disposing the protruding portion in the front direction from the support member, the protruding portion is fitted into the fitting portion of the translucent member. Since the protruding portion is fitted into the fitting portion of the translucent member, the vertical movement of the translucent member is restricted. Further, since the fitting direction in the protruding portion and the protruding direction of the locking piece are arranged differently, the light-transmitting member is restricted from moving in the horizontal direction by the support member and the outer wall member. As a result, the translucent member can be easily attached to the game machine without using a fixing member and without spoiling the aesthetic appearance of the game machine.

(32-2) Further having a frame member (frame portion HB2) that supports the corner translucent member in the vertical direction,
The corner translucent member extends vertically below the frame member to a rear position of the frame member and has a regulating portion (regulating portion HB21) for restricting its own forward movement. doing.

According to the above configuration, since the translucent member is supported in the vertical direction by the frame member, it is possible to reduce the stress in the vertical direction on the protruding portion and the fitting portion into which the protruding portion is fitted. Further, since the restricting portion of the translucent member is arranged at the rear position of the frame member, the forward movement of the translucent member itself is restricted, and the horizontal stress on the locking piece and the notch can be reduced. it can. Thereby, deterioration of the light transmitting member and the structure related to the light transmitting member can be reduced.

(33-1) A door that can open and close the front side of the housing,
It has a decorative convex portion protruding forward from the upper part of the door.
A light guide plate (top lens light guide plate HA14) having a seamless structure in which the decorative convex portion diffuses light and uniformly emits light from the surface of the decorative convex portion is provided from the front end to the rear end of the decorative convex portion. It is formed by the decoration unit HA1.

Conventionally, as disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-245279, a gaming machine in which an effect device is provided on a front door is known. According to such a game machine, it is possible to perform various effects by using the effect device, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Since the front door faces the player, it is easily exposed to external force due to contact with the player, so it is necessary to ensure durability. However, if the layout and design of the production device are emphasized, the front door of the front door There was a problem that the durability was lowered. In particular, when a convex portion protruding from the front surface is provided, the possibility of contact increases, so that more durability is required.

According to the above configuration, when a plurality of parts are joined to form a light guide plate of a decorative unit, the load is concentrated on the joint portion of the light guide pieces between the parts, but any light guide plate having a seamless structure can be used. For this reason, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the load is concentrated on a part. As a result, the decorative convex portion formed by the decorative unit provided with the light guide plate having a seamless structure has a large rigidity and strength as a whole, so that an external force is applied by contact with a player located in front of the game machine. Even in such a case, it is less likely to be deformed or damaged, and as a result, the durability of the door can be made high.

(33-2) The decoration unit is
A hollow portion is formed by the top lens light guide plate base HA15 connected to the frame of the door and the top lens cover HA11 that transmits the light to the outside, and the light guide plate is housed in the hollow portion.
The front region is curved downward, the width in the left-right direction is reduced from the door side to the front end side, and the shape has an apex at the center of the front end.
The back surface of the front region and the frame of the door are connected by a horizontally arranged decorative unit support mechanism.

According to the above configuration, by accommodating the light guide plate in the hollow portion formed by the top lens light guide plate base and the top lens cover, the top lens light guide plate base, the top lens cover, and the light guide plate are simply laminated. It is possible to form a decorative convex portion having higher rigidity than in the case of a plate shape. Further, the bending moment increases as it approaches the front end portion away from the rear end portion connected to the door frame, but by reducing the width in the left-right direction on the front end portion side to reduce the weight, the rigidity of the front side region and It is possible to increase the strength. Further, the back surface of the front region of the decorative unit curved downward is connected to the frame of the door via the horizontally arranged decorative unit support mechanism, so that the back surface of the front region of the decorative unit is connected by the decorative unit support mechanism. It is supported in the horizontal direction, and the front region has a large rigidity and strength in the front-rear direction. As a result, even when an external force is applied to the decorative convex portion formed by the decorative unit by a player or the like, the door is less likely to be deformed or damaged, and as a result, the durability of the door can be improved. It has become.

(33-3) A door that can open and close the front side of the housing,
It has a decorative convex portion protruding forward from the upper part of the door.
The decorative convex portion is
It has a top lens light guide plate base connected to the frame of the door, a top lens light guide plate HA14 that diffuses light and uniformly emits it from the surface, and a top lens cover that transmits the light to the outside.
The width in the left-right direction is reduced from the door side to the front end side, and the decorative unit is formed in a shape having an apex at the center of the front end.

According to the above configuration, the bending moment increases as it approaches the front end portion away from the rear end portion connected to the frame of the door, but the rigidity is reduced by reducing the width in the left-right direction on the front end portion side to reduce the weight. And it is possible to increase the strength. As a result, the decorative convex portion has a large rigidity and strength in the front region, so that it is unlikely to be deformed or damaged even when an external force is applied due to contact with a player located in front of the gaming machine. As a result, it is possible to increase the durability of the door.

(33-4) The decoration unit is
A hollow portion is formed by the top lens light guide plate base and the top lens cover, and the top lens light guide plate is housed in the hollow portion.

According to the above configuration, the top lens light guide plate base, the top lens cover, and the top lens light guide plate are simplified by accommodating the top lens light guide plate in the hollow portion formed by the top lens light guide plate base and the top lens cover. Since the shape has a larger moment of inertia of area than when the lens is laminated to form a plate, it is possible to form a decorative convex portion having high rigidity.

(33-5) The decorative unit has a front region curved downward.
The back surface of the front region of the decorative unit and the frame of the door are connected by a horizontally arranged decorative unit support mechanism.

According to the above configuration, the back surface of the front region of the decorative unit is decorated by connecting the back surface of the front region of the decorative unit curved downward to the frame of the door via the horizontally arranged decorative unit support mechanism. It will be supported in the horizontal direction by the unit support mechanism. As a result, since the decorative convex portion having the decorative unit and the decorative unit support mechanism has a large rigidity and strength in the front-rear direction, external force is applied by contact with a player located in front of the gaming machine. Even in such a case, it is less likely to be deformed or damaged, and as a result, the durability of the door can be made high.

(33-6) Behind the decorative convex portion, an irradiation light device B that emits irradiation light in the direction of the screen device C arranged diagonally downward and rearward is arranged.

According to the above configuration, since a large space can be secured behind the decorative convex portion, the degree of freedom in the size and arrangement of the irradiation light device can be expanded, and the rigidity and strength of the decorative convex portion are high. , The irradiation light device can be sufficiently protected.

According to the gaming machine 1 according to the first and second embodiments described above, the projector mechanism B2, the fixed screen mechanism D, the front screen mechanism E1, and the reel screen mechanism F1 are positioned at predetermined positions in the display unit A. It is fixed. On the other hand, the mirror mechanism B3 is provided with a screw for adjusting the light reflection direction, and the screw is exposed toward the opening side of the cabinet 21. Therefore, even after the display unit A is installed in the cabinet 21 of the game machine 1, the light reflection direction (angle) can be changed by loosening or tightening the screw with the upper door mechanism UD open. Can be adjusted. As a result, the projection position can be adjusted even when the position of the image projected by the projector mechanism B2 is not appropriate.

In the first and second embodiments described above, the projector mechanism B2, the mirror mechanism B3, the fixed screen mechanism D, the front screen mechanism E1, and the reel screen mechanism F1 have been described as being unitized. However, the projector mechanism, the mirror mechanism, and various screens may be directly attached to the main body of the game machine without being unitized.

[Third Embodiment]
The first embodiment and the second embodiment have been described above. Hereinafter, the third embodiment will be described. The basic configuration of the game machine 1 according to the third embodiment is the same as that of the game machine 1 according to the second embodiment. In the following, the same components as the components of the game machine 1 according to the second embodiment will be described with the same reference numerals. In addition, the description of the portion to which the description in the second embodiment applies to the third embodiment will be omitted.

[Pachislot function flow]
First, the functional flow of the gaming machine (hereinafter, also referred to as pachislot) in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 145. FIG. 145 is a diagram showing a functional flow of pachislot.

In the pachislot machine according to the present embodiment, a medal is used as a game medium for playing a game. In addition to medals, coins, game balls, game point data, tokens, and the like can also be applied as the game medium.

When a medal is inserted by the player and the start lever is operated, one value (hereinafter, random number value) is extracted from random numbers in a predetermined numerical range (for example, 0 to 65535).

The internal lottery means draws a lot based on the extracted random number value, and determines the internal winning combination. By determining the internal winning combination, the combination of symbols that are allowed to be displayed along the winning determination line described later is determined. In addition, as the types of symbol combinations, there are those related to "winning" in which benefits such as medal payout and replay operation are given to the player, and those related to other so-called "loss". There is.

Subsequently, when the stop button is pressed by the player after the rotation of a plurality of reels (left reel, middle reel, and right reel) is performed, the reel stop control means has an internal winning combination and a stop button. Control is performed to stop the rotation of the corresponding reel based on the pressed timing.

Here, in pachislot, basically, control is performed to stop the rotation of the corresponding reel within a specified time (190 msec) from the time when the stop button is pressed. In the present embodiment, the number of symbols that move with the rotation of the reel within the specified time is called the "number of sliding pieces", and the maximum number is defined as four symbols.

When the internal winning combination that allows the display of the combination of symbols related to the winning is determined, the reel stop control means uses the above-mentioned specified time to display the combination of the symbols as much as possible along the winning determination line. Stop the rotation of the reel so as to. On the other hand, for the combination of symbols whose display is not permitted by the internal winning combination, the rotation of the reel is stopped so as not to be displayed along the winning determination line by using the above-mentioned specified time.

When all the rotations of the plurality of reels are stopped in this way, the winning determination means determines whether or not the combination of symbols displayed along the winning determination line is related to winning. When it is determined that the prize is related to a prize, the player is given a privilege such as paying out a medal. The above-mentioned series of flows is performed as one game (unit game) in pachislot.

In this specification, the first reel stop operation (stop button operation) performed when all reels (left reel, middle reel, and right reel) are rotating is referred to as a first stop operation. The stop operation performed after the first stop operation is referred to as a second stop operation, and the stop operation performed after the second stop operation is referred to as a third stop operation.

Further, in pachislot, in the series of flows described above, various effects are performed by using the display of images performed by the display unit, the output of light performed by various LEDs, the output of sound performed by speakers, or a combination thereof. Will be.

When the start lever is operated by the player, a random value for production (hereinafter referred to as a random value for production) is extracted in addition to the random value used for determining the internal winning combination described above. When the effect random value is extracted, the effect content determining means determines by lottery what to execute this time from a plurality of types of effect contents associated with the internal winning combination.

When the content of the effect is determined, the effect execution means is linked to each opportunity such as when the rotation of the reels is started, the rotation of each reel is stopped, or when it is determined whether or not there is a prize. And proceed with the execution of the production. In this way, in pachislot, the player is provided with an opportunity to know or anticipate the determined internal winning combination (in other words, the combination of symbols to be aimed at) by executing the production content associated with the internal winning combination. This will improve the interest of the players.

[Control system of pachislot]
Next, the control system included in the game machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 146 and 147.

As described in the second embodiment, the game machine 1 includes a main control board MS and a sub control device SS. The main control board MS constitutes the main control circuit 1060. The main control circuit 1060 is a circuit that controls the main flow of the game in the game machine 1, such as determination of the internal winning combination, rotation and stop of the reels RL, RC, and RR, and determination of the presence or absence of winning. The sub control device SS constitutes the sub control circuit 1070. The sub-control circuit 1070 is a circuit that controls the execution of an effect by displaying an image or the like.

In the second embodiment, it has been described that the drive of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 is controlled by the main control board MS. On the other hand, in the third embodiment, the drive of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 is controlled by the sub control device SS.

Hereinafter, specific configurations of the main control circuit 1060 and the sub control circuit 1070 will be described with reference to FIGS. 146 and 147.

<Main control circuit>
First, the main control circuit 1060 configured by the main control board MS will be described with reference to FIG. 146. FIG. 146 is a block diagram showing a configuration example of the main control circuit.

The main control circuit 1060 has a microcomputer 1030 installed on the main control board MS as a main component. The microcomputer 1030 is composed of a main CPU 1031, a main ROM 1032, and a main RAM 1033.

The main ROM 1032 stores a control program executed by the main CPU 1031, a data table such as an internal lottery table, data for transmitting various control commands (commands) to the sub control circuit 1070, and the like. The main RAM 1033 is provided with a storage area for storing various data such as internal winning combinations determined by executing the control program.

A clock pulse generation circuit 1034, a frequency divider 1035, a random number generator 1036, and a sampling circuit 1037 are connected to the main CPU 1031. The clock pulse generation circuit 1034 and the frequency divider 1035 generate a clock pulse. The main CPU 1031 executes a control program based on the generated clock pulse. The random number generator 1036 generates random numbers in a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 65535). The sampling circuit 1037 extracts one value from the generated random numbers.

A switch or the like is connected to the input port of the microcomputer 1030. The main CPU 1031 receives an input from a switch or the like and controls the operation of peripheral devices such as stepping motors 1049L, 1049C, and 1049R. The stop switch 1007S (stop switch 1007LS, 1007CS, 1007RS) detects that each of the three stop buttons DD7 (stop buttons DD7L, DD7C, DD7R) is pressed by the player (stop operation). Further, the start switch 1006S detects that the start lever DD6 has been operated by the player (start operation).

The medal sensor 1005S detects that the medal accepted by the medal insertion slot DD5 has passed through the selector. Further, the C / P switch 1013S detects that the C / P button DD13 has been pressed by the player.

The BET switch 1008S detects that the BET button has been pressed by the player. As the BET button, in addition to the maximum BET button DD8 described in the second embodiment, a 1-BET button is provided. As described above, when the maximum BET button DD8 is pressed once, "3" is selected as the number of medals to be inserted. On the other hand, when the 1-BET button is pressed once, "1" is selected as the number of medals to be inserted, and when the 1-BET button is pressed twice, "2" is selected as the number of medals to be inserted. When the BET button is pressed three times, "3" is selected as the number of medals to be inserted. When the BET button (maximum BET button DD8 or 1-BET button) is pressed and the number of medals required to perform one game (2 or 3 in this embodiment) is inserted, The winning judgment line is activated.

Peripheral devices whose operation is controlled by the microcomputer 1030 include stepping motors 1049L, 1049C, 1049R and a hopper mechanism HP. Further, a circuit for controlling the operation of each peripheral device is connected to the output port of the microcomputer 1030.

The drive control board RU114 controls the drive of the stepping motors 1049L, 1049C, 1049R provided corresponding to each reel (reel RL, RC, RR). The reel position detection circuit 1050 detects reference positions (first reference position and second reference position) each time the reels RL, RC, and RR make a half turn by an optical sensor (sensor unit RU112) having a light emitting unit and a light receiving unit. (See FIG. 116).

The stepping motors 1049L, 1049C, and 1049R have a configuration in which the momentum is proportional to the number of pulse outputs and the rotation axis can be stopped at a specified angle. The driving force of the stepping motors 1049L, 1049C, 1049R is transmitted to the reels RL, RC, RR via gears having a predetermined reduction ratio. Each time a pulse is output to the stepping motors 1049L, 1049C, 1049R, the reels RL, RC, and RR rotate at a constant angle.

The main CPU 1031 counts the number of times a pulse is output to the stepping motors 1049L, 1049C, 1049R after detecting the reference position, thereby rotating the reels RL, RC, RR (mainly, how many reels are symbols). (Whether it has rotated by the amount) is managed, and the position of each symbol arranged on the surface of the reels RL, RC, RR is managed.

The hopper drive circuit 1041 controls the operation of the hopper mechanism HP. Further, the payout completion signal circuit 1051 manages the detection of medals performed by the medal detection unit 1040S provided in the hopper mechanism HP, and checks whether or not the number of medals discharged to the outside from the hopper mechanism HP has reached the number of medals to be paid out. To do.

<Sub-control circuit>
Next, the sub-control circuit 1070 configured by the sub-control device SS will be described with reference to FIG. 147. FIG. 147 is a block diagram showing a configuration example of the sub-control circuit.

The sub-control circuit 1070 is electrically connected to the main control circuit 1060, and performs processing such as determination and execution of the effect content based on a command transmitted from the main control circuit 1060. The sub-control circuit 1070 basically includes a sub CPU 1071, a sub ROM 1072, a sub RAM 1073, a rendering processor 1074, a drawing RAM 1075, a driver 1076, a DSP (digital signal processor) 1077, an audio RAM 1078, an A / D converter 1079, and an amplifier 1080. Is configured to include.

The sub CPU 1071 controls the output of video, sound, and light according to the control program stored in the sub ROM 1072 in response to the command transmitted from the main control circuit 1060. The sub RAM 1073 is provided with a storage area for registering the determined effect content and effect data, and a storage area for storing various data such as an internal winning combination transmitted from the main control circuit 1060. The sub ROM 1072 is basically composed of a program storage area and a data storage area.

The control program executed by the sub CPU 1071 is stored in the program storage area. For example, the control program includes a main board communication task for controlling communication with the main control circuit 1060, and an effect registration task for extracting an effect random value and determining and registering the effect content (effect data). , Projection mapping control task that controls the display of the image by the display unit A based on the determined production content, LED control task that controls the light output by the LED, sound control task that controls the sound output by the speakers DD25L, DD25R, etc. Is included.

The data storage area stores a storage area for storing various data tables, a storage area for storing the effect data constituting each effect content, a storage area for storing animation data related to video creation, and sound data related to BGM and sound effects. A storage area, a storage area for storing LED data related to a pattern of turning on and off light, and the like are included.

Further, in the sub-control circuit 1070, as peripheral devices whose operations are controlled, a projector mechanism B2, a drive motor E25 constituting the front screen drive mechanism E2, a drive motor F24 constituting the reel screen drive mechanism F2, and a liquid crystal display device are provided. The DD20, the speakers DD25L, DD25R and the LED substrate are connected.

The projector mechanism B2 controls a light source, three liquid crystal panels corresponding to each of the three primary colors of light, red, green, and blue, a lens that magnifies and emits light transmitted through the liquid crystal panel, and the light source and the liquid crystal panel. It is a transmissive liquid crystal projector provided with a control unit. The control unit controls the lighting and extinguishing of the light source based on the instruction from the sub CPU 1071 and controls the application of the drive voltage according to the image data to each pixel of the liquid crystal panel.

The sub CPU 1071 controls the projector mechanism B2 to emit light including an image from the lens, thereby causing any one of a plurality of screens (fixed screen mechanism D, front screen mechanism E1, and reel screen mechanism F1). Display the image on the screen of.

As described in the second embodiment, the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 are movable screens, and are driven by the front screen drive mechanism E2 and the reel screen drive mechanism F2, respectively.

The sub CPU 1071 rotates the front screen mechanism E1 between the front exposed position and the front standby position by controlling the drive motor E25, while the sub CPU 1071 controls the drive motor F24 to expose the reel screen mechanism F1 to the reel. Rotate between the position and the reel standby position (see FIG. 53).

When the front screen mechanism E1 is arranged at the front exposed position, the front screen mechanism E1 is in a state of covering the fixed screen mechanism D from the front, and an image is displayed on the front screen mechanism E1 (see FIG. 51). ..

On the other hand, when the front screen mechanism E1 is arranged in the front standby position, if the reel screen mechanism F1 is arranged in the reel standby position, the fixed screen mechanism D is exposed and the fixed screen mechanism D is exposed. The image is displayed on the screen (see FIG. 50). On the other hand, if the reel screen mechanism F1 is arranged at the reel exposed position, the reel screen mechanism F1 is in a state of covering the fixed screen mechanism D from the front, and an image is displayed on the reel screen mechanism F1 (see FIG. 52). ..

When the front screen mechanism E1 is arranged at the front exposed position, the reel screen mechanism F1 cannot be arranged at the reel exposed position. Further, when the reel screen mechanism F1 is arranged at the reel exposed position, the front screen mechanism E1 cannot be arranged at the front exposed position.

The sub CPU 1071 executes the rotation operation of the front screen mechanism E1 on the condition that the reel screen mechanism F1 is present in the reel standby position, and the reel screen on the condition that the front screen mechanism E1 is present in the front standby position. The rotation operation of the mechanism F1 is executed.

A sensor mechanism CS (sensors CS1 to CS3) is connected to the sub-control circuit 1070, and the sub-CPU 1071 is used for signals output from the sensors CS1 to CS3 by the same method as described in the second embodiment. Based on this, the positions of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 are appropriately managed. This prevents the screen mechanisms from interfering with each other.

The sub CPU 1071, the rendering processor 1074, the drawing RAM 1075 (including the frame buffer), and the driver 1076 create an image according to the animation data specified by the effect content, and display the created image on the liquid crystal display device DD20.

Further, the sub CPU 1071, the DSP 1077, the audio RAM 1078, the A / D converter 1079, and the amplifier 1080 output sounds such as BGM by the speakers DD25L and DD25R according to the sound data specified by the effect content.

Further, the sub CPU 1071 controls the lighting and extinguishing of the LED via the LED substrate according to the LED data specified by the effect content.

[Sub-control board case]
The sub-control device SS constituting the sub-control circuit 1070 described above includes a sub-control board 2070 and a sub-control board case 2000 for accommodating the sub-control board 2070. Hereinafter, the configuration of the sub-control board case 2000 will be mainly described with reference to FIGS. 148 to 165.

FIG. 148 is an exploded perspective view of the sub control device. FIG. 149 is a perspective view of the base member. FIG. 150 is a perspective view of the cover member as viewed from the bottom surface side. FIG. 151 is a front view of the sub control device. FIG. 152A is a top view of the sub control device. FIG. 152B is a bottom view of the sub control device.

As shown in FIG. 148, the sub control device SS includes a sub control board 2070, a base member 2010, and a cover member 2020. The sub-control board case 2000 is composed of the base member 2010 and the cover member 2010.

The sub-control board 2070 is composed of two boards that are slid and arranged substantially in parallel, and various electronic components such as a CPU, ROM, and RAM are mounted on the sub-control board 2070. Further, the sub-control board 2070 is provided with a connector 2071 into which a cable for electrically connecting the sub-control board 2070 and another control board, device, or the like is inserted.

Further, the sub-control board 2070 is provided with screw holes 2072 for attaching the sub-control board 2070 to the base member 2010. Further, the sub-control board 2070 is formed with a through hole 2073 through which a screw is inserted when the base member 2010 and the cover member 2020 are assembled by screwing.

As shown in FIG. 149, the base member 2010 includes a bottom plate 2011 having a rectangular shape in terms of top view, and side edge portions 2012a, 2012b, 2012c, and 2012d that stand upward from each side forming the outer periphery of the bottom plate 2011. The side edge portions 2012a and 2012c are formed in the longitudinal direction of the base member 2010, and the side edge portions 2012b and 2012d are formed in the lateral direction of the base member 2010.

The bottom plate 2011 is provided with a boss portion 2013 for attaching the sub-control board 2070 to the base member 2010. Further, the bottom plate 2011 is formed with screw holes 2014 for assembling the base member 2010 and the cover member 2010 by screw fastening.

Base-side adhesive portions 2030 (2030a, 2030b, 2030c) for adhering the base member 2010 and the cover member 2020 are formed on the side edge portions 2012a, 2012b, and 2012c. The base-side adhesive portion 2030a formed on the side edge portion 2012a is provided at a position closer to the side edge portion 2012d than the center in the longitudinal direction of the side edge portion 2012a. The base-side adhesive portion 2030b formed on the side edge portion 2012b is provided at the center of the side edge portion 2012b in the lateral direction. The base-side adhesive portion 2030c formed on the side edge portion 2012c is provided at a position closer to the side edge portion 2012d than the center in the longitudinal direction of the side edge portion 2012c. The base-side adhesive portion 2030 will be described in detail later.

The bottom plate 2011 is formed with heat passage holes 2015. A heat sink 2074 is attached to the sub-control board 2070 by screwing (see FIG. 148), but the heat passage hole 2015 allows the sub-control device SS to face the screw when viewed from the bottom side. It is provided in a suitable position. As a result, heat can be released to the outside of the sub-control device SS through the heat passage hole 2015, and the heat dissipation effect can be enhanced.

The base member 2010 is made of ABS resin, and after the base side adhesive portions 2030 (2030a, 2030b, 2030c) and the portions other than the base side adhesive portion 2030 are separately formed, they are adhered and fixed. It is one. The portion of the base member 2010 other than the base-side adhesive portion 2030 is referred to as a base-side base portion. The base side base portion is plated, while the base side adhesive portion 2030 is not plated. In the present embodiment, the base member 2010 fixes the base side base portion and the base side adhesive portion 2030 after plating only the base side base portion among the base side base portion and the base side adhesive portion 2030. It is produced by

As shown in FIG. 150, the cover member 2020 has a box-shaped shape with an opening at the bottom, is rectangular in top view, and has a top plate 2021 formed with a predetermined step (see FIG. 148). And side edge portions 2022a, 2022b, 2022c, 2022d projecting downward from each side forming the outer periphery of the top plate 2021. The side edge portions 2022a and 2022c are formed in the longitudinal direction of the cover member 2020, and the side edge portions 2022b and 2022d are formed in the lateral direction of the cover member 2020.

In the state where the base member 2010 and the cover member 2020 are assembled, the side edge portion 2012a and the side edge portion 2022a form a continuous wall surface, and the side edge portion 2012b and the side edge portion 2022b form a continuous wall surface. , The side edge portion 2012c and the side edge portion 2022c form a continuous wall surface, and the side edge portion 2012d and the side edge portion 2022d form a continuous wall surface (see FIG. 151).

As shown in FIG. 150, a boss portion 2023 for assembling the base member 2010 and the cover member 2020 by screw fastening is formed inside the cover member 2020.

The side edge portions 2022a, 2022b, and 2022c are formed with cover-side adhesive portions 2050 (2050a, 2050b, 2050c) for adhering the base member 2010 and the cover member 2020. The cover-side adhesive portion 2050a formed on the side edge portion 2022a is provided at a position closer to the side edge portion 2022d than the center in the longitudinal direction of the side edge portion 2022a, and the base member 2010 and the cover member 2020 are assembled. In this state, it is formed at a position corresponding to the base-side adhesive portion 2030a. The cover-side adhesive portion 2050b formed on the side edge portion 2022b is provided in the center of the side edge portion 2022b in the lateral direction, and when the base member 2010 and the cover member 2020 are assembled, the base-side adhesive portion is provided. It is formed at a position corresponding to 2030b. The cover-side adhesive portion 2050c formed on the side edge portion 2022c is provided at a position closer to the side edge portion 2022d than the center in the longitudinal direction of the side edge portion 2022c, and the base member 2010 and the cover member 2020 are assembled. In this state, it is formed at a position corresponding to the base-side adhesive portion 2030c. The cover-side adhesive portion 2050 will be described in detail later.

As shown in FIG. 148, the side edge portion 2022d is formed with an opening 2024 for exposing the connector 2071 arranged on the sub-control board 2070 to the outside of the sub-control board case 2000. The opening 2024 is formed in a rectangular shape over a considerable range of the side edge portion 2022d, and the cover-side adhesive portions 2050a and 2050c are formed in the vicinity of the opening 2024.

The top plate 2021 is formed with ventilation holes 2025 and 2026 for allowing air to flow between the inside and the outside of the sub-control board case 2000. As a result, the heat generated inside the sub-control board case 2000 can be released to the outside, while the cold air can be taken into the sub-control board case 2000.

The cover member 2020 is made of ABS resin, and the cover-side adhesive portions 2050 (2050a, 2050b, 2050c) and the portions other than the cover-side adhesive portion 2050 are separately molded and then adhered and fixed. It is one. The portion of the cover member 2020 other than the cover-side adhesive portion 2050 is referred to as a cover-side base portion. The cover-side substrate portion is plated, while the cover-side adhesive portion 2050 is not plated. In the present embodiment, the cover member 2020 fixes the cover-side base portion and the cover-side adhesive portion 2050 after plating only the cover-side base portion of the cover-side base portion and the cover-side adhesive portion 2050. It is produced by doing.

The sub-control board 2070, the base member 2010, and the cover member 2020 as the components of the sub-control device SS have been described above, but the sub-control device SS is assembled by the following steps (i) to (iii). Will be.

(I) Screwing of the sub-control board 2070 and the base member 2010 First, the positions of the screw holes 2072 formed in the sub-control board 2070 and the positions of the boss portions 2013 provided in the bottom plate 2011 of the base member 2010 are aligned. .. In this state, the screw is inserted into the screw hole 2072 from above the sub-control board 2070, and the screw is screwed into the hole formed in the boss portion 2013. As a result, the sub-control board 2070 can be attached to the base member 2010.

(Ii) Screwing of the base member 2010 and the cover member 2020 After the step (i) above, the positions of the screw holes 2014 formed in the bottom plate 2011 of the base member 2010 and the boss portion 2020 formed in the cover member 2020. (At this time, the position of the through hole 2073 formed in the sub-control board 2070 also corresponds to the position of the screw hole 2014 and the boss portion 2023). In this state, the screw is inserted into the screw hole 2014 from below the bottom plate 2011, and the screw is screwed into the hole formed in the boss portion 2023. As a result, the base member 2010 and the cover member 2020 can be assembled.

(Iii) Adhesion of base member 2010 and cover member 2020 When the above step (ii) is completed, the base side adhesive portion 2030a and the cover side adhesive portion 2050a are arranged at corresponding positions and are adhered to the base side. The portion 2030b and the cover-side adhesive portion 2050b are arranged at corresponding positions, and the base-side adhesive portion 2030c and the cover-side adhesive portion 2050c are arranged at corresponding positions. In this state, the base side adhesive portion 2030a and the cover side adhesive portion 2050a are adhered with an adhesive, the base side adhesive portion 2030b and the cover side adhesive portion 2050b are adhered with an adhesive, and the base side adhesive portion 2030c and the cover side are adhered to each other. The adhesive portion 2050c is adhered with an adhesive.

The sub control device SS (see FIGS. 151 and 152) is assembled through the steps (i) to (iii) above.

The sub-control device SS assembled as described above is attached to the cabinet G (see FIG. 90). As shown in FIG. 152B, a locking portion 2001 is formed on the bottom surface side of the bottom plate 2011 of the base member 2010. By sliding the sub control device SS with respect to the back wall G3 while the bottom surface of the bottom plate 2011 and the back wall G3 of the cabinet G face each other, the sub control device SS is locked to the back wall G3 by the locking portion 2001. be able to. In this state, the sub control device SS is fixed to the back wall G3 by the screw inserted through the mounting hole 2002.

In the following, the steps of (iii) above will be described in detail with reference to the drawings regarding the configurations of the base-side adhesive portion 2030 and the cover-side adhesive portion 2050.

Since the base-side adhesive portion 2030a, the base-side adhesive portion 2030b, and the base-side adhesive portion 2030c have the same configuration, they will be described below without distinguishing them. Similarly, since the cover-side adhesive portion 2050a, the cover-side adhesive portion 2050b, and the cover-side adhesive portion 2050c have the same configuration, they will be described below without distinguishing them.

<Adhesive part on the base side>
The base-side adhesive portion 2030 will be described with reference to FIGS. 153 to 157. FIG. 153 is a perspective view of the base-side adhesive portion. FIG. 154 is a front view of the base-side adhesive portion. FIG. 155 is a perspective view of the base-side adhesive portion as viewed from the rear. FIG. 156 is a right side view of the base-side adhesive portion. FIG. 157 is a top view of the base-side adhesive portion.

The base-side adhesive portion 2030 has a structure protruding from the side edge portions 2012 (2012a, 2012b, 2012c) of the base member 2010.

Specifically, the base-side adhesive portion 2030 includes a front wall portion 2031 (see FIG. 154) having a front view trap shape. The front wall portion 2031 is opposite to one side edge portion 2012 (for example, side edge portion 2012a) with respect to the side edge portion 2012 (for example, side edge portion 2012c) facing the side edge portion 2012 (this). Is called the front).

Further, the base-side adhesive portion 2030 has an upper wall portion 2032 that continuously forms the upper end of the base-side adhesive portion 2030 from the front wall portion 2031 and a side end of the base-side adhesive portion 2030 that is continuous from the front wall portion 2031. The side wall portion 2033 to be formed, the bottom wall portion 2034 which continuously forms the lower end of the base side adhesive portion 2030 from the front wall portion 2031, and the rear end of the base side adhesive portion 2030 which is continuous from the upper wall portion 2032. It includes a rear wall portion 2035.

The upper wall portion 2032 is formed above the upper end surface 2028 of the side edge portion 2012, and the bottom wall portion 2034 is formed below the upper end surface 2028 of the side edge portion 2012 and above the lower end surface 2029. ing.

The rear wall portion 2035 is a rear wall main portion 2035a formed continuously from the rear end of the upper wall portion 2032 in the vertical direction, and a horizontal portion continuously formed from the lower end of the rear wall main portion 2035a toward the rear. The 2035b, the first inclined portion 2035c formed continuously from the rear end of the horizontal portion 2035b toward the rear, and the first inclined portion 2035c formed continuously from the rear end of the first inclined portion 2035c toward the rear. The second inclined portion 2035d having a steeper slope than the 2035c and the second inclined portion 2035d are continuously formed from the rear end to the rear, and the inclination is steeper than the first inclined portion 2035c and the second inclined portion 2035d. Also includes a third inclined portion 2035e having a gentle inclination. The rear end of the third inclined portion 2035e is continuous with the upper end surface 2028 of the side edge portion 2012.

The front wall portion 2031 is formed with a reference surface 2031a substantially parallel to the side edge portion 2012 in the vertical direction at the center, and is formed horizontally with a curved surface 2031b having a shape recessed with respect to the reference surface 2031a. It has a groove portion 2031c having a concave shape with respect to the reference surface 2031a.

The reference surface 2031a has a structure that is slightly bent near the center of the groove portion 2031c and the lower end portion of the front wall portion 2031. The curved surface 2031b has a shape obtained by cutting out the reference surface 2031a in an arc shape, and is formed so as to penetrate vertically from the upper wall portion 2032 to the bottom wall portion 2034. The groove portion 2031c is also formed in the side wall portion 2033 continuously from the front wall portion 2031, and has a shape in which the wall surfaces of the front wall portion 2031 and the side wall portion 2033 are cut out in a U shape. The rear end of the groove portion 2031c is a boundary between the side wall portion 2033 and the rear wall portion 2035, and is located near the center of the rear wall main portion 2035a in the vertical direction.

<Adhesive part on the cover side>
The cover-side adhesive portion 2050 will be described with reference to FIGS. 158 to 162. FIG. 158 is a perspective view of the cover-side adhesive portion. FIG. 159 is a right side view of the cover-side adhesive portion. FIG. 160 is a perspective view of the cover-side adhesive portion as viewed from below. FIG. 161 is a perspective view of the cover-side adhesive portion as viewed from below. FIG. 162 is a bottom view of the cover-side adhesive portion.

The cover-side adhesive portion 2050 has a structure protruding from the side edge portions 2022 (2022a, 2022b, 2022c) of the cover member 2020.

Specifically, the cover-side adhesive portion 2050 has a box-shaped shape with an opening at the bottom, and includes a front wall portion 2051, an upper wall portion 2052, and a side wall portion 2053.

The front wall portion 2051 is opposite to one side edge portion 2022 (for example, side edge portion 2022a) and the side edge portion 2022 (for example, side edge portion 2022c) facing the side edge portion 2022 (this). Is formed in the front direction), and has a shape in which two lower corners of the rectangle are cut out in a front view. Correspondingly, the side wall portion 2053 has a shape in which the front portion of the rectangle bulges downward, and the lower end of the bulging portion has substantially the same height as the lower end surface 2019 of the side edge portion 2022. It has become.

As shown in FIGS. 160 and 161, the inside of the cover-side adhesive portion 2050 is surrounded by the front inner wall portion 2054, the upper inner wall portion 2055, the side inner wall portion 2056, and the rear inner wall portion 2057. The front inner wall portion 2054 constitutes the inner wall of the front wall portion 2051, the upper inner wall portion 2055 constitutes the inner wall of the upper wall portion 2052, the side inner wall portion 2056 constitutes the inner wall of the side wall portion 2053, and the rear inner wall portion 2053. The 2057 has a structure that is continuous with the side edge portion 2022 and the side edge portion 2022 is deformed.

The front inner wall portion 2054 has a reference surface 2054a substantially parallel to the side edge portion 2022, and a curved surface 2054b formed in the vertical direction at the center and having a shape recessed with respect to the reference surface 2054a. The curved surface 2054b has a shape in which the reference surface 2054a is cut out in a tapered shape so that the diameter of the front inner wall portion 2054 decreases from the lower side to the upper side toward the upper side. Two rectangular protrusions 2055a are formed on the upper inner wall portion 2055.

The rear inner wall portion 2057 is substantially parallel to the front inner wall portion 2054 and has a bulging portion 2057a formed by bulging from the side edge portion 2022 and a curvature formed continuously from the lower end of the bulging portion 2057a toward the rear. A reference portion 2057c formed continuously from the rear end of the curved portion 2057b and downward from the rear end of the curved portion 2057b and substantially parallel to the front inner wall portion 2054, and an inclination formed continuously from the lower end of the reference portion 2057c toward the rear. It has a portion 2057d and a portion (see FIG. 165).

<Adhesion between base member and cover member>
Adhesion between the base member 2010 and the cover member 2020 (step of (iii) above) will be described with reference to FIGS. 163 to 165. FIG. 163 is a diagram showing a state when the base member and the cover member are aligned. FIG. 164 is a bottom view of the base side adhesive portion and the cover side adhesive portion in a state where the base member and the cover member are screwed together. FIG. 165 is a cross-sectional view taken along the arrow AA of the sub-control device shown in FIG. 152A.

As described above, the base member 2010 and the cover member 2020 are screwed together before the base member 2010 and the cover member 2020 are adhered to each other (step (ii) above). When the base member 2010 and the cover member 2020 are screwed together, the positions of the screw holes 2014 formed in the bottom plate 2011 of the base member 2010 and the positions of the boss portion 2030 formed in the cover member 2020 are aligned with each other. , The base side adhesive portion 2030 and the cover side adhesive portion 2050 are also at corresponding positions (see FIG. 163).

Then, when the base member 2010 and the cover member 2020 are screwed together, the upper end surface 2028 of the side edge portion 2012 of the base member 2010 (see FIG. 153) and the lower end surface 2019 of the side edge portion 2022 of the cover member 2020 (FIG. 153). (Refer to 159) is in contact with. At that time, the portion of the base-side adhesive portion 2030 formed above the upper end surface 2028 of the side edge portion 2012 is the opening of the cover-side adhesive portion 2050 (front inner wall portion 2054, upper inner wall portion 2055, and side inner wall portion). It is housed in a space surrounded by 2056 and the rear inner wall portion 2057 (see FIG. 164). The space surrounded by the front inner wall portion 2054, the upper inner wall portion 2055, the side inner wall portion 2056, and the rear inner wall portion 2057 is also referred to as an internal space of the cover side adhesive portion 2050.

In a state where the base-side adhesive portion 2030 is housed in the internal space of the cover-side adhesive portion 2050, the front inner wall portion 2054 of the cover-side adhesive portion 2050 is located in front of the front wall portion 2031 of the base-side adhesive portion 2030. A gap is formed between the front inner wall portion 2054 and the front wall portion 2031. In particular, the curved surface 2054b of the front inner wall portion 2054 and the curved surface 2031b of the front wall portion 2031 face each other, and a large gap is generated between the curved surface 2054b and the curved surface 2031b as compared with the surroundings.

In the present embodiment, the nozzle is inserted through the gap formed between the curved surface 2054b and the curved surface 2031b, and the adhesive is injected using the nozzle. As described above, the curved surface 2054b of the cover-side adhesive portion 2050 has a tapered shape, but the shape corresponds to the shape of the nozzle, and when the adhesive is injected, the nozzle becomes curved surface 2054b. Engage. A relatively large gap exists between the curved surface 2054b and the curved surface 2031b, and a structure is formed in which a nozzle can be easily inserted. The nozzle is inserted from the bottom surface side of the cover side adhesive portion 2050 and the base side adhesive portion 2030, and when the adhesive is injected, the cover is provided so that the upper inner wall portion 2055 of the cover side adhesive portion 2050 is located below. The positions of the side adhesive portion 2050 and the base side adhesive portion 2030 are maintained.

As the adhesive, an ultraviolet curable adhesive is used. The ultraviolet curable adhesive injected from the nozzle is filled in the portion of the internal space of the cover-side adhesive portion 2050 that is not occupied by the base-side adhesive portion 2030.

Specifically, in the internal space of the cover-side adhesive portion 2050, a gap is generated between the front inner wall portion 2054 of the cover-side adhesive portion 2050 and the front wall portion 2031 of the base-side adhesive portion 2030 in the front, and the rear. A gap is also formed between the rear inner wall portion 2057 of the cover-side adhesive portion 2050 and the rear wall portion 2035 of the base-side adhesive portion 2030 (see FIG. 165), and the gap is filled with the ultraviolet curable adhesive. To.

The ultraviolet curable adhesive injected from the nozzle moves rearward along the groove portion 2031c formed in the front wall portion 2031. Since the groove portion 2031c is formed symmetrically with respect to the curved surface 2031b (see FIG. 154), the amount of the ultraviolet curable adhesive that moves rearward on the right side and the left side of the curved surface 2031b is unlikely to be biased, and ultraviolet rays are not generated. The curable adhesive can be uniformly filled.

Further, in a state where the base-side adhesive portion 2030 is accommodated in the internal space of the cover-side adhesive portion 2050, the upper wall portion 2032 of the base-side adhesive portion 2030 is a protrusion formed on the upper inner wall portion 2055 of the cover-side adhesive portion 2050. It comes into contact with 2055a (see FIG. 165). Therefore, a gap is formed between the portion of the upper inner wall portion 2055 where the protrusion 2055a is not formed and the upper wall portion 2032, and the ultraviolet curable adhesive injected from the nozzle moves rearward from the gap as well. ..

In the present embodiment, since the protrusion 2055a is formed on the upper inner wall portion 2055 of the cover-side adhesive portion 2050, the base-side adhesive portion 2030 is accommodated in the internal space of the cover-side adhesive portion 2050. If the base-side adhesive portion 2030 is pushed into the cover-side adhesive portion 2050 until the upper wall portion 2032 abuts on the protrusion 2055a, a gap (of the adhesive) is automatically provided between the upper inner wall portion 2055 and the upper wall portion 2032. (Movement route) will occur. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently secure the moving path of the adhesive without requiring time-consuming work such as alignment.

Further, if an error occurs in the size of the base side adhesive portion 2030 and the cover side adhesive portion 2050 in the molding process (the position of the upper wall portion 2032 of the base side adhesive portion 2030 is formed high, or the cover is formed). Even if the position of the upper inner wall portion 2055 of the side adhesive portion 2050 is formed low), a gap of at least the height of the protrusion 2055a is secured between the upper inner wall portion 2055 and the upper wall portion 2032. be able to. This makes it possible to prevent the movement path of the adhesive from being blocked.

In this way, the portion of the internal space of the cover-side adhesive portion 2050 that is not occupied by the base-side adhesive portion 2030 is filled with the ultraviolet-curable adhesive, and then irradiated with ultraviolet rays to cure the ultraviolet-curable adhesive. Will be done. As a result, the wall portions (front inner wall portion 2054, upper inner wall portion 2055, side inner wall portion 2056, and rear inner wall portion 2057) constituting the internal space of the cover side adhesive portion 2050 via the cured adhesive, and the said The base side adhesive portion 2030 housed in the space is adhered.

The gaming machine 1 according to the third embodiment has been described above. The gaming machine 1 according to the third embodiment has the following features.

(34-1) A control board (sub-control board 2070) for controlling the game, and
A gaming machine including a board case (sub-control board case 2000) for accommodating the control board.
The substrate case is configured by assembling a first member (cover member 2020) and a second member (base member 2010).
The first member is formed with a first adhesive portion (cover-side adhesive portion 2050) for adhering the first member and the second member, while the second member is formed with the first adhesive portion. A second adhesive portion (base side adhesive portion 2030) for adhering the member and the second member is formed.
The first adhesive portion is formed so as to surround the second adhesive portion.
The first adhesive portion and the second adhesive portion are adhered to each other by an adhesive interposed between the first adhesive portion and the second adhesive portion.
A game machine characterized by that.

According to the game machine 1 according to the third embodiment, the sub-control board case 2000 is configured by assembling the cover member 2020 and the base member 2010, and the cover side adhesive portion 2050 is formed on the cover member 2020. On the other hand, the base member 2010 is formed with a base-side adhesive portion 2030. The cover-side adhesive portion 2050 is formed so as to surround the base-side adhesive portion 2030, and the cover-side adhesive portion 2050 and the base-side adhesive portion 2030 are between the cover-side adhesive portion 2050 and the base-side adhesive portion 2030. It is adhered by an intervening adhesive.

That is, with the cover-side adhesive portion 2050 surrounding the base-side adhesive portion 2030, an adhesive is interposed between the cover-side adhesive portion 2050 and the base-side adhesive portion 2030, and the cover-side adhesive portion is provided with the adhesive. The 2050 and the base side adhesive portion 2030 are adhered to each other. Therefore, the sub-control board case 2000 cannot be opened unless the cover-side adhesive portion 2050 and the base-side adhesive portion 2030 surrounded by the cover-side adhesive portion 2050 are removed as a unit. Therefore, in order to open the sub-control board case 2000, it is necessary to destroy the cover-side adhesive portion 2050, the base-side adhesive portion 2030, and their surroundings, so that the sub-control board case 2000 is easily opened. Can be prevented.

(34-2) A control board (sub-control board 2070) for controlling the game, and
A gaming machine including a board case (sub-control board case 2000) for accommodating the control board.
The substrate case is configured by assembling a first member (cover member 2020) and a second member (base member 2010).
The first member is formed with a first adhesive portion (cover-side adhesive portion 2050) for adhering the first member and the second member, while the second member is formed with the first adhesive portion. A second adhesive portion (base side adhesive portion 2030) for adhering the member and the second member is formed.
In a state where the first member and the second member are not assembled, the first adhesive portion forms a space in which the adhesive before curing can be stored.
In the state where the first member and the second member are assembled, the space accommodates at least a part of the second adhesive portion and the cured adhesive, and the first adhesive portion and the said The second adhesive portion is adhered by the cured adhesive.
A game machine characterized by that.

According to the game machine 1 according to the third embodiment, the sub-control board case 2000 is configured by assembling the cover member 2020 and the base member 2010, and the cover side adhesive portion 2050 is formed on the cover member 2020. On the other hand, the base member 2010 is formed with a base-side adhesive portion 2030. In a state where the cover member 2020 and the base member 2010 are not assembled, the cover-side adhesive portion 2050 forms a space in which the adhesive before curing can be stored, and the cover member 2020 and the base member 2010 are assembled. In this state, the space (internal space of the cover-side adhesive portion 2050) accommodates at least a part of the base-side adhesive portion 2030 and the cured adhesive, and the cover-side adhesive portion 2050 and the base side. The adhesive portion 2030 is adhered to the cured adhesive.

That is, with the base-side adhesive portion 2030 accommodated in the space formed by the cover-side adhesive portion 2050, the adhesive is interposed between the cover-side adhesive portion 2050 and the base-side adhesive portion 2030 in a cured state. The cover-side adhesive portion 2050 and the base-side adhesive portion 2030 are adhered to each other by the adhesive. Therefore, the sub-control board case 2000 cannot be opened unless the cover-side adhesive portion 2050 and the base-side adhesive portion 2030 accommodated in the space formed by the cover-side adhesive portion 2050 are removed together. Therefore, in order to open the sub-control board case 2000, it is necessary to destroy the cover-side adhesive portion 2050, the base-side adhesive portion 2030, and their surroundings, so that the sub-control board case 2000 is easily opened. Can be prevented.

Further, according to the game machine 1 according to the third embodiment, the side edge portion 2022d of the cover member 2020 is formed with an opening 2024 for exposing the connector 2071 to the outside of the sub-control board case 2000. On the other hand, the cover-side adhesive portion 2050a and the cover-side adhesive portion 2050c of the cover member 2020 are provided at positions close to the side edge portion 2022d, and the base-side adhesive portion 2030a and the base-side adhesive portion 2030c of the base member 2010 are on the side. It is provided at a position close to the side edge portion 2012d corresponding to the edge portion 2022d. That is, in the vicinity of the opening 2024, the cover-side adhesive portion 2050a and the base-side adhesive portion 2030a are adhered, and the cover-side adhesive portion 2050c and the base-side adhesive portion 2030c are adhered to each other. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the sub-control board case 2000 from being illegally opened through the opening 2024.

In the third embodiment, it has been described that the base-side adhesive portion 2030 formed on the base member 2010 is housed in the internal space of the cover-side adhesive portion 2050 formed on the cover member 2020. The cover member 2020 corresponds to the first member in the present invention, and the base member 2010 corresponds to the second member in the present invention. Further, the cover-side adhesive portion 2050 corresponds to the first adhesive portion in the present invention, and the base-side adhesive portion 2030 corresponds to the second adhesive portion in the present invention. In the present invention, contrary to the third embodiment, the base-side adhesive portion may form an internal space, and the cover-side adhesive portion may be accommodated in the internal space.

Further, in the third embodiment, the base member 2010 is bonded and fixed after the base-side adhesive portions 2030 (2030a, 2030b, 2030c) and the portions other than the base-side adhesive portion 2030 are separately formed. It was explained as being integrated by. Further, the cover member 2020 is integrated by separately forming the cover-side adhesive portions 2050 (2050a, 2050b, 2050c) and the portions other than the cover-side adhesive portion 2050, and then adhering and fixing them. I explained it as a thing. However, in the present invention, in the first member, the first adhesive portion and the portion other than the first adhesive portion may be integrally molded, and the second member is a portion other than the second adhesive portion and the second adhesive portion. And may be integrally molded.

Further, in the third embodiment, it has been described that an ultraviolet curable adhesive is used as an adhesive to be interposed between the cover side adhesive portion 2050 and the base side adhesive portion 2030. The ultraviolet curable adhesive is not particularly limited as long as it is cured by irradiating with ultraviolet rays, and may be, for example, an acrylate-based adhesive as a radical polymerization type or an epoxy as a cationic polymerization type. It may be a radical adhesive. In the present invention, the adhesive for adhering the first adhesive portion and the second adhesive portion is not particularly limited, and is a photocurable resin containing, for example, a monomer, an oligomer, a photopolymerization initiator, various additives, and the like. , Curable adhesives other than photocurable adhesives such as heat-curable adhesives and moisture-curable adhesives, and other adhesives can be appropriately adopted.

Further, in the third embodiment, it has been described that the cover member 2020 and the base member 2010 are made of ABS resin. In the present invention, the materials of the first member and the second member are not particularly limited, and a transparent synthetic resin such as polycarbonate can be appropriately adopted.

Further, the mounting position and mounting method of the first member (cover member 2020) and the second member (base member 2010), and the mounting of the board case (sub-control board case 2000) and the control board (sub-control board 2070). The position and mounting method are not limited to the example of the third embodiment, and can be changed as appropriate.

In the third embodiment, it has been described that the sub control device SS is attached to the cabinet G so that the bottom surface of the bottom plate 2011 of the base member 2010 and the back wall G3 of the cabinet G face each other. However, the mounting position and mounting method of the sub control device are not limited to this example, and can be appropriately changed. For example, the sub-control device may be mounted on the door side where the cabinet can be opened and closed and on the back side of the liquid crystal display device. In this case, the heat passage hole 2015 (see FIG. 149) receives heat from the liquid crystal display device and transfers the heat to the heat sink 2074 (see FIG. 148) (with the fan 2075 provided on the cover member 2020 side). Take on.

(34-3) The gaming machine according to (34-1) or (34-2).
While at least a part of the surface of the substrate case is plated, the surfaces of the first adhesive portion and the second adhesive portion that are in contact with the adhesive are plated. Not
It is characterized by that.

According to the game machine 1 according to the third embodiment, the surface of the sub-control board case 2000 is plated. As a result, it is possible to block electrical or magnetic noise, and it is possible to prevent the sub-control board 2070 from malfunctioning due to the influence of the noise.

On the other hand, if the bonding portion between the cover member 2020 and the base member 2010 is plated, there is a concern that the adhesive may shift or peel off during the bonding process. In this regard, according to the game machine 1 according to the third embodiment, the cover side adhesive portion 2050 and the base side adhesive portion 2030 are formed as the adhesive portions between the cover member 2020 and the base member 2010, and the cover side adhesive portion 2050 and the cover side adhesive portion 2050 are formed. The base side adhesive portion 2030 is not plated. As a result, the above-mentioned problems do not occur in the bonding process, and the bonding strength between the cover member 2020 and the base member 2010 can be ensured.

The plating process is not particularly limited, and examples thereof include using copper as the base plating and performing nickel plating on the copper.

In the third embodiment, it is assumed that the cover-side adhesive portion 2050 (2050a, 2050b, 2050c) and the portion other than the cover-side adhesive portion 2050 (cover-side base portion) are molded separately, and the cover-side base portion is formed. It is described that the cover member 2020 is manufactured by fixing only the cover side base portion with the cover side adhesive portion 2050 and then fixing the cover side base portion and the cover side adhesive portion 2050. did. Further, on the premise that the base side adhesive portion 2030 (2030a, 2030b, 2030c) and the portion other than the base side adhesive portion 2030 (base side base portion) are separately formed, the base side base portion and the base side adhesive are bonded. It has been described that the base member 2010 is produced by plating only the base side base portion of the portion 2030 and then fixing the base side base portion and the base side adhesive portion 2030.

However, as described above, in the present invention, the first member and the second member may be integrally molded including the first adhesive portion and the second adhesive portion, respectively. In this case, the method of partial plating It is sufficient to prevent the bonding portion between the first bonding portion and the second bonding portion from being plated. For example, in the third embodiment, the wall portions (front inner wall portion 2054, upper inner wall portion 2055, side inner wall portion 2056, and rear inner wall portion 2057) constituting the internal space of the cover side adhesive portion 2050, and the base side. Masking may be applied to the portions of the adhesive portion 2030 that are formed above the upper end surface 2028 of the side edge portion 2012 so that the plating process is not performed.

Further, a cover member may be manufactured by molding and plating only the cover-side base portion and then insert-molding the cover-side adhesive portion, or molding and plating only the base-side base portion. After that, the base member may be manufactured by insert molding the base-side adhesive portion.

Further, in the third embodiment, it has been described that both the cover member 2020 and the base member 2010 are plated, but only the cover member 2020 may be plated. As described in the second embodiment, the sub-control device SS may be affected by radiation (electromagnetic field) due to contact between metal medals in the hopper mechanism HP, in order to avoid the influence of the electromagnetic field. It is desirable that the cover member 2020 whose surface is exposed toward the inside of the cabinet G (hopper mechanism HP side) is plated rather than the base member 2010 attached to the back wall G3 (see FIG. 90).

(34-4) The gaming machine according to any one of (34-1) to (34-3).
The first adhesive portion (cover side adhesive portion 2050) has an opening formed on one side, a closed wall portion (upper wall portion 2052) formed on the opposite side of the opening, and the closed wall portion. A peripheral wall portion (front wall portion 2051 and side wall portion 2053) formed to continuously form the opening and surround the second adhesive portion is provided.
A protrusion (protrusion 2055a) is formed inside the closed wall portion, while a first tapered recess (curved surface 2054b) is formed inside the peripheral wall portion from the opening side to the closed wall portion side. Has been formed and
A second recess (curved surface 2031b) is formed in the second adhesive portion (base side adhesive portion 2030) so as to face the first recess in a state where the first member and the second member are assembled. On the other hand, a groove (groove 2031c) is formed along the outer circumference of the second adhesive portion.
It is characterized by that.

According to the game machine 1 according to the third embodiment, the front inner wall portion 2054 of the cover side adhesive portion 2050 is formed with a tapered curved surface 2054b from the opening side to the upper inner wall portion 2055 side, and the base side adhesive portion 2030 is formed. The curved surface 2031b is formed so as to face the curved surface 2054b. Therefore, there is a relatively large gap between the curved surface 2054b and the curved surface 2031b in a state where no adhesive is interposed between the cover-side adhesive portion 2050 and the base-side adhesive portion 2030. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently inject the adhesive between the cover-side adhesive portion 2050 and the base-side adhesive portion 2030 by utilizing the gap, and the cover-side adhesive portion 2050 and the base-side adhesive portion 2030 can be combined. Can be effectively bonded.

Further, according to the game machine 1 according to the third embodiment, the groove portion 2031c is formed along the wall surfaces of the front wall portion 2031 and the side wall portion 2033 of the base side adhesive portion 2030. Therefore, the adhesive injected from between the curved surface 2054b and the curved surface 2031b can be moved to another place in the space formed by the cover-side adhesive portion 2050 along the groove portion 2031c, and the space can be moved. The adhesive can be filled throughout.

Further, according to the game machine 1 according to the third embodiment, the protrusion 2055a is formed on the upper inner wall portion 2055 of the cover-side adhesive portion 2050. Therefore, when the base-side adhesive portion 2030 comes into contact with the protrusion 2055a in a state where the base-side adhesive portion 2030 is accommodated in the space formed by the cover-side adhesive portion 2050, the upper inner wall portion 2055 of the cover-side adhesive portion 2050 A gap is formed between the portion where the protrusion 2055a is not formed and the base-side adhesive portion 2030. Therefore, the adhesive can be interposed in the gap, and the adhesive strength between the cover-side adhesive portion 2050 and the base-side adhesive portion 2030 can be improved.

As shown in FIG. 162, when the first adhesive portion (cover side adhesive portion 2050) is viewed from the opening side, the first recess (curved surface 2054b) is the peripheral wall portion of the first adhesive portion (cover side adhesive portion 2050). It is desirable that it is formed substantially in the center in the left-right direction inside the (front wall portion 2051). Further, as shown in FIG. 154, when the second adhesive portion (base side adhesive portion 2030) is viewed from the front, the second recess (curved surface 2031b) is left and right in the second adhesive portion (base side adhesive portion 2030). It is desirable that it is formed approximately in the center of the direction. Further, it is desirable that the groove (groove 2031c) along the outer circumference of the second adhesive portion (base side adhesive portion 2030) is formed so as to be symmetrical with respect to the second concave portion (curved surface 2031b). This facilitates uniform filling of the adhesive.

The number of protrusions (projections 2055a) formed on the closed wall portion (upper wall portion 2052) of the first adhesive portion (cover side adhesive portion 2050) is not particularly limited, and may be one or a plurality. Good. The shape and size of the protrusions (projections 2055a) are not particularly limited, but when a plurality of protrusions (projections 2055a) are provided, the shapes and sizes of the plurality of protrusions (projections 2055a) should be substantially the same. Is desirable. Further, the position where the protrusion (projection 2055a) is formed in the closed wall portion (upper wall portion 2052) is not particularly limited, but when a plurality of protrusions (projection 2055a) are provided, the plurality of protrusions (projection 2055a) are formed. It is desirable that they are arranged symmetrically. For example, when two protrusions (protrusions 2055a) are provided, as shown in FIG. 162, when the first adhesive portion (cover side adhesive portion 2050) is viewed from the opening side, the protrusion (projection 2055a) on the right side Two protrusions (protrusions 2055a) so that the distance to the right inner wall (side inner wall 2056) and the distance between the left protrusion (projection 2055a) and the left inner wall (side inner wall 2056) are equal. Is desirable to be placed. This facilitates uniform filling of the adhesive.

[Fourth Embodiment]
The first to third embodiments have been described above. Hereinafter, the fourth embodiment will be described. The basic configuration of the game machine 1 according to the fourth embodiment is the same as that of the game machine 1 according to the second embodiment and the third embodiment. In the following, the same components as the components of the game machine 1 according to the second embodiment and the third embodiment will be described with the same reference numerals. Further, the description of the portion to which the description in the second embodiment and the third embodiment also applies to the fourth embodiment will be omitted.

<Screen device C>
FIG. 166 is a perspective view of the display unit. FIG. 167 is an exploded perspective view of the screen device. FIG. 168 is an exploded perspective view of the screen device. FIG. 169 is an exploded perspective view of the screen device.

The display unit A shown in FIG. 166 is a so-called projection having an irradiation light device B that emits irradiation light including an image and a screen device C that causes an image to appear when the irradiation light from the irradiation light device B is irradiated. It is a mapping device. Similar to the second embodiment, the display unit A is interchangeably mounted on the intermediate support plate G1 (see FIG. 33) in the cabinet G.

As shown in FIG. 167, the screen device C has a screen housing C10. Specifically, the screen housing C10 includes a horizontally arranged bottom plate C1, a right side plate C2 erected at the right end of the bottom plate C1, a left side plate C3 erected at the left end of the bottom plate C1, and a bottom plate C1. It has a back plate C4 erected at the rear end. As a result, the right side plate C2, the left side plate C3, and the back plate C4 are connected to the bottom plate C1 by screwing, so that the front side where the player is located and the upper surface side where the irradiation light device B is located are connected. An open box-shaped screen housing C10 is formed.

A fixed screen mechanism D, a front screen mechanism E1, and a reel screen mechanism F1 are provided inside the screen housing C10. Since the configuration of the fixed screen mechanism D is as described in the second embodiment, the description thereof will be omitted. The configurations of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 will be described in detail later, supplementing the parts different from those of the second embodiment.

As shown in FIGS. 168 and 169, the bottom plate C1 of the screen housing C10 is formed in a flat plate shape having a rectangular top view. The upper surface of the bottom plate C1 has a central mounting portion C11 arranged in the central portion, and a right mounting portion C12 and a left mounting portion C13 arranged in the left-right direction about the central mounting portion C11. There is. These mounting portions C11, C12, and C13 are formed in a concave shape.

The central mounting portion C11 mounts the fixed screen mechanism D so that it can be positioned by fitting the lower end portion of the fixed screen mechanism D. The right movable body base C12 is placed so that the right movable body base C5 can be positioned by fitting the lower end portion of the right movable body base C5. The left movable body base C13 is mounted so that the left movable body base C6 can be positioned by fitting the lower end portion of the left movable body base C6.

A motor accommodating portion C22 is formed on the right side plate C2. The drive motor F24 is positioned and arranged by the motor accommodating portion C22. The drive motor F24 is a component of the reel screen drive mechanism F2 for driving the reel screen mechanism F1. The reel screen drive mechanism F2 will be described in detail later.

Further, the right side plate C2 and the left side plate C3 are formed with a first support portion C23 and a second support portion C24, respectively. The first support portion C23 rotatably supports the gear shaft E21a of the crank gear E21. The second support portion C24 rotatably supports the shaft member E3, which is the gear shaft of the intermediate gear E23. The crank gear E21 and the intermediate gear E23 are components of the front screen drive mechanism E2 for driving the front screen mechanism E1. The front screen drive mechanism E2 will be described in detail later.

In this way, the front screen drive mechanism E2 and the reel screen drive mechanism F2 are positioned and arranged by the right side plate C2 and the left side plate C3. The front screen drive mechanism E2 is composed of a right front screen drive mechanism E2B arranged on the right movable body base C5 side and a left front screen drive mechanism E2A arranged on the left movable body base C6 side. The right front screen drive mechanism E2B and the reel screen drive mechanism F2 are arranged between the right movable body base C5 and the right plate C2 in the left-right direction. Further, the left front screen drive mechanism E2A is arranged between the left movable body base C6 and the left plate C3 in the left-right direction.

Further, as in the second embodiment, the right side plate C2 and the left side plate C3 have operation openings C21 and C31. Thereby, for example, as described with reference to FIG. 47, the front screen is reached by reaching into the screen device C from the operating opening C21 and manually rotating the crank gear E21 visible from the operating opening C21. The mechanism E1 can be rotated.

<Screen positional relationship>
Similar to the second embodiment, in the present embodiment as well, a plurality of screens (fixed screen mechanism D, front screen mechanism E1, and front screen mechanism E1) are formed by controlling the projector mechanism B2 to emit light including an image from the lens. An image is displayed on one of these screens according to the positional relationship of the reel screen mechanism F1). The positional relationship of each screen is the same as that of the second embodiment. The outline will be described below.

The front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 are movable screens, and are driven by the front screen drive mechanism E2 and the reel screen drive mechanism F2, respectively.

By controlling the drive motor E25, the front screen mechanism E1 rotates between the front exposed position and the front standby position, while by controlling the drive motor F24, the reel screen mechanism F1 becomes the reel exposed position. It rotates with and from the reel standby position (see FIG. 53).

When the front screen mechanism E1 is arranged at the front exposed position, the front screen mechanism E1 is in a state of covering the fixed screen mechanism D from the front, and an image is displayed on the front screen mechanism E1 (see FIG. 51). ..

On the other hand, when the front screen mechanism E1 is arranged in the front standby position, if the reel screen mechanism F1 is arranged in the reel standby position, the fixed screen mechanism D is exposed and the fixed screen mechanism D is exposed. The image is displayed on the screen (see FIG. 50). On the other hand, if the reel screen mechanism F1 is arranged at the reel exposed position, the reel screen mechanism F1 is in a state of covering the fixed screen mechanism D from the front, and an image is displayed on the reel screen mechanism F1 (see FIG. 52). ..

When the front screen mechanism E1 is arranged at the front exposed position, the reel screen mechanism F1 cannot be arranged at the reel exposed position. Further, when the reel screen mechanism F1 is arranged at the reel exposed position, the front screen mechanism E1 cannot be arranged at the front exposed position. This point will be described in detail later.

<Front screen mechanism E1>
FIG. 170 is an exploded perspective view of the front screen mechanism. FIG. 171 is a front view of the front screen support base. FIG. 172 is a cross-sectional view taken along the arrow BB of the front screen support shown in FIG. 171. FIG. 173 is a diagram showing a state in which the front screen member is adhered to the front screen support base shown in FIG. 172. FIG. 174 is a cross-sectional view taken along the arrow CC of the front screen support shown in FIG. 171. FIG. 175 is a diagram showing a state in which the front screen member is adhered to the front screen support base shown in FIG. 174. FIG. 176 is a rear view of the front screen support base. FIG. 177 is a cross-sectional view taken along the arrow DD of the front screen support shown in FIG. 176. FIG. 178 is a cross-sectional view taken along the arrow EE of the front screen support shown in FIG. 176.

As shown in FIG. 170, the front screen mechanism E1 includes a rectangular front screen member E11 having a projection surface E11a on the entire surface and a front screen support base E12 having a pattern such as a first pattern surface E12a on both sides. Have.

The front screen member E11 is formed by applying a screen paint to a thin plate-shaped flat panel. As a result, the projection surface E11a of the front screen member E11 is formed flat.

On the other hand, the front screen support base E12 has a holding recess E121 for holding the front screen member E11. The holding recess E121 has an opening shape similar to that of the projection surface E11a of the front screen member E11 in a slightly enlarged state, and accommodates the entire front screen member E11. Further, the holding recess E121 is set in two stages of depth, a deep portion and a shallow portion.

The shallow portion is formed in a grid pattern by a portion formed along the longitudinal direction of the front screen support base E12 and a portion formed along the lateral direction of the front screen support base E12. Specifically, the shallow portion includes the outer shallow portion E122 (E122a, E122b, E122c, E122d) formed along each side forming the outer circumference of the holding recess E121, and the inside of the holding recess E121 along the longitudinal direction. The formed long and shallow portions E123 (E123a, E123b, E123c) and the short and shallow portions E124 (E124a, E124b, E124c) formed in the holding recess E121 along the lateral direction are provided.

Of the outer shallow portion E122, the outer shallow portion E122b and the outer shallow portion E122d are formed along the longitudinal direction, and the outer shallow portion E122a and the outer shallow portion E122c are formed along the lateral direction. The outer shallow portion E122a and the outer shallow portion E122b are continuously formed, and the outer shallow portion E122b and the outer shallow portion E122c are continuously formed. On the other hand, the outer shallow portion E122c and the outer shallow portion E122d are not continuously formed, and a gap is provided between the outer shallow portion E122c and the outer shallow portion E122d. Similarly, the outer shallow portion E122d and the outer shallow portion E122a are not continuously formed, and a gap is provided between the outer shallow portion E122d and the outer shallow portion E122a.

The elongated shallow portion E123b is formed in the central portion in the lateral direction over the longitudinal direction, and the short shallow portion E124b is formed in the central portion in the longitudinal direction over the lateral direction. Grooves are formed in the outer shallow portion E122 (E122a, E122b, E122c, E122d), the long shallow portion E123b, and the short shallow portion E124b.

The front screen member E11 housed in the holding recess E121 is in contact with and supported by the shallow portion formed in a grid pattern as described above, and is separated from the remaining deep portion (FIGS. 172 to 17). See 175).

Further, the front screen support base E12 has a first pattern surface E12a in a part of a region around the projection surface E11a. The first pattern surface E12a becomes visible to the player in front when the front screen mechanism E1 is arranged at the front exposed position. Further, the front screen support base E12 has a second pattern surface E12b on the entire surface opposite to the first pattern surface E12a (see FIG. 176). The second pattern surface E12b becomes visible to the player in front when the front screen mechanism E1 is arranged at the front standby position. In the first pattern surface E12a and the second pattern surface E12b, for example, a pattern related to the production of the game is three-dimensionally formed by unevenness.

The flat panel constituting the front screen member E11 and the front screen support base E12 are each manufactured by injection molding. As a material for the flat panel forming the front screen member E11 and the front screen support base E12, a thermoplastic resin (for example, ABS resin or the like) can be appropriately adopted.

The front screen member E11 and the front screen support base E12 configured as described above are integrally formed by being separately formed and then adhered to each other. An adhesive layer is formed on the surface of the front screen member E11 opposite to the projection surface E11a by applying a paint containing an adhesive resin. The front screen member E11 and the front screen support base E12 are adhered to each other by the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer. The pressure-sensitive adhesive layer may be formed in a shallow portion of the front screen support base E12 instead of the front screen member E11.

Examples of the adhesive resin include acrylic-based, rubber-based, and silicone-based resins having adhesiveness, and for example, an acrylic copolymer can be used. Examples of the acrylic copolymer include a (meth) acrylic acid ester-based copolymer, and in the present embodiment, a (meth) acrylic acid ester-based copolymer which is conventionally used as a resin component of a pressure-sensitive adhesive. Any one can be properly selected and used from the coalescence.

The front screen support base E12 is formed with through holes E130 (E130a, E130b, E130c, E130d) penetrating from the holding recess E121 to the second pattern surface E12b. The through hole E130a is formed in the gap between the outer shallow portion E122c and the outer shallow portion E122d. The through hole E130b is formed in the gap between the outer shallow portion E122d and the outer shallow portion E122a. The through hole E130c is formed in the vicinity of the contact point between the outer shallow portion E122a and the elongated shallow portion E123c. The through hole E130d is formed in the vicinity of the contact point between the outer shallow portion E122c and the elongated shallow portion E123c.

These four through holes E130 are a line segment connecting the through hole E130a and the through hole E130b, a line segment connecting the through hole E130b and the through hole E130c, a line segment connecting the through hole E130c and the through hole E130d, and a through hole. It is provided in a positional relationship such that a substantially rectangular shape is formed by a line segment connecting the hole E130d and the through hole E130a.

The through hole E130 is formed so that the shape in front view is circular, elliptical, quadrangular, hexagon, etc., and the hole diameter is large enough to accommodate the shaft of the screw used for assembling the display unit A. (For example, about 1 to 10 mm). As a result, even after the front screen member E11 and the front screen support base E12 are adhered to each other, the front screen member E11 can be lifted by inserting a screw or a rod-shaped object into the through hole E130. The member E11 can be removed.

Further, in the front screen support base E12, only the shallow portion formed in a grid pattern is adhered to the front screen member E11, and most of the front screen member E11 is adhered to the front screen support base E12. Not. As a result, the front screen member E11 can be removed relatively easily.

Further, gaps are formed between the outer shallow portion E122c and the outer shallow portion E122d, and between the outer shallow portion E122d and the outer shallow portion E122a, and the front is formed at a location corresponding to these gaps. The screen member E11 and the front screen support base E12 are not adhered to each other. This portion corresponds to the vicinity of the corner portion of the front screen member E11, and the front screen member E11 and the front screen support base E12 are not sufficiently adhered to each other in the vicinity of such a corner portion. Due to this, when a screw or a rod-shaped object is inserted into the through hole E130a and the through hole E130b formed in these gaps to lift the front screen member E11, the front screen member E11 is fronted. The force of peeling from the screen support base E12 acts efficiently, making it easier to remove the front screen member E11.

As described above, the through hole E130 is formed so as to penetrate from the holding recess E121 to the second pattern surface E12b. FIG. 177 is a cross-sectional view of the front screen support base E12 cut along a surface passing through the through hole E130, and FIG. 177 also shows the situation.

In this way, the through hole E130 provided in the holding recess E121 penetrates to the second pattern surface E12b, so that when the front screen mechanism E1 is viewed from the second pattern surface E12b side as shown in FIG. 176. , The through hole E130 becomes visible.

As described in the second embodiment, when the front screen mechanism E1 is arranged in the front standby position, the front screen mechanism E1 is in a posture of inclining downward from the front to the rear on the upper side of the screen housing C10 (FIG. See 50). Therefore, the second pattern surface E12b side of the front screen mechanism E1 is visible to the player through the upper display window UD1. However, since the second pattern surface E12b is formed with a three-dimensional pattern having irregularities, the through hole E130 is confused with the pattern and is not conspicuous in appearance.

In particular, the through hole E130 is provided in a recessed portion (a position where the pattern is recessed as compared with the surroundings) among the irregularities constituting the pattern. That is, the through hole E130 exists at a recessed portion on the second pattern surface E12b. Combined with this and the fact that the front screen mechanism E1 is in an inclined posture at the front standby position, the through hole E130 is hidden behind the convex portion of the pattern formed on the second pattern surface E12b. , It is difficult for the player to see.

Further, a plurality of round recesses E140 are formed on the second pattern surface E12b. The round recess E140 is a component of the pattern formed on the second pattern surface E12b, and has a concave shape on the second pattern surface E12b. However, unlike the through hole E130, the recess does not penetrate to the holding recess E121. FIG. 178 is a cross-sectional view of the front screen support base E12 cut along a surface passing through the round recess E140, which is also shown in FIG. 178.

Such a round recess E140 is similar in shape to the through hole E130 in front view, and due to the presence of the round recess E140, when the front screen mechanism E1 is viewed from the second pattern surface E12b side, the through hole E130 Is even less noticeable.

<Front screen drive mechanism E2>
The front screen mechanism E1 is rotatable by the driving force of the front screen drive mechanism E2. As described with reference to FIGS. 168 and 169, the front screen drive mechanism E2 is connected to the left front screen drive mechanism E2A connected to the lower surface of the left end portion of the front screen mechanism E1 and to the lower surface of the right end portion of the front screen mechanism E1. It has the right front screen drive mechanism E2B.

FIG. 179 is an explanatory view showing a state in which the right side plate and the left side plate of the screen housing are removed. FIG. 180 is a perspective view of the right front screen drive mechanism. FIG. 181 is an explanatory view showing a state in which the crank gear of the right front screen drive mechanism is removed. FIG. 182 is a plan view of the crank gear of the right front screen drive mechanism. FIG. 183 is a perspective view of the right front screen mechanism and the left front screen drive mechanism.

As shown in FIGS. 179 and 180, the right front screen drive mechanism E2B includes a crank member E22, a crank gear E21, an intermediate gear E23, a motor shaft gear E24, and a drive motor E25. One end of the crank member E22 in the right front screen drive mechanism E2B is connected to the front screen mechanism E1.

Similar to the second embodiment, the crank member E22 is rotatably supported by the right movable body base C5 at the intermediate position E22a (see FIG. 181). As a result, the crank member E22 can rotate about the intermediate position E22a as the rotation center. The intermediate position E22a coincides with the rotation center axis FG (see FIG. 53) of the front screen mechanism E1.

As described with reference to FIG. 57, the crank member E22 has an upper region on the upper end side (the side connected to the front screen mechanism E1) from the intermediate position E22a and a lower end side (front screen mechanism) from the intermediate position E22a. It has a lower region (on the side opposite to the side connected to E1). A slide groove E22b is formed in the lower region of the crank member E22 (see FIG. 181).

The slide groove E22b is formed so that the groove wall surface E22b1 has a U-shape in a side view. The U-shape is composed of two straight portions and a curved portion connecting the ends of the two straight portions. The two straight portions are formed in parallel, and the slide groove E22b has a surface corresponding to the straight portion of the groove wall surface E22b1 in the center line (intermediate position E22a and the lower end side of the crank member E22) in the lower region. It is set parallel to the straight line passing through the point. A slide member E26 is movably engaged with the slide groove E22b. The groove width of the slide groove E22b (distance between the two straight portions) is substantially the same as the member width of the slide member E26, and is set to slide during movement. That is, the slide member E26 is always in contact with the groove wall surface E22b1 of the slide groove E22b. Further, the upper end portion of the slide groove E22b is set so that the slide member E26 comes into contact with the upper end surface (the surface corresponding to the curved portion) when the front screen mechanism E1 is in the standby posture or the exposed posture. On the other hand, the lower end of the slide groove E22b is open so that a part of the slide member E26 can be exposed.

The slide member E26 is rotatably supported at the eccentric position E21b (see FIG. 182) of the crank gear E21. Further, the gear shaft E21a of the crank gear E21 is supported by the first support portion C23 (see FIG. 169) of the right side plate C2. Further, the crank member E22 is rotatably supported by the right movable body base C5 at the intermediate position E22a (see FIG. 181). Then, as in the second embodiment, in the gear shaft E21a of the crank gear E21, when the front screen mechanism E1 is in the standby posture or the exposed posture, the line segment connecting the gear shaft E21a and the eccentric position E21b is a crank member. It is set to have a relationship orthogonal to the line segment connecting the intermediate position E22a in E22 and the center point of the slide member E26 (see FIGS. 58 and 60).

As a result, when the front screen mechanism E1 is in the standby posture or the exposed posture, even if a force acts in the direction of rotating the lower region of the crank member E22, the gear shaft E21a is applied in the direction of applying all the components of this force. Exists and acts as a fixed end, so the slide member E26 does not move. As a result, a truss structure is formed by a three-bar link having 0 degrees of freedom, with the intermediate position E22a of the crank member E22 and the gear shaft E21a of the crank gear E21 as fixed ends and the slide member E26 as the free end. Even when E1 is pushed by hand, the front screen mechanism E1 does not move because the crank member E22 and the crank gear E21 act as a strong brake.

An intermediate gear E23 is meshed with the crank gear E21. A motor shaft gear E24 is meshed with the intermediate gear E23. The drive shaft of the drive motor E25 is connected to the motor shaft gear E24. As a result, the right front screen drive mechanism E2B can transmit the rotational driving force of the drive motor E25 to the crank gear E21 via the motor shaft gear E24 and the intermediate gear E23.

When a rotational driving force is applied to the crank gear E21, the slide member E26 provided at the eccentric position E21b is made movable along the slide groove E22b by sliding with the slide groove E22b, so that the crank member E22 A two-node link with one degree of freedom is formed in which the intermediate position E22a and the gear shaft E21a of the crank gear E21 are fixed ends, and the slide member E26 is a free end that can be moved along the groove wall surface. Then, when the slide member E26 rotates, the crank member E22 provided with the slide groove E22b with which the slide member E26 is engaged rotates with the intermediate position E22a as a fulcrum, and the upper region of the crank member E22 is rotated. Become. As a result, the front screen mechanism E1 moves between the front standby position and the front exposed position.

As shown in FIG. 183, the left front screen drive mechanism E2A has the same configuration as the right front screen drive mechanism E2B except for the motor shaft gear E24 and the drive motor E25. The left front screen drive mechanism E2A and the right front screen drive mechanism E2B are arranged symmetrically.

The intermediate gear E23 of the left front screen drive mechanism E2A and the intermediate gear E23 of the right front screen drive mechanism E2B are connected via a shaft member E3.

Specifically, the shaft member E3 extends in the left-right direction, and intermediate gears E23 of the left front screen drive mechanism E2A and the right front screen drive mechanism E2B are connected to both ends thereof.

In the above configuration, when the drive motor E25 is driven, the motor shaft gear E24 is rotated. As the motor shaft gear E24 rotates, the intermediate gears E23 and E23 and the shaft member E3 of the left front screen drive mechanism E2A and the right front screen drive mechanism E2B rotate integrally. Then, the crank gears E21 and E21 are rotated in conjunction with the rotation of the intermediate gears E23 and E23, so that the front screen mechanism E1 is rotated around the rotation center axis FG (see FIG. 53). , It will move between the front standby position and the front exposed position.

<Positional relationship between front screen mechanism E1 and crank gear E21>
FIG. 184 is a right side view of the crank gear of the right front screen drive mechanism. FIG. 185 is a right side view of the intermediate gear of the right front screen drive mechanism. FIG. 186 is a right side view of the crank gear and the intermediate gear of the right front screen drive mechanism when the front screen mechanism is arranged at the front exposed position. FIG. 187 is a right side view of the right side plate. FIG. 188 is a right side view of the screen device when the front screen mechanism is arranged at the front exposed position.

FIGS. 184 to 188 correspond to the views viewed from the direction of the rotation shaft of the crank gear E21, respectively. The direction of the rotation axis of the crank gear E21 and the direction of the rotation axis of the intermediate gear E23 are the same, and the direction is the direction perpendicular to the surfaces of the crank gear E21, the intermediate gear E23, and the right side plate C2. Will be. The surface of the crank gear E21, the surface of the intermediate gear E23, and the surface of the right side plate C2 are arranged substantially in parallel.

As shown in FIG. 184, the crank gear E21 is formed with a mark portion E21c and a through hole E21d. The mark portion E21c and the through hole E21d are formed as holes penetrating from the front side to the back side of the crank gear E21 shown in FIG. 184. The mark portion E21c and the through hole E21d are formed so that the shape in the front view is circular (or elliptical, quadrangular, hexagonal, etc.). The mark portion E21c and the through hole E21d are formed to have a considerably smaller size than the crank gear E21, and the hole diameter is, for example, about 1 to 10 mm. Further, the mark portion E21c and the through hole E21d are formed in the vicinity of the circumference of the crank gear E21, and the distance from the center O21 of the crank gear E21 to the mark portion E21c and the through hole E21d from the center O21 of the crank gear E21. The distance to the crank gear E21 is set to be about 75% to 90% of the radius of the crank gear E21. The mark portion E21c and the through hole E21d are formed in a positional relationship such that the angle formed by the straight line connecting the center O21 and the mark portion E21c and the straight line connecting the center O21 and the through hole E21d is about 160 °. There is.

As shown in FIG. 185, the intermediate gear E23 is formed with two marking portions E23a. The mark portion E23a is formed as a hole penetrating from the front side to the back side of the intermediate gear E23 shown in FIG. 185. The mark portion E23a is formed so that the shape in front view is circular (or elliptical, quadrangular, hexagonal, etc.). The mark portion E23a is formed in a size considerably smaller than that of the intermediate gear E23, and the hole diameter is, for example, about 1 to 10 mm. Further, the mark portion E23a is formed in the vicinity of the circumference of the intermediate gear E23, and the distance from the center O23 of the intermediate gear E23 to the mark portion E23a is about 75% to 90% of the radius of the intermediate gear E23. Is set to. The two marking portions E23a are formed at positions symmetrical with respect to the center O23 of the intermediate gear E23.

The mark portion E21c and the mark portion E23a may have any characteristics as long as they function as marks. That is, the mark portion E21c and the mark portion E23a are not limited to the through hole, and may be a hole (concave portion) that does not penetrate, a protrusion (convex portion), or a combination of the concave portion and the convex portion ( It may be a pattern due to unevenness), a part on which some characters or symbols are drawn with a pen or the like, or a part painted with a color different from the surroundings.

As shown in FIG. 186, when the front screen mechanism E1 is arranged at the front exposed position, the center O21 of the crank gear E21, the center O23 of the intermediate gear E23, and the mark portion E21c formed on the crank gear E21 The crank gear E21 and the intermediate gear E23 are arranged so that the mark portion E23a formed on the intermediate gear E23 is aligned substantially in a straight line.

As shown in FIG. 187, the right side plate C2 is provided with a marking window C100 near the center of the first support portion C23 and the second support portion C24. The mark window C100 is formed as an opening capable of visually recognizing the inside of the right side plate C2.

The mark window C100 is formed in a slightly vertically long rectangular shape, and the intersection of the two diagonal lines of the rectangle (the position of the center of gravity of the rectangle) is the center (intermediate position) of the first support portion C23 and the second support portion C24. ) Almost overlaps. Further, the diagonal length is about the same as or slightly shorter than the average value of the radius of the crank gear E21 and the radius of the intermediate gear E23 (80 of the average value of the radius of the crank gear E21 and the radius of the intermediate gear E23). ~ 110%) is set. As a result, the vicinity of the meshing portion between the crank gear E21 and the intermediate gear E23 can be visually recognized through the mark window C100.

Further, a through hole C101 is formed in the right side plate C2. The through hole C101 is formed as a hole that penetrates the right side plate C2, and the size of the hole is substantially the same as the through hole E21d formed in the crank gear E21, which is considerably smaller than that of the mark window C100. ing. For example, the area of the mark window C100 in the front view is about 30 to 300 times (or about 50 to 200 times) the area of the through hole C101 in the front view. The shape of the through hole C101 is substantially the same as that of the through hole E21d, and is, for example, a substantially circular shape in front view. The through hole C101 is formed in the vicinity of the operation opening C21.

When the front screen mechanism E1 is arranged at the front exposed position, the mark portion E21c formed on the crank gear E21 and the mark portion E23a (see FIG. 186) formed on the intermediate gear E23 are formed on the right side plate C2. It can be visually recognized through the mark window C100 (see FIG. 188). In FIG. 188, the center O21 of the crank gear E21 and the center O23 of the intermediate gear E23 cannot be directly visually recognized. However, since the screw C23a and the screw C24a are arranged at positions corresponding to the center O21 of the crank gear E21 and the center O23 of the intermediate gear E23, respectively, the screw C23a and the screw C24a cause the center O21 and the intermediate gear of the crank gear E21. The position of the center O23 of the E23 can be confirmed. As a result, the center O21 of the crank gear E21, the center O23 of the intermediate gear E23, the mark portion E21c formed on the crank gear E21, and the mark portion E23a formed on the intermediate gear E23 are aligned substantially in a straight line. You can grasp that.

Although not shown, the right side plate C2 and the crank gear E21 are arranged substantially in parallel with the gear shaft E21a of the crank gear E21 supported by the first support portion C23 of the right side plate C2. When the front screen mechanism E1 is arranged at the front exposed position, in the right side view (or left side view), the through hole C101 formed in the right side plate C2 and the through hole formed in the crank gear E21 are formed. The hole E21d overlaps with the hole E21d. That is, when viewed from a direction perpendicular to the right side plate C2, the position of the through hole C101 and the position of the through hole E21d are substantially the same, and these positions are superimposed. As a result, a part of the members arranged inside the crank gear E21 can be seen inside the screen housing C10 through the overlapping portion. Then, as will be described later, a rod-shaped object can be inserted into both the through hole C101 and the through hole E21d at the overlapping portion.

<Positional relationship between front screen mechanism E1 and slide member E26>
FIG. 189 is a left side view of the crank gear of the right front screen drive mechanism when the front screen mechanism is arranged at the front exposed position. FIG. 189 corresponds to the view seen from the direction of the rotation shaft of the crank gear E21.

As described above, the gear shaft E21a of the crank gear E21 is supported by the first support portion C23. Therefore, even if the crank gear E21 rotates, the position of the center O21 of the crank gear E21 does not change.

On the other hand, the crank gear E21 is provided with a slide member E26. As described above, the slide member E26 is pivotally supported at the eccentric position E21b (see FIG. 182) of the crank gear E21. When the crank gear E21 rotates, the slide member E26 also rotates accordingly. Specifically, the slide member E26 is a circle whose radius is the distance r (see FIG. 189) between the center O21 and the eccentric position E21b with the center O21 of the crank gear E21 as the center as the crank gear E21 rotates. Rotate on the circumference. That is, the locus drawn by the slide member E26 when the crank gear E21 rotates becomes a part (arc) of the circumference.

Then, as the slide member E26 rotates on the arc, the slide member E26 slides inside the slide groove E22b as described above, and the driving force is transmitted to the crank member E22 via the slide member E26. To. In conjunction with this, the front screen mechanism E1 connected to the crank member E22 rotates between the front exposed position and the front standby position (see FIGS. 57 to 60).

In this way, while the front screen mechanism E1 rotates between the front exposed position and the front standby position, the slide member E26 moves while changing its position on the arc with time. At that time, the position of the slide member E26 on the arc (the position of the eccentric position E21b on the arc) is determined by the straight line connecting the eccentric position E21b and the center O21 of the crank gear E21 in the horizontal direction. It is represented by an angle (hereinafter, this angle is referred to as ∠EOX) formed by a straight line (a straight line connecting a fixed point X21 whose position does not change regardless of the rotation of the crank gear E21 and the center O21) (see FIG. 189).

Then, using such an angle ∠EOX, the value of ∠EOX when the front screen mechanism E1 is arranged at the front exposed position is expressed as α, and the front screen mechanism E1 is arranged at the front standby position. The value of ∠EOX in the case is expressed as β. Then, when the front screen mechanism E1 rotates from the front exposed position to the front standby position, ∠EOX changes with time from α to β.

As described above, the front screen mechanism E1 and the front screen drive mechanism E2 according to the present embodiment have the crank gear E21 so that the angle ∠EOX indicating the position of the slide member E26 changes with time from α to β. It is rotated so that the driving force is transmitted to the front screen mechanism E1 by sliding the slide member E26 inside the slide groove E22b, and the front screen mechanism E1 is rotated from the front exposed position to the front standby position. Is designed for.

<Assembly of front screen mechanism E1 and front screen drive mechanism E2>
FIG. 190 is a diagram showing a crank gear in a state before assembling the crank gear and the crank member. FIG. 191 is a diagram showing a crank member in a state before assembling the crank gear and the crank member. Note that FIGS. 190 and 191 show only the crank gear, the crank member, and some members existing around them, and the other members are not shown for convenience.

In order to rotate the front screen mechanism E1 as designed as described above, when assembling the front screen mechanism E1 and the front screen drive mechanism E2, the crank gear is subjected to the following steps (i) to (v). The E21 and the crank member E22 may be assembled.

(I) The crank gear E21 is attached to the right side plate C2 so that the gear shaft E21a of the crank gear E21 is supported by the first support portion C23 of the right side plate C2 (see FIG. 190).
(Ii) By manually rotating the crank gear E21 of the above (i), the angle ∠EOX indicating the position of the slide member E26 is adjusted, and the crank gear E21 is arranged so that ∠EOX = α (FIG. 190). reference)
(Iii) With ∠EOX = α, fix the crank gear E21 so that it does not rotate any more.
(Iv) The posture of the crank member E22 is set to the posture (exposed posture) when the front screen mechanism E1 is arranged at the front exposed position (see FIG. 191).
(V) The slide member E26 provided on the crank gear E21 of the above (iii) is engaged with the slide groove E22b formed on the crank member E22 of the above (iv).

Of the above (i) to (v), the steps (i), (iv), and (v) can be performed by appropriately adopting conventionally known means. Hereinafter, the steps (ii) and (iii) will be mainly described.

FIG. 192 is a right side view showing a state in which the crank gear is attached to the right side plate. FIG. 193 is a diagram showing a state in which an intermediate gear is attached to the right side plate and the crank gear shown in FIG. 192.

In the step (ii), first, the crank gear E21 of the above (i) is pressed while visually recognizing the mark portion E21c formed on the crank gear E21 through the mark window C100 formed on the right side plate C2. Rotate manually. Then, as shown in FIG. 192, the mark portion E21c formed on the crank gear E21 is the center O21 of the crank gear E21 (screw C23a for fastening the right side plate C2 and the gear shaft E21a of the crank gear E21) and the second. The position of the crank gear E21 is adjusted so as to be arranged on a straight line connecting the center of the hole formed as the support portion C24.

On the other hand, the intermediate gear E23 fixed in advance with the shaft member E3 is temporarily fixed in alignment with the position of the second support portion C24. At that time, the intermediate gear E23 is manually rotated while visually recognizing the marking portion E23a formed on the intermediate gear E23 through the marking window C100. Then, as shown in FIG. 193, the mark portion E23a formed on the intermediate gear E23 is the center O21 of the crank gear E21 (screw C23a for fastening the right side plate C2 and the gear shaft E21a of the crank gear E21) and the intermediate gear. The position of the intermediate gear E23 is adjusted so as to be arranged on a straight line connecting the center O23 of the E23 (screw C24a seen from the hole formed as the second support portion C24).

As described above, by using the mark portion E23a formed on the intermediate gear E23 together with the mark portion E21c formed on the crank gear E21 as a mark, the position of the crank gear E21 can be strictly adjusted.

Here, the position of the slide member E26 (eccentric position E21b) on the crank gear E21 is formed at the center O21 of the crank gear E21, the center O23 of the intermediate gear E23, the mark portion E21c formed on the crank gear E21, and the intermediate gear E23. It is designed so that the angle ∠EOX described with reference to FIG. 189 is α when the marked portions E23a are aligned with each other in a straight line.

Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 192 and 193, the center O21 of the crank gear E21, the center O23 of the intermediate gear E23, the mark portion E21c formed on the crank gear E21, and the mark portion E23a formed on the intermediate gear E23. By arranging the crank gear E21 and the intermediate gear E23 so that the and are lined up in a straight line, ∠EOX = α can be set.

However, even if the ∠EOX (position of the slide member E26) is adjusted in this way, the crank gear E21 is easily rotated, and the adjusted position is likely to shift. Therefore, the crank gear E21 is in a state where the center O21 of the crank gear E21, the center O23 of the intermediate gear E23, the mark portion E21c formed on the crank gear E21, and the mark portion E23a formed on the intermediate gear E23 are aligned in a straight line. Is fixed so that it does not move (step (iii) above). The crank gear E21 can be fixed as follows.

As described with reference to FIG. 187, a through hole C101 is formed in the right side plate C2. The formation position of the through hole C101 is when the center O21 of the crank gear E21, the center O23 of the intermediate gear E23, the mark portion E21c formed on the crank gear E21, and the mark portion E23a formed on the intermediate gear E23 are aligned in a straight line. (When the crank gear E21 is arranged so that ∠EOX = α), the through hole C101 and the through hole E21d formed in the crank gear E21 are designed to exactly overlap each other.

In the step (iii), a rod-shaped object (for example, a rod whose thickness substantially matches the size of the through hole C101 and the through hole E21d) is formed in both the through hole C101 and the through hole E21d. Let it be inserted. As a result, the relative positions of the crank gear E21 and the right side plate C2 are fixed. Therefore, even if a force for rotating the crank gear E21 acts, the crank gear E21 cannot move with respect to the right side plate C2 due to the presence of the rod-shaped object, and misalignment can be prevented. ..

The method of fixing the crank gear E21 is not limited to the above method, and for example, the crank does not move with the rotation of the right movable body base C5 instead of the right plate C2. A through hole C101 may be formed in a member whose position does not change regardless of the operation of the gear E21), and the crank gear E21 may be fixed by the same method as described above. Further, the crank gear E21 is formed by inserting an outlet-shaped (U-shaped or U-shaped) object through both the mark portion E21c formed on the crank gear E21 and the mark portion E23a formed on the intermediate gear E23. May be fixed. In this case, it is not necessary to form the through hole C101 in the member such as the right side plate C2.

Further, the center O21 of the crank gear E21, the center O23 of the intermediate gear E23, the mark portion E21c formed on the crank gear E21, and the mark portion E23a formed on the intermediate gear E23 are not arranged in a straight line on the right side plate C2. The position of the crank gear E21 may be adjusted so that the formed through hole C101 and the through hole E21d formed in the crank gear E21 overlap. However, as described above, the through hole C101 formed in the right side plate C2 and the through hole E21d formed in the crank gear E21 are quite small, and even if the crank gear E21 is rotated in the dark clouds, both holes are quite heavy. It may not be. In addition, it may be difficult to visually confirm whether or not these holes overlap. In this respect, in the present embodiment, the center O21 of the crank gear E21, the center O23 of the intermediate gear E23, the mark portion E21c formed on the crank gear E21, and the mark portion E23a formed on the intermediate gear E23 are arranged in a straight line. As a result, the through hole C101 and the through hole E21d automatically overlap each other, so that the alignment can be easily performed.

In the above, the alignment of the crank gear E21 of the right front screen drive mechanism E2B has been described. However, the crank gear E21 and the intermediate gear E23 of the left front screen drive mechanism E2A and the left plate C3 also have the right front screen drive mechanism E2B, respectively. The crank gear E21 and the intermediate gear E23 of the above, and the right side plate C2 (see FIGS. 184 to 188) have the same configuration, and the alignment of the crank gear E21 of the left front screen drive mechanism E2A is also performed in the above (ii). And (iii), it can be carried out by going through the same steps.

As a result, in both the right front screen drive mechanism E2B and the left front screen drive mechanism E2A, the slide member E26 provided on the crank gear E21 (the above (ii) and (iii)) fixed in the state of ∠EOX = α). Can be engaged with the slide groove E22b formed in the crank member E22 (above (iv)) in the exposed posture (above (v)). As a result, the slide member E26 comes into contact with the upper end surface of the slide groove E22b (see FIG. 60).

With this state as the initial state, by operating the front screen drive mechanism E2 so that ∠EOX changes from α to β, the slide member E26 can slide inside the slide groove E22b as designed. The front screen mechanism E1 connected to the crank member E22 can be appropriately rotated from the front exposed position to the front standby position.

By going through the steps described above, the front screen mechanism E1 and the front screen drive mechanism E2 can be assembled in the state (exposed posture) when the front screen mechanism E1 is arranged at the front exposed position.

Then, by connecting the front screen mechanism E1 and the front screen drive mechanism E2 with other mechanisms, a finished product of the display unit A can be obtained. In the display unit A thus obtained, the front screen mechanism E1 and the front screen drive mechanism E2 are in the exposed posture, and the display unit A is transported in that state.

Here, as described above, when the front screen mechanism E1 is arranged at the front exposed position, the straight line connecting the rotation center position (gear shaft E21a, center O21) of the crank gear E21 and the eccentric position E21b and the crank member The straight line connecting the rotation center position (intermediate position E22a) of E22 and the eccentric position E21b of the crank gear E21 are orthogonal to each other (FIG. 60, and the feature (2-1) of the gaming machine 1 according to the second embodiment) and (2-2)).

As a result, even if a force is applied to the slide member E26 due to shaking during transportation, the force is not converted into a force for rotating the crank gear E21, and the crank member E22 and the crank gear E21 have a strong brake. The front screen mechanism E1 does not move. As a result, it is possible to prevent the display unit A from being damaged due to the movement of the front screen mechanism E1 during transportation.

However, when assembling the front screen mechanism E1 and the front screen drive mechanism E2, the front screen mechanism E1 is in the front standby position instead of the state (exposed posture) when the front screen mechanism E1 is arranged in the front exposed position. The crank gear E21 and the crank member E22 may be assembled in the state (standby posture) when they are arranged.

In this case, when the crank gear E21 is arranged so that the angle ∠EOX described with reference to FIG. 189 is β, the center O21 of the crank gear E21, the center O23 of the intermediate gear E23, and the crank gear E21 The position of forming the mark portion E21c in the crank gear E21 may be changed so that the formed mark portion E21c and the mark portion E23a formed on the intermediate gear E23 are aligned with each other. Further, when the crank gear E21 is arranged so that ∠EOX is β, the crank gear so that the through hole C101 formed in the right side plate C2 and the through hole E21d formed in the crank gear E21 overlap. The position where the through hole E21d is formed in E21 may be changed.

In this way, the front screen mechanism E1 and the front screen drive mechanism E2 can be assembled in any posture including the exposed posture and the standby posture by appropriately changing the forming positions of the mark portion E21c and the through hole E21d.

<Reel screen mechanism F1>
FIG. 194 is a perspective view of the reel screen mechanism when it is arranged at the reel standby position. FIG. 195 is a perspective view of the reel screen mechanism when it is arranged at the reel exposed position.

As shown in FIGS. 194 and 195, the reel screen mechanism F1 has a side view arc shape curved in a shape similar to the rotation direction (see FIG. 52). The surface of the reel screen mechanism F1 has a pattern formed on the peripheral edge portion, and the inner peripheral region of the peripheral edge portion is a projection surface F1a. The projection surface F1a is an arcuate surface that becomes convex toward the upstream side in the irradiation direction of light from the projector mechanism B2 when the reel screen mechanism F1 is arranged at the reel exposure position (see FIG. 53). Further, a pattern is formed on the back surface of the reel screen mechanism F1 on the rotation center side. The pattern on the back surface is visible to the player in front when the reel screen mechanism F1 is positioned at the reel standby position (see FIG. 53).

<Reel screen drive mechanism F2>
The reel screen mechanism F1 is rotatable between the reel standby position and the reel exposed position by the driving force of the reel screen drive mechanism F2. Then, when the reel screen mechanism F1 is positioned at the reel exposed position, the projection surface F1a can appear an image by irradiating the irradiation light.

FIG. 196 is a perspective view of the reel screen mechanism, the reel screen drive mechanism, and the movable body base. FIG. 197 is a perspective view of the reel screen mechanism and the reel screen drive mechanism.

As shown in FIGS. 196 and 197, the reel screen drive mechanism F2 has two arm members F21 and F21, an arcuate gear F22, a motor shaft gear F23, and a drive motor F24. One end of each of the two arm members F21 and F21 is connected to the back surface of the right end portion and the back surface of the left end portion of the reel screen mechanism F1. Further, support shafts F21a and F21a projecting outward in the left-right direction are formed on the outer surfaces of the other ends of the two arm members F21 and F21. The support shafts F21a and F21a are rotatably supported by the right movable body base C5 and the left movable body base C6, respectively. As a result, the two arm members F21 can rotate around the support shafts F21a and F21a. The support shafts F21a and F21a coincide with the rotation center shaft RG of the reel screen mechanism F1 (see FIG. 53).

The arcuate gear F22 is fixed to the tip of the support shaft F21a. A motor shaft gear F23 is meshed with the arcuate gear F22. The drive shaft of the drive motor F24 is connected to the motor shaft gear F23.

<Positional relationship between arm member F21 in reel standby posture and movable body bases C5 and C6>
FIG. 198 is a perspective view showing an arm member and a movable body base when the reel screen mechanism is arranged at the reel standby position.

When the reel screen mechanism F1 is arranged at the reel standby position, the arm member F21 connected to the reel screen mechanism F1 and the movable body bases C5 and C6 are substantially in contact with each other. FIG. 198 shows this state.

Hereinafter, the arrangement relationship between the arm member F21 and the movable body bases C5 and C6 will be described in detail with reference to the structure of the arm member F21 and the structures of the movable body bases C5 and C6. Since the left movable body base C6 has the same structure as the right movable body base C5, the description of the left movable body base C6 will be omitted.

FIG. 199 is a right side view of the reel screen mechanism and the arm member. FIG. 200 is a bottom view of the reel screen mechanism and the arm member. FIG. 201 is a perspective view of the reel screen mechanism and the arm member as viewed from below.

As shown in FIG. 199, the arm member F21 has a side view fan shape. The reel screen mechanism F1 is connected to the portion corresponding to the fan-shaped arc. Further, one side (lower side) of the two sides forming the fan shape has a shape in which a portion slightly closer to the reel screen mechanism F1 than the center of the side is bulged.

As shown in FIG. 200, from the lower side of the fan shape in FIG. 199 toward the inside (the side opposite to the side on which the support shaft F21a is formed, that is, the left side), the lower end forming the lower end of the arm member F21. Part F200 is formed. The lower end portion F200 has a rectangular shape when viewed from the bottom. The outer (right side) long side of the four sides constituting the rectangle coincides with the lower side of the sector in FIG. 199.

As shown in FIG. 201, the lower end portion F200 has a flat lower end surface F200a and a protrusion F200b formed so as to project downward at a part of the outer edge of the lower end portion F200.

The protrusion F200b has the shape of a side-viewing triangle (see FIG. 199), and the apex portion of the triangle is formed in a slightly rounded curved shape (see FIG. 201).

FIG. 202 is a perspective view of the right movable body base. FIG. 203 is a diagram showing a state in which the positions of the arm member and the movable body base shown in FIG. 198 are slightly shifted in the vertical direction. FIG. 204 is a top view of the movable body base near the reference plane. FIG. 205 is a cross-sectional view taken along the arrow FF of the movable body base shown in FIG. FIG. 206 is a view of the cushioning member installation portion viewed from the right side. FIG. 207 is a diagram showing a state in which the cushioning member is installed in the cushioning member installation portion shown in FIG. 206. FIG. 208 is a diagram showing a state in which the arm member and the cushioning member are in contact with each other in the cross section of the movable body base shown in FIG. 204 along the arrow GG.

As shown in FIG. 202, the right movable body base C5 includes an upper side wall portion C81 and a lower side wall portion C91. A third support portion C51 and a fourth support portion C61 are formed on the upper side wall portion C81. A fifth support portion C71 is formed on the lower side wall portion C91. The third support portion C51 rotatably supports the crank member E22 connected to the front screen mechanism E1. The fourth support portion C61 rotatably supports the support shaft F21a of the arm member F21 connected to the reel screen mechanism F1. The fifth support portion C71 rotatably supports the shaft member E3 which is the gear shaft of the intermediate gear E23 of the front screen drive mechanism E2.

The upper side wall portion C81 and the lower side wall portion C91 have a flat surface. The surface formed on the upper side wall portion C81 and the surface formed on the lower side wall portion C91 are formed so as to be displaced in the left-right direction in the front view.

Further, the right movable body base C5 has a reference surface C200 formed substantially horizontally. The right end of the reference surface C200 is continuous with the lower end of the surface formed on the upper side wall portion C81, and the left end of the reference surface C200 is continuous with the upper end of the surface formed on the lower side wall portion C91.

Further, the right movable body base C5 has a cushioning member installation portion C201. The cushioning member installation portion C201 is formed continuously with the reference surface C200, and has a shape recessed with respect to the reference surface C200.

When the reel screen mechanism F1 is arranged at the reel standby position (see FIG. 198), the lower end surface F200a of the arm member F21 and the reference surface C200 are substantially in contact with each other, and the protrusion F200b of the arm member F21 is formed as the cushioning member installation portion C201. It will be stored in the recess (see FIG. 203).

As shown in FIG. 204, the reference surface C200 of the right movable body base C5 and the cushioning member installation portion C201 form a rectangular shape when viewed from above. The reference surface C200 has a horizontal plane C200a formed from the vicinity of the rear end portion of the buffer member installation portion C201 to the rear side, and a rough surface C200b formed in front of the horizontal plane 200a. The rough surface C200b is a rough surface having some irregularities as compared with the horizontal plane 200a.

Further, the short side (length in the left-right direction) of the rectangle (reference surface C200 of the right movable body base C5) in FIG. 204 is the short side (length in the left-right direction) of the rectangle (lower end portion F200 of the arm member F21) in FIG. 200. It's longer than that. As a result, when the arm member F21 and the right movable body base C5 are in a substantially contacted state (see FIG. 198), the left side portion of the reference surface C200 is not covered by the lower end surface F200a and is exposed.

FIG. 206 shows the back surface of the upper side wall portion C81 shown in FIG. 205. That is, FIG. 206 is a view showing the state when the upper side wall portion C81 is viewed from the side (right side) opposite to the side where the reference surface C200 is formed, centering on the cushioning member installation portion C201.

As shown in FIG. 206, an opening is formed on the back surface of the upper side wall portion C81. The cushioning member installation portion C201 is formed by communicating the recess with respect to the reference surface C200 and the opening, and has a box shape in which the upper surface and the right surface are open. An opening C92 (see FIG. 202) is also formed in the lower side wall portion C91, but the opening does not communicate with the cushioning member installation portion C201.

The cushioning member installation portion C201 includes a bottom surface portion C201a constituting the bottom surface of the box, a front end portion C201b formed continuously from the front end of the bottom surface portion C201a toward the upper side in the vertical direction, and the front end portion 201b from the left end to the rear. It is composed of a side wall portion C201c which is continuously formed and a rear end portion C201d which is continuous with the side wall portion C201c and constitutes the rear end of the box. The rear end portion C201d includes a front portion formed continuously from the rear end of the bottom surface portion C201a toward the upper side in the vertical direction, a rear portion formed with an inclination at the rearmost portion, and a front portion and a rear portion. It has a connecting part that connects the above in a curved shape.

As shown in FIG. 207, a rectangular parallelepiped-shaped cushioning member C202 is placed on the bottom surface portion C201a of the cushioning member installation portion C201. The cushioning member C202 is made of a gel-like material (silicone gel) containing silicone as a main raw material, which has shock absorbing power and anti-vibration performance. As the silicone gel, for example, α gel (registered trademark) manufactured by Taica Corporation can be used. The material of the cushioning member C202 is not particularly limited, and in addition to silicone gel, a flexible organosilicon compound such as silicone grease, silicone rubber, and silicone resin, and a flexible organosilicon compound such as fluororesin are used. Can be adopted as appropriate.

FIG. 208 shows the state of the cushioning member installation portion C201 when the reel screen mechanism F1 is arranged at the reel standby position (state of FIG. 198). As shown in FIG. 208, the protrusion F200b of the arm member F21 is housed in a recess formed as a cushioning member installation portion C201. The tip of the protrusion F200b is in contact with the surface of the cushioning member C202. Although not shown in the figure, the surface of the cushioning member C202 is pressed by the tip of the protrusion F200b and has a recessed shape.

The lower end surface F200a of the arm member F21 is substantially in contact with the reference surface C200 (horizontal plane C200a and rough surface C200b) of the right movable body base C5. However, there are slight gaps between the lower end surface F200a and the horizontal plane C200a and between the lower end surface F200a and the rough surface C200b, respectively, and the lower end surface F200a and the reference surface C200 are strictly. Is not in contact. The arm member F21 is supported by the right movable body base C5 via the cushioning member C202.

From the above, when the reel screen mechanism F1 starts rotating from the reel exposed position and reaches the reel standby position, the protrusion F200b of the arm member F21 comes into contact with the surface of the cushioning member C202. As a result, the rotation of the arm member F21 can be smoothly stopped while the shock absorbing member C202 absorbs the impact caused by the contact. As a result, the arm member F21 and the movable body base C5 do not come into direct contact with each other with a large impact, and the arm member F21, the movable body base C5, the reel screen mechanism F1 and the like are prevented from being damaged by the impact. be able to.

<Positional relationship between the front screen mechanism E1 in the front exposed posture and the bottom plate C1>
FIG. 209 is a perspective view showing the front screen mechanism and the bottom plate when the front screen mechanism is arranged at the front exposed position.

When the front screen mechanism E1 is arranged at the front exposed position, the front screen support base E12 (see FIG. 171) and the bottom plate C1 of the screen housing C10 (see FIGS. 168 and 169), which are components of the front screen mechanism E1. Is in a state of being substantially in contact with each other. FIG. 209 shows this state.

Hereinafter, the arrangement relationship between the front screen support base E12 and the bottom plate C1 will be described in detail with reference to the structure of the front screen support base E12 and the structure of the bottom plate C1.

FIG. 210 is a perspective view of the front screen support base. FIG. 211 is a partially enlarged view of a protrusion formed on the front screen support shown in FIG. 210.

As described with reference to FIG. 171, the front screen support base E12 has a rectangular shape when viewed from the front. As shown in FIG. 210, a lower end portion E300 forming the lower end of the front screen support base E12 is formed along the lower long side of the four sides forming the rectangle.

The lower end portion E300 has a flat lower end surface E300a and protrusions E300b formed so as to project downward in the vicinity of both ends in the longitudinal direction.

As shown in FIG. 211, the protrusion E300b has the shape of a side view triangle. The three sides forming the triangle are a side on the same plane as the lower end surface E300a (side A in the front-rear direction), a side continuous with the back surface of the front screen support base E12 (side B in the vertical direction), and these sides. It is composed of diagonal sides connecting the two. The portion corresponding to the side in the oblique direction is formed through a stepwise inclination, and the portion connected to the side B in the vertical direction is formed in a rounded curved shape.

FIG. 212 is a perspective view of the bottom plate. FIG. 213 is a diagram showing a state in which the positions of the front screen mechanism and the bottom plate shown in FIG. 209 are slightly shifted in the vertical direction. FIG. 214 is a view of the bottom plate viewed from diagonally below. FIG. 215 is a top view of the bottom plate. FIG. 216 is a partially enlarged view of the cushioning member installation portion in the cross section of the bottom plate shown in FIG. 215 along the arrow HH. FIG. 217 is a diagram showing a state in which the cushioning member cover is attached to the cushioning member installation portion formed on the bottom plate shown in FIG. 214. FIG. 218 is a perspective view of the cover for the cushioning member. FIG. 219 is a diagram showing a state in which the cushioning member is placed on the cushioning member cover shown in FIG. 218. FIG. 220 is a diagram showing a state in which the front screen support base and the cushioning member are in contact with each other in the cross section of the bottom plate shown in FIG. 215 along the arrow HH. FIG. 221 is a diagram showing a state in which the cushioning member and the cover for the cushioning member are installed in the cross section of the bottom plate shown in FIG. 215 along the arrow I-I.

As shown in FIG. 212, the bottom plate C1 is formed with two cushioning member installation portions C300 slightly in front of the two apex portions on the front side of the trapezoidal central mounting portion C11. The cushioning member installation portion C300 has a concave shape with respect to the surrounding reference surface C301.

When the front screen mechanism E1 is arranged at the front exposed position (see FIG. 209), the lower end surface E300a of the front screen support base E12 and the reference surface C301 are substantially in contact with each other, and the protrusion E300b of the front screen support base E12 is installed as a cushioning member. It will be housed in the recess formed as part C300 (see FIG. 213).

The distance between the two protrusions E300b in the left-right direction is set to be substantially the same as the distance between the two cushion member installation portions C300 in the left-right direction, and the protrusion E300b on the right side is the cushion member installation portion C300 on the right side. The protrusion E300b on the left side is stored in the cushioning member installation portion C300 on the left side.

As shown in FIG. 214, the recess formed as the cushioning member installation portion C300 is formed by an opening formed on the surface of the bottom plate C1 penetrating to the back surface of the bottom plate C1. For the sake of clarity, in FIG. 214, the openings formed on the surface of the bottom plate C1 are shown by diagonal lines.

As shown in FIG. 216, the cushioning member installation portion C300 includes a front wall portion C300a and a rear wall portion C300b formed vertically downward from the front end and the rear end of the opening formed on the surface of the bottom plate C1, respectively. , The cushion member cover mounting portion C300c formed continuously from the lower end of the front wall portion C300a toward the rear side in the horizontal direction, and the cover mounting portion C300c formed continuously from the lower end of the rear wall portion C300b toward the front side in the horizontal direction. It is provided with a cover mounting portion C300d for a cushioning member. The cover mounting portion C300c for the cushioning member and the cover mounting portion C300d for the cushioning member are not continuous and have a divided shape.

A part of the lower surface of the cushioning member cover C310 shown in FIG. 218 comes into contact with the cushioning member cover mounting portion C300c and the cushioning member cover mounting portion C300d. The cushioning member cover C310 is provided with a screw hole C312. By screwing a screw through the screw insertion hole C302 (see FIG. 212) of the bottom plate C1 into the screw hole C312, the cushioning member cover C310 is inserted into the bottom plate C1. Can be attached to (see FIG. 217).

As shown in FIG. 219, a rectangular parallelepiped-shaped cushioning member C320 is mounted on the cushioning member mounting surface C311 (see FIG. 218) of the cushioning member cover C310. The cushioning member C320 is made of a gel-like material (silicone gel) containing silicone as a main raw material, which has shock absorbing power and anti-vibration performance. As the material of the cushioning member C320, the same material as the cushioning member C202 (see FIG. 207) described above can be used.

FIG. 220 shows the state of the cushioning member installation portion C300 when the front screen mechanism E1 is arranged at the front exposed position (state of FIG. 209). As shown in FIG. 220, the protrusion E300b of the front screen support base E12 is housed in a recess formed as a cushioning member installation portion C300. The tip of the protrusion E300b is in contact with the surface of the cushioning member C320. Although not shown in the figure, the surface of the cushioning member C320 is pressed by the tip of the protrusion E300b and has a recessed shape.

Although not shown, the lower end surface E300a of the front screen support base E12 is substantially in contact with the reference surface C301 of the bottom plate C1. However, there is a slight gap between the lower end surface E300a and the reference surface C301, and the lower end surface E300a and the reference surface C301 are not strictly in contact with each other. The front screen mechanism E1 is supported by the bottom plate C1 via the cushioning member C320.

From the above, when the front screen mechanism E1 starts rotating from the front standby position and reaches the front exposed position, the protrusion E300b of the front screen support base E12 comes into contact with the surface of the cushioning member C320. As a result, the rotation of the front screen mechanism E1 can be smoothly stopped while the shock absorbing member C320 absorbs the impact caused by the contact. As a result, the front screen support base E12 and the bottom plate C1 do not come into direct contact with each other with a large impact, and it is possible to prevent the front screen mechanism E1 and the bottom plate C1 from being damaged by the impact.

As shown in FIG. 221, the length of the opening formed on the surface of the bottom plate C1 in the left-right direction is shorter than the length in the left-right direction of the cushioning member C320. That is, the opening formed on the surface of the bottom plate C1 is smaller than the size of the cushioning member C320. If a large opening is formed on the surface of the bottom plate C1, the cushioning member provided inside the opening (buffering member installation portion) and the protrusions housed therein may be visually recognized by the player. is there. In the present embodiment, by providing a cushioning member in a cavity portion larger than the opening formed on the surface of the bottom plate C1, it is possible to prevent such a situation from occurring and maintain the aesthetic appearance of the game machine. ..

As described above, when the front screen mechanism E1 is arranged at the front exposed position, the lower end surface E300a of the front screen support base E12 is substantially in contact with the reference surface C301 of the bottom plate C1, and the front screen mechanism E1 is buffered. It is supported by the bottom plate C1 via the member C320.

On the other hand, although not shown, when the reel screen mechanism F1 is arranged at the reel exposed position, the reel screen mechanism F1 is in a state of being separated from the reference surface C301 of the bottom plate C1. Therefore, when the reel screen mechanism F1 rotates from the reel standby position to the reel exposed position, the reel screen mechanism F1 does not come into contact with the bottom plate C1, so that it is not necessary to absorb the impact caused by the contact. Therefore, no protrusion is formed at the lower end of the reel screen mechanism F1, and no cushioning member with which the protrusion comes into contact is provided.

<Restriction of rotation of front screen mechanism E1 and reel screen mechanism F1>
As described above, when the front screen mechanism E1 is arranged at the front exposed position, the front screen mechanism E1 is in a state of covering the fixed screen mechanism D from the front, and an image is displayed on the front screen mechanism E1. (See FIG. 51). In this case, the reel screen mechanism F1 is arranged at the reel standby position. On the other hand, when the reel screen mechanism F1 is arranged at the reel exposed position, the reel screen mechanism F1 is in a state of covering the fixed screen mechanism D from the front, and an image is displayed on the reel screen mechanism F1 (FIG. 52). reference). In this case, the front screen mechanism E1 is arranged at the front standby position.

As described with reference to FIG. 53, the front exposed position exists within the operating range of the reel screen mechanism F1. Therefore, when the front screen mechanism E1 is arranged at the front exposed position and the reel screen mechanism F1 is moved from the reel standby position to the reel exposed position, the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 come into contact with each other. become. Further, the reel exposed position exists within the operating range of the front screen mechanism E1. Therefore, when the reel screen mechanism F1 is arranged at the reel exposed position and the front screen mechanism E1 is moved from the front standby position to the front exposed position, the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 come into contact with each other. become.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, as in the third embodiment, the sensor mechanism CS (sensors CS1 to CS3) is connected to the sub-control circuit 1070 (see FIG. 147), and the sub CPU 1071 outputs from the sensors CS1 to CS3. The positions of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 are appropriately managed based on the signals received.

Then, the sub CPU 1071 executes the rotation operation of the front screen mechanism E1 on the condition that the reel screen mechanism F1 is present in the reel standby position, and on the condition that the front screen mechanism E1 is present in the front standby position. The rotation operation of the reel screen mechanism F1 is executed. This is trying to prevent the screen mechanisms from interfering with each other.

However, the force to move the reel screen mechanism F1 from the reel standby position to the reel exposed position or the force to move the front screen mechanism E1 from the front standby position to the front exposed position due to external vibration or impact. It is thought that may be added.

Further, as shown in FIG. 53, when the front screen mechanism E1 is arranged at the front standby position, the center of gravity of the front screen mechanism E1 is above the rotation center axis FG of the front screen mechanism E1. Further, when the front screen mechanism E1 is arranged at the front standby position, the connecting portion between the front screen mechanism E1 and the crank member E22 is arranged behind the front screen mechanism E1, and the center of gravity of the front screen mechanism E1 is , Exists in front of the rotation center axis FG of the front screen mechanism E1. Therefore, the gravity acting on the center of gravity of the front screen mechanism E1 acts in the direction of moving the front screen mechanism E1 from the front standby position to the front exposed position.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, as will be described below, the crank member E22 (see FIG. 183), which is a component of the front screen drive mechanism E2, and the arcuate gear F22 (FIG. 197), which is a component of the reel screen drive mechanism F2. The structure of (see) is characteristic. As a result, when the front screen mechanism E1 is arranged at the front exposed position, the reel screen mechanism F1 is restricted from moving from the reel standby position to the reel exposed position, and the reel screen mechanism F1 is arranged at the reel exposed position. When this is the case, the front screen mechanism E1 is restricted from moving from the front standby position to the front exposed position.

FIG. 222 is a right side view of the arcuate gear shown in FIG. 197. FIG. 223 is a perspective view of the arcuate gear shown in FIG. 222. Note that FIG. 222 coincides with the view seen from the direction of the rotation axis of the arcuate gear F22, and the direction coincides with the direction perpendicular to the surface of the arcuate gear F22.

As shown in FIGS. 222 and 223, the arc-shaped gear F22 is formed with a reel-side regulated portion F400. The reel-side regulated portion F400 is formed at a reel-side regulated position (position indicated by a point F400a in FIG. 222) deviated from the center O22 of the arcuate gear F22. In the figure, it represents the center O22 of the arcuate gear F22 the distance to the reel side the restricted position F400a in _{R 1.}

As shown in FIG. 223, the reel-side regulated portion F400 is provided so as to project from the reel-side regulated position F400a in a direction perpendicular to the surface of the arcuate gear F22. The reel-side regulated portion F400 is formed so that the shape in the side view is circular (or elliptical, quadrangular, hexagonal, etc.). The size (diameter) in the side view is shorter than the length of the portion protruding from the surface of the arcuate gear F22 (the distance from the surface of the arcuate gear F22 to the tip of the regulated portion F400 on the reel side). ing.

Further, the arc-shaped gear F22 is formed with a reel-side regulating portion F401. For the sake of clarity, in FIG. 222, the reel side regulation portion F401 is shown by diagonal lines. The reel-side regulating portion F401 has a shape that forms an arc corresponding to a circle centered on the center O22 of the arc-shaped gear F22. In the figure, it represents the radius of the circle r _1. The inscribed angle with respect to the arc is about 150 ° to 160 °.

As shown in FIG. 223, the reel-side regulating portion F401 is provided so as to project in a direction perpendicular to the surface of the arcuate gear F22. The arcuate gear F22 has a structure protruding from the surface (a protruding structure formed on a concentric circle centered on the center O22, and a protruding structure radially formed from the center O22, in addition to the reel-side regulating portion F401. ), But the length of the portion of the reel-side regulating portion F401 protruding from the surface of the arcuate gear F22 is longer than that of other protruding structures.

FIG. 224 is a left side view of the crank member of the right front screen drive mechanism. FIG. 225 is a perspective view of the crank member shown in FIG. 224. In these figures, the state of the surface of the crank member E22 opposite to the side on which the slide groove E22b (see FIG. 181) is formed is shown. Note that FIG. 224 corresponds to the view seen from the direction of the rotation axis of the crank member E22, and the direction coincides with the direction perpendicular to the surface of the crank member E22.

As shown in FIGS. 224 and 225, the crank member E22 is formed with a front side regulating portion E400. For the sake of clarity, in FIG. 224, the front side regulation portion E400 is shaded. The front side regulating portion E400 has a shape that forms an arc corresponding to a circle centered on the rotation center E22a (intermediate position E22a shown in FIG. 181) of the crank member E22. In the figure, it represents the radius of the circle r _2. The inscribed angle with respect to the arc is about 90 ° to 100 °.

As shown in FIG. 225, the front side regulating portion E400 is provided so as to project in a direction perpendicular to the surface of the crank member E22.

Further, the crank member E22 is formed with a front-side regulated portion E401. The front side regulated portion E401 is formed at a front side regulated position (position indicated by a point E401a in FIG. 224) deviated from the rotation center E22a of the crank member E22. In the figure, it represents the distance from the rotation center E22a of the crank member E22 up front the restricted position E401a at _{R 2.} The front regulated position E401a corresponds to the position where the slide groove E22b is formed on the surface opposite to the crank member E22.

The front side regulated portion E401 is formed so that the shape in the side view is circular (or elliptical, quadrangular, hexagonal, etc.). The size (diameter) of the front side regulated portion E401 in side view is set to be smaller than the width of the slide groove E22b (for example, about 1/6 to 1/4).

Further, as shown in FIG. 225, the front-side regulated portion E401 is provided so as to project from the front-side regulated position E401a in a direction perpendicular to the surface of the crank member E22.

As described above, the reel-side regulated portion F400 and the reel-side regulated portion F401 are each provided so as to project in a direction perpendicular to the surface of the arcuate gear F22 (see FIG. 223). Further, the front side regulating portion E400 and the front side regulated portion E401 are each provided so as to project in a direction perpendicular to the surface of the crank member E22 (see FIG. 225).

Further, the arcuate gear F22 and the crank member E22 are arranged so that the surface of the arcuate gear F22 and the surface of the crank member E22 are substantially parallel to each other (the direction of the rotation axis of the arcuate gear F22 and the crank member). The direction of the rotation axis of E22 matches).

Then, the length of the portion where the reel-side regulated portion F400 protrudes from the surface of the arc-shaped gear F22 (the protruding length of the reel-side regulated portion F400) and the reel-side regulated portion F401 are on the surface of the arc-shaped gear F22. The length of the protruding portion (the protruding length of the reel side regulating portion F401) and the length of the portion where the front side regulating portion E400 protrudes from the surface of the crank member E22 (the protruding length of the front side regulating portion E400). ) And the length of the portion where the front side regulated portion E401 protrudes from the surface of the crank member E22 (the protruding length of the front side regulated portion E401) is the surface of the arcuate gear F22 and the crank member, respectively. It is shorter than the distance to the surface of E22.

On the other hand, the total of the protruding length of the reel-side regulated portion F400 and the protruding length of the front-side regulated portion E400, and the total of the protruding length of the reel-side regulated portion F401 and the protruding length of the front-side regulated portion E401 are Each is longer than the distance between the surface of the arcuate gear F22 and the surface of the crank member E22.

Therefore, when the reel-side regulated portion F400 rotates with the rotation of the arcuate gear F22, if the front-side regulating portion E400 exists during the rotation, the presence of the front-side regulating portion E400 is an obstacle. (Locked to the front side restricting portion E400), the reel side regulated portion F400 cannot rotate any more. As a result, the arcuate gear F22 cannot also rotate, and as a result, the rotation of the reel screen mechanism F1 is restricted.

Similarly, when the front side regulated portion E401 rotates with the rotation of the crank member E22, if the reel side regulating portion F401 exists in the middle of the rotation, the presence of the reel side regulating portion F401 interferes. (Locked to the reel side restricting portion F401), the front side regulated portion E401 cannot rotate any more. As a result, the crank member E22 cannot rotate, and as a result, the rotation of the front screen mechanism E1 is restricted.

Hereinafter, description will be made in more detail with reference to FIGS. 226 to 229. FIG. 226 is a perspective view of a cross section of the screen device when the front screen mechanism is arranged at the front exposed position and the reel screen mechanism is arranged at the reel standby position. FIG. 227 is a right side view of a cross section of the arcuate gear and the crank member when the front screen mechanism is arranged at the front exposed position and the reel screen mechanism is arranged at the reel standby position. FIG. 228 is a perspective view of a cross section of the screen device when the reel screen mechanism is arranged at the reel exposed position and the front screen mechanism is arranged at the front standby position. FIG. 229 is a right side view of a cross section of the arcuate gear and the crank member when the reel screen mechanism is arranged at the reel exposed position and the front screen mechanism is arranged at the front standby position.

Specifically, FIGS. 226 and 227 show a surface parallel to the surface of the arcuate gear F22 and the surface of the crank member E22, and the distance from the surface of the arcuate gear F22 is the protruding length of the reel-side regulated portion F400. It is a cross-sectional view when the crank member E22 is cut on a surface which is shorter than the above and the distance from the surface of the crank member E22 is shorter than the protruding length of the front side regulating portion E400. 228 and 229 are planes parallel to the plane of the arcuate gear F22 and the plane of the crank member E22, and the distance from the plane of the arcuate gear F22 is shorter than the protruding length of the reel side regulating portion F401, and the crank. FIG. 5 is a cross-sectional view when the member E22 is cut on a surface such that the distance from the surface is shorter than the protruding length of the front side regulated portion E401.

For the sake of clarity, the front side regulating portion E400 is shown by diagonal lines in FIGS. 226 and 227, and the reel side regulating portion F401 is shown by diagonal lines in FIGS. 228 and 229. Further, FIGS. 226 to 229 show the crank member E22, which is the crank member E22 of the left front screen drive mechanism E2A, and the crank member E22 of the right front screen drive mechanism E2B is (front). It does not appear in the figure (except for the side regulation part E400 and the front side regulated part E401).

When the front screen mechanism E1 is arranged at the front exposed position and the reel screen mechanism F1 is arranged at the reel standby position, the reel side regulated portion F400 and the front side regulated portion E400 are as shown in FIGS. 226 and 227. Is placed in.

In this state, it is assumed that a force for moving the reel screen mechanism F1 from the reel standby position to the reel exposed position is applied. At that time, the restricted portion F400 on the reel side tries to start rotating counterclockwise from the positions shown in FIGS. 226 and 227. The moving direction of the reel-side regulated portion F400 at the start of rotation is the distance between the center O22 and the existing position of the reel-side regulated portion F400 (reel-side regulated position F400a) with the center O22 of the arcuate gear F22 as the center. It is a counterclockwise direction (direction indicated by an arrow in FIG. 227) along a tangent line at the reel-side restricted position F400a of a circle having a radius of (R _{1 in} FIG. 222). However, as shown in FIGS. 226 and 227, the front side regulating portion E400 is arranged so as to be close to (substantially abutted) with the reel side regulated portion F400 on the moving direction side of the reel side regulated portion F400. .. The front regulated portion E400 is arranged so as to intersect the moving direction (tangent line) of the reel side regulated portion F400 (so as to obstruct the course of the reel side regulated portion F400), and the reel side regulated portion F400. Even if the F400 tries to continue rotating, it is locked by the front side regulating portion E400, and the reel side regulated portion F400 cannot pass through the existing position of the front side regulating portion E400, and rotates at that position. It will stop. As a result, the arcuate gear F22 cannot rotate any more, and as a result, the reel screen mechanism F1 also does not rotate, and the positional relationship between the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 is maintained. become.

The above contents can be paraphrased as follows. That is, when the arc-shaped gear F22 rotates to drive the reel screen mechanism F1, the reel-side regulated portion F400 is centered on the center O22 of the arc-shaped gear F22, and the center O22 and the reel-side regulated position F400a. It rotates on the circumference of a circle whose radius is a distance (R _{1 in} FIG. 222). When the reel screen mechanism F1 rotates from the reel standby position to the reel exposed position, the locus drawn by the reel-side regulated portion F400 becomes a part (arc) of the circumference. In the present embodiment, when the front screen mechanism E1 is arranged at the front exposed position, the front side regulating portion E400 is arranged so as to intersect the arc, so that the reel side regulated portion F400 is on the arc. The front side regulating portion E400 will be present in the middle of rotating. Therefore, the front-side regulated portion E400 becomes a barrier that blocks the path of the reel-side regulated portion F400, and the reel-side regulated portion F400 is prevented from rotating further (the front-side regulated portion E400 blocks the way). .. As a result, even if a force for moving the reel screen mechanism F1 from the reel standby position to the reel exposed position is applied, it is possible to prevent the reel screen mechanism F1 from moving to the reel exposed position.

When the front screen mechanism E1 is arranged at the front exposed position and the reel screen mechanism F1 is arranged at the reel standby position (in the case of FIGS. 226 and 227), the reel screen mechanism F1 is kept near the reel standby position. From this point of view, it is preferable that the reel-side regulated portion F400 and the front-side regulated portion E400 are as close as possible. For example, the gap between the reel-side regulated portion F400 and the front-side regulated portion E400 is less than twice the diameter (circle diameter) of the reel-side regulated portion F400, less than or equal to the diameter of the reel-side regulated portion F400, or the reel. It may be designed so that the diameter of the side regulated portion F400 is 2/3 or less (or 1/2 or less, 1/3 or less, 1/4 or less, etc.).

Further, as described in detail in the second embodiment, when the reel screen mechanism F1 is arranged at the reel standby position, the front screen mechanism E1 can be rotated from the front exposed position to the front standby position. In this regard, as described with reference to FIG. 224, the front side regulating portion E400 corresponds to a circle centered on the rotation center E22a of the crank member E22 (a circle having r ₂ as a radius shown in FIG. 224). It has a shape that forms an arc. Therefore, when the front screen mechanism E1 is rotated from the front exposed position to the front standby position, the front side regulating unit E400 rotates clockwise on the circumference from the position shown in FIG. 227. At that time, the reel-side the restricted portion F400 is remains in the position shown in FIG. 227 (distance that is shorter than the radius r ₂ of the circular position of the rotation center E22a of the crank member E22), the front side It does not interfere with the course of the Regulatory Department E400. Therefore, the front side regulating portion E400 is not locked by the reel side regulated portion F400, and the front screen mechanism E1 can be rotated from the front exposed position to the front standby position without any problem.

In this way, from the viewpoint of preventing the reel-side regulated portion F400 from obstructing the course of the front-side restricting portion E400 when rotating the front screen mechanism E1 from the front exposed position to the front standby position, the front screen When the mechanism E1 is arranged at the front exposed position and the reel screen mechanism F1 is arranged at the reel standby position (in the case of FIGS. 226 and 227), the reel side regulated portion F400 and the front side regulated portion E400 are hit. It is better not to touch them, but to separate them to some extent (if the reel side regulated part F400 and the front side regulation part E400 are in contact with each other, when the front side regulation part E400 moves, the front side regulation part E400 and the reel side Friction may occur due to contact with the regulated portion F400, and smooth rotation may not be possible). For example, the gap between the reel-side regulated portion F400 and the front-side regulated portion E400 is 1/20 or more (or 1/10 or more, 1/5 or more) of the diameter (circle diameter) of the reel-side regulated portion F400. It is preferable to design so that the diameter is 1/3 or more, 1/2 or more, 2/3 or more, etc.), or the diameter of the regulated portion F400 on the reel side.

When the reel screen mechanism F1 is arranged at the reel exposed position and the front screen mechanism E1 is arranged at the front standby position, the front side regulated portion E401 and the reel side regulated portion F401 are as shown in FIGS. 228 and 229. Is placed in.

In this state, it is assumed that a force is applied to move the front screen mechanism E1 from the front standby position to the front exposed position. At that time, the regulated portion E401 on the front side tries to start rotating counterclockwise from the positions shown in FIGS. 228 and 229. The moving direction of the front side regulated portion E401 at the start of rotation is centered on the rotation center E22a of the crank member E22, and the positions where the rotation center E22a and the front side regulated portion E401 exist (front side regulated position E401a). the distance (in the direction indicated by the arrow in FIG. 229) counter-clockwise direction along the tangential line at the front side the restricted position E401a of a circle the radius (R ₂ in FIG. ₂₂₄₎ with. However, as shown in FIGS. 228 and 229, the reel-side restricting portion F401 is arranged so as to be close to (substantially in contact with) the front-side regulated portion E401 on the moving direction side of the front-side regulated portion E401. .. The reel-side regulated portion F401 is arranged so as to intersect the moving direction (the tangent line) of the front-side regulated portion E401 (so as to obstruct the course of the front-side regulated portion E401), and the front-side regulated portion E401 is regulated. Even if the E401 tries to continue rotating, it is locked by the reel-side regulating portion F401, and the front-side regulated portion E401 cannot pass through the existing position of the reel-side regulating portion F401, and rotates at that position. It will stop. As a result, the crank member E22 cannot rotate any more, and as a result, the front screen mechanism E1 also does not rotate, and the positional relationship between the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 is maintained. Become.

The above contents can be paraphrased as follows. That is, when the crank member E22 rotates to drive the front screen mechanism E1, the front side regulated portion E401 is centered on the rotation center E22a of the crank member E22, and the rotation center E22a and the front side regulated position E401a. pivots on the circumference length of a circle that the (R ₂ in FIG. ₂₂₄₎ and the radius of the. When the front screen mechanism E1 rotates from the front standby position to the front exposed position, the locus drawn by the front side regulated portion E401 becomes a part (arc) of the circumference. In the present embodiment, when the reel screen mechanism F1 is arranged at the reel exposed position, the reel side restricting portion F401 is arranged so as to intersect the arc, so that the front side regulated portion E401 is on the arc. The reel side regulation unit F401 is present in the middle of rotating. Therefore, the reel-side regulated portion F401 serves as a barrier that blocks the path of the front-side regulated portion E401, and the front-side regulated portion E401 is prevented from rotating further (the reel-side regulated portion F401 blocks the way). .. As a result, even if a force for moving the front screen mechanism E1 from the front standby position to the front exposed position is applied, it is possible to prevent the front screen mechanism E1 from moving to the front exposed position.

When the reel screen mechanism F1 is arranged at the reel exposed position and the front screen mechanism E1 is arranged at the front standby position (in the case of FIGS. 228 and 229), the front screen mechanism E1 is kept near the front standby position. From this point of view, it is preferable that the front side regulated portion E401 and the reel side regulated portion F401 are as close as possible. For example, the gap between the front regulated portion E401 and the reel side regulated portion F401 is less than twice the diameter (circle diameter) of the front side regulated portion E401, less than or equal to the diameter of the front side regulated portion E401, or the front. It may be designed so that the diameter of the side regulated portion E401 is 2/3 or less (or 1/2 or less, 1/3 or less, 1/4 or less, etc.).

Further, as described in detail in the second embodiment, when the front screen mechanism E1 is arranged at the front standby position, the reel screen mechanism F1 can be rotated from the reel exposed position to the reel standby position. Arc In this regard, as described with reference to FIG. 222, the reel-side restricting portion F401 is corresponding to circle around the center O22 of the arcuate gear F22 (circle the r ₁ shown in FIG. 222 and radius) It has a shape that forms. Therefore, when the reel screen mechanism F1 is rotated from the reel exposed position to the reel standby position, the reel side regulating unit F401 rotates clockwise on the circumference from the position shown in FIG. 229. At that time, the front side the restricted portion E401 is remains in the position shown in FIG. 229 (distance that is shorter than the radius r ₁ of the circle position from the center O22 of the arcuate gear F22), the reel-side regulating It does not interfere with the course of part F401. Therefore, the reel side restricting portion F401 is not locked by the front side regulated portion E401, and the reel screen mechanism F1 can be rotated from the reel exposed position to the reel standby position without any problem.

In this way, when the reel screen mechanism F1 is rotated from the reel exposed position to the reel standby position, the reel screen is prevented from the viewpoint that the front side regulated portion E401 does not obstruct the course of the reel side regulated portion F401. When the mechanism F1 is arranged at the reel exposed position and the front screen mechanism E1 is arranged at the front standby position (in the case of FIGS. 228 and 229), the front side regulated portion E401 and the reel side regulated portion F401 are hit. It is better not to touch them but to separate them to some extent (if the front side regulated part E401 and the reel side regulation part F401 are in contact with each other, when the reel side regulation part F401 moves, the reel side regulation part F401 and the front side Friction may occur due to contact with the regulated portion E401, and smooth rotation may not be possible). For example, the gap between the front regulated portion E401 and the reel side regulated portion F401 is 1/20 or more (or 1/10 or more, 1/5 or more) of the diameter (circle diameter) of the front regulated portion E401. It is preferable to design so that the diameter is 1/3 or more, 1/2 or more, 2/3 or more, etc.), or the diameter of the regulated portion E401 on the front side.

The distance from the center O22 of the arcuate gear F22 to the reel-side restricting portion F401 and _{(r 1} in FIG. 222), the distance from the rotation center E22a of the crank member E22 to the front side regulating unit E400 _(r in FIG. 224 ₂ ) Is shorter than the distance from the center O22 of the arcuate gear F22 to the rotation center E22a of the crank member E22 (the linear distance between the center O22 and the rotation center E22a in FIGS. 227 and 229). .. As a result, even if the crank member E22 rotates, the reel side regulation unit F401 and the front side regulation unit E400 do not come into contact with each other (the front side regulation unit E400 is locked by the reel side regulation unit F401). Even if the arcuate gear F22 rotates, the reel side regulation unit F401 and the front side regulation unit E400 do not come into contact with each other (the reel side regulation unit F401 is locked by the front side regulation unit E400). Not). Therefore, when the reel screen mechanism F1 is arranged at the reel standby position (in the case of FIG. 227), the front screen mechanism E1 can be rotated from the front exposed position to the front standby position without any problem, and the front screen mechanism can be rotated. When E1 is arranged at the front standby position (in the case of FIG. 229), the reel screen mechanism F1 can be rotated from the reel exposed position to the reel standby position without any problem.

As described above, as one embodiment of the present invention, the game machine 1 according to the fourth embodiment has been described.

Conventionally, a game machine equipped with an effect device capable of producing an effect by operating a movable body is known (see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-013685). According to such a game machine, through the movement of the movable body, it is possible to perform a powerful effect that cannot be obtained only by the image displayed on the liquid crystal display device.

In recent years, in order to further enhance the effect of the effect, a game machine equipped with an effect device having a plurality of movable bodies has been proposed. In a game machine equipped with such an effect device, a desired effect can be performed by appropriately changing the positional relationship of each movable body according to the game situation. If one movable body moves to a place different from the place where it should be originally placed, it will not be possible to realize the intended effect.

The present invention has been made in view of the above problems, and an object of the present invention is to arrange a movable body at an appropriate position in a game machine equipped with a production device having a plurality of movable bodies.

In this respect, the game machine 1 according to the fourth embodiment has the following features.

(35-1) A projector capable of projecting an image (projector mechanism B2) and
A first screen (front screen mechanism E1) and a second screen (reel screen mechanism F1) capable of displaying the image projected by the projector, and
The first drive mechanism (front screen drive mechanism E2) for driving the first screen and
A second drive mechanism (reel screen drive mechanism F2) for driving the second screen, and
The main body (cabinet G) with an opening on the front and
An opening / closing door (upper door mechanism UD) that is attached to the main body so as to be openable and closable and is provided with a display area (upper display window UD1) that allows the image displayed on the screen to be visually recognized is provided.
The first drive mechanism (front screen drive mechanism E2) includes a first drive force transmission member (crank member E22) for transmitting a drive force to the first screen, and the first screen is the first drive. Along with the operation of the force transmitting member, an operation is performed between the first projected position (front exposed position) and the first non-projected position (front standby position).
The second drive mechanism (reel screen drive mechanism F2) includes a second drive force transmission member (arc-shaped gear F22) for transmitting a drive force to the second screen, and the second screen is the second screen. Along with the operation of the driving force transmission member, an operation is performed between the second projected position (reel exposed position) and the second non-projected position (reel standby position).
When the first screen is arranged at the first projection position (front exposure position), the second screen is arranged at the second non-projection position (reel standby position), and the image projected by the projector. Is displayed on the first screen (front screen mechanism E1), while the second screen is arranged at the second projection position (reel exposure position), the first screen is the first non-projection. The image arranged at the position (front standby position) and projected by the projector is displayed on the second screen (reel screen mechanism F1).
The first driving force transmitting member (crank member E22) is formed with a first regulating portion (front side regulating portion E400) for blocking the operation of the second driving force transmitting member.
The second driving force transmission member (arc-shaped gear F22) operates together with the second driving force transmission member, and the operation can be blocked by the first regulation unit (reel side regulated unit). F400) is formed,
When the first screen is arranged at the first projection position (front exposure position), the second screen is moved from the second non-projection position (reel standby position) to the second projection position (reel exposure position). When a force to move toward is applied, the second regulated portion (reel side regulated portion F400) formed on the second driving force transmitting member is formed on the first driving force transmitting member. The operation of the second driving force transmission member (arc-shaped gear F22) is blocked due to being locked by the portion (front side regulating portion E400).
A game machine characterized by that.

According to the game machine 1 according to the fourth embodiment, when the first screen (front screen mechanism E1) is arranged at the first projection position (front exposure position), the second screen (reel screen mechanism F1) is set. The image arranged at the second non-projection position (reel standby position) and projected by the projector is displayed on the first screen (front screen mechanism E1). On the other hand, when the second screen (reel screen mechanism F1) is arranged at the second projection position (reel exposure position), the first screen (front screen mechanism E1) is at the first non-projection position (front standby position). The image projected by the projector is displayed on the second screen (reel screen mechanism F1). By defining the positional relationship between the first screen (front screen mechanism E1) and the second screen (reel screen mechanism F1) in this way, the screen on which the image projected by the projector is displayed is the first screen (front). It is decided to switch between the screen mechanism E1) and the second screen (reel screen mechanism F1). As a result, it is possible to perform an effect using a desired screen according to the situation of the game.

Here, if the first screen (front screen mechanism E1) is arranged at the first projection position (front exposure position), the second screen (reel screen mechanism F1) is at the second non-projection position (reel standby). If it moves from the position) to the second projection position (reel exposure position), the positional relationship between the first screen (front screen mechanism E1) and the second screen (reel screen mechanism F1) is broken, which is appropriate. There is a possibility that it will not be possible to produce. In this regard, according to the gaming machine 1 according to the fourth embodiment, the first driving force transmitting member (crank member E22) for transmitting the driving force to the first screen (front screen mechanism E1) has a second screen. A first regulating portion (front side regulating portion E400) is formed to prevent the operation of the second driving force transmitting member (arc-shaped gear F22) for transmitting the driving force to the (reel screen mechanism F1). Further, the second driving force transmission member (arc-shaped gear F22) operates together with the second driving force transmission member (arc-shaped gear F22), and the operation is blocked by the first regulation unit (front side regulation unit E400). A second regulated portion (reel side regulated portion F400) to be obtained is formed. Then, when the first screen (front screen mechanism E1) is arranged at the first projection position (front exposure position), the second screen (reel screen mechanism F1) is moved from the second non-projection position (reel standby position) to the second screen. 2 Even when a force to move toward the projected position (reel exposed position) is applied, the second regulated portion (reel side regulated portion F400) formed on the second driving force transmission member (arc-shaped gear F22). ) Is locked by the first regulating portion (front side regulating portion E400) formed on the first driving force transmitting member (crank member E22), and thus the second driving force transmitting member (arc-shaped gear F22). ) Is blocked. As a result, the force is prevented from being transmitted from the second driving force transmission member (arc-shaped gear F22) to the second screen (reel screen mechanism F1), and the second screen (reel screen mechanism F1) becomes the second screen. It is possible to prevent the vehicle from moving from the non-projection position (reel standby position) to the second projection position (reel exposure position).

(35-2) A projector capable of projecting an image (projector mechanism B2) and
A first screen (front screen mechanism E1) and a second screen (reel screen mechanism F1) capable of displaying the image projected by the projector, and
The first drive mechanism (front screen drive mechanism E2) for driving the first screen and
A second drive mechanism (reel screen drive mechanism F2) for driving the second screen, and
The main body (cabinet G) with an opening on the front and
An opening / closing door (upper door mechanism UD) that is attached to the main body so as to be openable and closable and is provided with a display area (upper display window UD1) that allows the image displayed on the screen to be visually recognized is provided.
The first drive mechanism (front screen drive mechanism E2) includes an arm (crank member E22) connected to the first screen, and the first screen is linked to the operation of the arm and has a first projection position. Operate between the (front exposed position) and the first non-projection position (front standby position),
The second drive mechanism (reel screen drive mechanism F2) includes a gear (arc-shaped gear F22) for transmitting a driving force to the second screen, and the second screen is accompanied by rotation of the gear. , Operates between the second projected position (reel exposed position) and the second non-projected position (reel standby position).
When the first screen is arranged at the first projection position (front exposure position), the second screen is arranged at the second non-projection position (reel standby position), and the image projected by the projector. Is displayed on the first screen (front screen mechanism E1), while the second screen is arranged at the second projection position (reel exposure position), the first screen is the first non-projection. The image arranged at the position (front standby position) and projected by the projector is displayed on the second screen (reel screen mechanism F1).
The arm (crank member E22) is formed with a first regulating portion (front side regulating portion E400) for preventing the rotation of the gear in a curved shape.
In the gear (arc-shaped gear F22), a second regulated portion (reel-side regulated portion F400) that rotates together with the gear and can be prevented from rotating by the first regulating portion is rotated on the gear. It is formed at a predetermined position (reel side regulated position F400a) deviated from the center of motion.
The second regulated portion (reel side regulated portion F400) at the time when the second screen starts operating from the second non-projected position (reel standby position) to the second projected position (reel exposed position). The direction of movement was along the tangent line at the predetermined position of a circle centered on the rotation center of the gear (center O22 of the arcuate gear F22) and having the distance between the rotation center of the gear and the predetermined position as a radius. One direction (the direction indicated by the arrow in FIG. 227).
When the first screen is arranged at the first projection position (front exposed position), the second regulated portion (front side regulating portion E400) having a curved shape intersects the tangent line. It is arranged on the one direction side of the portion and is in contact with or in close proximity to the second regulated portion (reel side regulated portion F400).
A game machine characterized by that.

According to the game machine 1 according to the fourth embodiment, when the first screen (front screen mechanism E1) is arranged at the first projection position (front exposure position), the second screen (reel screen mechanism F1) is set. The image arranged at the second non-projection position (reel standby position) and projected by the projector is displayed on the first screen (front screen mechanism E1). On the other hand, when the second screen (reel screen mechanism F1) is arranged at the second projection position (reel exposure position), the first screen (front screen mechanism E1) is at the first non-projection position (front standby position). The image projected by the projector is displayed on the second screen (reel screen mechanism F1). By defining the positional relationship between the first screen (front screen mechanism E1) and the second screen (reel screen mechanism F1) in this way, the screen on which the image projected by the projector is displayed is the first screen (front). It is decided to switch between the screen mechanism E1) and the second screen (reel screen mechanism F1). As a result, it is possible to perform an effect using a desired screen according to the situation of the game.

Here, if the first screen (front screen mechanism E1) is arranged at the first projection position (front exposure position), the second screen (reel screen mechanism F1) is at the second non-projection position (reel standby). If it moves from the position) to the second projection position (reel exposure position), the positional relationship between the first screen (front screen mechanism E1) and the second screen (reel screen mechanism F1) is broken, which is appropriate. There is a possibility that it will not be possible to produce. In this regard, according to the gaming machine 1 according to the fourth embodiment, the arm (crank member E22) connected to the first screen (front screen mechanism E1) has a driving force applied to the second screen (reel screen mechanism F1). The first regulating portion (front side regulating portion E400) for preventing the rotation of the gear (arc-shaped gear F22) for transmitting the signal is formed in a curved shape. Further, the gear (arc-shaped gear F22) for transmitting the driving force to the second screen (reel screen mechanism F1) rotates together with the gear (arc-shaped gear F22), and the first regulating portion (front side regulation) is regulated. The second regulated portion (reel side regulated portion F400) whose rotation can be blocked by the portion E400) is deviated from the rotation center on the gear (center O22 of the arcuate gear F22) at a predetermined position (reel side regulated portion). It is formed at position F400a). The second regulated portion (reel side regulated portion) at the time when the second screen (reel screen mechanism F1) starts operating from the second non-projected position (reel standby position) to the second projected position (reel exposed position). The moving direction of F400) is centered on the center of rotation of the gear (center O22 of the arcuate gear F22), the center of rotation of the gear (center O22 of the arcuate gear F22), and a predetermined position (reel side regulated position F400a). It is one direction (the direction indicated by the arrow in FIG. 227) along the tangent line at a predetermined position (reel side regulated position F400a) of the circle having the distance of. Then, when the first screen (front screen mechanism E1) is arranged at the first projection position (front exposure position), the curved first regulation portion (front side regulation portion E400) intersects the tangent line. The second screen (reel screen mechanism F1) moves from the second non-projection position (reel standby position) to the second projection position (reel exposed position) in the above-mentioned one direction of the second regulated portion (reel side regulated portion F400). It is arranged on the side of the second regulated portion (reel side regulated portion F400) at the time when the operation is started toward the target, and is in contact with or close to the second regulated portion (reel side regulated portion F400). ing. As a result, assuming that a force for moving the second screen (reel screen mechanism F1) from the second non-projection position (reel standby position) to the second projection position (reel exposed position) is applied to the gear (arc-shaped gear F22). The second regulated portion (reel side regulated portion F400) formed on the gear (arc-shaped gear F22) is engaged by the first regulated portion (front side regulated portion E400) formed on the arm (crank member E22). It will be stopped. Due to this, the rotation of the gear (arc-shaped gear F22) is blocked, so that the force is transmitted from the gear (arc-shaped gear F22) to the second screen (reel screen mechanism F1). It is possible to prevent the second screen (reel screen mechanism F1) from moving from the second non-projection position (reel standby position) to the second projection position (reel exposed position).

(36-1) A projector capable of projecting an image (projector mechanism B2) and
A first screen (reel screen mechanism F1) and a second screen (front screen mechanism E1) capable of displaying the image projected by the projector, and
The first drive mechanism (reel screen drive mechanism F2) for driving the first screen and
A second drive mechanism (front screen drive mechanism E2) for driving the second screen, and
The main body (cabinet G) with an opening on the front and
An opening / closing door (upper door mechanism UD) that is attached to the main body so as to be openable and closable and is provided with a display area (upper display window UD1) that allows the image displayed on the screen to be visually recognized is provided.
The first drive mechanism (reel screen drive mechanism F2) includes a first drive force transmission member (arc-shaped gear F22) for transmitting a drive force to the first screen, and the first screen is the first screen. With the operation of the driving force transmission member, it rotates between the first projected position (reel exposed position) and the first non-projected position (reel standby position).
The second drive mechanism (front screen drive mechanism E2) includes a second drive force transmission member (crank member E22) for transmitting a drive force to the second screen, and the second screen is the second drive. With the operation of the force transmitting member, it rotates between the second projected position (front exposed position) and the second non-projected position (front standby position).
When the first screen is arranged at the first projection position (reel exposure position), the second screen is arranged at the second non-projection position (front standby position), and the image projected by the projector. Is displayed on the first screen (reel screen mechanism F1), while the second screen is arranged at the second projection position (front exposure position), the first screen is the first non-projection. The image arranged at the position (reel standby position) and projected by the projector is displayed on the second screen (front screen mechanism E1).
When the second screen rotates from the second non-projection position (front standby position) to the second projection position (front exposure position), the portion on the second screen farthest from the center of the rotation is drawn. The locus (trajectory drawn by the front end portion of the front screen mechanism E1 shown in FIG. 53) is in front of the existing position of the first screen arranged at the first projection position (reel exposed position).
The first driving force transmitting member (arc-shaped gear F22) is formed with a first regulating portion (reel side regulating portion F401) for blocking the operation of the second driving force transmitting member.
The second driving force transmission member (crank member E22) operates together with the second driving force transmission member, and the operation can be blocked by the first regulation unit (front side regulated unit E401). ) Is formed,
When the first screen is arranged at the first projection position (reel exposure position), the second screen is moved from the second non-projection position (front standby position) to the second projection position (front exposure position). When a force to move toward is applied, the second regulated portion (front side regulated portion E401) formed on the second driving force transmitting member is formed on the first driving force transmitting member. The operation of the second driving force transmitting member (crank member E22) is prevented due to being locked by the portion (reel side regulating portion F401).
A game machine characterized by that.

According to the game machine 1 according to the fourth embodiment, when the first screen (reel screen mechanism F1) is arranged at the first projection position (reel exposure position), the second screen (front screen mechanism E1) is set. The image arranged in the second non-projection position (front standby position) and projected by the projector is displayed on the first screen (reel screen mechanism F1). On the other hand, when the second screen (front screen mechanism E1) is arranged at the second projection position (front exposure position), the first screen (reel screen mechanism F1) is in the first non-projection position (reel standby position). The image projected by the projector is displayed on the second screen (front screen mechanism E1). By defining the positional relationship between the first screen (reel screen mechanism F1) and the second screen (front screen mechanism E1) in this way, the screen on which the image projected by the projector is displayed is the first screen (reel). It is decided to switch between the screen mechanism F1) and the second screen (front screen mechanism E1). As a result, it is possible to perform an effect using a desired screen according to the situation of the game.

Here, if the first screen (reel screen mechanism F1) is arranged at the first projection position (reel exposure position), the second screen (front screen mechanism E1) is at the second non-projection position (front standby). If it moves from the position) to the second projection position (front exposure position), the positional relationship between the first screen (reel screen mechanism F1) and the second screen (front screen mechanism E1) is broken, which is appropriate. There is a possibility that it will not be possible to produce. In particular, when the second screen (front screen mechanism E1) rotates from the second non-projection position (front standby position) to the second projection position (front exposure position), the second screen farthest from the center of the rotation (front screen mechanism E1). The locus drawn by the portion on the front screen mechanism E1) (the locus drawn by the front end portion of the front screen mechanism E1 shown in FIG. 53) is the first screen (reel screen mechanism F1) arranged at the first projection position (reel exposed position). ) Is in front of the existing position. Therefore, when the first screen (reel screen mechanism F1) is arranged at the first projection position (reel exposure position), the second screen (front screen mechanism E1) starts from the second non-projection position (front standby position). When moving toward the second projection position (front exposure position), the second screen (front screen mechanism E1) appears so as to cover the front of the first screen (reel screen mechanism F1). For example, an excited player may hit or shake the game machine while playing a game, and the second screen (front screen mechanism E1) is in the second non-projection position due to the vibration caused by the hitting or shaking of the game machine. When moving from the (front standby position) to the second projection position (front exposure position), it is displayed on the first screen (reel screen mechanism F1) due to the appearance of the second screen (front screen mechanism E1). The existing image is obscured from the front (a part or all of the image displayed on the first screen (reel screen mechanism F1) is displayed on the second screen (front screen mechanism E1)), and the effect is produced. It is also expected that it will be very strange.

In this regard, according to the game machine 1 according to the fourth embodiment, the first driving force transmitting member (arc-shaped gear F22) for transmitting the driving force to the first screen (reel screen mechanism F1) has a second A first regulating portion (reel side regulating portion F401) is formed to prevent the operation of the second driving force transmitting member (crank member E22) for transmitting the driving force to the screen (front screen mechanism E1). Further, the second driving force transmission member (crank member E22) operates together with the second driving force transmission member (crank member E22), and the operation can be blocked by the first regulation unit (reel side regulation unit F401). 2 A regulated portion (front side regulated portion E401) is formed. Then, when the first screen (reel screen mechanism F1) is arranged at the first projection position (reel exposure position), the second screen (front screen mechanism E1) is moved from the second non-projection position (front standby position). 2 The second regulated portion (front side regulated portion E401) formed on the second driving force transmission member (crank member E22) even when a force for moving toward the projection position (front exposed position) is applied. Is locked by the first regulating portion (reel side regulating portion F401) formed on the first driving force transmitting member (arc-shaped gear F22), so that the second driving force transmitting member (crank member E22) Operation is blocked. As a result, the force is prevented from being transmitted from the second driving force transmission member (crank member E22) to the second screen (front screen mechanism E1), and the second screen (front screen mechanism E1) is not the second screen. It is possible to prevent the vehicle from moving from the projection position (front standby position) to the second projection position (front exposure position). As a result, when an effect using the first screen (reel screen mechanism F1) is performed, a situation occurs in which the effect is disturbed by the movement of the second screen (front screen mechanism E1). It can also be suppressed from being stolen.

(36-2) The gaming machine according to (36-1) above.
When the second screen (front screen mechanism E1) is arranged at the second non-projection position (front standby position), the center of gravity of the second screen is above and in front of the center of rotation.
It is characterized by that.

According to the game machine 1 according to the fourth embodiment, when the second screen (front screen mechanism E1) is arranged at the second non-projection position (front standby position), the center of gravity of the second screen (front screen mechanism E1) Is above and in front of the center of rotation of the second screen (front screen mechanism E1), so that the second screen (front screen mechanism E1) is projected from the second non-projection position (front standby position) by gravity. A force that tries to move toward the position (front exposed position) acts. In addition to such gravity, as mentioned above, there is a possibility that the player may give an impact during the game. Alternatively, there is a possibility that a force for moving the second screen (front screen mechanism E1) acts due to vibration or the like generated during transportation of the game machine (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-042692). As a result, if the second screen (front screen mechanism E1) moves from the second non-projection position (front standby position) to the second projection position (front exposure position) (the second screen (front screen) arranged above). If the mechanism E1) falls), there is a concern that the second screen (front screen mechanism E1) may come into contact with other members and these members may be damaged. However, as described above, according to the gaming machine 1 according to the fourth embodiment, the second regulated portion (front side regulated portion E401) formed on the second driving force transmission member (crank member E22) is the second. 1 It is possible to stop the movement of the second screen (front screen mechanism E1) by being locked by the first regulating portion (reel side regulating portion F401) formed on the driving force transmission member (arc-shaped gear F22). Therefore, it is possible to prevent such a situation from occurring.

Further, conventionally, a game machine equipped with an effect device capable of producing an effect by operating a movable body is known (see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-013685). According to such a game machine, through the movement of the movable body, it is possible to perform a powerful effect that cannot be obtained only by the image displayed on the liquid crystal display device.

In a game machine equipped with such a movable body, it is assumed that the movable body comes into contact with other members due to the movement of the movable body, but if the impact at the time of contact is large, the movable body or other members The member may be damaged.

The present invention has been made in view of the above problems, and an object of the present invention is to prevent the movable body and other members from being damaged in a game machine provided with the movable body.

In this respect, the game machine 1 according to the fourth embodiment has the following features.

(37-1) A projector capable of projecting an image (projector mechanism B2) and
A screen (reel screen mechanism F1) capable of displaying the image projected by the projector and
A drive mechanism for driving the screen (reel screen drive mechanism F2) and
The main body (cabinet G) with an opening on the front and
An opening / closing door (upper door mechanism UD) that is attached to the main body so as to be openable and closable and is provided with a display area (upper display window UD1) that allows the image displayed on the screen to be visually recognized is provided.
The drive mechanism (reel screen drive mechanism F2) includes a drive force transmission member (arm member F21) for transmitting a drive force to the screen.
The driving force transmission member is rotatably supported by support members (movable body bases C5 and C6).
By being driven by the drive mechanism, the screen rotates from the first position (reel exposed position) to the second position (reel standby position).
When the screen is in the second position (reel standby position), the protrusion (projection F200b) formed on the driving force transmission member is housed in the recess (buffer member installation portion C201) formed on the support member. At the same time, the protrusion abuts on the cushioning member (buffering member C202) provided in the recess.
A game machine characterized by that.

According to the game machine 1 according to the fourth embodiment, the protrusion (projection F200b) is formed on the driving force transmitting member (arm member F21) for transmitting the driving force to the screen (reel screen mechanism F1). A recess (buffer member installation portion C201) is formed in the support member (movable body bases C5 and C6) that rotatably supports the driving force transmission member (arm member F21), and the recess (buffer member installation portion C201) is formed. Is provided with a cushioning member (buffering member C202). When the screen (reel screen mechanism F1) is in the second position (reel standby position), the protrusions (projections F200b) formed on the driving force transmission member (arm member F21) are supported members (movable body base C5. It is housed in the recess (buffer member installation portion C201) formed in C6), and the protrusion (projection F200b) comes into contact with the cushion member (buffer member C202) provided in the recess (buffer member installation portion C201). .. Therefore, when the screen (reel screen mechanism F1) that has started rotating from the first position (reel exposed position) reaches the second position (reel standby position), the driving force transmission member (arm member F21) When the protrusion (protrusion F200b) and the cushioning member (buffering member C202) come into contact with each other, the impact caused by the contact can be absorbed by the cushioning member (buffering member C202). As a result, it is possible to alleviate the force applied to the driving force transmission member (arm member F21), the support member (movable body bases C5 / C6), the screen (reel screen mechanism F1), etc. due to the contact. It can be prevented from being damaged. Further, the protrusions (protrusions F200b) formed on the driving force transmission member (arm member F21) are housed in the recesses (buffer member installation portion C201) formed on the support members (movable body bases C5 and C6). Therefore, it is sufficient to provide the cushioning member (buffering member C202) in the recess (buffering member installation portion C201), and the entire contact point between the driving force transmission member (arm member F21) and the support member (movable body bases C5 and C6). It is not necessary to provide a cushioning member. Therefore, the amount of the cushioning member can be reduced, and the cost due to the use of the cushioning member can be suppressed.

In the present embodiment, it has been described that the protrusions F200b formed on the arm member F21 (driving force transmitting member) are housed in the cushioning member installation portions C201 (recesses) formed on the movable body bases C5 and C6. In the present invention, the driving force transmission member in which the protrusions to be housed in the recesses are formed is not limited to the arm member F21. For example, the protrusions are formed in the gear (arc-shaped gear), and the protrusions are formed in the recesses. It may be stored. As such a gear, it is possible to adopt a front-view fan-shaped gear (a figure surrounded by an arc and two radii), in which case the protrusion protrudes from one of the two radii. It may be formed so as to be provided.

An example is a fan-shaped gear with a central angle of 270 °. Two points on the circumference centered on the point O are referred to as A and B, and the arc and the two radii constituting the sector are referred to as the arc AB, the radius OA, and the radius OB, respectively. The arc AB constituting the sector is the longer arc (superior arc), in other words, the sector (fan with a central angle of 270 °) has the shorter arc (inferior arc), radius OA, and radius OB. It has a shape cut out from the circle centered on the point O in a fan shape (a fan shape having a central angle of 90 °). The points A and B on the circumference have a positional relationship such that the point B exists at a position where the point A is rotated 90 ° clockwise along the circumference. In a gear having such a shape, the portion corresponding to the radius OA is thicker than the portion corresponding to the radius OB, and a protrusion that protrudes in the clockwise direction at the portion where the thickness is increased. Is formed.

Here, when the screen (reel screen mechanism F1) is in the first position (reel exposed position), the radius OA is arranged along the vertical direction, while the radius OB is arranged along the horizontal direction, and the gear is arranged. By rotating 90 ° clockwise, the screen (reel screen mechanism F1) moves to the second position (reel standby position). When the screen (reel screen mechanism F1) is in the second position (reel standby position), the radius OA is arranged along the horizontal direction. At this time, the protrusions formed in the radius OA are arranged so as to protrude downward. On the other hand, as described in the fourth embodiment, the movable body bases C5 and C6 are formed with a cushioning member installation portion C201 (recess) recessed with respect to the horizontal plane (reference plane C200), and a screen (reel) is formed. When the screen mechanism F1) is in the second position (reel standby position), the protrusions formed at the radius OA are housed in the cushioning member installation portion C201 (recess) and provided in the cushioning member installation portion C201 (recess). It comes into contact with the cushioning member (buffering member C202). Even in such an aspect, the same effect as that of the fourth embodiment can be obtained.

(37-2) The gaming machine according to (37-1).
A screen housing (screen housing C10) for accommodating the screen and the drive mechanism is further provided.
The support members (movable body bases C5 and C6) have a support surface (reference surface C200) formed above the bottom plate (bottom plate C1) of the screen housing and substantially parallel to the surface of the bottom plate.
The recess (buffer member installation portion C201) has a recessed shape with respect to the support surface.
When the screen is in the second position (reel standby position), the tip of the protrusion (projection F200b) formed on the driving force transmission member (arm member F21) becomes the lower end of the driving force transmission member, and the protrusion The driving force transmitting member is supported by the recessed portion via the cushioning member by abutting the tip of the cushioning member.
It is characterized by that.

According to the game machine 1 according to the fourth embodiment, when the screen (reel screen mechanism F1) is in the second position (reel standby position), the driving force transmission member (arm member F21) is a screen housing (arm member F21). It is in a state of being separated from the bottom plate (bottom plate C1) of the screen housing C10). That is, the driving force transmission member (arm member F21) is not supported by the bottom plate (bottom plate C1), but a support surface (reference surface C200) substantially parallel to the surface of the bottom plate (bottom plate C1) is supported by the support member (movable body base C5. The protrusion (arm member F21) of the driving force transmission member (arm member F21) is formed on the cushioning member (buffering member C202) formed in the recess (buffering member installation portion C201) formed on the support surface (reference surface C200) as well as on the C6). By bringing the protrusions F200b) into contact with each other, the driving force transmission member (arm member F21) is supported by the recess (buffer member installation portion C201) via the buffer member (buffer member C202). As a result, the gravity acting on the driving force transmitting member (arm member F21) is received by the buffering member (buffering member C202), and the driving force transmitting member (arm member F21) can be kept in a stable state.

Further, according to the game machine 1 according to the fourth embodiment, when the screen (reel screen mechanism F1) is in the second position (reel standby position), the screen (arm member F21) is added to the screen (arm member F21). The reel screen mechanism F1) is also separated from the bottom plate (bottom plate C1) of the screen housing (screen housing C10) and is not supported by the bottom plate (bottom plate C1), but the weight of the screen (reel screen mechanism F1) is also buffered. It can be supported by the member (buffer member C202), and the screen (reel screen mechanism F1) arranged at the second position (reel standby position) can be stabilized.

(37-I) Drives a projector (projector mechanism B2) capable of projecting an image, a first screen (reel screen mechanism F1) capable of displaying an image projected by the projector, and the first screen. The first drive mechanism (reel screen drive mechanism F2) for the purpose is a display unit (display unit A) configured by being unitized.
A main body (cabinet G) that houses the display unit and has an opening on the front surface.
An opening / closing door (upper door mechanism UD) that is attached to the main body so as to be openable and closable and is provided with a display area (upper display window UD1) that allows the image displayed on the screen to be visually recognized is provided.
An arm (arm member F21) is connected to the first screen (reel screen mechanism F1).
The arm is rotatably supported by support members (movable body bases C5 and C6).
By being driven by the first drive mechanism, the first screen rotates from the first position (reel exposed position) to the second position (reel standby position) in conjunction with the rotation of the arm. ,
When the first screen is in the second position (reel standby position), the protrusion (projection F200b) formed on the arm is housed in the recess (buffer member installation portion C201) formed on the support member. At the same time, the protrusion abuts on the cushioning member (buffering member C202) provided in the recess.
A game machine characterized by that.

(37-II) The gaming machine according to (37-I).
The display unit includes the projector, the first screen, and the first drive mechanism.
A second screen (front screen mechanism E1) capable of displaying the image projected by the projector, and
A second drive mechanism (front screen drive mechanism E2) for driving the second screen, and
The first screen, the first drive mechanism, the second screen, and the screen housing (screen housing C10) accommodating the second drive mechanism are unitized.
By being driven by the second drive mechanism, the second screen rotates from position A (front standby position) to position B (front exposed position).
When the second screen is in the position B (front exposed position), a protrusion (projection E300b) formed on the second screen is a recess (buffer member) formed on the bottom plate (bottom plate C1) of the screen housing. It is housed in the installation portion C300), and the protrusion abuts on the cushioning member (buffer member C320) provided in the recess.
It is characterized by that.

(38-1) A projector capable of projecting an image (projector mechanism B2) and
A first screen (front screen mechanism E1) capable of displaying an image projected by the projector, and
A drive mechanism for driving the first screen (front screen drive mechanism E2) and
A screen housing (screen housing C10) accommodating the first screen and the drive mechanism, and
The main body (cabinet G) with an opening on the front and
An opening / closing door (upper door mechanism UD) that is attached to the main body so as to be openable and closable and is provided with a display area (upper display window UD1) that allows the image displayed on the screen to be visually recognized is provided.
By being driven by the drive mechanism, the first screen rotates from the first position (front standby position) to the second position (front exposed position).
When the first screen is in the second position (front exposed position), a protrusion (projection E300b) formed on the first screen is a recess (bottom plate C1) formed on the bottom plate (bottom plate C1) of the screen housing. It is housed in the cushioning member installation portion C300), and the protrusion abuts on the cushioning member (buffering member C320) provided in the recess.
A game machine characterized by that.

According to the game machine 1 according to the fourth embodiment, while the protrusion (projection E300b) is formed on the first screen (front screen mechanism E1), the bottom plate (bottom plate C1) of the screen housing (screen housing C10) is formed. ) Is formed with a recess (buffer member installation portion C300), and the recess (buffer member installation portion C300) is provided with a cushioning member (buffer member C320). When the first screen (front screen mechanism E1) is in the second position (front exposed position), the protrusions (projections E300b) formed on the first screen (front screen mechanism E1) are formed on the bottom plate (bottom plate C1). It is housed in the formed recess (buffer member installation portion C300), and the protrusion (projection E300b) comes into contact with the cushion member (buffer member C320) provided in the recess (buffer member installation portion C300). Therefore, when the first screen (front screen mechanism E1) that has started rotation from the first position (front standby position) reaches the second position (front exposure position), the first screen (front screen mechanism E1) ) And the cushioning member (buffering member C320) come into contact with each other, so that the impact caused by the contact can be absorbed by the cushioning member (buffering member C320). As a result, it is possible to alleviate the force applied to the first screen (front screen mechanism E1), the bottom plate (bottom plate C1), and the like due to contact, and it is possible to prevent these from being damaged. Further, since the protrusions (projections E300b) formed on the first screen (front screen mechanism E1) are housed in the recesses (buffer member installation portion C300) formed on the bottom plate (bottom plate C1), the cushioning member (cushioning member (projection E300b)) It suffices to provide the cushioning member C320) in the recess (buffering member installation portion C300), and it is not necessary to provide the cushioning member over the entire contact area between the first screen (front screen mechanism E1) and the bottom plate (bottom plate C1). .. Therefore, the amount of the cushioning member can be reduced, and the cost due to the use of the cushioning member can be suppressed. Further, by storing the protrusion (projection E300b) formed on the first screen (front screen mechanism E1) in the recess (buffer member installation portion C300) formed on the bottom plate (bottom plate C1), the protrusion (projection E300b) It is possible to make the screen invisible to the player, and it is possible to prevent the appearance from being deteriorated due to the presence of the protrusion (protrusion E300b).

The protrusion does not have to be completely housed in the recess, and the remaining part of the protrusion may be exposed to the outside of the recess while a part of the protrusion is housed in the recess. However, as described above, from the viewpoint of hiding the protrusions from the player, it is desirable to store most of the protrusions in the recesses. For example, when the game machine is viewed from the front, 80% of the protrusions are stored. It is preferable to configure the protrusions and the recesses so that the above (or 90% or more, 95% or more, 98% or more) are stored in the recesses and hidden.

(38-2) The gaming machine according to (38-1).
Further provided with a second screen (fixed screen mechanism D) different from the first screen,
On the bottom plate (bottom plate C1), a mounting portion (center mounting portion C11) for mounting the second screen is formed in a concave shape.
The second screen is mounted on the bottom plate in a state of being fitted to the above-described mounting portion.
It is characterized by that.

According to the game machine 1 according to the fourth embodiment, the bottom plate (bottom plate C1) has a concave mounting portion (center mounting portion C11) for mounting the second screen (fixed screen mechanism D). The second screen (fixed screen mechanism D) is mounted on the bottom plate (bottom plate C1) in a state of being fitted to the mounting portion (center mounting portion C11). Therefore, if an impact is generated when the first screen (front screen mechanism E1) and the bottom plate (bottom plate C1) come into contact with each other, the impact is likely to propagate to the second screen (fixed screen mechanism D). However, as described above, according to the game machine 1 according to the fourth embodiment, the protrusion (projection E300b) of the first screen (front screen mechanism E1) and the cushioning member (buffering member C320) come into contact with each other. Since the impact caused by the contact can be absorbed by the buffer member (buffer member C320), the impact is suppressed from propagating to the second screen (fixed screen mechanism D), and the second screen (fixed screen mechanism D) It can be prevented from being damaged.

Further, conventionally, a game machine equipped with an effect device capable of producing an effect by operating a movable body is known (see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-013685). According to such a game machine, through the movement of the movable body, it is possible to perform a powerful effect that cannot be obtained only by the image displayed on the liquid crystal display device.

A game machine equipped with such an effect device is provided with a drive mechanism for driving a movable body, but if the drive mechanism is not arranged at an appropriate position, the driving force can be accurately applied to the movable body. It cannot be transmitted, and the originally intended movement of the movable body cannot be realized.

The present invention has been made in view of the above problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of arranging a drive mechanism at an appropriate position.

In this respect, the game machine 1 according to the fourth embodiment has the following features.

(39-1) A projector capable of projecting an image (projector mechanism B2) and
A screen (front screen mechanism E1) capable of displaying the image projected by the projector, and
A drive mechanism for driving the screen (front screen drive mechanism E2) and
A screen housing (screen housing C10) for accommodating the screen and the drive mechanism,
The main body (cabinet G) with an opening on the front and
It is provided with an opening / closing door (upper door mechanism UD) which is attached to the main body so as to be openable and closable and is provided with a display area (upper display window UD1) capable of viewing the screen.
The drive mechanism (front screen drive mechanism E2) includes a first gear (crank gear E21) and a second gear (intermediate gear E23) for transmitting a driving force to the screen.
A straight line connecting a predetermined position (eccentric position E21b) deviated from the rotation center on the first gear and the rotation center of the first gear, and a predetermined direction irrelevant to the rotation of the first gear. The angle formed by the straight line (angle ∠EOX shown in FIG. 189) is expressed as θ, and when the value of θ changes from α to β with the rotation of the first gear, the screen is displayed on the first gear. Rotate from the 1st position (front exposed position) to the 2nd position (front standby position),
The screen housing (right side plate C2 and left side plate C3 of the screen housing C10) has an opening (marking window) at a position where at least a part of the first gear and the second gear can be visually recognized from the outside. C100) is provided,
When the first gear is in the state of θ = α, the rotation center of the first gear (center O21 of the crank gear E21) and the rotation center of the second gear (center O23 of the intermediate gear E23). And the first mark portion (mark portion E21c) formed on the first gear and the second mark portion (mark portion E23a) formed on the second gear so as to be aligned substantially in a straight line. The first mark portion and the second mark portion are visible through the opening.
A game machine characterized by that.

According to the gaming machine 1 according to the fourth embodiment, the angle θ (from the center of rotation on the first gear (center O21 of the crank gear E21)) with the rotation of the first gear (crank gear E21). A straight line connecting the displaced predetermined position (eccentric position E21b) and the rotation center of the first gear (center O21 of the crank gear E21) and a predetermined direction irrelevant to the rotation of the first gear (crank gear E21). By changing the angle formed by the (horizontal) straight line (angle ∠EOX shown in FIG. 189) from α to β, the screen (front screen mechanism E1) moves from the first position (front exposed position) to the second position. Rotates to the position (front standby position). Therefore, in order to rotate the screen (front screen mechanism E1) from the first position (front exposed position) to the second position (front standby position), the first gear (front standby position) is set at the start of the rotation. The crank gear E21) needs to be arranged in the state of θ = α.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine 1 according to the fourth embodiment, when the first gear (crank gear E21) is in the state of θ = α, the rotation center of the first gear (center O21 of the crank gear E21). ) And the rotation center of the second gear (center O23 of the intermediate gear E23), the first mark portion (mark portion E21c) formed on the first gear (crank gear E21), and the second gear (intermediate gear E23). The opening (marking window C100) provided in the screen housing (right side plate C2 and left side plate C3) is provided so that the second marking portion (marking portion E23a) formed in) is aligned substantially in a straight line. Through this, the first mark portion (mark portion E21c) and the second mark portion (mark portion E23a) can be visually recognized. Therefore, in order to arrange the first gear (crank gear E21) in the state of θ = α, conversely, the first mark portion (mark portion E21c) and the second mark portion (mark portion E21c) and the second through the opening (marking window C100). While visually recognizing the mark portion (mark portion E23a), the rotation center of the first gear (center O21 of the crank gear E21), the rotation center of the second gear (center O23 of the intermediate gear E23), and the first mark portion. If the first gear (crank gear E21) and the second gear (intermediate gear E23) are arranged so that the (mark portion E21c) and the second mark portion (mark portion E23a) are aligned substantially in a straight line. Good. As a result, the first gear (crank gear E21) can be arranged in the state of θ = α, and the screen (front screen mechanism E1) can be made to perform a desired operation.

(39-2) A projector capable of projecting an image (projector mechanism B2) and
A screen (front screen mechanism E1) capable of displaying the image projected by the projector, and
A drive mechanism for driving the screen (front screen drive mechanism E2) and
A screen housing (screen housing C10) for accommodating the screen and the drive mechanism,
The main body (cabinet G) with an opening on the front and
It is provided with an opening / closing door (upper door mechanism UD) which is attached to the main body so as to be openable and closable and is provided with a display area (upper display window UD1) capable of viewing the screen.
The drive mechanism (front screen drive mechanism E2) is
An arm (crank member E22) connected to the screen and
A first method of transmitting a driving force generated from a motor to a slide groove (slide groove E22b) formed in the arm via a slide member (slide member E26) slidable inside the slide groove. Gear (crank gear E21) and
A second gear (intermediate gear E23) that is meshed with the first gear and transmits the driving force generated by the motor to the first gear is provided.
The slide member is fixed at an eccentric position (eccentric position E21b) deviated from the rotation center on the first gear, and the rotation of the first gear is accompanied by rotation of the first gear. Rotate on the circumference of a circle centered on the center of motion (center O21 shown in FIG. 189) and whose radius is the distance between the rotation center of the first gear and the eccentric position (distance r shown in FIG. 189). And
The slide member is rotated from the first predetermined position on the circumference (the position where the angle ∠EOX is α as shown in FIG. 189) to the second predetermined position (the position where the angle ∠EOX is β as shown in FIG. 189). When the arm moves, the driving force is transmitted to the slide groove through the slide member by sliding the slide member inside the slide groove as the slide member rotates. On the other hand, the screen rotates in conjunction with the rotation of the arm from the first position (front exposed position) to the second position (front standby position).
The screen housing (right side plate C2 and left side plate C3 of the screen housing C10) has an opening (marking window) at a position where at least a part of the first gear and the second gear can be visually recognized from the outside. C100) is provided,
When the slide member is at the first predetermined position on the circumference (the position where the angle ∠EOX shown in FIG. 189 is α), the rotation center of the first gear (center O21 of the crank gear E21). And the rotation center of the second gear (center O23 of the intermediate gear E23), the first mark portion (mark portion E21c) formed on the first gear, and the second mark formed on the second gear. The first mark portion and the second mark portion are visible through the opening so that the portions (mark portions E23a) are aligned substantially in a straight line.
A game machine characterized by that.

According to the game machine 1 according to the fourth embodiment, an arm (crank member E22) is connected to the screen (front screen mechanism E1), and a slide groove (slide groove E22b) is formed in the arm (crank member E22). Has been done. Then, the slide member (slide member E26) fixed to the first gear (crank gear E21) can slide inside the slide groove (slide groove E22b). Specifically, the slide member (slide member E26) is fixed at an eccentric position (eccentric position E21b) deviated from the center of rotation on the first gear (crank gear E21), and is fixed to the first gear (crank gear). With the rotation of E21), the center of rotation of the first gear (center O21 of the crank gear E21) is centered, and the center of rotation of the first gear (center O21 of the crank gear E21) and the eccentric position (eccentricity). It rotates on the circumference of a circle whose radius is the distance from the position E21b). The slide member (slide member E26) is from the first predetermined position on the circumference (the position where the angle ∠EOX shown in FIG. 189 is α) to the second predetermined position (the angle ∠EOX shown in FIG. 189 is β). When rotated to the position), the slide member (slide member E26) slides inside the slide groove (slide groove E22b) as the slide member (slide member E26) rotates, so that the slide member (slide member) The arm (crank member E22) rotates in conjunction with the transmission of the driving force to the slide groove (slide groove E22b) via E26). Then, in conjunction with the rotation of the arm (crank member E22), the screen (front screen mechanism E1) rotates from the first position (front exposed position) to the second position (front standby position). Therefore, in order to rotate the screen (front screen mechanism E1) from the first position (front exposed position) to the second position (front standby position), a slide member (slide member) is required at the start of the rotation. E26) needs to be arranged at the first predetermined position on the circumference (the position where the angle ∠EOX shown in FIG. 189 is α).

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine 1 according to the fourth embodiment, the slide member (slide member E26) is at the first predetermined position on the circumference (the position where the angle ∠EOX shown in FIG. 189 is α). In the case, a first gear formed at the rotation center of the first gear (center O21 of the crank gear E21), the rotation center of the second gear (center O23 of the intermediate gear E23), and the first gear (crank gear E21). The screen housing (right side plate C2) so that the first mark portion (mark portion E21c) and the second mark portion (mark portion E23a) formed on the second gear (intermediate gear E23) are aligned substantially in a straight line. The first mark portion (mark portion E21c) and the second mark portion (mark portion E23a) can be visually recognized through the opening (mark portion window C100) provided in the left side plate C3). Therefore, in order to arrange the slide member (slide member E26) at the first predetermined position on the circumference (the position where the angle ∠EOX shown in FIG. 189 is α), on the contrary, the opening (marking window) is used. The center of rotation of the first gear (center O21 of the crank gear E21) and the second gear while visually recognizing the first mark portion (mark portion E21c) and the second mark portion (mark portion E23a) via C100). The first gear (crank gear) so that the center of rotation (center O23 of the intermediate gear E23), the first mark portion (mark portion E21c), and the second mark portion (mark portion E23a) are aligned substantially in a straight line. E21) and the second gear (intermediate gear E23) may be arranged. As a result, the slide member (slide member E26) can be arranged at the first predetermined position on the circumference (the position where the angle ∠EOX shown in FIG. 189 is α), so that the slide member (slide member E26) By sliding the inside of the slide groove (slide groove E22b) as designed, it becomes possible to accurately transmit the driving force to the screen (front screen mechanism E1), which is desired for the screen (front screen mechanism E1). Can be made to perform the operation of.

(39-3) The gaming machine according to (39-1) or (39-2).
When the screen is in the second position (front standby position), the screen is separated from the bottom plate (bottom plate C1) of the screen housing, whereas the screen is in the first position (front standby position). When in the front exposed position), the screen is supported by the bottom plate (bottom plate C1).
It is characterized by that.

According to the game machine 1 according to the fourth embodiment, when the screen (front screen mechanism E1) is in the first position (front exposed position), the screen (front screen mechanism E1) is a screen housing (screen housing). It is supported by the bottom plate (bottom plate C1) of the body C10), and is in a stable state as compared with the case where the screen (front screen mechanism E1) is in the second position (front standby position). In order to arrange the screen (front screen mechanism E1) in such a stable state (first position (front exposed position)), as described above, the rotation center of the first gear (crank gear E21). By utilizing the positional relationship between the center O21), the rotation center of the second gear (center O23 of the intermediate gear E23), the first mark portion (mark portion E21c), and the second mark portion (mark portion E23a). The first gear (crank gear E21) may be arranged. According to the game machine 1 according to the fourth embodiment, the screen (front screen mechanism E1) can be arranged in a more stable state through such arrangement of the first gear (crank gear E21).

(40-1) A projector capable of projecting an image (projector mechanism B2) and
A screen (front screen mechanism E1) capable of displaying the image projected by the projector, and
A drive mechanism for driving the screen (front screen drive mechanism E2) and
The main body (cabinet G) with an opening on the front and
It is provided with an opening / closing door (upper door mechanism UD) which is attached to the main body so as to be openable and closable and is provided with a display area (upper display window UD1) capable of viewing the screen.
The drive mechanism (front screen drive mechanism E2) includes a gear (crank gear E21) for transmitting a driving force to the screen.
An angle formed by a straight line connecting a predetermined position (eccentric position E21b) deviated from the rotation center on the gear and the rotation center of the gear and a straight line in a predetermined direction unrelated to the rotation of the gear (FIG. 189). The angle ∠EOX) shown in is expressed as θ, and when the value of θ changes from α to β with the rotation of the gear, the screen is displayed from the first position (front exposed position) to the second position. Rotate to the position (front standby position),
The gear (crank gear E21) is formed with a first through hole (through hole E21d) that penetrates the gear.
When the gear is in the state of θ = α, the first through hole (through hole E21d) and the fixing member (right side plate C2 or right movable body base C5) whose position is fixed regardless of the rotation of the gear. The second through hole (through hole C101) formed so as to penetrate the through hole is arranged in a positional relationship in which a rod-shaped object can be inserted into both through holes.
A game machine characterized by that.

According to the gaming machine 1 according to the fourth embodiment, a predetermined position (eccentricity) deviated from the angle θ (the center of rotation on the gear (center O21 of the crank gear E21)) with the rotation of the gear (crank gear E21). The angle between the straight line connecting the position E21b) and the rotation center of the gear (center O21 of the crank gear E21) and the straight line in the predetermined direction (horizontal direction) unrelated to the rotation of the gear (crank gear E21)) ( As the angle ∠EOX) shown in FIG. 189 changes from α to β, the screen (front screen mechanism E1) rotates from the first position (front exposed position) to the second position (front standby position). Therefore, in order to rotate the screen (front screen mechanism E1) from the first position (front exposed position) to the second position (front standby position), the gear (crank gear E21) is to be rotated at the start of the rotation. ) Needs to be placed in the state of θ = α.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine 1 according to the fourth embodiment, when the gear (crank gear E21) is in the state of θ = α, the first through hole (through hole E21d) formed in the gear (crank gear E21) is formed. ) And the second through hole (through hole C101) formed so as to penetrate the fixing member (right side plate C2 and right movable body base C5) whose position is fixed regardless of the rotation of the gear. By inserting a rod-shaped object, it is possible to fix the gear (crank gear E21) so that the value of θ does not change from α. Therefore, in order to arrange the gear in the state of θ = α, the position of the first through hole (through hole E21d) is both the first through hole (through hole E21d) and the second through hole (through hole C101). The position of the gear (crank gear E21) may be adjusted so that the rod-shaped object can be inserted into the gear. In that state, a rod-shaped object is inserted through both the first through hole (through hole E21d) and the second through hole (through hole C101) to fix the gear (crank gear E21), whereby the gear is set to θ = α. It can be fixedly placed in the state. As a result, the screen (front screen mechanism E1) can be made to perform a desired operation.

(40-2) A projector capable of projecting an image (projector mechanism B2) and
A screen (front screen mechanism E1) capable of displaying the image projected by the projector, and
A drive mechanism for driving the screen (front screen drive mechanism E2) and
The main body (cabinet G) with an opening on the front and
It is provided with an opening / closing door (upper door mechanism UD) which is attached to the main body so as to be openable and closable and is provided with a display area (upper display window UD1) capable of viewing the screen.
The drive mechanism (front screen drive mechanism E2) is
An arm (crank member E22) connected to the screen and
A gear (crank) that transmits a driving force generated from a motor to a slide groove (slide groove E22b) formed in the arm via a slide member (slide member E26) that can slide inside the slide groove. With gear E21)
The slide member is fixed at an eccentric position (eccentric position E21b) deviated from the rotation center on the gear, and as the gear rotates, the rotation center of the gear (center O21 shown in FIG. 189). ) As the center, and the distance between the rotation center of the gear and the eccentric position (distance r shown in FIG. 189) is the radius.
The slide member is rotated from the first predetermined position on the circumference (the position where the angle ∠EOX is α as shown in FIG. 189) to the second predetermined position (the position where the angle ∠EOX is β as shown in FIG. 189). When the arm moves, the driving force is transmitted to the slide groove through the slide member by sliding the slide member inside the slide groove as the slide member rotates. On the other hand, the screen rotates in conjunction with the rotation of the arm from the first position (front exposed position) to the second position (front standby position).
The gear (crank gear E21) is formed with a first through hole (through hole E21d) that penetrates the gear.
When the slide member is at the first predetermined position on the circumference (the position where the angle ∠EOX shown in FIG. 189 is α), the first through hole (through hole E21d) and the rotation of the gear. A second through hole (through hole C101) formed so as to penetrate a fixing member (right side plate C2 or right movable body base C5) whose position is fixed regardless of movement allows a rod-shaped object to pass through both through holes. They are arranged in a positional relationship that allows them to be inserted,
A game machine characterized by that.

According to the game machine 1 according to the fourth embodiment, an arm (crank member E22) is connected to the screen (front screen mechanism E1), and a slide groove (slide groove E22b) is formed in the arm (crank member E22). Has been done. Then, the slide member (slide member E26) fixed to the gear (crank gear E21) can slide inside the slide groove (slide groove E22b). Specifically, the slide member (slide member E26) is fixed at an eccentric position (eccentric position E21b) deviated from the rotation center on the gear (crank gear E21) to rotate the gear (crank gear E21). Along with this, a circle whose radius is the distance between the center of rotation of the gear (center O21 of the crank gear E21) and the center of rotation of the gear (center O21 of the crank gear E21) and the eccentric position (eccentric position E21b). Rotate on the circumference. The slide member (slide member E26) is from the first predetermined position on the circumference (the position where the angle ∠EOX shown in FIG. 189 is α) to the second predetermined position (the angle ∠EOX shown in FIG. 189 is β). When rotated to the position), the slide member (slide member E26) slides inside the slide groove (slide groove E22b) as the slide member (slide member E26) rotates, so that the slide member (slide member) The arm (crank member E22) rotates in conjunction with the transmission of the driving force to the slide groove (slide groove E22b) via E26). Then, in conjunction with the rotation of the arm (crank member E22), the screen (front screen mechanism E1) rotates from the first position (front exposed position) to the second position (front standby position). Therefore, in order to rotate the screen (front screen mechanism E1) from the first position (front exposed position) to the second position (front standby position), a slide member (slide member) is required at the start of the rotation. E26) needs to be arranged at the first predetermined position on the circumference (the position where the angle ∠EOX shown in FIG. 189 is α).

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine 1 according to the fourth embodiment, the slide member (slide member E26) is at the first predetermined position on the circumference (the position where the angle ∠EOX shown in FIG. 189 is α). In this case, the first through hole (through hole E21d) formed in the gear (crank gear E21) and the fixing member (right side plate C2 or right movable body base C5) whose position is fixed regardless of the rotation of the gear are used. By inserting a rod-shaped object into both of the second through holes (through holes C101) formed so as to penetrate, the position of the slide member (slide member E26) is set to the first predetermined position (angle shown in FIG. 189). It is possible to fix the gear (crank gear E21) so that it does not move from the position where ∠EOX becomes α). Therefore, in order to arrange the slide member (slide member E26) at the first predetermined position on the circumference (the position where the angle ∠EOX shown in FIG. 189 is α), the first through hole (through hole E21d) The position of the gear (crank gear E21) is such that a rod-shaped object can be inserted into both the first through hole (through hole E21d) and the second through hole (through hole C101). You just have to adjust the position. In this state, a rod-shaped object is inserted into both the first through hole (through hole E21d) and the second through hole (through hole C101) to fix the gear (crank gear E21), thereby fixing the slide member (slide member E26). ) Can be fixedly arranged at the first predetermined position on the circumference (the position where the angle ∠EOX shown in FIG. 189 is α). As a result, by sliding the slide member (slide member E26) inside the slide groove (slide groove E22b) as designed, it becomes possible to accurately transmit the driving force to the screen (front screen mechanism E1). , The screen (front screen mechanism E1) can be made to perform a desired operation.

(40-3) The gaming machine according to (40-2).
The fixing member (right side plate C2) is a plate arranged substantially parallel to the surface of the gear (crank gear E21).
When the slide member is in the first predetermined position on the circumference (the position where the angle ∠EOX shown in FIG. 189 is α), the direction in which the gear and the plate are perpendicular to the surface of the gear. When viewed from the above, the first through hole (through hole E21d) and the second through hole (through hole C101) overlap each other.
It is characterized by that.

According to the game machine 1 according to the fourth embodiment, when the slide member (slide member E26) is in the first predetermined position on the circumference (the position where the angle ∠EOX shown in FIG. 189 is α), the first The through hole (through hole E21d) and the second through hole (through hole C101) overlap each other. Therefore, in order to arrange the slide member (slide member E26) at the first predetermined position on the circumference (the position where the angle ∠EOX shown in FIG. 189 is α), the first through hole (through hole E21d) The position of the gear (crank gear E21) may be adjusted so that the second through hole (through hole C101) overlaps with the second through hole. When a rod-shaped object is inserted into the second through hole (through hole C101) in this state, the rod-shaped object also inserts the first through hole (through hole E21d). As a result, the gear (crank gear E21) is fixed, and the slide member (slide member E26) is fixedly arranged at the first predetermined position on the circumference (the position where the angle ∠EOX shown in FIG. 189 is α). Can be done.

(41-1) A projector capable of projecting an image (projector mechanism B2) and
A screen (front screen mechanism E1) capable of displaying the image projected by the projector, and
A drive mechanism for driving the screen (front screen drive mechanism E2) and
A screen housing (screen housing C10) for accommodating the screen and the drive mechanism,
The main body (cabinet G) with an opening on the front and
It is provided with an opening / closing door (upper door mechanism UD) which is attached to the main body so as to be openable and closable and is provided with a display area (upper display window UD1) capable of viewing the screen.
The drive mechanism (front screen drive mechanism E2) includes a first gear (crank gear E21) for transmitting a driving force to the screen.
A straight line connecting a predetermined position (eccentric position E21b) deviated from the rotation center on the first gear and the rotation center of the first gear, and a predetermined direction irrelevant to the rotation of the first gear. The angle formed by the straight line (angle ∠EOX shown in FIG. 189) is expressed as θ, and when the value of θ changes from α to β with the rotation of the first gear, the screen is displayed on the first gear. Rotate from the 1st position (front exposed position) to the 2nd position (front standby position),
The first gear (crank gear E21) is formed with a first through hole (through hole E21d) that penetrates the first gear.
A second through hole (through hole C101) penetrating the plate is formed in the plates (right side plate C2 and left side plate C3) constituting the screen housing.
When the first gear and the plate are viewed from a direction perpendicular to the surface of the plate when the first gear is in the state of θ = α, the first through hole and the second through The holes overlap,
A game machine characterized by that.

According to the gaming machine 1 according to the fourth embodiment, the angle θ (from the center of rotation on the first gear (center O21 of the crank gear E21)) with the rotation of the first gear (crank gear E21). A straight line connecting the displaced predetermined position (eccentric position E21b) and the rotation center of the first gear (center O21 of the crank gear E21) and a predetermined direction irrelevant to the rotation of the first gear (crank gear E21). By changing the angle formed by the (horizontal) straight line (angle ∠EOX shown in FIG. 189) from α to β, the screen (front screen mechanism E1) moves from the first position (front exposed position) to the second position. Rotates to the position (front standby position). Therefore, in order to rotate the screen (front screen mechanism E1) from the first position (front exposed position) to the second position (front standby position), the first gear (front standby position) is set at the start of the rotation. The crank gear E21) needs to be arranged in the state of θ = α.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine 1 according to the fourth embodiment, when the first gear (crank gear E21) is in the state of θ = α, the first gear (crank gear E21) formed on the first gear. The through hole (through hole E21d) and the second through hole (through hole C101) formed in the plates (right side plate C2 and left side plate C3) constituting the screen housing (screen housing C10) overlap. Therefore, in order to arrange the first gear (crank gear E21) in the state of θ = α, conversely, the first through hole (through hole E21d) and the second through hole (through hole C101) are overlapped with each other. In addition, the position of the first gear (crank gear E21) may be adjusted. In this state, for example, when a rod-shaped object is inserted into the second through hole (through hole C101), the rod-shaped object also inserts the first through hole (through hole E21d). As a result, the first gear (crank gear E21) is fixed, and the first gear (crank gear E21) can be fixedly arranged in the state of θ = α. As a result, the screen (front screen mechanism E1) can be made to perform a desired operation.

(41-2) A projector capable of projecting an image (projector mechanism B2) and
A screen (front screen mechanism E1) capable of displaying the image projected by the projector, and
A drive mechanism for driving the screen (front screen drive mechanism E2) and
A screen housing (screen housing C10) for accommodating the screen and the drive mechanism,
The main body (cabinet G) with an opening on the front and
It is provided with an opening / closing door (upper door mechanism UD) which is attached to the main body so as to be openable and closable and is provided with a display area (upper display window UD1) capable of viewing the screen.
The drive mechanism (front screen drive mechanism E2) is
An arm (crank member E22) connected to the screen and
A first method of transmitting a driving force generated from a motor to a slide groove (slide groove E22b) formed in the arm via a slide member (slide member E26) slidable inside the slide groove. Equipped with a gear (crank gear E21)
The slide member is fixed at an eccentric position (eccentric position E21b) deviated from the rotation center on the first gear, and the rotation of the first gear is accompanied by rotation of the first gear. Rotate on the circumference of a circle centered on the center of motion (center O21 shown in FIG. 189) and whose radius is the distance between the rotation center of the first gear and the eccentric position (distance r shown in FIG. 189). And
The slide member is rotated from the first predetermined position on the circumference (the position where the angle ∠EOX is α as shown in FIG. 189) to the second predetermined position (the position where the angle ∠EOX is β as shown in FIG. 189). When the arm moves, the driving force is transmitted to the slide groove through the slide member by sliding the slide member inside the slide groove as the slide member rotates. On the other hand, the screen rotates in conjunction with the rotation of the arm from the first position (front exposed position) to the second position (front standby position).
The first gear (crank gear E21) is formed with a first through hole (through hole E21d) that penetrates the first gear.
A second through hole (through hole C101) penetrating the plate is formed in the plates (right side plate C2 and left side plate C3) constituting the screen housing.
When the slide member is in the first predetermined position on the circumference (the position where the angle ∠EOX shown in FIG. 189 is α), the first gear and the plate are placed on the surface of the plate. When viewed from a vertical direction, the first through hole and the second through hole overlap each other.
A game machine characterized by that.

According to the game machine 1 according to the fourth embodiment, an arm (crank member E22) is connected to the screen (front screen mechanism E1), and a slide groove (slide groove E22b) is formed in the arm (crank member E22). Has been done. Then, the slide member (slide member E26) fixed to the first gear (crank gear E21) can slide inside the slide groove (slide groove E22b). Specifically, the slide member (slide member E26) is fixed at an eccentric position (eccentric position E21b) deviated from the center of rotation on the first gear (crank gear E21), and is fixed to the first gear (crank gear). With the rotation of E21), the center of rotation of the first gear (center O21 of the crank gear E21) is centered, and the center of rotation of the first gear (center O21 of the crank gear E21) and the eccentric position (eccentricity). It rotates on the circumference of a circle whose radius is the distance from the position E21b). The slide member (slide member E26) is from the first predetermined position on the circumference (the position where the angle ∠EOX shown in FIG. 189 is α) to the second predetermined position (the angle ∠EOX shown in FIG. 189 is β). When rotated to the position), the slide member (slide member E26) slides inside the slide groove (slide groove E22b) as the slide member (slide member E26) rotates, so that the slide member (slide member) The arm (crank member E22) rotates in conjunction with the transmission of the driving force to the slide groove (slide groove E22b) via E26). Then, in conjunction with the rotation of the arm (crank member E22), the screen (front screen mechanism E1) rotates from the first position (front exposed position) to the second position (front standby position). Therefore, in order to rotate the screen (front screen mechanism E1) from the first position (front exposed position) to the second position (front standby position), a slide member (slide member) is required at the start of the rotation. E26) needs to be arranged at the first predetermined position on the circumference (the position where the angle ∠EOX shown in FIG. 189 is α).

On the other hand, according to the game machine 1 according to the fourth embodiment, the slide member (slide member E26) is at the first predetermined position on the circumference (the position where the angle ∠EOX shown in FIG. 189 is α). In this case, the first through hole (through hole E21d) formed in the first gear (crank gear E21) is formed in the plates (right side plate C2 and left side plate C3) constituting the screen housing (screen housing C10). The second through hole (through hole C101) is overlapped with the second through hole. Therefore, in order to dispose the slide member (slide member E26) at the first predetermined position on the circumference (the position where the angle ∠EOX shown in FIG. 189 is α), on the contrary, the first through hole (penetration). The position of the first gear (crank gear E21) may be adjusted so that the hole E21d) and the second through hole (through hole C101) overlap. In this state, for example, when a rod-shaped object is inserted into the second through hole (through hole C101), the rod-shaped object also inserts the first through hole (through hole E21d). As a result, the first gear (crank gear E21) is fixed, and the slide member (slide member E26) is fixed at the first predetermined position on the circumference (the position where the angle ∠EOX shown in FIG. 189 is α). Can be placed. As a result, by sliding the slide member (slide member E26) inside the slide groove (slide groove E22b) as designed, it becomes possible to accurately transmit the driving force to the screen (front screen mechanism E1). , The screen (front screen mechanism E1) can be made to perform a desired operation.

(41-3) The gaming machine according to (41-2).
A second gear (intermediate gear E23) that is meshed with the first gear and transmits the driving force generated by the motor to the first gear is further provided.
The screen housing (right side plate C2 and left side plate C3 of the screen housing C10) has an opening (marking window) at a position where at least a part of the first gear and the second gear can be visually recognized from the outside. C100) is provided,
When the slide member is at the first predetermined position on the circumference (the position where the angle ∠EOX shown in FIG. 189 is α), the rotation center of the first gear (center O21 of the crank gear E21). And the rotation center of the second gear (center O23 of the intermediate gear E23), the first mark portion (mark portion E21c) formed on the first gear, and the second mark formed on the second gear. The first mark portion and the second mark portion are visible through the opening so that the portions (mark portions E23a) are aligned substantially in a straight line.
It is characterized by that.

As described above, according to the gaming machine 1 according to the fourth embodiment, the first gear (crank gear E21) so that the first through hole (through hole E21d) and the second through hole (through hole C101) overlap each other. ), The slide member (slide member E26) can be arranged at the first predetermined position on the circumference (the position where the angle ∠EOX shown in FIG. 189 is α). However, even if the first gear (crank gear E21) is rotated in the dark clouds, the first through hole (through hole E21d) and the second through hole (through hole C101) may not easily overlap each other. Further, it may be difficult to visually confirm whether or not the first through hole (through hole E21d) and the second through hole (through hole C101) overlap.

In this regard, according to the gaming machine 1 according to the fourth embodiment, the slide member (slide member E26) is at the first predetermined position on the circumference (the position where the angle ∠EOX shown in FIG. 189 is α). In the case, a first gear formed at the rotation center of the first gear (center O21 of the crank gear E21), the rotation center of the second gear (center O23 of the intermediate gear E23), and the first gear (crank gear E21). The screen housing (right side plate C2) so that the first mark portion (mark portion E21c) and the second mark portion (mark portion E23a) formed on the second gear (intermediate gear E23) are aligned substantially in a straight line. The first mark portion (mark portion E21c) and the second mark portion (mark portion E23a) can be visually recognized through the opening (mark portion window C100) provided in the left side plate C3). Therefore, the rotation center of the first gear (center O21 of the crank gear E21), the rotation center of the second gear (center O23 of the intermediate gear E23), the first mark portion (mark portion E21c), and the second mark portion. When the (mark portion E23a) is aligned substantially in a straight line, the first through hole (through hole E21d) and the second through hole (through hole C101) overlap. Therefore, in order to overlap the first through hole (through hole E21d) and the second through hole (through hole C101), the first mark portion (mark portion E21c) is passed through the opening (mark window C100). And while visually recognizing the second mark portion (mark portion E23a), the rotation center of the first gear (center O21 of the crank gear E21), the rotation center of the second gear (center O23 of the intermediate gear E23), and the second Positions of the first gear (crank gear E21) and the second gear (intermediate gear E23) so that the first mark portion (mark portion E21c) and the second mark portion (mark portion E23a) are aligned substantially in a straight line. Should be adjusted. By doing so, it is possible to relatively easily bring the first through hole (through hole E21d) and the second through hole (through hole C101) into an overlapping state, and the slide member (slide member E26). ) Can be arranged at the first predetermined position on the circumference (the position where the angle ∠EOX shown in FIG. 189 is α).

Further, conventionally, a game machine capable of producing an effect by projecting an image on a screen is known (see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-147828). According to such a game machine, it is possible to express an image to the same extent as a liquid crystal display device, and it is possible to reduce the cost when the display surface becomes large as compared with a liquid crystal display device or the like. Further, by appropriately changing the shape of the screen, it is possible to express an image that cannot be performed by a liquid crystal display device.

In a game machine that produces an effect using such a screen, it is important that the screen is arranged at an appropriate position. That is, if the screen is not arranged at an appropriate position, there will be a gap between the image projected by the projection device such as a projector and the display surface of the screen. In such a case, the effect content may be uncomfortable. It will be something.

The present invention has been made in view of the above problems, and an object of the present invention is to improve the accuracy of the production in a game machine that produces the production using a screen.

In this respect, the game machine 1 according to the fourth embodiment has the following features.

(42-1) A projector capable of projecting an image (projector mechanism B2) and
A screen (front screen mechanism E1) having a display surface (projection surface E11a) capable of displaying the image projected by the projector, and
The main body (cabinet G) with an opening on the front and
It is provided with an opening / closing door (upper door mechanism UD) which is attached to the main body so as to be openable and closable and is provided with a display area (upper display window UD1) capable of viewing the screen.
The screen (front screen mechanism E1) is composed of a first member (front screen member E11) having the display surface and a second member (front screen support base E12) adhered to the first member. Has been formed and
The second member (front screen support base E12) is formed with a hole (through hole E130) that penetrates from the side that is adhered to the first member to the other side.
A game machine characterized by that.

According to the game machine 1 according to the fourth embodiment, the screen (front screen mechanism E1) has a second member (front screen member E11) separate from the first member (front screen member E11) having a display surface (projection surface E11a). The front screen support base E12) is provided, and the first member (front screen member E11) and the second member (front screen support base E12) are formed by being adhered to each other. The second member (front screen support base E12) is formed with a hole (through hole E130) that penetrates from the side that is adhered to the first member (front screen member E11) to the other side. .. Therefore, even after the first member (front screen member E11) and the second member (front screen support base E12) are adhered to each other, a rod-shaped object or the like is inserted into the hole (through hole E130). Then, by lifting the first member (front screen member E11), the first member (front screen member E11) can be easily removed. Therefore, the first member (front screen member E11) and the second member (front screen support base) are in a state where the first member (front screen member E11) (display surface (projection surface E11a)) is displaced from an appropriate position. Even when the E12) is adhered, the first member (front screen member E11) is once removed from the second member (front screen support base E12), and the first member (front screen member) is again used. By adhering the E11) and the second member (front screen support base E12), the position of the first member (front screen member E11) (display surface (projection surface E11a)) can be finely adjusted. As a result, the display surface (projection surface E11a) can be arranged at an appropriate position, and the accuracy of the effect using the screen (front screen mechanism E1) can be improved.

(42-2) The gaming machine according to (42-1).
The screen (front screen mechanism E1) operates between a first position (front standby position) and a second position (front exposed position) by being driven by a drive mechanism (front screen drive mechanism E2). And
When the screen is in the second position (front exposure position), the image projected by the projector is displayed on the screen, while the screen is in the first position (front standby position). The screen is arranged so that the other side surface (second pattern surface E12b) of the second member can be visually recognized through the display area.
A pattern having irregularities is formed on the other side surface (second pattern surface E12b) of the second member.
The hole is formed in a recessed portion of the unevenness constituting the pattern.
It is characterized by that.

According to the game machine 1 according to the fourth embodiment, when the screen (front screen mechanism E1) is in the first position (front standby position), the screen (front screen mechanism E1) is the second member (front screen). The other side of the support base E12) (the side opposite to the side where the first member (front screen member E11) is adhered) (the back surface of the screen (second pattern surface E12b)) is the display area (upper side). It is arranged so as to be visible through the display window UD1). Here, as described above, the hole (through hole E130) formed in the second member (front screen support base E12) is from the side where it is adhered to the first member (front screen member E11) to the other. Since it penetrates to the side, when the screen (front screen mechanism E1) is in the first position (front standby position), the back surface (second pattern surface E12b) of the screen (front screen mechanism E1) is the display area (upper side). As it becomes visible through the display window UD1), the hole (through hole E130) formed in the second member (front screen support base E12) also comes into the player's view. If such a hole (through hole E130) is visually recognized by the player, the aesthetic appearance of the game machine may be spoiled and the interest of the game may be reduced. In this regard, according to the game machine 1 according to the fourth embodiment, the other side of the second member (front screen support base E12) (the side that is adhered to the first member (front screen member E11)). A pattern is formed on the surface (second pattern surface E12b) on the opposite side. As a result, the hole (through hole E130) formed in the second member (front screen support base E12) can be confused with the pattern to make it inconspicuous in appearance, and the aesthetic appearance of the game machine can be maintained. It is possible to prevent the interest of the game from being lowered. In particular, the pattern has irregularities, and the holes (through holes E130) are formed in recessed portions of the irregularities constituting the pattern. As a result, the hole (through hole E130) is formed on the other side of the second member (front screen support base E12) (the side opposite to the side where the first member (front screen member E11) is adhered). Since it exists in a recessed portion on the surface (second pattern surface E12b), it is possible to create a situation in which the hole (through hole E130) is difficult for the player to see.

[Fifth Embodiment]
The first to fourth embodiments have been described above. Hereinafter, the fifth embodiment will be described. The basic configuration of the gaming machine 1 according to the fifth embodiment is the same as that of the gaming machine 1 according to the second to fourth embodiments. In the following, the same components as the components of the game machine 1 according to the second to fourth embodiments will be described with the same reference numerals. Further, the description of the portion to which the description in the second embodiment to the fourth embodiment also applies to the fifth embodiment will be omitted.

<Illumination light device B>
FIG. 230 is an exploded perspective view of the irradiation light device.

As shown in FIG. 230, the irradiation light device B is a screen arranged in front of a projector mechanism B2 that emits irradiation light forward and a screen that emits irradiation light from the projector mechanism B2 diagonally downward and rearward. It has a mirror mechanism B3 that reflects in the device C direction, and a projector cover B1 that houses the projector mechanism B2 and the mirror mechanism B3.

Since the configuration of the screen device C is as described in the second embodiment and the fourth embodiment, the description thereof will be omitted in the present embodiment.

<Electrical and optical configuration of projector mechanism B2>
FIG. 231 is a block diagram showing a circuit configuration of the projector mechanism.

As shown in FIG. 231, the projector mechanism B2 includes a projector control board B23, an optical mechanism B24, and a relay board CK as electrical components. A sub-control device SS (see FIG. 148) is connected to the projector mechanism B2 via a relay board CK. The sub-control device SS controls the projector control board B23 according to the effect operation of the screen or the accessory, and projects the irradiation light onto the screen or the accessory via the optical mechanism B24 as a visual effect. Display the image. Further, in the assembly process of the display unit A or the like, the adjustment PC (personal computer) 1000 is connected to the relay board CK of the projector mechanism B2. The adjustment PC (personal computer) 1000 is used for adjusting the position of the irradiation light projected by the projector mechanism B2 and initializing the focus (details will be described later). In this embodiment, the adjustment PC 1000 is adopted as the adjustment device of the projector mechanism B2, but the adjustment device of the projector mechanism B2 is a tablet PC or a so-called smartphone in which an adjustment program (application software) is installed. , Or it may be a dedicated terminal device.

The projector control board B23 includes a control LSI 230, an EEPROM (registered trademark) 231 and a DLP (registered trademark) control circuit 232, and an LED driver 233. The optical mechanism B24 is an LED light source, DMD, and lens unit B21 that emit R (red), G (green), and B (blue) colored lights as components arranged around the lens unit B21 (see FIG. 232). The projection lens 210 is provided with a focus mechanism or the like for adjusting the focus (not shown).

The control LSI 230 controls the DLP control circuit 232 so as to project the irradiation light based on the command of the sub control device SS. The control LSI 230 controls the focus mechanism and moves the projection lens 210 in the optical axis direction based on the command of the sub-control device SS to adjust the focus when projecting the irradiation light. The EEPROM 231 stores data related to the control program by the control LSI 230 and the setting / adjustment of the projector mechanism B2.

The DLP system of the projector mechanism B2 is mainly composed of a DLP control circuit 232, an LED driver, and an LED light source and a DMD of the optical mechanism B24.

Under the control of the DLP control circuit 232, the light reflected in the predetermined direction by the DMD travels to the lens unit B21, passes through the projection lens 210, enters the mirror mechanism B3, and is finally reflected by the mirror mechanism B3. Guides you to the projection target. As a result, the irradiation light is projected onto the screen or the accessory to be projected, and an image corresponding to the effect is formed.

In the present embodiment, the projector mechanism B2 is configured as a so-called DLP projector. Further, the projector mechanism B2 increases the projection distance to the projection target by folding back the irradiation light by the mirror mechanism B3, and makes the projection distance of the irradiation light as short as possible by, for example, setting the contrast ratio to 1000: 1. ing. As a result, the display unit A provided with the projector mechanism B2 is constructed to be cheaper and smaller, and can be easily mounted in the limited space in the cabinet G of the game machine 1.

<Mechanical configuration of projector mechanism B2>
FIG. 232 is an exploded perspective view of the projector mechanism.

As shown in FIG. 232, the projector mechanism B2 has a case B22, a lens unit cover B222, an undercover B223, an upper pedestal B220, and a lower pedestal B221 as exterior components. A lens unit cover B222 is attached to the front opening B22k of the case B22. An undercover B223 is arranged on the lower surface of the case B22 so as to cover it. The undercover B223 is supported by the lower pedestal B221 via the stay B223a, and is also fixed to an appropriate portion on the lower surface of the case B22.

The projector mechanism B2 is attached to the projector cover B1 (see FIG. 230) via the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221. The procedure for adjusting the mounting of the projector mechanism B2 will be described later.

Further, the projector mechanism B2 has a lens unit B21, an LED substrate (not shown) equipped with an LED light source, a DMD substrate (not shown) equipped with a DMD, and a plurality of heat sinks 243R, 243G, 243B as internal components. , 243D, intake fans 244A, 244B, exhaust fan 245, and projector control board B23. In the case B22, the lens unit B21 is housed while the projection lens 210 of the lens unit B21 is covered with the lens unit cover B222, and the LED board, the DMD board, a plurality of heat sinks 243R, 243G, 243B, 243D, and an intake fan. 244A, 244B and exhaust fan 245 are accommodated. The projector control board B23 is fixed to the lower surface of the case B22.

In such a projector mechanism B2, video data related to an image such as an effect is transmitted from the sub control device SS, and the sub control device SS controls the projector mechanism B2 so as to project the image on a screen or an accessory. On the other hand, the sub control device SS controls the screen drive mechanisms E2 and F2 to move the screen mechanisms E1 and F1 according to the content of the effect.

Here, the sub-control device SS controls the projector mechanism B2 according to the movement of the screen mechanisms E1 and F1 by the effect, and is applied to the projection surfaces E11a and F1a of the moved screen mechanisms E1 and F1 and the projection surface of the fixed screen mechanism D. , Adjust the focus so that the image is projected clearly.

The heat sinks 243R, 243G, and 243B are partially in contact with the back surface of the LED substrate. The heat sink 243D is in partial contact with the back surface of the DMD substrate. In the present embodiment, the fin outer sizes of the heat sinks 243R, 243G, 243B, and 243D are relatively large for the heat sink 243R and 243G, while the heat sinks 243B and 243D are relatively small. These heat sinks 243R, 243G, 243B, and 243D are efficient so as not to raise the temperature of the optical element or the substrate until the optical characteristics are significantly changed by dissipating the heat generated in each of the LED substrate and the DMD substrate into the air. It dissipates well. The heat sinks 243R, 243G, 243B, and 243D, which are heat radiating members, are made of an aluminum material having high thermal conductivity in order to enhance the heat radiating effect, and have a plurality of heat radiating fins in order to increase the contact area with air.

The intake fan 244A is arranged so as to be close to the back surface of the right front portion of the case B22, and is close to the heat sink 243R. The intake fan 244B is arranged so as to be close to the back surface of the left side portion of the case B22, and is close to the heat sink 243D. The exhaust fan 245 is arranged so as to be close to the back surface of the rear portion of the case B22, and is close to the heat sink 243G.

An intake port B22A is provided on the right front side of the case B22 in which the intake fan 244A is close, and an exhaust port B22E is provided in the right rear part of the case B22 in which the heat sink 243R is close to the intake port B22A. Has been done. An intake port B22B is provided in a part of the left side of the case B22 to which the intake fan 244B is close, and in the other part of the left side of the case B22 along with the intake port B22B, the inside of the case B22 is provided. The intake port B22C is provided so that air can reach the three heat sinks 243G, 243B, and 243D through the empty space. An exhaust port B22D is provided at the rear of the case B22 to which the exhaust fan 245 is close.

That is, in the case B22 of the projector mechanism B2, after being forcibly sucked from the intake port B22A by the intake fan 244A, a flow of air exhausted from the exhaust port B22E is formed while taking heat from the heat sink 243R. .. Further, in the case B22, after being forcibly sucked from the intake port B22B by the intake fan 244B, it is forcibly taken from the exhaust port B22D by the exhaust fan 245 while taking heat from the heat sink 243D, the heat sink 243B, and the heat sink 243G. A flow of air exhausted to is formed. Further, in the case B22, after being sucked from the intake port B22C, a flow of air forcibly exhausted from the exhaust port B22D by the exhaust fan 45 is formed while mainly taking heat from the heat sink 243G and the heat sink 243B. ..

The projector control board B23 is attached to the lower surface of the case B22 while being covered with the undercover B223. A control LSI 230, an EEPROM 231 and a DLP control circuit 232, an LED driver 233, and the like are mounted on the projector control board B23. The projector control board B23 is electrically connected to the LED board and DMD board arranged in the case B22, and further to the focus mechanism.

<Adjustment of position / orientation of projector mechanism B2>
FIG. 233 is an exploded perspective view of the upper pedestal and the lower pedestal for fixing the projector mechanism. FIG. 234 is a plan view of the upper pedestal and the lower pedestal connected to each other. FIG. 235 is a diagram for explaining a method of positioning the upper pedestal. FIG. 236 is a cross-sectional view taken along the arrow JJ of the upper pedestal and the lower pedestal shown in FIG. 234. FIG. 237 is a diagram for explaining a method of adjusting the posture of the lower pedestal. FIG. 238 is a diagram showing a connection form between the projector mechanism and the adjustment PC.

As shown in FIGS. 233 and 234, the upper pedestal B220 is a sheet metal member fixed to the relay plate B300 (see FIG. 242), and the left and right sides of the rectangular main body 2200 and the main body 2200 are downward and outward. The left end 2201a and the right end 2201b, which are formed by bending into a main body 2200 and have a step on both the left and right sides, and the rear end portion that partially extends from the rear side to the rear side of the main body 2200. It has 2202.

Each of the left end portion 2201a and the right end portion 2201b is provided with a plurality of square holes 2201c for fixing to the relay plate B300 by screwing. In the present embodiment, three square holes 2201c are arranged in each of the left end portion 2201a and the right end portion 2201b, and are provided at equal intervals in the front-rear direction. The vertical and horizontal inner diameter dimensions of the square hole 2201c are larger than the screw shaft diameter of the mounting screw T (see FIG. 235) that is inserted into and fastened to the square hole 2201c.

FIG. 235 shows the mounting form of the upper pedestal B220 with respect to the relay plate B300. The upper view of FIG. 235 (a) is a view showing a state in which the mounting screw T is inserted and fastened to the square hole 2201c of the upper pedestal B220, and the lower figure of FIG. 235 (a) is a view of FIG. 235 (a). It is sectional drawing which follows the BB'line shown in the above figure. Note that FIG. 235 shows the periphery of the square hole 2201c formed in the left end portion 2201a of the upper pedestal B220, but the same applies to the periphery of the remaining square hole 2201c in the left end portion 2201a and the right end portion 2201b.

As shown in FIG. 235 (a), the mounting screw T is inserted into the square hole 2201c from above, and the mounting screw T is arranged substantially in the center of the square hole 2201c. The mounting screw T is screwed to the nut N located on the lower surface side of the relay plate B300 via a washer W arranged along the upper surface of the upper pedestal B220 and the lower surface of the relay plate B300. As a result, the left end portion 2201a of the upper pedestal B220 is attached to the relay plate B300 by screwing. The right end 2201b of the upper pedestal B220 is also attached to the relay plate B300 by the same screwing.

Here, the shaded portion indicated by reference numeral A in FIG. 235 (a) is a gap formed between the screw shaft of the mounting screw T and the square hole 2201c. In FIG. 235 (a), the screw shaft of the mounting screw T is arranged and fixed substantially in the center of the square hole 2201c. At this time, the screw shaft of the mounting screw T can be moved within the range (adjustment range) of the shaded portion of the reference numeral A. That is, by finely adjusting the relative position of the mounting screw T with respect to the square hole 2201c within the opening range of the square hole 2201c, the left end portion 2201a of the upper pedestal B220 can be positioned and adjusted with respect to the relay plate B300. Similarly, the right end portion 2201b of the upper pedestal B220 can also be positioned and adjusted with respect to the relay plate B300.

FIG. 235 (b) shows a state in which the left end portion 2201a of the upper pedestal B220 is shifted in the direction of the arrow E with respect to FIG. 235 (a). The lower view of FIG. 235 (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line DD'shown in the upper view of FIG. 235 (b). In the state shown in FIG. 235 (b), the screw shaft of the mounting screw T is displaced relatively to the right within the opening range of the square hole 2201c, and is within the range (adjustment range) of the shaded portion indicated by reference numeral C. It is possible to move with.

In this way, the upper pedestal B220 is attached to the relay plate B300 while being positioned and adjusted within a predetermined adjustment range that is the opening range of the square hole 2201c. That is, in the projector mechanism B2, the mounting position with respect to the relay plate B300 is adjusted in the left-right direction and the front-rear direction by the plurality of square holes 2201c provided in the left end portion 2201a and the right end portion 2201b of the upper pedestal B220. As will be described later, since the relay plate B300 is fixed to the projector cover B1, the direction of the light emitted from the projector mechanism B2 is perpendicular to the left-right direction and coincides with the front-back direction as the reference direction. Easy to adjust.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 233 and 234, the main body portion 2200 and the rear end portion 2202 of the upper pedestal B220 are provided with three connecting holes 2200A for connecting the lower pedestal B221. These three connecting holes 2200A are arranged so as not to be located on the same straight line in a plane (horizontal plane) along the main body 2200.

The lower pedestal B221 is a sheet metal member that roughly corresponds to the main body portion 2200 and the rear end portion 2202 of the upper pedestal B220. The lower pedestal B221 is integrally formed with three connecting screw portions 2210 so as to project upward corresponding to the three connecting holes 2200A. These three connecting screw portions 2210 are also arranged so as not to be located on the same straight line in the plane (horizontal plane) along the lower pedestal B221.

Further, the lower pedestal B221 is provided with a plurality of screw holes 2214 for screwing the case B22 and a plurality of screw holes 2215 for screwing the stay B223a. The lower pedestal B221 is connected to the lower surface of the upper pedestal B220 while supporting the undercover B223 via the case B22 and the stay B223a.

The upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221 are connected to each other in an adjustable distance at each of the three connecting portions R1, R2, and R3. Each of the connecting portions R1, R2, and R3 is composed of a connecting hole 2200A of the upper pedestal B220, a connecting screw portion 2210 of the lower pedestal B221, a coil spring 2211, a washer 2212, and a nut 2213 (see FIG. 237).

FIG. 237 shows the connection structure of the lower pedestal B221 with respect to the upper pedestal B220. FIG. 237 is a cross-sectional view showing a state in which the lower pedestal B221 is connected to the upper pedestal B220 by the connecting hole 2200A, the connecting screw portion 2210, the coil spring 2211, the washer 2212, and the nut 2213 in the connecting portion R2. Note that FIG. 237 shows one connecting portion R2, but the same applies to the remaining connecting portions R1 and R3.

The connecting screw portion 2210 of the lower pedestal B221 is inserted into the connecting hole 2200A from the lower surface side of the main body portion 2200 of the upper pedestal B220, and is screwed to the nut 2213 via the washer 2212 arranged on the upper surface side of the main body portion 2200. To. A coil spring 2211 is fitted onto the connecting screw portion 2210, and the coil spring 2211 is sandwiched between the lower surface of the main body portion 2200 and the upper surface of the lower pedestal B221 at the peripheral edge of the connecting hole 2200A. By such a coil spring 2211, the portion of the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221 near the connecting portion R2 is urged in a direction away from each other (vertical direction), so that the connecting screw portion 2210 and the nut 2213 are screwed together. Loosening is prevented at the joint.

In such a connecting portion R2, the distance between the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221 can be changed while being urged by the coil spring 2211 by appropriately turning the nut 2213 in the tightening direction or the loosening direction. Specifically, when the nut 2213 is turned in the tightening direction, the distance between the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221 in the connecting portion R2 is narrowed. At this time, as described above, the upper pedestal B220 is fixed to the relay plate B300 (see FIG. 242), and as will be described later, the relay plate B300 is fixed to the projector cover B1. Therefore, the portion of the lower pedestal B221 near the connecting portion R2 is displaced in the direction closer to the upper pedestal B220 by appropriately tightening the nut 2213, and the height position is adjusted higher. On the other hand, when the nut 2213 is turned in the loosening direction, the distance between the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221 in the connecting portion R2 is increased. That is, the portion of the lower pedestal B221 near the connecting portion R2 is displaced in the direction away from the upper pedestal B220 by appropriately loosening the nut 2213, and the height position is adjusted to a lower position.

Also in the other connecting portions R1 and R3, the height position of the lower pedestal B221 near the connecting portions R1 and R3 can be easily adjusted by appropriately adjusting the tightening amount of the nut 2213 in the same manner as described above. Specifically, the lines connecting the connecting portions R1, R2, and R3 form a triangle so that they are not located on the same straight line in the plane (in the horizontal plane) along the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221. It is arranged like this. That is, since the height position of the lower pedestal B221 can be finely adjusted by the tightening amount of the nut 2213 at each of the three connecting portions R1, R2, R3, the posture of the lower pedestal B221 can be adjusted in the front-rear direction. The degree of inclination in the three-dimensional space can be adjusted in either the left-right direction or the up-down direction.

By using the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221 as described above, the projector mechanism B2 is attached to the projector cover B1 so that the position and the optical axis can be adjusted.

The posture adjustment of the lower pedestal B221 is performed while irradiating the screen or the like with light from the projector mechanism B2 supported by the lower pedestal B221. At that time, an image is projected on the screen or the like by the irradiation light, and the posture of the lower pedestal B221 is adjusted while checking the image. As a result, the optical axis direction of the light emitted from the projector mechanism B2 is adjusted so that the image is projected on the surface of the screen or the like in an appropriate display mode. That is, the optical axis direction can be adjusted in advance by adjusting the posture of the lower pedestal B221 so that so-called trapezoidal distortion or the like does not occur as an image display mode.

As shown in FIG. 238, the adjustment in the optical axis direction and the like are performed using the adjustment PC 1000 connected to the projector mechanism B2. The projector mechanism B2 attached to the projector cover B1 via the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221 adjusts the optical axis direction and checks the displayed image on the screen or the like at the time of inspection at a factory. Various adjustments are made to project and display the image. The adjustment PC 1000 is temporarily connected to the relay board CK of the projector mechanism B2 during the adjustment work (see FIG. 231). When the adjustment PC 1000 is operated, the optical parameters related to the projection position of the irradiation light, the focus adjustment, and the like in the projector mechanism B2 are changed by a predetermined command transmitted from the adjustment PC 1000. The projection position and the optical parameters appropriately adjusted in this way are stored in the EEPROM 231 of the projector mechanism B2 as the adjustment value data in the horizontal direction and the vertical direction (see FIG. 231). The horizontal and vertical adjustment value data stored in the EEPROM 231 is not supplied to the projector mechanism B2 due to transportation after shipment from the factory, and even if the game machine 1 is installed in the game hall, it remains as it is. Can be used.

As is clear from the above description, the projector mechanism B2 is positioned in the left-right direction and the front-rear direction according to the mounting position with respect to the relay plate B300, and also depends on the posture of the lower pedestal B221 in the three-dimensional space. The optical axis direction is adjusted.

In the present embodiment, the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221 are provided at three connecting portions for connecting to each other, but if the condition that at least three locations are not on the same straight line is satisfied, four locations are provided. The connecting portion may be provided above. Further, in the present embodiment, the upper pedestal B220 is provided with the connecting hole 2200A and the lower pedestal B221 is provided with the connecting screw portion 2210, but these connecting holes and the connecting screw portion may be provided upside down. The connecting screw portion is not limited to the one formed integrally with the pedestal as in the present embodiment, and may be any one that can be fixed to one pedestal. For example, the connecting screw portion may be a bolt that penetrates and is fixed to the lower pedestal.

<Attachment of projector mechanism B2 to projector cover B1>
In attaching the projector mechanism B2 to the projector cover B1, the projector mechanism B2 may be directly fixed to the projector cover B1 by screwing the upper pedestal B220 to the upper wall portion B12 (FIG. 39) or the like. In the embodiment, the relay plate B300 is interposed between the upper pedestal B220 and the projector cover B1.

The upper pedestal B220 and the relay plate B300 are fixed by the method described with reference to FIG. 235. Hereinafter, fixing of the relay plate B300 and the projector cover B1 will be described.

FIG. 239 is a perspective view showing a state in which the upper wall portion of the projector cover is removed. FIG. 240 is a plan view of the projector cover, the relay plate, and the upper pedestal connected to each other. FIG. 241 is a cross-sectional view taken along the arrow KK of the projector cover, the relay plate, and the upper pedestal shown in FIG. 240. FIG. 242 is a perspective view showing a state in which the projector cover is removed from the state shown in FIG. 240. FIG. 243 is an exploded perspective view showing the relay plate and the cushioning member.

As shown in FIG. 239, the projector cover B1 according to the present embodiment has a slight difference in appearance from the projector cover B1 according to the second embodiment (see FIG. 39), but the basic configuration is the first. 2 As described in the embodiment. Hereinafter, the configuration inside the projector cover B1 that has not been described in the second embodiment will be described.

Similar to the second embodiment and the fourth embodiment, the projector cover B1 is connected to the screen housing C10 by screwing screws into the right side plate C2 and the left side plate C3 via the screw holes B131c ( (See FIGS. 166 and 167). Further, the mirror mechanism B3 is housed in the projector cover B1 (see FIG. 38).

The projector cover B1 has a relay plate mounting portion B301 inside. The relay plate mounting portion B301 is formed so as to project inward from the inner side surfaces of the left and right side wall portions B13 and B13, respectively. The relay plate mounting portion B301 has a relay plate mounting surface B301a formed substantially horizontally.

A mounting hole B301b and a position adjusting hole B301c are formed as through holes on the relay plate mounting surface B301a. The mounting hole B301b is a screw hole for mounting the relay plate B300 to the relay plate mounting portion B301 by screwing. The position adjusting hole B301c is formed at a position facing the square hole 2201c (see FIG. 233) of the upper pedestal B220 when the relay plate B300 is attached to the relay plate mounting portion B301.

As shown in FIGS. 240 to 242, the relay plate B300 is attached to the projector cover B1 by screwing the screw B310 into the mounting hole B301b of the relay plate mounting surface B301a via the washer B311 and the cushioning member B312. There is.

Further, the relay plate B300 and the upper pedestal B220 are fastened by using the cap bolt 320 and the fixing plate B321. Although the fixed plate B321 is not shown in FIG. 235, a conventionally known member can be appropriately selected and used when fastening the relay plate B300 and the upper pedestal B220.

In FIG. 243, only one of the two relay plates B300 provided on the left and right is shown, and only one of the cushioning members B312 provided at the four corners is shown.

As shown in FIG. 243, the relay plate B300 is formed in a rectangular plate, and has three first through holes B300a and a second through hole having a hole diameter larger than that of the first through hole B300a. Two B300b are formed.

The first through hole B300a is a hole through which the cap bolt 320 is inserted when the relay plate B300 is attached to the upper pedestal B220. The second through hole B300b is a hole for penetrating the cushioning member B312.

The cushioning member B312 includes an upper portion B312a, an intermediate portion B312b, and a lower portion B312c. The upper portion B312a, the intermediate portion B312b, and the lower portion B312c all have a donut shape in which a central portion is cut out from a cylinder. A through hole B312d is formed by communicating the cut-out central portion. A screw B310 (see FIGS. 240 to 242) is inserted into the through hole B312d. The side surfaces of the upper portion B312a and the lower portion B312c are slightly rounded.

The diameter of the upper portion B312a and the lower portion B312c are substantially the same in the top view, and the diameter of the intermediate portion B312b is smaller than the diameter of the upper portion B312a and the lower portion B312c. The diameter of the intermediate portion B312b is substantially the same as the diameter of the second through hole B300b of the relay plate B300, or slightly smaller than the diameter of the second through hole B300b. Further, the length of the intermediate portion B312b in the vertical direction is substantially the same as the thickness of the relay plate B300 in the vertical direction. As a result, the cushioning member B312 can be penetrated into the second through hole B300b so that the side surface of the intermediate portion B312b is brought into contact with the side surface of the second through hole B300b.

As a result, the lower end of the upper portion B312a is in contact with the upper surface of the relay plate B300, the upper end of the lower portion B312c is in contact with the lower surface of the relay plate B300, and the lower end of the lower portion B312c is in contact with the relay plate mounting surface B301a. They will come into contact (see FIGS. 240-242).

As shown in FIG. 242, the right end portion 2201b of the upper pedestal B220 has a shape in which the front portion and the rear portion are cut out in a curved shape. As a result, a space for arranging the buffer member B312 is secured. Although not shown in the figure, the left end 2201a also has a similar shape.

The cushioning member B312 is made of a gel-like material (silicone gel) containing silicone as a main raw material, which has shock absorbing power and anti-vibration performance. As the silicone gel, for example, α gel (registered trademark) manufactured by Taica Corporation can be used. The material of the cushioning member B312 is not particularly limited, and in addition to silicone gel, a flexible organosilicon compound such as silicone grease, silicone rubber, and silicone resin, and a flexible organosilicon compound such as fluororesin are used. Can be adopted as appropriate.

Due to such properties of the cushioning member B312, it is possible to alleviate the vibration transmitted to the projector cover B1 and the projector mechanism B2, and from the impact generated during the transportation of the display unit A, each member and device constituting the display unit A can be removed. Can be protected.

As described above, as one embodiment of the present invention, the game machine 1 according to the fifth embodiment has been described.

Conventionally, there is known a game machine capable of producing an effect by displaying an image projected by a projector on a screen (see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-147828). According to such a game machine, it is possible to express an image to the same extent as a liquid crystal display device, and it is possible to reduce the cost when the display surface becomes large as compared with a liquid crystal display device or the like. Further, by appropriately changing the shape of the screen, it is possible to express an image that cannot be performed by a liquid crystal display device.

In a game machine that produces effects using such a projector, if the projector is damaged due to vibration or impact generated when the projector or the game machine equipped with the projector is transported, the projector will function normally. However, it becomes impossible to realize the intended production.

In particular, as a game machine that produces an effect using such a screen, the present inventor has developed a display unit in which a projector and a screen are unitized. It is considered that such a display unit is integrated by connecting the projector and the screen to each other, and vibration or impact generated in any member of the display unit is easily propagated to other members. Be done. Focusing on this point, the present inventor pays attention to this point, and when transporting a display unit or a game machine equipped with a display unit, a force due to vibration or impact is applied to each component of the display unit, thereby causing the display unit. I thought that there was a possibility that some or all of the above would be damaged.

The present invention has been made in view of the above problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of preventing the projector from being damaged.

In this respect, the gaming machine 1 according to the fifth embodiment has the following features.

(43-1) A projector capable of projecting an image (internal components (lens unit B21 and the like) of the projector mechanism B2 shown in FIG. 232 and a case B22 for accommodating them).
A projector cover (projector cover B1) arranged so as to surround the projector,
A screen (fixed screen mechanism D, front screen mechanism E1, reel screen mechanism F1) capable of displaying the image projected by the projector, and
The main body (cabinet G) with an opening on the front and
It is provided with an opening / closing door (upper door mechanism UD) which is attached to the main body so as to be openable and closable and is provided with a display area (upper display window UD1) capable of viewing the screen.
A cushioning member (buffering member B312) is provided at a connecting portion between the projector and the projector cover.
A game machine characterized by that.

A projector (internal components of the projector mechanism B2 (lens unit B21 or the like) and a case B22 containing them) or a projector (internal components of the projector mechanism B2 (lens unit B21 or the like) and a case B22 containing them) When transporting the mounted gaming machine, it is considered that shaking occurs in heavy members and devices, and a large load due to the shaking is applied to the parts connecting such members and devices. .. According to the game machine 1 according to the fifth embodiment, a buffer is provided at a connecting portion between a projector (internal components of the projector mechanism B2 (lens unit B21 and the like) and a case B22 for accommodating them) and a projector cover (projector cover B1). Since the member (buffer member B312) is provided, it is possible to alleviate such a load and prevent the connecting portion from being damaged. Further, since the vibration can be absorbed by the cushioning member (buffering member B312) provided in the connecting portion, the projector (internal components of the projector mechanism B2 (lens unit B21 and the like) and the case B22 for accommodating them) can be absorbed. ) And the vibration transmitted to the projector cover (projector cover B1) can be softened. This makes it possible to reduce the impact applied to the projector (internal components of the projector mechanism B2 (lens unit B21 and the like) and the case B22 for accommodating them) and the projector cover (projector cover B1), and the projector (projector mechanism B2). It is also possible to prevent damage to the internal components (lens unit B21 and the like), the case B22 that houses them, and the projector cover (projector cover B1).

(43-2) A projector capable of projecting an image (internal components (lens unit B21, etc.) of the projector mechanism B2 shown in FIG. 232 and a case B22 for accommodating them).
A projector cover (projector cover B1) arranged so as to surround the projector,
A screen (fixed screen mechanism D, front screen mechanism E1, reel screen mechanism F1) capable of displaying the image projected by the projector, and
The main body (cabinet G) with an opening on the front and
It is provided with an opening / closing door (upper door mechanism UD) which is attached to the main body so as to be openable and closable and is provided with a display area (upper display window UD1) capable of viewing the screen.
The projector cover and the projector are connected via a first member (relay plate B300) and a second member (upper pedestal B220).
The first member (relay plate B300) is connected to the projector via the second member by being attached to the second member (upper pedestal B220) on one side of the surface, while the first member (relay plate B300) is connected to the projector via the second member. It is attached to the projector cover (projector cover B1) on the side opposite to the one surface.
A buffer member (buffer member B312) is provided so as to sandwich the first member while abutting on both the one surface and the opposite surface of the first member (relay plate B300).
A game machine characterized by that.

A projector (internal components of the projector mechanism B2 (lens unit B21 or the like) and a case B22 containing them) or a projector (internal components of the projector mechanism B2 (lens unit B21 or the like) and a case B22 containing them) When transporting the mounted gaming machine, it is considered that shaking occurs in heavy members and devices, and a large load due to the shaking is applied to the parts connecting such members and devices. .. According to the game machine 1 according to the fifth embodiment, a projector (internal components of the projector mechanism B2 (lens unit B21 and the like) and a case B22 for accommodating them) and a projector cover (projector cover B1) are connected. Since the cushioning member (buffering member B312) is provided so as to come into contact with the first member (relaying plate B300), such a load can be alleviated, and the first member (relaying plate B300) can be used. It can be prevented from being damaged. Further, since the vibration can be absorbed by the cushioning member (buffering member B312) provided on the first member (relay plate B300), the projector (internal component of the projector mechanism B2 (lens unit B21 or the like) and the like) It is possible to soften the vibration transmitted to the case B22) and the projector cover (projector cover B1) that accommodate them. This makes it possible to reduce the impact applied to the projector (internal components of the projector mechanism B2 (lens unit B21 and the like) and the case B22 for accommodating them) and the projector cover (projector cover B1), and the projector (projector mechanism B2). It is also possible to prevent damage to the internal components (lens unit B21 and the like), the case B22 that houses them, and the projector cover (projector cover B1).

Further, according to the game machine 1 according to the fifth embodiment, the cushioning member (buffering member B312) comes into contact with both surfaces of the first member (relaying plate B300), and the first member (relaying plate B300) is in contact with each other. ) Is sandwiched between them. As a result, the vibration generated in the first member (relay plate B300) can be efficiently absorbed, and the projector (internal components of the projector mechanism B2 (lens unit B21, etc.) and the case B22 for accommodating them) and the like. It is possible to further soften the vibration transmitted to the projector cover (projector cover B1). As a result, the first member (relay plate B300), the projector (internal components of the projector mechanism B2 (lens unit B21 and the like) and the case B22 for accommodating them), the projector cover (projector cover B1) and the like are damaged. This can be effectively prevented.

(43-3) The gaming machine according to (43-1) or (43-2).
A screen housing for accommodating the screen and
A reflection mirror that reflects the light emitted from the projector is further provided.
The screen can display an image projected by the projector based on the light reflected by the reflection mirror.
The projector cover (projector cover B1) is provided with the reflection mirror (mirror mechanism B3), and the screen housing (screen housing C10) is attached.
It is characterized by that.

According to the game machine 1 according to the fifth embodiment, the light emitted from the projector (internal components of the projector mechanism B2 (lens unit B21 and the like) and the case B22 accommodating them) is reflected by the reflection mirror (mirror mechanism B3). By being reflected, an image is displayed on the screen (fixed screen mechanism D, front screen mechanism E1, reel screen mechanism F1). Here, since the reflection mirror (mirror mechanism B3) is provided on the projector cover (projector cover B1), the projector (internal components of the projector mechanism B2 (lens unit B21 and the like) and the case B22 for accommodating them) The projector cover (projector cover B1), the reflection mirror (mirror mechanism B3), the screen (fixed screen mechanism D, front screen mechanism E1, reel screen mechanism F1), and the screen housing (screen housing C10) are integrated. If the projector cover (projector cover B1) vibrates when the unit or the game machine equipped with the unit is transported, the position and orientation of the reflection mirror (mirror mechanism B3) may change. As a result, the positional relationship between the reflection mirror (mirror mechanism B3) and the projector (internal components of the projector mechanism B2 (lens unit B21, etc.) and the case B22 for accommodating them) is displaced, resulting in high quality. There is a concern that it will not be possible to provide such images. In this regard, according to the game machine 1 according to the fifth embodiment, it is possible to absorb the vibration by the cushioning member (buffering member B312) and soften the vibration transmitted to the projector cover (projector cover B1). It is possible to prevent the position and orientation of the reflection mirror (mirror mechanism B3) provided on the cover (projector cover B1) from changing.

Further, according to the game machine 1 according to the fifth embodiment, a projector (internal components of the projector mechanism B2 (lens unit B21 and the like) and a case B22 for accommodating them), a projector cover (projector cover B1), and a reflection mirror ( A unit in which a mirror mechanism B3), a screen (fixed screen mechanism D, front screen mechanism E1, reel screen mechanism F1) and a screen housing (screen housing C10) are integrated, or a game machine equipped with the unit. Since the vibration generated during transportation is absorbed by the cushioning member (buffering member B312), the screen housing (screen housing C10) attached to the projector cover (projector cover B1) and the screen housing Vibration transmitted to the screen (fixed screen mechanism D, front screen mechanism E1, reel screen mechanism F1) housed in (screen housing C10) can be softened. As a result, it is possible to prevent the screen housing (screen housing C10) and the screen (fixed screen mechanism D, front screen mechanism E1, reel screen mechanism F1) from being damaged.

(43-I) The gaming machine according to (43-2) above.
The second member (upper pedestal B220) is attached to the first member (relay plate B300) attached to the projector cover so that its in-plane position can be adjusted.
It is characterized by that.

According to the game machine 1 according to the fifth embodiment, the second member (upper pedestal B220) is in-plane with respect to the first member (relay plate B300) attached to the projector cover (projector cover B1). It is installed so that its position can be adjusted. Therefore, the projector (internal component of the projector mechanism B2 (lens unit B21, etc.) and the like) with respect to the projector cover (projector cover B1) via the first member (relay plate B300) and the second member (upper pedestal B220). The relative position of the case B22) for accommodating them can be made appropriate. However, even if the projector (internal components of the projector mechanism B2 (lens unit B21, etc.) and the case B22 for accommodating them) is adjusted so as to be arranged at an appropriate position, the display unit (display unit A) or the display There is a concern that misalignment may occur due to vibration when transporting the game machine equipped with the unit (display unit A). In this regard, according to the game machine 1 according to the fifth embodiment, the vibration can be absorbed by the buffer member (buffer member B312) provided on the first member (relay plate B300). It is possible to prevent the occurrence of misalignment.

(43-II) The gaming machine according to (43-2) above.
The first member (relay plate B300) and the projector (internal components (lens unit B21 and the like) of the projector mechanism B2 shown in FIG. 232 and a case B22 for accommodating them) are the second member (upper pedestal). It is connected via a B220) and a third member (lower pedestal B221).
The third member (lower pedestal B221) is attached to the second member (upper pedestal B220) so as to be able to adjust the interval at three or more points while supporting the projector.
It is characterized by that.

According to the game machine 1 according to the fifth embodiment, the third member (lower pedestal B221) supports a projector (internal components of the projector mechanism B2 (lens unit B21 and the like) and a case B22 for accommodating them). However, it is attached to the second member (upper pedestal B220) so that the distance can be adjusted at three or more places. Therefore, by adjusting the distance between the second member (upper pedestal B220) and the third member (lower pedestal B221) at each location, the third member (lower) with respect to the second member (upper pedestal B220) is adjusted. The inclination of the side pedestal B221) can be changed. Thereby, the posture of the projector (internal components (lens unit B21 and the like) of the projector mechanism B2 and the case B22 for accommodating them) supported by the third member (lower pedestal B221) can be adjusted. However, even if the posture of the projector (internal components of the projector mechanism B2 (lens unit B21, etc.) and the case B22 for accommodating them) is adjusted in this way, the display unit (display unit A) or the display unit (display) Due to the vibration when transporting the game machine equipped with the unit A), the distance between the second member (upper pedestal B220) and the third member (lower pedestal B221) changes, so that the projector ( There is a concern that the postures of the internal components (lens unit B21 and the like) of the projector mechanism B2 and the case B22 that houses them may be disrupted. In this regard, according to the game machine 1 according to the fifth embodiment, the vibration can be absorbed by the cushioning member (buffer member B312) provided on the first member (relay plate B300), so that the vibration can be caused. As a result, it is possible to prevent the distance between the second member (upper pedestal B220) and the third member (lower pedestal B221) from changing, and the projector (internal component of the projector mechanism B2 (lens unit B21, etc.)) and The posture of the case B22) for accommodating them can be maintained.

[Sixth Embodiment]
The first to fifth embodiments have been described above. Hereinafter, the sixth embodiment will be described. The basic configuration of the gaming machine 1 according to the sixth embodiment is the same as that of the gaming machine 1 according to the second to fifth embodiments. In the following, the same components as those of the game machine 1 according to the second to fifth embodiments will be described with the same reference numerals. Further, the description of the portion to which the description in the second embodiment to the fifth embodiment also applies to the sixth embodiment will be omitted.

<Upper pedestal B220 and lower pedestal B221>
The upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221 according to the present embodiment have different configurations from the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221 according to the fifth embodiment.

FIG. 244 is a perspective view of the upper pedestal and the lower pedestal. FIG. 245 is a plan view of the upper pedestal and the lower pedestal. FIG. 246 is a view of the upper pedestal and the lower pedestal viewed diagonally from the front. FIG. 247 is a view of the upper pedestal and the lower pedestal viewed from diagonally rearward. FIG. 248 is a perspective view of a case that houses the internal components of the projector mechanism. FIG. 249 is a perspective view showing a state in which the case is attached to the lower pedestal.

As shown in FIGS. 244 and 245, the upper pedestal B220 has a shape in which a rectangular opening is provided in a sheet metal member having a rectangular shape in a plan view. As shown in FIG. 245, the opening is formed in a substantially rectangular shape surrounded by side A, side B, side C, and side D.

Square holes 2201c are provided on the right side portion and the left side portion of the upper pedestal B220, respectively. The square hole 2201c is a hole for fixing the upper pedestal B220 to the relay plate B300 (see FIG. 252) by screwing. Similar to the fifth embodiment, the vertical and horizontal inner diameter dimensions of the square hole 2201c are larger than the screw shaft diameter of the mounting screw T inserted into and fastened to the square hole 2201c. The figure also shows a fixing plate B321 used when fixing the upper pedestal B220 to the relay plate B300.

The method of attaching the upper pedestal B220 to the relay plate B300 using the square hole 2201c and the method of adjusting the position of the upper pedestal B220 with respect to the relay plate B300 are as described with reference to FIG. 235. The description is omitted.

Further, the upper pedestal B220 is provided with three connecting holes 2200A for connecting the lower pedestal B221. Similar to the fifth embodiment, the three connecting holes 2200A are arranged so as not to be located on the same straight line in the plane (horizontal plane) along the upper pedestal B220.

The lower pedestal B221 has a step between the rectangular main body B221a and the main body B221a and extends forward, and has a step between the right side B221b and the left side B221c and the main body B221a and extends rearward. It is a sheet metal member including a rear end portion B221d.

As shown in FIG. 246, the right side portion B221b is formed by bending the right side of the front end of the main body portion B221a downward and outward. The left side portion B221c is formed by bending the left side of the front end of the main body portion B221a downward and outward. As shown in FIG. 247, the rear end portion B221d is formed by bending the rear end of the main body portion B221a downward and a part of the downwardly bent portion outward. The right side portion B221b, the left side portion B221c, and the rear end portion B221d are formed so as to be positioned on the same plane.

A connecting screw portion 2210 is integrally formed on the right side portion B221b, the left side portion B221c, and the rear end portion B221d so as to project upward corresponding to the three connecting holes 2200A of the upper pedestal B220, respectively. Similar to the fifth embodiment, the three connecting screw portions 2210 are also arranged so as not to be located on the same straight line in the plane (horizontal plane) along the right side portion B221b, the left side portion B221c, and the rear end portion B221d. There is.

Similar to the fifth embodiment, the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221 are connected to each other so that the distance between them can be adjusted at each of the three connecting holes 2200A and the three connecting portions corresponding to the three connecting screw portions 2210. Will be done. Each of the three connecting portions is composed of a connecting hole 2200A, a connecting screw portion 2210, a coil spring 2211, a washer 2212, and a nut 2213 (see FIG. 237).

A method of connecting the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221, and a method of adjusting the distance between the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221 at each connecting portion (a method of adjusting the posture of the lower pedestal B221 with respect to the upper pedestal B220). ) Is as described with reference to FIG. 237, and thus the description thereof is omitted here.

Further, as shown in FIG. 244, the lower pedestal B221 is provided with a plurality of screw holes 2214 for screwing the case B22. As the case B22, a case having the same configuration as that of the fifth embodiment can be adopted, but in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 248, the case B22 having a rectangular parallelepiped box shape is adopted. There is.

Similar to the fifth embodiment, the case B22 houses a lens unit B21 (see FIG. 232), an LED substrate, a DMD substrate, a heat sink, an intake fan, and the like, which are internal components of the projector mechanism B2. A projector control board B23 (see FIG. 232) is fixed to the lower surface of the case B22.

A lens unit cover B222 (see FIG. 232) is attached to the front opening B22k provided on the front surface of the case B22. The lens unit B21 is housed in the case B22 with the projection lens 210 (see FIG. 232) covered with the lens unit cover B222.

Further, although not shown, in the case B22, two intake fans 244A are located on the left side of the center in the left-right direction (near the right end of the left side portion B221c when attached to the lower pedestal B221 (see FIG. 249)). -244B are arranged so as to be lined up in the front-rear direction. A heat sink is provided on the left side of the two intake fans 244A and 244B.

Further, an intake port B22A is provided on the right side surface of the case B22 (see FIG. 248), and an exhaust port B22E is provided on the left side surface of the case B22 (see FIG. 249). As a result, in the case B22, after being forcibly taken in from the intake port B22A by the intake fans 244A and 244B, a flow of air exhausted from the exhaust port B22E is formed while taking heat from the heat sink.

As shown in FIG. 249, the case B22 is attached to the lower pedestal B221 by screw fastening, and its upper end surface (upper wall portion B22F shown in FIG. 248) is the inner surface of the main body portion B221a of the lower pedestal B221. Is in contact with. Further, in a state where the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221 are connected, the main body portion B221a of the lower pedestal B221 is located above the upper pedestal B220. As a result, the upper wall portion B22F of the case B22 is also positioned above the upper pedestal B220.

In this regard, in the fifth embodiment, the upper end of the case B22 is attached to the lower pedestal B221, and the upper pedestal B220 is arranged above the lower pedestal B221. Therefore, the case B22 could not be arranged in the space formed between the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221 (the gap portion indicated by the arrow S in FIG. 236).

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the upper end of the case B22 is formed by forming an opening in the upper pedestal B220 and arranging the case B22 so that the upper end (upper wall portion B22F) of the case B22 inserts the opening upward. (Upper wall portion B22F) can be positioned above the upper pedestal B220. As a result, the gap portion indicated by the arrow S in FIG. 236 can be used as a space for arranging the case B22.

In this way, as compared with the fifth embodiment, the relative position of the case B22 (projector mechanism B2) with respect to the upper pedestal B220 is moved upward, so that the front portion provided on the front surface of the case B22 is provided. A part of the upper pedestal B220 will be arranged in front of the opening B22k (see FIG. 248) (see FIG. 249). That is, a part of the upper pedestal B220 is arranged in front of the projection lens 210 (see FIG. 232) installed so as to correspond to the front opening B22k. As a result, it seems that the light emitted from the projection lens 210 is blocked by the upper pedestal B220.

However, the irradiation light is not blocked in this way. That is, in the present embodiment, the irradiation light is emitted from a portion below the optical axis of the projection lens 210. In other words, only the lower half of the projection lens 210 (the portion below the horizontal plane passing through the central portion in the vertical direction of the projection lens 210) is used when emitting the irradiation light. The light emitting position of such a projection lens 210 is different from that of a conventionally known projector (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-058875).

As described above, in the present embodiment, the upper half of the projection lens 210 is not used when the irradiation light is emitted, and the irradiation light is emitted from the portion below the optical axis of the projection lens 210. FIG. 249. The upper pedestal B220 arranged in front of the projection lens 210 as described above exists above the optical axis of the projection lens 210. Therefore, the path of the light emitted from the projection lens 210 is below the upper pedestal B220, and the irradiation light is not blocked by the upper pedestal B220.

Further, by bending the lower pedestal B221 downward to form the right side portion B221b, the left side portion B221c, and the rear end portion B221d, the right side portion B221b, the left side portion B221c, and the rear end portion B221d are respectively above. The upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221 can be connected so that the upper pedestal B220 is arranged. As a result, while the configurations of the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221 are changed from the fifth embodiment, the same configurations as those of the fifth embodiment can be adopted for the configurations of the three connecting portions.

Therefore, the adjustment of the optical axis direction and the like of the light emitted from the projector mechanism B2 can be performed by the same method as in the fifth embodiment (see FIG. 238). An advanced computer program is required for such adjustment of the optical axis direction, and a large amount of cost is incurred in the development of the program. In the present embodiment, the optical axis direction and the like can be adjusted using the same program as in the fifth embodiment, so that it is possible to suppress the occurrence of new costs.

Further, in the present embodiment, the case B22 is described as having the upper wall portion B22F, but as in the fifth embodiment, the case B22 with the upper side open (see FIG. 232) may also be used. Good. The method of attaching the case B22 to the lower pedestal B221 is not particularly limited, and the case B22 is attached to the lower pedestal B221 by using the stay B223a (see FIG. 232) as in the fifth embodiment. It may be that.

As described above, in the present embodiment, by arranging a part of the case B22 above the upper pedestal B220, it is possible to move the case B22 upward as compared with the fifth embodiment. , A new space can be created in the lower region of the case B22. Such an effect is obtained by changing the configuration of the upper pedestal B220 from the fifth embodiment, and the same configuration as that of the fifth embodiment can be adopted for the projector cover B1.

However, in the present embodiment, the projector cover B1 having a configuration different from that of the fifth embodiment is adopted in consideration of other effects. Hereinafter, the projector cover B1 according to the present embodiment will be described.

<Projector cover B1>
FIG. 250 is a perspective view showing a state in which the upper wall portion of the projector cover is removed. FIG. 251 is a plan view of the projector cover with the upper wall portion removed. FIG. 252 is an exploded view showing a cross-sectional view taken along the arrow LL of the projector cover shown in FIG. 251 and a perspective view of a relay plate attached to the projector cover. FIG. 253 is a view of the projector cover with the upper wall portion removed as viewed from diagonally above. FIG. 254 is a front view of the projector cover with the upper wall portion removed. FIG. 255 is a cross-sectional view taken along the arrow MM of the projector cover shown in FIG. 254.

As shown in FIG. 250, the projector cover B1 has a relay plate mounting portion B301 inside. The relay plate mounting portion B301 is formed so as to project inward from the inner side surfaces of the left and right side wall portions B13 and B13, respectively. The relay plate mounting portion B301 is formed so as to have a step, and the relay plate mounting surface B301a formed forward and rearward, the position adjusting surface B301d formed above the relay plate mounting surface B301a, and the front It also has a connecting portion B301e for connecting the relay plate mounting surface B301a and the position adjusting surface B301d on the rear side.

A mounting hole B301b is formed on the relay plate mounting surface B301a. Further, a position adjusting hole B301c is formed on the position adjusting surface B301d. Similar to the fifth embodiment, the mounting hole B301b is a screw hole for mounting the relay plate B300 to the relay plate mounting portion B301 by screwing. The position adjusting hole B301c is formed at a position facing the square hole 2201c (see FIG. 244) of the upper pedestal B220 when the relay plate B300 is attached to the relay plate mounting portion B301.

As shown in FIG. 252, the relay plate B300 has a step between the main body B300A and the main body B300A and extends forward, and has a step between the main body B300A and the front side B300B and extends rearward. A rear side portion B300C is provided. The front side portion B300B is formed by bending the front end of the main body portion B300A downward and forward. The rear side portion B300C is formed by bending the rear end of the main body portion B300A downward and rearward. As described above, the shape of the relay plate B300 corresponds to the step provided in the relay plate mounting portion B301 of the projector cover B1.

A first through hole B300a is formed in the main body portion B300A. A second through hole B300b is formed in each of the front side portion B300B and the rear side portion B300C. Similar to the fifth embodiment, the first through hole B300a is a hole through which the cap bolt 320 (see FIG. 242) is inserted when the relay plate B300 is attached to the upper pedestal B220. On the other hand, the second through hole B300b is a hole through which a screw is inserted when the relay plate B300 is attached to the relay plate mounting portion B301 by screwing, but unlike the fifth embodiment, in the present embodiment, the cushioning member B312 ( (See FIG. 242) is not provided.

Further, as shown in FIG. 250, openings B400 having an open upper side are provided on both left and right sides in front of the projector cover B1. The opening B400 has a shape similar to a hexagon having sides EJ (see FIG. 251) in a top view.

As shown in FIG. 253, continuous wall surfaces (wall surface B401e, wall surface B401f, wall surface B401g, wall surface B401h, wall surface B401i, and wall surface B401j) are formed with sides E to J as the upper ends. ing. The wall surface B401j (see FIG. 250) formed continuously from the side J has a shorter length in the vertical direction as compared with the other wall surfaces B401e to B401i. The wall surface B401e formed continuously from the side E is continuous to the rear inside the projector cover B1 and is a part of the inner side surface 403 (see FIG. 255) of the projector cover B1.

Further, as shown in FIG. 252, a cavity B402 is formed below the position adjusting surface B301d of the relay plate mounting portion B301.

FIG. 255 is a cross-sectional view when cut in a horizontal plane passing through the connecting portion B301e (a surface above the relay plate mounting surface B301a and passing below the position adjusting surface B301d).

As shown in FIG. 255, the opening B400 opened toward the upper side of the projector cover B1 and the cavity 402 formed below the position adjusting surface B301d of the relay plate mounting portion B301 communicate with each other inside the projector cover B1. ing.

<Formation of air flow path by projector cover B1 and blind B500>
In the present embodiment, as a member provided on the lower side of the projector cover B1, a blind B500 is adopted instead of the perforated plate B15 in the second embodiment.

FIG. 256 is a perspective view of the blind. FIG. 257 is a plan view of the irradiation light device with the upper wall portion of the projector cover removed. FIG. 258 is a cross-sectional view taken along the arrow NN of the irradiation light device shown in FIG. 257. FIG. 259 is a right side view of a cross section of the irradiation light device shown in FIG. 257 along the arrow view NN.

As shown in FIG. 256, the blind B500 has a symmetrical structure, and the horizontal portion B501 formed substantially horizontally and the inclined portion B502 formed so as to have a continuous inclination with the horizontal portion B501. The outer wall of the blind B500 is continuous with the rear wall portion B503, which is erected upward from the inclined portion B502 so as to have the same width in the left-right direction as the inclined portion B502, and the inclined portion B502 and the rear wall portion B503. It has an outer wall portion B504 and an inner wall portion B505 that is continuous with the inclined portion B502 and the rear wall portion B503 and faces the outer wall portion B504.

The horizontal portion B501 includes a first wall portion B501a slightly erected upward at its front end, a second wall portion B501b continuous from the inner portion of the first wall portion B501a toward the rear, and a second wall portion B501. A third wall portion B501c that is continuous diagonally rearward from the wall portion B501b, a fourth wall portion B501d that is continuous rearward from the third wall portion B501c, and a third wall portion B501d that is continuous inward from the fourth wall portion B501d. 5 wall portions B501e and 5 walls are formed. The fifth wall portion B501e is continuous with the inner wall portion B505.

To attach the blind B500 to the projector cover B1 by screwing in the area surrounded by the first wall portion B501a, the second wall portion B501b, the third wall portion B501c, the fourth wall portion B501d, and the fifth wall portion B501e. Screw holes 506 are formed.

As shown in FIG. 258, in a state where the blind B500 is attached to the lower side of the projector cover B1, the surface of the first wall portion B501a of the blind B500 is continuous with the wall surface B401f of the projector cover B1 and is the second of the blind B500. The surface of the wall portion B501b is continuous with the wall surface B401g of the projector cover B1, the surface of the third wall portion B501c of the blind B500 is continuous with the wall surface B401h of the projector cover B1, and the surface of the fourth wall portion B501d of the blind B500 is continuous. , It is continuous with the wall surface B401i of the projector cover B1. The surface of the fifth wall portion B501e of the blind B500 is continuous with the surface B402a (see FIG. 255) existing in front of the cavity B402 (see FIG. 252) of the projector cover B1.

Further, the front surface of the rear wall portion B503 of the blind B500 is continuous with the surface B402b (see FIG. 255) existing behind the cavity B402 of the projector cover B1. Further, the inner surface of the outer wall portion B504 of the blind B500 is continuous with the inner side surface 403 (see FIG. 255) of the projector cover B1.

From the above, the space P (see FIG. 258) is formed by the projector cover B1 and the blind B500. The upper part of the space P is covered by the projector cover B1 and the lower part is covered by the blind B500. Further, the sides of the space P are the surfaces of the first wall portion B501a to the fifth wall portion B501e of the blind B500, the rear wall portion B503, and the outer wall portion B504, and the wall surface B401f of the projector cover B1 continuous with them. It is surrounded by B401i, surfaces B402a and B402b existing in front of and behind the cavity B402, and an inner surface surface 403.

A part of the space P above the space P is connected to the external space of the projector cover B1 via the opening B400 (see FIG. 251), and the internal space Q of the projector cover B1 (see FIG. 255) through the cavity B402. See).

Although not shown here, in the present embodiment, when the display unit A is mounted on the cabinet G, the opening G41 (see FIG. 40) formed in the upper surface wall G4 of the cabinet G is the true opening B400 of the projector cover B1. Positioned on top.

Further, as shown in FIG. 258, the intake port B22A (see FIG. 248) of the case B22 is arranged so as to be close to the cavity B402 (the cavity B402 on the right side of the two cavities B402). Although not shown, the exhaust port B22E (see FIG. 249) of the case B22 is also similarly arranged so as to be close to the cavity B402 (the left cavity B402 of the two cavities B402). Further, as described above, two intake fans 244A and 244B are arranged inside the case B22.

As a result, in the present embodiment, air is introduced from the outside of the game machine 1 into the inside of the cabinet G through the opening G41 (the opening G41 on the right side of the two openings G41) formed in the upper wall G4 of the cabinet G. Is incorporated. This air moves downward inside the cabinet G and is taken into the inside of the projector cover B1 through the opening B400 of the projector cover B1 (the opening B400 on the right side of the two openings B400).

The air that has entered the inside of the projector cover B1 moves backward in the space P formed by the projector cover B1 and the blind B500 (the space P on the right side of the two spaces P, see FIG. 258), and then the projector. It turns inward of the cover B1, passes through the cavity B402 (the cavity B402 on the right side of the two cavities B402), and enters the inside of the case B22 via the intake port B22A.

The air that has entered the inside of the case B22 travels to the left while taking away the heat generated in the case B22, and exits the case B22 through the exhaust port B22E.

After passing through the cavity B402 (the cavity B402 on the left side of the two cavities B402), the air leaving the case B22 changes its course forward and changes the course to the space P (the space on the left side of the two spaces P). Move P) forward. Then, the air goes out of the projector cover B1 through the opening B400 of the projector cover B1 (the opening B400 on the left side of the two openings B400).

The air that has flowed out of the projector cover B1 moves upward inside the cabinet G, and then passes through the opening G41 (the left opening G41 of the two openings G41) formed in the upper wall G4 of the cabinet G. Then, it is released to the outside of the game machine 1.

Of the air flows described above, the air flow path inside the projector cover B1 is indicated by a thick arrow in FIG. 255.

In the present embodiment, by forming such an air flow path, the heat generated in the projector mechanism B2 can be discharged to the outside of the game machine 1.

Further, the projector cover B1 and the blind B500 have a symmetrical structure (see FIGS. 250 and 256), and the opening B400 of the projector cover B1 forming such an air flow path and the projector cover B1 The space P and the like formed by the blind B500 are also symmetrical. Therefore, when designing the air flow path, if one of the left and right flow paths is designed, the design of the other flow path can be omitted. In this way, in the present embodiment, it is possible to produce the display unit A capable of appropriately discharging the heat generated by the projector mechanism B2 to the outside while reducing the design cost in the development stage.

Here, as described above, the opening G41 (see FIG. 40) formed in the upper surface wall G4 of the cabinet G exists directly above the opening B400 of the projector cover B1. That is, when the opening G41 of the cabinet G and the opening B400 of the projector cover B1 are viewed from above, at least a part of them overlap each other.

Therefore, when a foreign substance such as a liquid enters the game machine 1 through the opening G41 of the cabinet G, the foreign substance enters the inside of the projector cover B1. However, according to the present embodiment, even in such a case, it is possible to prevent the foreign matter from entering the inside of the case B22. Hereinafter, a case where the liquid R is charged from the opening G41 of the cabinet G will be described as an example.

The liquid R introduced from the opening G41 of the cabinet G passes through the opening B400 of the projector cover B1 and falls on the horizontal portion B501 (see FIG. 258) of the blind B500. Then, the liquid R flows from the horizontal portion B501 toward the inclined portion B502. In this way, the liquid R flows on the surfaces of the horizontal portion B501 and the inclined portion B502.

On the other hand, the space P shown in FIG. 258 and the internal space Q (see FIG. 255) of the projector cover B1 are connected to each other through the opening B510 shown in FIG. 259. As shown in FIG. 259, the opening B510 has a shape in which the shape in the side view is similar to a rectangle composed of sides K to N.

Here, the side K forming the lower end of the opening B510 corresponds to the upper end edge B505a (see FIG. 256) of the inner wall portion B505 of the blind B500. The upper end edge B505a (lower end of the opening 510) of the inner wall portion B505 is located above the horizontal portion B501 and the inclined portion B502 (passage of the liquid R) as shown in FIG. 256. As a result, it is less likely that the liquid R will enter the internal space Q (inside the case B22) of the projector cover B1 through the opening B510.

Further, since the inclined portion B502 has an inclination such that it descends toward the rear, the liquid R flows rearward through the inclined portion B502 and collides with the rear wall portion B503. Then, the liquid R is stored in the region surrounded by the rear wall portion B503, the outer wall portion B504, and the inner wall portion B505 (see FIG. 259).

The vertical distance of the rear portion of the inclined portion B502 from the upper end edge B505a (lower end of the opening 510) of the inner wall portion B505 is longer than that of the front portion, and the liquid R is behind such an inclined portion B502. Since the liquid R is stored in the portion (the area away from the lower end of the opening 510), the liquid R may enter the internal space Q (inside the case B22) of the projector cover B1 through the opening B510. It can be effectively prevented.

Further, since the capacity of the liquid R that can be stored can be increased as compared with the case where such an inclination is not provided, the amount of the liquid R charged from the opening G41 of the cabinet G is not so large. It is possible to surely prevent the liquid R from entering the inside of the case B22.

The game machine 1 is provided with a discharge mechanism including a tube or the like that communicates from the blind B500 to the outside of the game machine 1 so that the stored liquid or other foreign matter can be discharged to the outside of the game machine 1. It is desirable to have.

Further, in order to reduce the amount of foreign matter entering the inside of the game machine 1 from the opening G41 of the cabinet G as much as possible, the opening G41 of the cabinet G should be smaller than the opening B400 of the projector cover B1 and the opening of the cabinet G. It is desirable that the G41 is provided with some measures (mesh, etc.) to prevent the invasion of foreign matter.

As described above, as one embodiment of the present invention, the game machine 1 according to the sixth embodiment has been described.

Conventionally, there is known a game machine capable of producing an effect by displaying an image projected by a projector on a screen (see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-147828). According to such a game machine, it is possible to express an image to the same extent as a liquid crystal display device, and it is possible to reduce the cost when the display surface becomes large as compared with a liquid crystal display device or the like. Further, by appropriately changing the shape of the screen, it is possible to express an image that cannot be performed by a liquid crystal display device.

In a game machine that produces an effect using such a projector and a screen, it is conceivable to install a wide variety of screens and other accessories in the space below the projector, depending on the model of the game machine.

However, for example, when trying to install a large screen or when trying to install many accessories, there is a problem that a sufficient installation space cannot be secured.

As a countermeasure for securing such an installation space, the design of the cover (projector cover) covering the projector can be changed. For example, it is conceivable to remake the projector cover so that the position of the portion constituting the ceiling of the projector cover is high, or to remake the projector cover so that the mounting position of the projector to the projector cover is high. If such a ceiling position or a mounting position becomes higher, the arrangement position of the projector can be moved upward accordingly, and as a result, a new space can be created in the lower region of the projector.

However, when the design of the projector cover is changed, it is necessary to remake the mold of the projector cover, and there is a problem that the production of the mold requires a huge cost.

The present invention has been made in view of the above problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of expanding the space existing under the projector while suppressing an increase in cost.

In this respect, the gaming machine 1 according to the sixth embodiment has the following features.

(44-1) A projector capable of projecting an image (internal components (lens unit B21, etc.) of the projector mechanism B2 shown in FIG. 232 and a case B22 for accommodating them).
A projector cover (projector cover B1) arranged so as to surround the projector,
A screen (fixed screen mechanism D, front screen mechanism E1, reel screen mechanism F1) capable of displaying the image projected by the projector, and
The main body (cabinet G) with an opening on the front and
It is provided with an opening / closing door (upper door mechanism UD) which is attached to the main body so as to be openable and closable and is provided with a display area (upper display window UD1) capable of viewing the screen.
The projector cover and the projector are connected to each other via a first member (upper pedestal B220) having an opening.
The projector is arranged so that a part of the projector is inserted from below to above the opening of the first member, and the projector (an internal component (lens unit B21 or the like) of the projector mechanism B2 shown in FIG. 232). And a part of the case B22) for accommodating them exists above the first member (upper pedestal B220).
A game machine characterized by that.

According to the game machine 1 according to the sixth embodiment, the projector cover (projector cover B1) and the projector (internal components (lens unit B21 and the like) of the projector mechanism B2 and the case B22 for accommodating them) are the first members. It is connected via (upper pedestal B220), and an opening is formed in the first member (upper pedestal B220). Then, due to the presence of the opening, a part (a part belonging to a predetermined range from the upper end) of the projector (internal components of the projector mechanism B2 (lens unit B21 and the like) and the case B22 for accommodating them) is made into a first member (upper pedestal). It is possible to arrange it above B220). On the other hand, when the first member (upper pedestal B220) is not formed with an opening, the upper end of the projector (internal components of the projector mechanism B2 (lens unit B21 or the like) and the case B22 for accommodating them) is inevitably. In addition, it will be arranged below the first member (upper pedestal B220). Therefore, by forming an opening in the first member (upper pedestal B220), the projector (internal components of the projector mechanism B2 (lens unit B21, etc.) and them are accommodated, as compared with the case where the opening is not formed. The case B22) can be moved upward as a whole. As a result, a new space can be created in the lower region of the projector (internal components of the projector mechanism B2 (lens unit B21 and the like) and the case B22 for accommodating them). In order to obtain such an effect, it is sufficient to change the design of the first member (upper pedestal B220), and it is not necessary to change the design of the projector cover (projector cover B1). Therefore, the cost generated for expanding the space existing under the projector (internal components of the projector mechanism B2 (lens unit B21 and the like) and the case B22 for accommodating them) can be suppressed low.

(44-2) The gaming machine according to (44-1).
The first member (upper pedestal B220) is attached so that the in-plane position with respect to the projector cover can be adjusted.
The first member (upper pedestal B220) and the projector (internal components (lens unit B21 and the like) of the projector mechanism B2 shown in FIG. 232 and a case B22 for accommodating them) are the second member (lower pedestal B221). It is connected via
The second member (lower pedestal B221) has an upper portion (main body portion B221a) and a lower portion (right portion B221b, left side portion B221c, and left side portion B221c) formed by bending downward with respect to the upper portion. With a rear end B221d)
The second member is attached to the projector at the upper portion (main body portion B221a) to support the projector, and the lower side portion (right side portion B221b, left side portion) arranged below the first member. B221c and the rear end portion B221d) are attached to the first member (upper pedestal B220) so that the distance can be adjusted at three or more points.
It is characterized by that.

Prior to the present invention, the present inventor attaches a second member (lower pedestal B221) to an upper portion of a projector (internal components of the projector mechanism B2 (lens unit B21 and the like) and a case B22 for accommodating them). The first member (upper pedestal B220) arranged above the second member (lower pedestal B221) while supporting (the internal components of the projector mechanism B2 (lens unit B21 and the like) and the case B22 for accommodating them). ), We have developed a mounting structure that allows the spacing to be adjusted at three or more locations. According to such a mounting structure, the distance between the first member (upper pedestal B220) and the second member (lower pedestal B221) is adjusted at each location to adjust the distance between the first member (upper pedestal B220) and the second member (upper pedestal B220). The inclination of the member (lower pedestal B221) can be changed, whereby the projector (internal components of the projector mechanism B2 (lens unit B21, etc.) and them) supported by the second member (lower pedestal B221) can be changed. The posture of the housing case B22) can be adjusted.

Here, as described above, based on the opening formed in the first member (upper pedestal B220), the projector (internal components of the projector mechanism B2 (lens unit B21 and the like) and the case B22 for accommodating them) A part of the member will be arranged above the first member (upper pedestal B220). Therefore, as in the conventional case, when the second member (lower pedestal B221) is attached to the upper portion of the projector (internal components of the projector mechanism B2 (lens unit B21 or the like) and the case B22 for accommodating them), There was a need to arrange the second member (lower pedestal B221) above. However, when the second member (lower pedestal B221) is moved upward, the second member (lower pedestal B221) is arranged above the first member (upper pedestal B220), and the first member The vertical relationship between the (upper pedestal B220) and the second member (lower pedestal B221) will be reversed from the conventional one. An advanced computer program is required to adjust the posture of the projector (internal components of the projector mechanism B2 (lens unit B21, etc.) and the case B22 that houses them) as described above, but the first member (upper pedestal B220) ) And the second member (lower pedestal B221), if the relative positional relationship changes, the conventional program cannot be used, and a large amount of cost is incurred to develop a new program. I faced the problem of getting rid of it.

In the course of diligent studies on such problems, the present inventor changed the design of the second member (lower pedestal B221) to make the upper part (main body part B221a) and the lower side part (right side part B221b, left side). A case in which a projector (internal components (lens unit B21, etc.) of the projector mechanism B2 and the like) and a case for accommodating them are formed in an upper portion (main body portion B221a) after having a bent structure including a portion B221c and a rear end portion B221d). By arranging the lower side portion (right side portion B221b, left side portion B221c, and rear end portion B221d) below the first member (upper pedestal B220) while supporting B22), the first member (upper pedestal). The distance between the first member (upper pedestal B220) and the first member (upper pedestal B220) can be adjusted in the same manner as before without changing the relative positional relationship between the B220) and the second member (lower pedestal B221). I came up with the idea that I can do it. According to the game machine 1 according to the sixth embodiment, the projector (internal components of the projector mechanism B2 (lens unit B21, etc.) and the case B22 for accommodating them) are used in the same manner as before without changing the design of the program. ), Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of new costs.

Further, conventionally, there is known a game machine capable of producing an effect by displaying an image projected by a projection device such as a projector on a screen (see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-147828). According to such a game machine, it is possible to express an image to the same extent as a liquid crystal display device, and it is possible to reduce the cost when the display surface becomes large as compared with a liquid crystal display device or the like. Further, by appropriately changing the shape of the screen, it is possible to express an image that cannot be performed by a liquid crystal display device.

However, since the projection device tends to generate heat and reach a high temperature as compared with a liquid crystal display device or the like, there is a problem that the projection device does not function normally unless the generated heat is released.

The present invention has been made in view of the above problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of efficiently dissipating heat generated by a projection device capable of projecting an image. And.

In this respect, the gaming machine 1 according to the sixth embodiment has the following features.

(45-1) A projector capable of projecting an image (projector mechanism B2) and
Cover members (projector cover B1 and blind B500) arranged so as to surround the projector, and
A screen (fixed screen mechanism D, front screen mechanism E1, reel screen mechanism F1) capable of displaying the image projected by the projector, and
The main body (cabinet G) with an opening on the front and
It is provided with an opening / closing door (upper door mechanism UD) which is attached to the main body so as to be openable and closable and is provided with a display area (upper display window UD1) capable of viewing the screen.
The cover member (projector cover B1) has a first opening (the right opening B400 of the two openings B400) and a second opening (the left side of the two openings B400) that are open upward. Opening B400) is formed,
Inside the cover member, a first space (a space P on the right side of the two spaces P) is formed by communicating with the first opening, while communicating with the second opening. Two spaces (the space P on the left side of the two spaces P) are formed.
The first space is opened in a direction different from the upper direction (left direction) by a third opening (opening B510 on the right side of the two openings B510) formed inside the cover member. On the other hand, the second space is opened in a direction different from the upper direction (right direction) by a fourth opening (opening B510 on the left side of the two openings B510) formed inside the cover member. And
The first opening (opening B400 on the right side) and the third opening (opening B510 on the right side) communicate with each other, while the second opening (opening B400 on the left side) and the fourth opening (opening on the left side). B510) is in communication with
The projector is arranged between the third opening (opening B510 on the right side) and the fourth opening (opening B510 on the left side).
The cover member (blind B500) includes a lower end portion (horizontal portion B501 and an inclined portion B502) that defines the lower end of the first space (space P on the right side), and the lower end portion has the first opening. It is provided with an inclined portion (inclined portion B502) having an incline so as to descend as the distance from the portion directly below the above.
At least a part of the inclined portion is located below the lower end of the third opening (upper end edge B505a of the inner wall portion B505).
A game machine characterized by that.

According to the game machine 1 according to the sixth embodiment, the cover member (projector cover B1) arranged so as to surround the projector (projector mechanism B2) has a first opening (opening on the right side) opened upward. B400) and a second opening (opening B400 on the left side) are formed. Further, inside the cover member (projector cover B1), a third opening (opening B510 on the right side) and a fourth opening (opening B510 on the left side) opened in a direction different from the upper direction (left-right direction) are formed. ing. The first opening (opening B400 on the right side) and the third opening (opening B510 on the right side) communicate with each other, thereby forming a first space (space P on the right side) while forming a second opening. (Opening B400 on the left side) and the fourth opening (opening B510 on the left side) communicate with each other, whereby a second space (space P on the left side) is formed. A projector (projector mechanism B2) is arranged between the third opening (opening B510 on the right side) and the fourth opening (opening B510 on the left side). As a result, the air that has flowed in from the outside of the cover member (projector cover B1) through the first opening (right opening B400) is the first space (right space P) and the third opening (right opening). After passing through the projector (projector mechanism B2) via B510), the second opening (left side) is passed through the fourth opening (left side opening B510) and the second space (left side space P). It is discharged to the outside of the cover member (projector cover B1) through the opening B400). When the air passes through the projector (projector mechanism B2), it is warmed by absorbing the heat generated by the projector (projector mechanism B2), and the hot air has a property of going upward. Therefore, the air that has passed through the projector (projector mechanism B2) rises in the second space (left space P) and forms a second opening (second space P) above the second space (left space P). It will be discharged smoothly from the opening B400) on the left side. As a result, the heat generated by the projector (projector mechanism B2) can be efficiently released through such an air flow, and the cooling efficiency of the projector (projector mechanism B2) can be improved.

Further, according to the game machine 1 according to the sixth embodiment, the cover member (blind B500) has a lower end portion (horizontal portion B501 and an inclined portion B502) that defines the lower end of the first space (space P on the right side). The lower end portion (horizontal portion B501 and the inclined portion B502) is provided with an inclined portion (inclined portion B502) having an inclination so as to decrease as the distance from the portion directly below the first opening (the opening B400 on the right side) is provided. .. Therefore, when a liquid (drink or the like poured by the player) enters the inside of the cover member (projector cover B1 and blind B500) from the outside of the game machine through the first opening (opening B400 on the right side). , The liquid will flow through the inclined portion (inclined portion B502) so as to descend as the distance from the portion directly below the first opening (opening B400 on the right side). Here, since at least a part of the inclined portion (inclined portion B502) is located below the lower end (upper end edge B505a of the inner wall portion B505) of the third opening (opening B510 on the right side), the liquid is inclined. When it flows down the portion (inclined portion B502) and reaches below the lower end (upper end edge B505a of the inner wall portion B505) of the third opening (opening B510 on the right side), the third opening (right side) of the liquid is reached. Since the lower end (upper edge B505a of the inner wall portion B505) of the opening B510) is located above, the liquid is difficult to pass through the third opening (opening B510 on the right side), and the liquid is difficult to pass through the projector. It is unlikely that the (projector mechanism B2) will invade the side where the (projector mechanism B2) is arranged. In this way, according to the game machine 1 according to the sixth embodiment, the projector (projector mechanism B2) can be protected from foreign substances such as liquids that have entered from the outside of the game machine.

(45-2) The gaming machine according to (45-1).
On the upper surface of the main body (upper surface wall G4 of the cabinet G), a fifth opening (opening G41 on the right side of the two openings G41) is placed above the first opening and the second opening. ) And a sixth opening (the left opening G41 of the two openings G41) are formed.
It is characterized by that.

According to the game machine 1 according to the sixth embodiment, the upper surface (upper surface wall G4) of the main body (cabinet G) has a first opening (opening B400 on the right side) and a second opening of the cover member (projector cover B1). A fifth opening (right side opening G41) and a sixth opening (left side opening G41) are formed above each of the openings (left side opening B400). As a result, air is taken into the inside of the game machine from above the outside of the game machine through the fifth opening (opening G41 on the right side) of the main body (cabinet G), and the first opening of the cover member (projector cover B1). After allowing this air to flow into the cover member (projector cover B1) through the opening (opening B400 on the right side), the air that has passed through the projector (projector mechanism B2) is passed through the second cover member (projector cover B1). It can be discharged upward to the outside of the game machine through the opening (opening B400 on the left side) and the sixth opening (opening G41 on the left side) of the main body (cabinet G). As described above, in the game machine 1 according to the sixth embodiment, the discharge destination of the air warmed through the projector (projector mechanism B2) is above the outside of the game machine, but the air is tentatively used for the game. If it is discharged from the back of the machine, there is a concern that heat will be trapped in the island equipment installed in the game store, which will adversely affect the control of the game machine. In addition, if air is discharged from the side surface of the game machine, the warmed air will be taken into the adjacent game machine, and as a result of a vicious cycle of warm air between the adjacent game machines, the projector It is considered that the cooling efficiency of (projector mechanism B2) cannot be improved. Further, if the air is discharged to the front of the game machine, hot air may be blown to the player's face. In this regard, according to the gaming machine 1 according to the sixth embodiment, it is possible to create an air flow for releasing the heat generated by the projector (projector mechanism B2) without causing such a problem.

On the other hand, according to the game machine 1 according to the sixth embodiment, the fifth opening (right side opening G41) and the sixth opening (left side) formed on the upper surface of the main body (upper surface wall G4 of the cabinet G). Since the opening G41) exists above the first opening (opening B400 on the right side) and the second opening (opening B400 on the left side) formed in the cover member (projector cover B1), the fifth opening. When a foreign substance enters from the outside to the inside of the game machine through the (right side opening G41) or the sixth opening (left side opening G41), the foreign substance enters the first opening (right side opening B400) or the second. It is easy to enter the inside of the cover member (projector cover B1 and blind B500) through the opening (opening B400 on the left side). Therefore, there is a concern that foreign matter that has entered the inside of the cover member (projector cover B1 and blind B500) may reach the projector (projector mechanism B2) and adversely affect the projector (projector mechanism B2). For example, when a player injects a drink through the fifth opening (opening G41 on the right side), the drink passes through the first space (space P on the right side) and the third opening (opening B510 on the right side). If it penetrates into the projector (projector mechanism B2), the projector (projector mechanism B2) may break down. In this regard, according to the game machine 1 according to the sixth embodiment, a cover member (projector cover) is provided from the outside of the game machine through the fifth opening (opening G41 on the right side) and the first opening (opening B400 on the right side). Even when the liquid enters the inside of the B1 and the blind B500), the liquid flows along the inclined portion (inclined portion B502) as described above, so that such a situation occurs. Can be prevented.

(45-3) The gaming machine according to (45-1) or (45-2).
A space that is closed downward is formed by the inclined portion (inclined portion B502) and the wall portion (rear wall portion B503, outer wall portion B504, and inner wall portion B505) that is continuous with the inclined portion.
It is characterized by that.

According to the game machine 1 according to the sixth embodiment, the wall portion (rear wall portion B503, outer wall portion B504, and inner wall portion B505) continuous with the inclined portion (tilted portion B502) and the inclined portion (tilted portion B502) Since a space closed below is formed, the liquid that has flowed down the inclined portion (inclined portion B502) can be stored in the space. As a result, as long as the liquid level of the stored liquid is below the lower end of the third opening (opening B510 on the right side) (upper edge B505a of the inner wall portion B505), the third opening (opening B510 on the right side) It is possible to prevent the liquid from entering the arrangement space of the projector (projector mechanism B2) through the projector.

(46-1) A projector capable of projecting an image (projector mechanism B2) and
Cover members (projector cover B1 and blind B500) arranged so as to surround the projector, and
A screen (fixed screen mechanism D, front screen mechanism E1, reel screen mechanism F1) capable of displaying the image projected by the projector, and
The main body (cabinet G) with an opening on the front and
It is provided with an opening / closing door (upper door mechanism UD) which is attached to the main body so as to be openable and closable and is provided with a display area (upper display window UD1) capable of viewing the screen.
The cover member (projector cover B1) has a first opening (the right opening B400 of the two openings B400) and a second opening (the left side of the two openings B400) that are open upward. Opening B400) is formed,
Inside the cover member, a first space (a space P on the right side of the two spaces P) is formed by communicating with the first opening, while communicating with the second opening. Two spaces (the space P on the left side of the two spaces P) are formed.
The first space is opened in a direction different from the upper direction (left direction) by a third opening (opening B510 on the right side of the two openings B510) formed inside the cover member. On the other hand, the second space is opened in a direction different from the upper direction (right direction) by a fourth opening (opening B510 on the left side of the two openings B510) formed inside the cover member. And
The first opening (opening B400 on the right side) and the third opening (opening B510 on the right side) communicate with each other, while the second opening (opening B400 on the left side) and the fourth opening (opening on the left side). B510) is in communication with
The projector is arranged between the third opening (opening B510 on the right side) and the fourth opening (opening B510 on the left side).
A game machine characterized by that.

According to the game machine 1 according to the sixth embodiment, the cover member (projector cover B1) arranged so as to surround the projector (projector mechanism B2) has a first opening (opening on the right side) opened upward. B400) and a second opening (opening B400 on the left side) are formed. Further, inside the cover member (projector cover B1), a third opening (opening B510 on the right side) and a fourth opening (opening B510 on the left side) opened in a direction different from the upper direction (left-right direction) are formed. ing. The first opening (opening B400 on the right side) and the third opening (opening B510 on the right side) communicate with each other, thereby forming a first space (space P on the right side) while forming a second opening. (Opening B400 on the left side) and the fourth opening (opening B510 on the left side) communicate with each other, whereby a second space (space P on the left side) is formed. A projector (projector mechanism B2) is arranged between the third opening (opening B510 on the right side) and the fourth opening (opening B510 on the left side). As a result, the air that has flowed in from the outside of the cover member (projector cover B1) through the first opening (right opening B400) is the first space (right space P) and the third opening (right opening). After passing through the projector (projector mechanism B2) via B510), the second opening (left side) is passed through the fourth opening (left side opening B510) and the second space (left side space P). It is discharged to the outside of the cover member (projector cover B1) through the opening B400). When the air passes through the projector (projector mechanism B2), it is warmed by absorbing the heat generated by the projector (projector mechanism B2), and the hot air has a property of going upward. Therefore, the air that has passed through the projector (projector mechanism B2) rises in the second space (left space P) and forms a second opening (second space P) above the second space (left space P). It will be discharged smoothly from the opening B400) on the left side. As a result, the heat generated by the projector (projector mechanism B2) can be efficiently released through such an air flow, and the cooling efficiency of the projector (projector mechanism B2) can be improved.

(46-2) The gaming machine according to (46-1).
The projector has a fan (intake air) arranged between the first vent (intake port B22A) and the second vent (exhaust port B22E) and the first vent and the second vent. Equipped with fans 244A and 244B)
The first vent (intake port B22A) and the third opening (opening B510 on the right side) face each other, while the second vent (exhaust port B22E) and the fourth opening (opening on the left side) face each other. The projector is arranged so as to face B510).
It is characterized by that.

According to the game machine 1 according to the sixth embodiment, the projector (projector mechanism B2) is provided with a first vent (intake port B22A) and a second vent (exhaust port B22E), and is provided with a second vent. Fans (intake fans 244A and 244B) are provided between the first vent (intake port B22A) and the second vent (exhaust port B22E), and the first vent (intake port B22A) is provided. Because the projector (projector mechanism B2) is arranged so that the second vent (exhaust port B22E) faces the third opening (opening B510 on the right side) and faces the fourth opening (opening B510 on the left side). , By forcibly sucking air with a fan (intake fan 244A / 244B), the above-mentioned air flow can be smoothly created.

The position of the fan provided to smoothly create such an air flow is not particularly limited. For example, in the above-described embodiment, an example in which the intake fans 244A and 244B are arranged in the projector mechanism B2 (inside the case B22) has been described, but the intake fan and / or the exhaust fan are provided outside the projector mechanism B2. May be arranged.

An example of such a modification will be described with reference to FIG. 260. FIG. 260 is a diagram for explaining the arrangement positions of the intake fan and the exhaust fan.

The intake fan can be arranged at a desired position in the space P formed by the projector cover B1 and the blind B500 (the space P on the right side of the two spaces P, see FIG. 258).

In FIG. 260, the position of the intake fan is surrounded by the area surrounded by the dotted line indicated by F (R ₁ ), the area surrounded by the dotted line indicated by F (R ₂ ), and the dotted line indicated by F (R ₃ ). region, and illustrate the region surrounded by a dotted line indicated by F (R _4).

The area surrounded by the dotted line indicated by F (R ₁ ) is located near the opening B510 (see FIG. 259) on the right side, and when the intake fan is arranged in the area, the intake fan is a case. It is close to the intake port B22A (see FIG. 248) provided on the right side surface of B22. As a result, the air taken in from the outside of the projector cover B1 can be efficiently sent to the inside of the case B22 (projector mechanism B2).

The area surrounded by the dotted line indicated by F (R ₂ ) is the area on the right side of the area surrounded by the dotted line indicated by F (R ₁ ), and is a portion where the wall surface B401i of the projector cover B1 is extended rearward. When the intake fan is arranged in the area surrounded by the dotted line indicated by F (R ₂ ), the traveling direction of the air that has moved backward in the space P can be smoothly changed inward.

The area surrounded by the dotted line indicated by F (R ₃ ) is the front area of the area surrounded by the dotted line indicated by F (R ₂ ), and is the lower area of the wall surface B401j (see FIG. 250) of the projector cover B1. is there. When the intake fan is arranged in the area surrounded by the dotted line indicated by F (R ₃ ), the air taken into the inside of the projector cover B1 can be smoothly flowed backward through the opening B400. ..

The region surrounded by the dotted line indicated by F (R ₄ ) is the front region of the region surrounded by the dotted line indicated by F (R ₃ ), and is the region below the opening B400. When the intake fan is arranged in the area surrounded by the dotted line indicated by F (R ₄ ), air can be smoothly taken into the inside of the projector cover B1.

Further, the exhaust fan can be arranged at a desired position in the space P (the space P on the left side of the two spaces P) formed by the projector cover B1 and the blind B500.

In FIG. 260, the area surrounded by the dotted line indicated by F (L ₁ ) and the area surrounded by the dotted line indicated by F (L ₂ ) are illustrated as the arrangement positions of the exhaust fan.

The area surrounded by the dotted line indicated by F (L ₁ ) is located near the opening B510 on the left side, and when the exhaust fan is arranged in this area, the exhaust fan is placed on the left side surface of the case B22. It is close to the exhaust port B22E (see FIG. 249) provided. As a result, the air warmed by the heat generated by the projector mechanism B2 can be efficiently sent out to the outside of the projector mechanism B2.

The area surrounded by the dotted line indicated by F (L ₂ ) is the lower area of the wall surface B401j of the projector cover B1. When the exhaust fan is arranged in the area surrounded by the dotted line indicated by F (L ₂ ), the traveling direction of the air discharged from the case B22 can be smoothly changed to the forward direction.

As the intake fan and the exhaust fan described above with reference to FIG. 260, both the intake fan and the exhaust fan may be arranged, or only the intake fan may be arranged. However, only the exhaust fan may be arranged.

Further, the intake fan includes an area surrounded by a dotted line indicated by F (R ₁ ), an area surrounded by a dotted line indicated by F (R ₂ ), an area surrounded by a dotted line indicated by F (R ₃ ), and an area surrounded by a dotted line. , F (R ₄ ) may be arranged in only one of the regions surrounded by the dotted line, or may be disposed in two or more regions among these regions. May be good. The exhaust fan may be arranged in only one of the area surrounded by the dotted line indicated by F (L ₁ ) and the area surrounded by the dotted line indicated by F (L ₂ ). It may be arranged in both areas.

In the above-described embodiment, it has been described that an air flow path as shown by a thick arrow in FIG. 255 is formed inside the projector cover B1. However, the air in the projector cover B1 does not necessarily have to flow completely along the path.

An air flow path that can be formed other than the air flow path shown in FIG. 255 will be described with reference to FIG. 261. FIG. 261 is a diagram showing an air flow path that can be formed inside the projector cover.

As shown by the arrow X ₁ in FIG. 261, for example, air heated by the heat generated by the projector mechanism B2 is, there may be flow as out to the outside of the case B22 via the inlet B22a. Air flowing out of the air inlet B22A this way, as shown by the arrow X _2, it may move to the rear of the projector cover B1. Further, as shown by an arrow X _3, air exiting from the case B22 via the outlet B22E is, there may be a flow of air, such as toward the rear.

Since the rear of the projector cover B1 is open, the air that has moved backward as indicated by the arrow X ₂ or an arrow X ₃ is discharged to the outside of the projector cover B1. An exhaust fan may be provided in the rear region of the projector cover B1 so that air can be smoothly discharged from the rear of the projector cover B1.

(46-3) The gaming machine according to (46-1) or (46-2).
On the upper surface of the main body (upper surface wall G4 of the cabinet G), a fifth opening (opening G41 on the right side of the two openings G41) is placed above the first opening and the second opening. ) And a sixth opening (the opening G41 on the left side of the two openings G41) are formed.
The projector is housed in the main body so as to be arranged above the screen.
It is characterized by that.

According to the game machine 1 according to the sixth embodiment, the upper surface (upper surface wall G4) of the main body (cabinet G) has a first opening (opening B400 on the right side) and a second opening of the cover member (projector cover B1). A fifth opening (right side opening G41) and a sixth opening (left side opening G41) are formed above each of the openings (left side opening B400). As a result, air is taken into the inside of the game machine from above the outside of the game machine through the fifth opening (opening G41 on the right side) of the main body (cabinet G), and the first opening of the cover member (projector cover B1). After allowing this air to flow into the cover member (projector cover B1) through the opening (opening B400 on the right side), the air that has passed through the projector (projector mechanism B2) is passed through the second cover member (projector cover B1). It can be discharged upward to the outside of the game machine through the opening (opening B400 on the left side) and the sixth opening (opening G41 on the left side) of the main body (cabinet G). As described above, in the game machine 1 according to the sixth embodiment, the discharge destination of the air warmed through the projector (projector mechanism B2) is above the outside of the game machine, but the air is tentatively used for the game. If it is discharged from the back of the machine, there is a concern that heat will be trapped in the island equipment installed in the game store, which will adversely affect the control of the game machine. In addition, if air is discharged from the side surface of the game machine, the warmed air will be taken into the adjacent game machine, and as a result of a vicious cycle of warm air between the adjacent game machines, the projector It is considered that the cooling efficiency of (projector mechanism B2) cannot be improved. Further, if the air is discharged to the front of the game machine, hot air may be blown to the player's face. In this regard, according to the game machine 1 according to the sixth embodiment, it is possible to create an air flow for releasing the heat generated by the projector (projector mechanism B2) without causing such a problem.

Further, according to the game machine 1 according to the sixth embodiment, the projector (projector mechanism B2) is arranged above the screen (fixed screen mechanism D, front screen mechanism E1, reel screen mechanism F1). It is housed in (cabinet G), and the arrangement position of the projector (projector mechanism B2) is close to the upper surface of the main body (upper surface wall G4 of cabinet G). Therefore, the distance between the fifth opening (opening G41 on the right side) and the sixth opening (opening G41 on the left side) formed on the upper surface of the main body (upper wall G4 of the cabinet G) and the projector (projector mechanism B2) is also increased. It is short, and accordingly, the number of members and devices existing between the fifth opening (opening G41 on the right side) and the sixth opening (opening G41 on the left side) and the projector (projector mechanism B2) is relatively small. There is. Therefore, in designing a flow path in which the air taken in from the fifth opening (opening G41 on the right side) is discharged from the sixth opening (opening G41 on the left side) via the projector (projector mechanism B2), the process is in progress. It is not necessary to make a complicated detour route to avoid the members and devices existing in the air flow path, and the air flow path can be designed relatively easily.

In the sixth embodiment, the case where the present invention is applied to a pachislot machine has been described. Hereinafter, a modified example in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine will be described with reference to FIGS. 262 to 266.

FIG. 262 is a perspective view showing the appearance of the pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 263 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 264 is an exploded perspective view showing the decorative unit and the frame member of the pachinko gaming machine from the front.

As shown in FIGS. 262 and 263, the pachinko gaming machine 6100 includes a glass door 6111, a wooden frame 6112, a base door 6113, a game board 6114, a plate unit 6115, a launching device 6122 for launching a game ball, and various control boards. It is composed of a board unit 6123 including the board unit, a ball payout unit for giving a game ball as a game value, and the like.

The glass door 6111 described above is pivotally attached to the base door 6113 so as to be openable and closable. Further, an opening 6116 is formed in the center of the glass door 6111, and a protective glass 6124 having transparency is arranged in the opening 6116. Further, the base door 6113 is pivotally attached to the front of the wooden frame 6112 described above.

The dish unit 6115 described above is arranged on the base door 6113 so as to be located below the glass door 6111. The plate unit 6115 is provided with an upper plate 6125 above the plate unit 6115 and a lower plate 6126 below the plate unit 6115. The upper plate 6125 and the lower plate 6126 are formed with payout outlets 6131A and 6131B for lending the game ball and paying out the game ball (prize ball), and when the predetermined payout conditions are satisfied, the game is played. The balls are discharged, and in particular, the upper plate 6125 stores the game balls for firing in the game area 6141.

The launcher 6122 described above is arranged on the base door 6113 so as to be located on the side of the dish unit 6115. The launching device 6122 is provided with a launching handle 6132 that can be operated by the player, and the pachinko game can be advanced by operating the launching handle 6132 by the player. When the launch handle 6132 is held by the player and is rotated clockwise, electric power is supplied to the launch motor according to the rotation angle, and the game ball stored in the upper plate 6125 is released. It is fired sequentially on the game board.

The game board 6114 described above is arranged in front of the base door 6113 so as to be located behind the protective glass 6124. The game board 6114 has a game area 6141 in front of the game board 6114 on which the launched game ball can roll. The game area 6141 is an area surrounded by a guide rail or the like and on which the game ball can roll. In this way, the game ball launched by the launching device 6122 is guided by the guide rail provided on the game board and moves to the upper part of the game board 6114, and then a plurality of obstacle nails provided in the game area 6141. The collision with the game board causes the game board to flow down from above while changing its traveling direction.

As shown in FIG. 262, a decorative unit 6258 is provided in the upper region on the front surface of the glass door 6111. The decorative unit 6258 is arranged so as to project forward of the pachinko gaming machine 6100.

A cavity is formed inside the decoration unit 6258, and the irradiation light device B described in the above-described embodiment is arranged in the cavity. FIG. 262 shows a state in which the inside of the decorative unit 6258 is seen through from above the decorative unit 6258.

As shown in FIG. 263, a screen device C (see FIG. 166) is arranged on the back side of the game board 6114. As a result, the screen (fixed screen mechanism D, front screen mechanism E1, and reel screen mechanism F1) of the screen device C is irradiated with the light emitted from the projector mechanism B2 of the irradiation light device B as in the above-described embodiment. It is possible to make it.

The decorative unit 6258 is mounted on top of the frame member 6211 (see FIG. 264). Although not shown, the frame member 6211 is fixed to the back side of the glass door 6111.

As shown in FIG. 264, the irradiation light device B is attached to the upper part of the frame member 6211. By attaching the decorative unit 6258 to the frame member 6211 with the irradiation light device B attached to the frame member 6211, the irradiation light device B is housed in the internal space of the decoration unit 6258.

Further, the speaker 6152 and the speaker holder 6152A are integrally attached to the upper part of the frame member 6211 on both the left and right sides of the irradiation light device B. On the other hand, the decorative unit 6258 is provided with speaker holes 6151A and 6151B on the right side and the left side, respectively. The speaker holes 6151A and 6151B are formed as mesh-shaped openings.

In a state where the decorative unit 6258 is attached to the frame member 6211, the speaker holes 6151A and 6151B cover the front of the speaker 6152, respectively, and the sound generated from the speaker 6152 is transmitted through the speaker holes 6151A and 6151B, respectively. It can be released to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 6100.

Here, the speaker hole 6151A also functions as a vent for taking in air from the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 6100. As shown in FIG. 264, an intake fan 6244 is arranged on the front right side of the irradiation light device B. As a result, air is taken into the inside of the pachinko gaming machine 6100 from the outside front of the pachinko gaming machine 6100 through the speaker hole 6151A.

This air is taken into the inside of the projector cover B1 through the opening B400R of the projector cover B1 (the opening B400 on the right side of the two openings B400) and is generated by the projector mechanism B2, as in the sixth embodiment. It travels inside the projector cover B1 while taking away the heat, and goes out of the projector cover B1 through the opening B400L (the opening B400 on the left side of the two openings B400).

The air that has flowed out of the projector cover B1 passes through the through hole 6245 formed in the frame member 6211 and moves rearward, and is discharged to the outside from the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 6100.

The air flow described above is indicated by arrows in FIGS. 262 and 264. In the sixth embodiment, a case where air is taken in from the outside upper side of the game machine 1 and air is discharged to the outer upper side of the game machine 1 has been described. On the other hand, in this modification, air is taken in from the outside front of the pachinko gaming machine 6100, and air is discharged to the outside rear of the pachinko gaming machine 6100. As described above, in the present invention, the direction in which air for cooling the projector is taken in and the direction in which air is discharged are not particularly limited, and can be appropriately designed according to the arrangement position of the projector, the structure around the projector, and the like.

Since the pachinko gaming machine has a shorter depth in the front-rear direction of the gaming machine than the pachislot gaming machine, when another pachinko gaming machine is installed on the back side of one pachinko gaming machine in the same island facility. , There is a relatively large space between these pachinko machines. Therefore, even if the air warmed by the projector is discharged from the back of the pachinko gaming machine, it is considered that the island equipment of the pachinko gaming machine does not retain as much heat as the island equipment of the pachislot gaming machine.

Hereinafter, as another modification, a case where air is taken in from the outside right side of the pachinko gaming machine 6100 and air is discharged to the outside left side of the pachinko gaming machine 6100 will be described with reference to FIG. 265. FIG. 265 is a perspective view showing the appearance of the pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 265, an opening 6300R is formed on the right side surface of the decorative unit 6258. As a result, air is taken into the inside of the pachinko gaming machine 6100 from the outside right side of the pachinko gaming machine 6100 through the opening 6300R.

This air is taken into the inside of the projector cover B1 through the opening B400R of the projector cover B1 (the opening B400 on the right side of the two openings B400) and is generated by the projector mechanism B2, as in the above-described modification. It travels inside the projector cover B1 while taking away the heat, and goes out of the projector cover B1 through the opening B400L (the opening B400 on the left side of the two openings B400).

Although not shown in the figure, an opening (opening 6300L) is formed on the left side surface of the decorative unit 6258 as well as the right side surface. As a result, the air discharged from the opening B400L to the outside of the projector cover B1 is discharged from the opening 6300L to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 6100.

Such an air flow is indicated by an arrow in FIG. 265. In this modification, it is considered that the warmed air may be taken into the adjacent game machine because the air discharge direction is set to the side of the game machine. In order to prevent such a situation from occurring, when the air discharge direction is set to the side of the gaming machine, for example, the width of the decorative unit 6258 in the left-right direction is further shortened to make one pachinko machine. It is desirable that the exhaust port (opening 6300L) of the gaming machine and the intake port (opening 6300R) of the pachinko gaming machine installed next to the pachinko gaming machine are configured to be separated to some extent.

Hereinafter, another modification will be described with reference to FIG. 266. FIG. 266 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine.

In the above-described modification, it has been described that the irradiation light device B is attached to the frame member 6211. On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 266, the irradiation light device B is attached to the base door 6113. The speaker 6152 is also attached to the base door 6113. Even in such a modified example, the same air flow path as in the above-described example can be formed.

Although FIG. 266 shows how the irradiation light device B is attached to the front side of the base door 6113, the irradiation light device B may be attached to the rear side of the base door 6113. In the present invention, the irradiation light device B may be installed in front of the game board or may be installed behind the game board. When the irradiation light device B is installed behind the game board, the irradiation light device B can be arranged by using the space while forming a space on the back side of the game board.

For example, an opening portion is provided in the center of the game board, and the irradiation light device is arranged in the base door, the game board, or other rear members of the pachinko gaming machine so that the front portion of the irradiation light device penetrates through the opening portion. It may be. In that case, a game board of a conventional general pachinko game machine (a pachinko game machine having an opening in the center of the game board so that a liquid crystal display device or the like behind the game board can be visually recognized through the opening). Can be diverted as it is. For example, by removing the liquid crystal display device, arranging the screen mechanism, and further arranging the irradiation light device on the rear member of the game board or the like, the irradiation light device and the screen mechanism can be maintained while keeping the shape of the game board. It will be possible to make it a new game machine equipped with. When such a configuration is adopted, since a part of the front part of the irradiation light device protrudes forward from the game board, a larger space behind the pachinko game machine can be secured. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the temperature rise in the island equipment when the pachinko game machine equipped with the irradiation light device is installed in the entire island equipment in the amusement park where the island equipment is narrow. Further, a small-sized liquid crystal display for arranging a decorative member such as a logo according to the model or performing auxiliary decoration in front of the irradiation light device (for example, around the reflector holding portion B11) that can be visually recognized by the player. By arranging the device, the illumination substrate, etc., the irradiation light device can be blindfolded so as not to be seen by the player, and the effect of the effect can be further enhanced.

The screen device C may be installed in a state of being attached to the irradiation light device B, or may be installed in a state of being separated from the irradiation light device B.

In the modification described above, the air discharge direction is the rear or side of the game machine, but the air may be discharged from above the game machine as in the sixth embodiment. When the air discharge direction is upward, for example, an exhaust opening may be formed on the upper surface of the decorative unit 6258 (glass door 6111). In this case, when the irradiation light device B is installed behind the game board, an opening may be appropriately formed in the game board in order to secure an air passage.

In the present invention, it is possible to appropriately form an opening in the member existing on the air flow path according to the direction in which the air is taken in and the direction in which the air is discharged, and the path through which the air flows. A tubular duct may be provided depending on the air flow path.

Further, in order to make the air flow smooth, an intake fan and / or an exhaust fan can be appropriately arranged. For example, an intake fan (for example, the intake fan 6244 in FIG. 264) may be arranged between the opening for taking in air (for example, the opening 6300R in FIG. 265) and the opening B400R in the projector cover B1. It is possible to dispose an exhaust fan between the opening for discharging (for example, the opening 6300L in FIG. 265) and the opening B400L of the projector cover B1. However, if intake and exhaust are sufficiently performed by the fan provided inside the irradiation light device B, it is not necessary to dispose the fan outside the irradiation light device B.

In the above-described modification, the projector cover B1 described in the sixth embodiment is shown as being adopted, but the configuration of the projector cover is not particularly limited, and for taking in air for cooling the projector. A projector cover having an opening and an opening for discharging the air can be appropriately adopted. These openings can be formed at arbitrary locations such as the front and rear, above and below, and sides of the projector cover, and the position of forming the openings is appropriately determined in consideration of the cooling efficiency of the projector and the like. be able to. Further, the projector may be arranged inside the game machine in an exposed state without being covered by the projector cover, and the cooling air taken in from the outside of the game machine is directly sent to the projector (via the projector cover). It is also possible to configure it to hit (without doing).

[7th Embodiment]
The first to sixth embodiments have been described above. Hereinafter, the seventh embodiment will be described. The basic configuration of the gaming machine 1 according to the seventh embodiment is the same as that of the gaming machine 1 according to the second to sixth embodiments. In the following, the same components as the components of the game machine 1 according to the second to sixth embodiments will be described with the same reference numerals. Further, the description of the portion to which the description in the second embodiment to the sixth embodiment also applies to the seventh embodiment will be omitted.

<Upper door mechanism UD>
FIG. 267 is a perspective view of the upper door mechanism with the inner frame attached as viewed from the rear. FIG. 268 is an exploded perspective view of the upper door mechanism and the inner frame.

As described in the second embodiment, the inside of the cabinet G is divided into an upper space and a lower space by an intermediate support plate G1 (see FIGS. 32 and 33). The upper door mechanism UD shown in FIG. 267 is arranged in front of the upper space in the cabinet G and closes the upper part of the opening in the cabinet G, similarly to the upper door mechanism UD (see FIG. 123) according to the second embodiment. Is provided so that

As shown in FIG. 268, the upper door mechanism UD has a panel base HH that forms the skeleton of the upper door mechanism UD. Panel mechanisms HA, HB, HC, HD, HE, HF, and HG are provided on the front side of the panel base HH. On the back surface side of the panel base HH, an upper door key receiving member HK, an upper door hinge member HM, and a center frame HL are provided. Further, the upper door mechanism UD has an upper display window UD1 (see FIG. 31) in the central portion, and the upper display window UD1 is provided with a transparent panel UD11. Since the above configuration is as described in the second embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

An inner frame 7000 is attached to the back side of the upper door mechanism UD according to the present embodiment. Hereinafter, the configuration of the inner frame 7000 will be described in detail.

<Inner frame 7000>
FIG. 269 is a perspective view of the inner frame. FIG. 270 is an exploded perspective view of the inner frame. FIG. 271 is an exploded perspective view of the inner frame. FIG. 272 is an exploded perspective view of the right side portion, the left side portion, and the lower side portion of the inner frame. FIG. 273 is an exploded perspective view of the right side portion, the left side portion, and the lower side portion of the inner frame. FIG. 274 is a front view of the gaming machine with the transparent panel removed. FIG. 275 is a perspective view of the upper door mechanism, the inner frame, and the bottom plate of the screen housing as viewed from the rear. FIG. 276A is a partially enlarged view of the vicinity of the upper display window in the gaming machine in the state where the inner frame is removed from the state shown in FIG. 274. FIG. 276B is a perspective view of the right side portion of the inner frame, the right movable body base, and the right hidden wall. FIG. 277 is a perspective view showing the lower side portion of the inner frame, the lower cover, and the center frame in an exploded manner. FIG. 278 is a perspective view of the center frame, the lower portion of the inner frame, the bottom plate of the screen housing, and the intermediate support plate as viewed from the side. FIG. 279 is a perspective view of the center frame, the bottom plate of the screen housing, and the intermediate support plate as viewed from the side.

Note that FIG. 270 shows a state in which each component of the inner frame 7000 is viewed from diagonally above. FIG. 271 shows a state in which each component of the inner frame 7000 is viewed from diagonally below. FIG. 272 shows a state in which each component of the inner frame 7000 is viewed from diagonally right. FIG. 273 shows a state in which each component of the inner frame 7000 is viewed from diagonally below.

As shown in FIG. 269, the inner frame 7000 is formed as a U-shaped member. As shown in FIGS. 270 and 271, the inner frame 7000 includes a right side portion 7001, a left side portion 7002, a lower side portion 7003, a lower cover 7004, an upper right fixing portion 7005, and an upper left fixing portion 7006.

<Right side 7001 and left side 7002>
First, the right side portion 7001 and the left side portion 7002 will be described.

As shown in FIGS. 272 and 273, the right side portion 7001 has a triangular columnar shape of a substantially right triangle in a plan view. The right side portion 7001 includes a first decorative surface 7001a and a second decorative surface 7001b corresponding to two sides (7001A and 7001B) sandwiching a right angle of the triangle, and an undecorated surface corresponding to the hypotenuse (7001C) of the triangle. 7001c is formed. The first decorative surface 7001a and the second decorative surface 7001b are three-dimensionally decorated with irregularities. On the other hand, the undecorated surface 7001c is not decorated.

The left side portion 7002 has a triangular columnar shape of a substantially right triangle in a plan view. On the left side 7002, the first decorative surface 7002a and the second decorative surface 7002b corresponding to the two sides (7002A and 7002B) sandwiching the right angle of the triangle, and the undecorated surface corresponding to the hypotenuse (7002C) of the triangle, respectively. 7002c is formed. The first decorative surface 7002a and the second decorative surface 7002b are three-dimensionally decorated with irregularities. On the other hand, the undecorated surface 7002c is not decorated.

The right side portion 7001 and the left side portion 7002 are attached to the upper door mechanism UD by being fixed to the panel base HH by screw fastening, respectively.

As shown in FIG. 274, when the inner frame 7000 is attached to the upper door mechanism UD and the upper door mechanism UD is closed, the first decorative surface 7001a of the right side 7001 and the first decorative surface of the left side 7002 are closed. The 7002a is arranged on the front side of the game machine 1. Here, FIG. 274 shows a state in which the transparent panel UD11 is removed. However, since most of the transparent panel UD11 is transparent, when the game machine 1 is viewed from the front, the first of the right side portion 7001 The decorative surface 7001a and the first decorative surface 7002a of the left side portion 7002 become visible through the upper display window UD1.

The right side portion 7001 is also decorated so as to straddle both the first decorative surface 7001a and the second decorative surface 7001b, and the boundary between the first decorative surface 7001a and the second decorative surface 7001b is unclear. Area exists. Similarly, the left side portion 7002 is also decorated so as to straddle both the first decorative surface 7002a and the second decorative surface 7002b, and the boundary between the first decorative surface 7002a and the second decorative surface 7002b is non-existent. There is a clear region (eg, region 7002d shown in FIG. 272). In the present specification, the region of the right side portion 7001 shown in FIG. 274 (the region visible in front view) is defined as the first decorative surface 7001a, and the region of the left side portion 7002 shown in FIG. 274 (front surface). The visually recognizable area) is defined as the first decorative surface 7002a.

FIG. 275 shows the positional relationship between the inner frame 7000 and the bottom plate C1 (see FIGS. 45 and 168) of the screen housing C10 in a state where the upper door mechanism UD is closed.

As described in the second embodiment and the fourth embodiment, the right movable body base C5 is mounted on the right mounting portion C12 of the bottom plate C1. The right front screen drive mechanism E2B and the reel screen drive mechanism F2 are arranged on the right side of the right movable body base C5. Further, the left movable body base C6 is mounted on the left mounting portion C13 of the bottom plate C1. The left front screen drive mechanism E2A is arranged on the left side of the left movable body base C6.

At least a part of the right front screen drive mechanism E2B and the reel screen drive mechanism F2 are arranged on the left side of the right end of the upper display window UD1. Further, at least a part of the left front screen drive mechanism E2A is arranged on the right side of the left end of the upper display window UD1.

Therefore, if the inner frame 7000 is not provided, the front screen drive mechanism E2 (right front screen drive mechanism E2B and left front screen drive mechanism E2A) and the reel screen drive mechanism F2 are displayed on the upper display window. It can be easily seen by the player via the UD1 (see FIG. 276A).

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the inner frame 7000 is provided, and the presence of the inner frame 7000 creates a situation in which the front screen drive mechanism E2 and the reel screen drive mechanism F2 are difficult to see in the player's field of view.

As shown in FIG. 275, the side 7001B of the inner frame 7000, that is, the side defining the second decorative surface 7001b of the right side portion 7001 (see FIG. 272) and the right end side C12a of the right mounting portion C12 of the bottom plate C1 are formed. , It is almost parallel. The positions of the side 7001B and the right end side C12a in the left-right direction are substantially the same (or the right end side C12a is slightly to the right of the side 7001B) (when the game machine 1 is viewed from the front, the right movable body). The right end of the base C5 substantially overlaps with the second decorative surface 7001b, or the right end of the right movable body base C5 is slightly to the right of the second decorative surface 7001b). Further, the side 7002B of the inner frame 7000, that is, the side defining the second decorative surface 7002b of the left side portion 7002 (see FIG. 272) and the left end side C13a of the left mounting portion C13 of the bottom plate C1 are substantially parallel to each other. ing. The positions of the side 7002B and the left end side C13a in the left-right direction are substantially the same (or the left end side C13a is slightly to the left of the side 7002B) (when the game machine 1 is viewed from the front, the second decoration The surface 7002b and the left end side C13a are substantially overlapped with each other, or the left end of the left movable body base C6 is slightly to the left of the second decorative surface 7002b).

Therefore, the right front screen drive mechanism E2B and the reel screen drive mechanism F2 are arranged on the right side of the second decorative surface 7001b of the inner frame 7000 (right side portion 7001). The second decorative surface 7001b is a surface that defines the left end of the right side portion 7001, and the first decorative surface 7001a is formed on the right side of the second decorative surface 7001b in front view. Further, the left front screen drive mechanism E2A is arranged on the left side of the second decorative surface 7002b of the inner frame 7000 (left side portion 7002). The second decorative surface 7002b is a surface that defines the right end of the left side portion 7002, and the first decorative surface 7002a is formed on the left side of the second decorative surface 7002b in front view.

Therefore, when the game machine 1 is viewed from the front, the right front screen drive mechanism E2B and the reel screen drive mechanism F2 are in a state of overlapping with the first decorative surface 7001a of the inner frame 7000 (right side portion 7001), and drive the left front screen. The mechanism E2A is in a state of overlapping with the first decorative surface 7002a of the inner frame 7000 (left side portion 7002). That is, the right front screen drive mechanism E2B and the reel screen drive mechanism F2 are covered from the front by the right side portion 7001 (first decorative surface 7001a) of the inner frame 7000, and the left front screen drive mechanism E2A is the left side portion of the inner frame 7000. It will be covered from the front by 7002 (first decorative surface 7002a). As a result, the front screen drive mechanism E2 (right front screen drive mechanism E2B and left front screen drive mechanism E2A) and the reel screen drive mechanism F2 are less likely to be visually recognized by the player (see FIG. 274).

Further, even when the game machine 1 is viewed from an obliquely forward direction, the second decorative surface 7001b of the inner frame 7000 (right side portion 7001) is at a predetermined angle with the first decorative surface 7001a (the surface arranged on the front side). Since the right front screen drive mechanism E2B and the reel screen drive mechanism F2 are arranged so as to form (90 ° in the present embodiment), they are hidden behind the second decorative surface 7001b, making it difficult to see. .. Similarly, the second decorative surface 7002b of the inner frame 7000 (left side 7002) is arranged so as to form a predetermined angle (90 ° in the present embodiment) with the first decorative surface 7002a (the surface arranged on the front side). Therefore, the left front screen drive mechanism E2A is hidden behind the second decorative surface 7002b, making it difficult to see.

Further, as shown in FIG. 276B, a right hidden wall C7001 is arranged between the right side portion 7001 of the inner frame 7000 and the right movable body base C5 (see FIG. 202). FIG. 276B shows the positional relationship between the right side portion 7001 of the inner frame 7000 and the right hidden wall C7001 in a state where the upper door mechanism UD is closed.

As shown in this figure, the right side portion 7001 and the right hidden wall C7001 are substantially in contact with each other. Further, the second decorative surface 7001b of the right side portion 7001 and the surface of the right hidden wall C7001 (the surface on the left side in the front view) are arranged substantially in parallel, and these surfaces exist on substantially the same plane. (The positions in the left-right direction are almost the same). As a result, the second decorative surface 7001b of the right side portion 7001 is substantially continuous from the surface of the right hidden wall C7001.

Further, the rear portion of the second decorative surface 7001b and the front portion of the right hidden wall C7001 (near the portion where the right side portion 7001 and the right hidden wall C7001 are substantially in contact with each other) are formed in substantially the same color. There is. Further, the right hidden wall C7001 has a pattern C7001a which has a convex shape with respect to the surface and has a rock-like appearance. A pattern C7001b that is the same as or similar to the pattern C7001a is also formed on the rear portion of the second decorative surface 7001b. The same or similar patterns as these patterns are also formed on the front portion of the right movable body base C5.

As described above, the right side portion 7001 of the inner frame 7000, the right hidden wall C7001 and the right movable body base C5 are arranged in a natural appearance because the boundary between the members is inconspicuous. Therefore, the inner frame 7000 is provided. It is possible to prevent the player from giving a sense of discomfort in appearance.

In order to prevent the display unit A from being damaged by the impact when the upper door mechanism UD is closed, a slight distance is provided between the right side portion 7001 of the inner frame 7000 and the right hidden wall C7001. May be. However, it is desirable that the gap between the right side portion 7001 and the right hidden wall C7001 is negligible with respect to the size of the right side portion 7001. For example, the distance between the right side portion 7001 and the right hidden wall C7001 is 1/20 or less, 1/30 or less, 1/50 or less, 1/100 or less, etc. of the length of the side 7001B (see FIG. 272) of the right side portion 7001. Can be.

Further, in the above, the right side portion 7001 of the inner frame 7000, the right movable body base C5, and the right hidden wall C7001 have been described, but the same applies to the left side portion 7002 of the inner frame 7000 and the left movable body base C6. The left hidden wall is arranged, and the same applies to the configuration and arrangement of the left side portion 7002, the left movable body base C6, and the left hidden wall.

<Lower side 7003 and lower cover 7004>
Next, the lower side portion 7003 and the lower cover 7004 will be described.

As shown in FIGS. 272 and 273, the lower side portion 7003 includes a main body portion 7003a having a rectangular shape in a plan view, and a right step portion 7003b and a left step portion 7003c having a trapezoidal or triangular shape in a plan view. The right step portion 7003b is formed with a step on the right side of the main body portion 7003a so that the thickness in the vertical direction is smaller than that of the main body portion 7003a. The left step portion 7003c is formed with a step on the left side of the main body portion 7003a so that the thickness in the vertical direction is smaller than that of the main body portion 7003a. At the front ends of the right step portion 7003b and the left step portion 7003c, a wall portion (front end wall portion 7003e) having the same thickness as the main body portion 7003a is formed.

The above-mentioned right side portion 7001 is placed on the right side step portion 7003b and fixed by screwing. The back side of the front end wall portion 7003e of the right step portion 7003b is continuous with the right edge portion 7003f of the main body portion 7003a, and the shapes of these wall portions and side edges correspond to the shape of the lower portion of the right side portion 7001. ing. As a result, when the lower end of the right side portion 7001 comes into contact with the upper surface of the right side step portion 7003b, the right side portion 7001 can be fitted to the right side step portion 7003b.

Similarly, the left side portion 7002 described above is placed on the left side step portion 7003c and fixed by screwing. The back side of the front end wall portion 7003e of the left step portion 7003c is continuous with the left edge portion 7003g of the main body portion 7003a, and the shapes of these wall portions and the side edge portions correspond to the shape of the lower portion of the left side portion 7002. ing. As a result, when the lower end of the left side portion 7002 comes into contact with the upper surface of the left side step portion 7003c, the left side portion 7002 can be fitted to the left side step portion 7003c.

In such an inner frame 7000, the lower portion 7003 is fixed by screwing the front surface 7003d of the main body portion 7003a to the vertical surface HLa (see FIG. 277) in the center frame HL (see FIG. 268). , Attached to the upper door mechanism UD. Further, a lower cover 7004 having a rectangular shape in a plan view is attached to the back surface of the lower portion 7003.

FIG. 278 shows the positional relationship between the lower portion 7003 of the inner frame 7000, the center frame HL, and the bottom plate C1 of the screen housing C10 when the upper door mechanism UD is closed.

As shown in FIG. 278, the lower end 7003 (main body 7003a) of the inner frame 7000 has its front end fixed to the center frame HL, while its rear end is located behind the front end of the bottom plate C1. As a result, the main body 7003a of the lower 7003 is in a posture that bridges the center frame HL and the bottom plate C1.

On the other hand, FIG. 279 shows a state in which the lower portion 7003 is removed from the state shown in FIG. 278. In this state, a gap S is formed between the center frame HL and the bottom plate C1, and due to the presence of the gap S, the space above the intermediate support plate G1 (the above-mentioned upper space) and the space above the intermediate support plate G1. It communicates with the lower space (lower space described above).

In the present embodiment, such a gap S (a gap formed between the upper door mechanism UD and the screen device C or the intermediate support plate G1) is closed by providing the lower portion 7003 of the inner frame 7000. .. As a result, the main control board MS (see FIG. 32), the sub control device SS (see FIGS. 90 and 148), and various other devices arranged in the lower space are illegally accessed through the gap S. It prevents it from being stolen. For the sake of clarity, the gap S is shown by diagonal lines in FIG. 279, and the main body portion 7003a of the lower portion 7003 is shown by diagonal lines in FIG. 278.

Further, since the main body portion 7003a of the lower side portion 7003 is arranged above the bottom plate C1, it is desirable that the structure exists on the bottom plate C1 due to the presence of the lower side portion 7003 and is visible to the player. It is also possible to prevent a non-existent object (for example, the cushioning member installation portion C300 (see FIG. 212) described in the fourth embodiment) from entering the player's field of view.

<Upper right fixing part 7005 and upper left fixing part 7006>
Subsequently, the upper right fixing portion 7005 and the upper left fixing portion 7006 will be described.

As shown in FIGS. 269 and 270, the upper right fixing portion 7005 is fixed to the upper end surface of the right side portion 7001 by screwing. The upper right fixing portion 7005 has a shape in which the rear portion resembles the upper end surface of the right side portion 7001, and is formed so as to be bent or curved to the left from the rear portion to the front.

Further, the upper left fixing portion 7006 is fixed to the upper end surface of the left side portion 7002 by screwing. The upper left fixing portion 7006 has a shape similar to the upper end surface of the left side portion 7002 at the rear portion, and is formed so as to be bent or curved to the right from the rear portion to the front.

Since the upper right fixing portion 7005 and the upper left fixing portion 7006 are provided, the parts (for example, LED substrate) arranged above the upper right fixing portion 7005 or the upper left fixing portion 7006 are less likely to be visually recognized by the player. ing.

In particular, the upper right fixing portion 7005 and the upper left fixing portion 7006 have a shape such that the front portion faces inward. Normally, the player is seated so as to face the vicinity of the center in the left-right direction of the upper display window UD1, and when the player looks up at the upper right portion of the upper display window UD1, the upper right fixed portion 7005 When the front portion enters the player's view and the player looks up at the left upper portion of the upper display window UD1, the front portion of the upper left fixed portion 7006 comes into the player's view. As a result, it is possible to effectively create a situation in which the parts arranged above the upper right fixing portion 7005 or the upper left fixing portion 7006 are difficult to be visually recognized by the player.

As described above, as one embodiment of the present invention, the game machine 1 according to the seventh embodiment has been described.

Conventionally, a game machine equipped with an effect device capable of producing an effect by operating a movable body is known (see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-013685).

According to a game machine equipped with such an effect device, it is possible to perform a powerful effect that cannot be obtained only by an image or the like displayed on a liquid crystal display device through the movement of a movable body. As a result, it is possible to create a unique world view woven by the production, and it is possible to immerse the player in the game without inviting the player to such a world of the game.

On the other hand, a game machine having such a movable body is provided with a drive mechanism for driving the movable body. Here, if the drive mechanism comes into the player's field of view, the player may objectively (re-recognize) the fact that his / her fascinating effect is driven by the drive mechanism. There is sex. As a result, the player is distracted by the drive mechanism and it becomes difficult to pay attention to the production, and the player who was drawn into the world of the game is awakened, and the feeling of the player becomes a reality from the world of the game. It is feared that returning to the world will reduce the interest of the game.

The present invention has been made in view of the above problems, and an object of the present invention is to allow a player to pay attention to a production in a game machine equipped with a production device having a movable body.

In this respect, the gaming machine 1 according to the seventh embodiment has the following features.

(47-1) A projector capable of projecting an image (projector mechanism B2) and
A screen (front screen mechanism E1 and reel screen mechanism F1) capable of displaying the image projected by the projector, and
A drive mechanism for driving the screen (front screen drive mechanism E2 and reel screen drive mechanism F2) and
The main body (cabinet G) with an opening on the front and
It is provided with an opening / closing door (upper door mechanism UD) which is attached to the main body so as to be openable and closable and is provided with a display area (upper display window UD1) capable of viewing the screen.
As the drive mechanism, a right drive mechanism (right front screen drive mechanism E2B and reel screen drive mechanism F2) arranged on the right side of the screen and a left drive mechanism (left front screen drive mechanism) arranged on the left side of the screen. E2A) is provided,
On the back side of the opening / closing door, a covering member (inner frame 7000) for making the right side drive mechanism and the left side drive mechanism difficult to see from the player is attached.
The covering member includes a right side portion (right side portion 7001) and a left side portion (left side portion 7002) extending in the vertical direction, and a lower side portion (lower side) connecting the lower portion of the right side portion and the lower portion of the left side portion. With part 7003)
When the opening / closing door is closed with respect to the main body portion, the right side portion (right side portion 7001) covers the right side drive mechanism (right front screen drive mechanism E2B and reel screen drive mechanism F2) from the front. The left side portion (left side portion 7002) covers the left side drive mechanism (left front screen drive mechanism E2A) from the front.
A game machine characterized by that.

According to the game machine 1 according to the seventh embodiment, as a drive mechanism for driving the screen (front screen mechanism E1 and reel screen mechanism F1), the right side is on the right side of the screen (front screen mechanism E1 and reel screen mechanism F1). The drive mechanism (right front screen drive mechanism E2B and reel screen drive mechanism F2) is arranged, and the left drive mechanism (left front screen drive mechanism E2A) is arranged on the left side of the screen (front screen mechanism E1 and reel screen mechanism F1). Has been done. If such a drive mechanism (front screen drive mechanism E2 and reel screen drive mechanism F2) is visually recognized by the player, the player is concerned about the drive mechanism (front screen drive mechanism E2 and reel screen drive mechanism F2). There is a concern that it will be difficult to pay close attention to the production if it is taken away.

In this regard, according to the game machine 1 according to the seventh embodiment, a covering member (inner frame 7000) is attached to the back side of the opening / closing door (upper door mechanism UD). The covering member (inner frame 7000) includes a right side portion (right side portion 7001) and a left side portion (left side portion 7002) extending in the vertical direction, and a lower portion and a left side portion (left side portion 7002) of the right side portion (right side portion 7001). It is provided with a lower portion (lower side portion 7003) that connects to the lower portion of the. When the opening / closing door (upper door mechanism UD) is closed with respect to the main body (cabinet G), the right side (right side 7001) is driven by the right drive mechanism (right front screen drive mechanism E2B and reel screen drive). The mechanism F2) is covered from the front, and the left side portion (left side portion 7002) covers the left side drive mechanism (left front screen drive mechanism E2A) from the front. This makes it possible to prevent the right side drive mechanism (right front screen drive mechanism E2B and reel screen drive mechanism F2) and the left side drive mechanism (left front screen drive mechanism E2A) from being visually recognized by the player. You can make the person watch the production.

In addition, "covering from the front" means a state in which at least a part of the members arranged in the rear is hidden by the members arranged in the front when viewed from the front. In the present invention, at least a part of the right side drive mechanism is hidden by the right side part, and at least a part of the left side drive mechanism is hidden by the left side part. Here, it is desirable that the right side drive mechanism and the left side drive mechanism are configured so as not to be seen at all in the front view, but it is not necessary to hide them only by the right side portion and the left side portion. That is, a part of the right side drive mechanism and the left side drive mechanism is hidden by the right side part and the left side part, and the remaining part of the right side drive mechanism and the left side drive mechanism is covered with a member other than the covering member (inner frame) (for example, panel base HH). ) May be used to hide it.

Further, according to the game machine 1 according to the seventh embodiment, it is possible to achieve the above-mentioned effect and at the same time prevent the goto action. That is, if there is a space in which a wire-shaped device can be inserted toward the inside of the game machine, there is a possibility that various devices existing inside the game machine may be illegally accessed through the space. There is a concern that the game medium may be illegally acquired by such a goto act. In this respect, the covering member (inner frame 7000) includes a right side portion (right side portion 7001), a left side portion (left side portion 7002), and a lower side portion (lower side portion 7003), and a right side portion (right side portion 7001). And the left side portion (left side portion 7002) can prevent unauthorized access to the rear of the game machine, and the lower portion (lower side portion 7003) can prevent unauthorized access to the lower side of the game machine. As described above, the covering member (inner frame 7000) has a function of blindfolding the drive mechanism (front screen drive mechanism E2 and reel screen drive mechanism F2) and also has a function of preventing a rattling action.

(47-2) The gaming machine according to (47-1).
A partition plate (intermediate support plate G1) for partitioning the inside of the main body into an upper space and a lower space is provided.
The screen and the drive mechanism are arranged in the upper space.
A control board (main control board MS and sub control board 2070) for controlling the game is arranged in the lower space.
It is characterized by that.

According to the game machine 1 according to the seventh embodiment, the inside of the main body (cabinet G) is divided into an upper space and a lower space by a partition plate (intermediate support plate G1), and a screen (front screen mechanism E1 and The reel screen mechanism F1) and the drive mechanism (front screen drive mechanism E2 and reel screen drive mechanism F2) are arranged in the upper space. On the other hand, in the lower space, a control board (main control board MS and sub control board 2070) for controlling the game is arranged. Then, as described above, the covering member (inner frame 7000) has a lower side portion (lower side portion 7003) that connects the lower portion of the right side portion (right side portion 7001) and the lower portion of the left side portion (left side portion 7002). It is provided. Due to the presence of such a lower side portion (lower side portion 7003), the path for invading the wire-shaped instrument into the control board (main control board MS or sub control board 2070) arranged in the lower space is blocked. This makes it possible to prevent an illegal operation regarding the control of the game from being performed. In addition, if the installation location of the control board (main control board MS or sub control board 2070) is known to the Goto teacher, the Goto action is likely to occur, but due to the presence of the lower part (lower side 7003). , The lower space is in a state where it is difficult to see from the outside of the game machine. As a result, it is possible to prevent the installation location of the control board (main control board MS or sub-control board 2070) from being grasped by the Goto teacher, and from this point as well, the Goto act is performed. Can be prevented.

Further, according to the game machine 1 according to the seventh embodiment, in order to unlock the upper door mechanism UD as in the second embodiment, it is first necessary to unlock the lower door mechanism DD. (See FIGS. 93 to 97). Thereby, the security for the upper space of the cabinet G can be enhanced. As a result, it is possible to prevent the goto action aimed at the control board arranged in the lower space from being performed through the upper space.

Further, according to the game machine 1 according to the seventh embodiment, the lower portion 7003 is arranged above the intermediate support plate G1 and is formed of black or a color close to black (a color having low brightness). There is. As a result, when the inside of the game machine is looked into through the upper display window UD1 with the upper door mechanism UD closed, the lower portion 7003 is dark and difficult to see, and is below the intermediate support plate G1. The space (lower space) is more difficult to see. Therefore, it is possible to effectively prevent the goto act from being performed. As for the brightness, as in the second embodiment, the L ^* a ^* b ^* color system (L ^* a ^* b ^* color space) and the L ^* u ^* v ^* color system (L ^* u ^* v ^*) Brightness in color space) can be adopted. For example, the lower portion 7003 can be configured so that the brightness in the L ^* a ^* b ^* color system is 70 or less, 50 or less, 30 or less, 20 or less, 10 or less, or the like.

(47-3) The gaming machine according to (47-1) or (47-2).
The right side portion (right side portion 7001) and the left side portion (left side portion 7002) each have a first surface arranged on the front side of the game machine in a state where the opening / closing door is closed with respect to the main body portion. (First decorative surface 7001a and first decorative surface 7002a) and a second surface (second decorative surface 7001b and second decorative surface 7002b) formed so as to be continuous with the first surface and toward the rear. And have,
It is characterized by that.

According to the game machine 1 according to the seventh embodiment, the opening / closing door (upper door mechanism UD) of the right side portion (right side portion 7001) and the left side portion (left side portion 7002) is closed with respect to the main body portion (cabinet G), respectively. In this state, it has a first surface (first decorative surface 7001a and first decorative surface 7002a) arranged on the front side of the game machine. Therefore, when the gaming machine is viewed from the front, the right side drive mechanism (right front screen drive mechanism E2B and reel screen drive mechanism F2) is aligned with the first surface (first decorative surface 7001a) of the right side portion (right side portion 7001). The left side drive mechanism (left front screen drive mechanism E2A) is in an overlapping state with the first surface (first decorative surface 7002a) of the left side portion (left side portion 7002). That is, the right side drive mechanism (right front screen drive mechanism E2B and reel screen drive mechanism F2) is covered from the front by the first surface (first decorative surface 7001a) of the right side portion (right side portion 7001), and the left side drive mechanism (right side drive mechanism (7001a)). The left front screen drive mechanism E2A) is covered from the front by the first surface (first decorative surface 7002a) of the left side portion (left side portion 7002). As a result, it is possible to prevent the right side drive mechanism (right front screen drive mechanism E2B and reel screen drive mechanism F2) and the left side drive mechanism (left front screen drive mechanism E2A) from being visually recognized by the player.

Further, according to the game machine 1 according to the seventh embodiment, the right side portion (right side portion 7001) and the left side portion (left side portion 7002) have the opening / closing door (upper door mechanism UD) with respect to the main body portion (cabinet G), respectively. Second surface (second decorative surface 7001b and second decorative surface 7001b and second) formed so as to be continuous with the first surface (first decorative surface 7001a and first decorative surface 7002a) in the closed state. It has two decorative surfaces 7002b). Therefore, when the game machine is viewed from an obliquely forward direction, the right side drive mechanism (right front screen drive mechanism E2B and reel screen drive mechanism F2) and the left side drive mechanism (left front screen drive mechanism E2A) are on the first surface (first surface). In addition to the 1 decorative surface 7001a and the first decorative surface 7002a), it is hidden behind the second surface (the second decorative surface 7001b and the second decorative surface 7002b), making it difficult to see. As a result, it is possible to effectively prevent the right side drive mechanism (right front screen drive mechanism E2B and reel screen drive mechanism F2) and the left side drive mechanism (left front screen drive mechanism E2A) from being visually recognized by the player. ..

[8th Embodiment]
The first to seventh embodiments have been described above. Hereinafter, the eighth embodiment will be described. The basic configuration of the gaming machine 1 according to the eighth embodiment is the same as that of the gaming machine 1 according to the second to seventh embodiments. In the following, the same components as the components of the game machine 1 according to the second to seventh embodiments will be described with the same reference numerals. Further, the description of the portion to which the description in the second embodiment to the seventh embodiment also applies to the eighth embodiment will be omitted.

<Overflow bucket OF>
FIG. 280 is a perspective view of the gaming machine in a state where the lower door mechanism is opened. FIG. 281 is a perspective view showing a state in which the overflow bucket is removed from the gaming machine shown in FIG. 280. FIG. 282 is a perspective view showing a state in which the overflow flap is removed from the state shown in FIG. 281. FIG. 283 is a perspective view of the state shown in FIG. 282 as viewed from different directions. FIG. 284 is a perspective view showing a state in which the overflow cover and the recovery device fixing plate are removed from the state shown in FIG. 283. FIG. 285 is a perspective view showing a state in which the overflow cover is removed from the state shown in FIG. 283. FIG. 286 is a partially enlarged view showing a state in which the overflow bucket is installed in the overflow bucket installation portion. FIG. 287 is a cross-sectional view showing a state of cutting in a vertical plane in the front-rear direction in the state shown in FIG. 286. FIG. 288 is a cross-sectional view showing a state of cutting in a vertical plane in the left-right direction in the state shown in FIG. 286.

As shown in FIG. 280, in the present embodiment, similarly to the second embodiment (see FIG. 77), the hopper mechanism HP and the overflow bucket OF are arranged below the lower space of the cabinet G. There is.

As described in the second embodiment, the hopper mechanism HP is attached to the central portion of the bottom plate G91 in the cabinet G. The hopper mechanism HP has a structure capable of accommodating a large number of medals and ejecting those medals one by one.

The overflow bucket OF stores medals overflowing from the hopper mechanism HP. The overflow bucket OF is arranged on the right side of the hopper mechanism HP when the inside of the cabinet G is viewed from the front.

As shown in FIG. 282, the overflow bucket OF has a box shape with an open upper surface. On the back surface 8010 (the surface located on the back side when the overflow bucket OF is installed inside the cabinet G) of the side surfaces of the overflow bucket OF, a pair of detection piece insertion holes 8010a and a ground insertion hole 8010b. Is formed.

As shown in FIG. 281, a detection plate 8011 is attached to the back wall G3 of the cabinet G. The detection plate 8011 has a pair of medal detection pieces 8011a. The detection piece insertion hole 8010a of the overflow bucket OF is a hole for inserting the medal detection piece 8011a of the detection plate 8011. The detection piece insertion hole 8010a is formed at a position where the medal detection piece 8011a is inserted into the overflow bucket OF when the overflow bucket OF is arranged at an appropriate position inside the cabinet G.

As a result, when the amount of medals stored in the overflow bucket OF reaches a certain amount, the medal detection piece 8011a protruding toward the inside of the overflow bucket OF is conducted by contacting the medals and detected. The plate 8011 can detect that a certain amount of medals are stored in the overflow bucket OF.

Further, as shown in FIG. 281, a noise filter bracket 8012 is attached to the back wall G3 of the cabinet G. The noise filter bracket 8012 has a ground portion 8012a. The grounding insertion hole 8010b of the overflow bucket OF is a hole for inserting the grounding portion 8012a of the noise filter bracket 8012. The grounding insertion hole 8010b is formed at a position where the grounding portion 8012a is inserted into the overflow bucket OF when the overflow bucket OF is arranged at an appropriate position inside the cabinet G.

As a result, the ground portion 8012a projecting toward the inside of the overflow bucket OF comes into contact with the medals stored in the overflow bucket OF, and static electricity can be released from the medals.

Further, as shown in FIG. 282, a medal discharge hole 8013a is formed on the bottom surface 8013 of the overflow bucket OF. FIG. 284 shows a state in which the overflow bucket OF is turned upside down so that the bottom surface 8013 faces upward, and the overall shape of the discharge hole 8013a is shown.

As shown in FIG. 284, an opening 8014 is formed in the bottom plate G91 of the cabinet G at a position facing the discharge hole 8013a when the overflow bucket OF is installed inside the cabinet G. As a result, the medals stored in the overflow bucket OF can be discharged to the outside of the game machine 1 through the discharge hole 8013a of the overflow bucket OF and the opening G91a of the bottom plate G91. In a game store where an automatic medal collection system is introduced, medals discharged from the overflow bucket OF can be collected by a medal transfer device such as a belt conveyor installed under the game machine 1.

The discharge hole 8013a is closed by attaching an overflow flap 8014 provided as a bottom lid to the lower part of the overflow bucket OF. Specifically, a recess is formed on the bottom surface 8013 of the overflow bucket OF so as to have a step, and the overflow flap 8014 has a shape that can be fitted into the recess. As a result, the overflow flap 8014 can be attached to the overflow bucket OF. In addition, in FIG. 282 and FIG. 283, the overflow bucket OF and the overflow flap 8014 are shown in an exploded manner.

As shown in FIG. 284, the overflow bucket installation portion 8015 in the bottom plate G91 of the cabinet G has a shape that is raised with respect to the surrounding surface. As shown in FIG. 285, a recovery device fixing plate 8016 is attached to the front portion of the overflow bucket installation portion 8015 in the bottom plate G91 by screwing. The recovery device fixing plate 8016 has a shape in which the right end and the left end of the main surface 8016a are bent downward. Further, the recovery device fixing plate 8016 has a front side portion 8016b in front of the main surface 8016a. The front side portion 8016b has a step with the main surface 8016a, and is formed slightly below the main surface 8016a. The front side portion 8016b is attached to an inner rib G91b provided on the bottom plate G91 so as to have a height higher than the periphery. As a result, when the recovery device fixing plate 8016 is attached to the bottom plate G91, the upper surface of the overflow bucket installation portion 8015 and the main surface 8016a of the recovery device fixing plate 8016 have substantially the same height. Further, the front end portion of the upper surface of the overflow bucket installation portion 8015 and the rear end portion of the main surface 8016a of the recovery device fixing plate 8016 have a similar curved shape, and the recovery device fixing plate 8016 is attached to the bottom plate G91. In this state, these surfaces are substantially continuous.

As shown in FIG. 283, the overflow cover 8017 is placed on the overflow bucket installation portion 8015 and the recovery device fixing plate 8016 so as to straddle them. As shown in FIG. 285, four engaging pieces 8017a are formed on the main surface 8017b of the overflow cover 8017, and the four engaging portions 8015a provided on the overflow bucket installation portion 8015 are engaged with each other. Can be done.

The overflow cover 8017 has an upper side surface 8017c formed substantially parallel to the main surface 8017b above the substantially horizontal main surface 8017b, a rear inclined surface 8017d connecting the main surface 8017b and the upper side surface 8017c, and an upper side surface 8017c. It has a front inclined surface 8017e that is continuous from the front end of the vehicle toward the lower front side.

When the overflow cover 8017 is placed on the overflow bucket installation portion 8015 and the recovery device fixing plate 8016, most of the main surface 8017b of the overflow cover 8017 is positioned above the overflow bucket installation portion 8015, and the upper side surface 8017c The rear inclined surface 8017d and the front inclined surface 8017e are positioned above the recovery device fixing plate 8016.

With the overflow cover 8017 disposed as described above, the overflow bucket OF is installed in the overflow bucket installation portion 8015. The overflow flap 8014 is attached to the overflow bucket OF in advance.

As shown in FIG. 286, when the overflow bucket OF is installed in the overflow bucket installation portion 8015, the overflow bucket OF is positioned above the main surface 8017b of the overflow cover 8017, and is positioned behind the upper side surface 8017c of the overflow cover 8017. The inclined surface 8017d and the forward inclined surface 8017e are arranged in front of the overflow bucket OF. For the sake of clarity, the locking portion G512 (see FIG. 94) of the lower door locking mechanism G51 is not shown.

As shown in FIG. 287, when the overflow bucket OF is installed in the overflow bucket installation portion 8015, the medal detection piece 8011a of the detection plate 8011 passes through the detection piece insertion hole 8010a of the overflow bucket OF and overflow bucket. It is inserted inside the OF. Further, the ground portion 8012a of the noise filter bracket 8012 is inserted into the overflow bucket OF through the ground insertion hole 8010b of the overflow bucket OF.

As shown in FIG. 288, when the overflow bucket OF is installed in the overflow bucket installation portion 8015, the overflow guide 8020 is arranged on the right side of the overflow bucket OF. The overflow guide 8020 will be described in detail below.

<Overflow Guide 8020>
FIG. 289 is a perspective view of the overflow guide. FIG. 290 is a partially enlarged view of the overflow bucket and the overflow guide in a state where the lower door mechanism is opened. FIG. 291 is a partially enlarged view of the overflow bucket and the overflow guide showing a state in which the overflow guide is cut in a horizontal plane. FIG. 292 is a perspective view showing an overflow bucket and an overflow guide.

As shown in FIG. 289, the overflow guide 8020 has a shape similar to a hexagon having sides A to F in front view, and a pillar (square pillar) having such a hexagonal figure as a bottom surface. It has a shape like that. In the following, the side surface corresponding to the side A will be referred to as a contact surface 8020a, the side surface corresponding to the side B will be referred to as an upper side surface 8020b, and the side surface corresponding to the side E (a surface substantially parallel to the contact surface 8020a) will be referred to as an installation surface 8020e. And. The contact surface 8020a and the installation surface 8020e are formed in the vertical direction, and the upper side surface 8020b is formed in the horizontal direction.

As shown in FIG. 290, the overflow guide 8020 is inserted with screw holes 8021 (see FIG. 289) so that the installation surface 8020e is on the side wall G2 side of the cabinet G and the contact surface 8020a is on the overflow bucket OF side. It is fixed to the side wall G2 by screws. The contact surface 8020a is in contact with the overflow bucket OF.

FIG. 291 shows a top view of a cross section when cut in a horizontal plane above the upper end of the overflow bucket OF and below the upper side surface 8020b of the overflow guide 8020. The overflow guide 8020 is shaded for clarity. The overflow guide 8020 is arranged so as to fill the space between the side wall G2 of the cabinet G and the overflow bucket OF, and no gap is formed between the side wall G2 and the overflow bucket OF.

FIG. 292 shows the positional relationship between the overflow bucket OF and the overflow guide 8020 in a state where the overflow bucket OF is installed in the overflow bucket installation unit 8015.

As shown in FIG. 292, the overflow bucket OF has an upper peripheral edge portion 8032 protruding with respect to the side surface 8031, and the upper peripheral edge portion 8032 is in contact with the overflow guide 8020 (see FIG. 290). Further, the length of the overflow guide 8020 in the front-rear direction is longer than the length of the opening 8030 of the overflow bucket OF in the front-rear direction.

By providing such an overflow guide 8020, it is possible to prevent the medal from falling between the side wall G2 of the cabinet G and the overflow bucket OF.

<Speaker cover DD25R1>
FIG. 293 is a perspective view showing the back side of the lower door mechanism. FIG. 294 is a partially enlarged view showing a state in which the speaker cover is removed from the lower door mechanism shown in FIG. 293.

As described in the second embodiment, the lower door mechanism DD is provided with the speaker DD25L on the lower left side and the speaker DD25R on the lower right side (see FIG. 107). The speaker DD25L is as described in the second embodiment.

As shown in FIGS. 293 and 294, the speaker DD25R is provided at the lower part on the back side of the lower door DD1 (see FIG. 108) of the lower door mechanism DD. The speaker DD25R is attached to the lower door DD1 together with the speaker cover DD25R1 by screwing in a state of being covered by the speaker cover DD25R1 from the back side.

The speaker cover DD25R1 has a cylindrical shape with one side open. The bottom surface of the speaker cover DD25R1 (the surface opposite to the opening side) is formed so as to have a step, and the first bottom surface DD25R1a continuous with the side surface and the second bottom surface protruding from the first bottom surface DD25R1a. It has DD25R1b and.

<Contact between overflow bucket OF and speaker cover DD25R1>
FIG. 295 is a cross-sectional view showing the inside of the cabinet when the lower door mechanism is closed.

When the lower door mechanism DD is closed, the overflow bucket OF and the speaker cover DD25R1 are arranged so as to face each other. Specifically, the central portion of the overflow bucket OF in the left-right direction and the central portion of the speaker cover DD25R1 in the left-right direction are arranged so as to substantially coincide with each other.

FIG. 295 shows a cross section viewed from the right side when the lower door mechanism DD is cut in a vertical plane passing through both the overflow bucket OF and the speaker cover DD25R1 in a closed state.

As shown in FIG. 295, when the lower door mechanism DD is closed, the overflow bucket OF and the speaker cover DD25R1 are in contact with each other. Specifically, the first bottom surface DD25R1a of the speaker cover DD25R1 is in contact with the first front surface 8033a of the overflow bucket OF, and the second bottom surface DD25R1b of the speaker cover DD25R1 is in contact with the second front surface 8033b of the overflow bucket OF. The first front surface 8033a of the overflow bucket OF is formed so as to project forward from the second front surface 8033b (see FIG. 292).

As described above, as one embodiment of the present invention, the game machine 1 according to the eighth embodiment has been described.

Conventionally, there is known a gaming machine provided adjacent to a hopper device and provided with a medal auxiliary storage for storing medals overflowing from the hopper device (see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-188399). In such a game machine, when the amount of medals stored in the medal auxiliary storage reaches a certain amount, the stored medals are automatically stored under the control of the game machine or manually by the clerk of the game store. It is discharged to the outside of the game machine.

In automatic ejection, the openings formed at the bottom of the medal auxiliary storage and the openings formed at the bottom of the cabinet are communicated with each other, and the medals stored in the medal auxiliary storage are passed through these openings. It can be discharged to the outside of the game machine. In a game store where an automatic medal collection system is introduced, medals discharged from the medal auxiliary storage can be collected by a medal transfer device such as a belt conveyor installed under the game machine.

On the other hand, in the manual discharge, the medal auxiliary storage is taken out from the cabinet with the door open by the clerk of the game store, the medals stored in the medal auxiliary storage are removed, and then the medal auxiliary storage is removed. Is put back in place in the cabinet.

As mentioned above, when the medals stored in the medal auxiliary storage are manually ejected by the clerk of the game store, it takes time and effort to return the medal auxiliary storage to the original position in the cabinet. There is a possibility that labor efficiency will decrease and it will not be possible to fully meet the needs of customers (players). Further, since the player cannot play the game while the manual discharge work is being performed, if the work takes a long time, the operating rate of the game machine may decrease. ..

The present invention has been made in view of the above problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of easily performing the work of arranging the medal auxiliary storage in a regular position. ..

In this respect, the gaming machine 1 according to the eighth embodiment has the following features.

(48-1) A medal auxiliary storage (overflow bucket OF) for storing medals overflowing from the hopper device (hopper mechanism HP) for storing medals, and
A main body (cabinet G) that houses the medal auxiliary storage and has an opening on the front surface,
An opening / closing door (lower door mechanism DD) that can be opened / closed with respect to the main body,
A speaker cover (speaker cover DD25R1) attached to the opening / closing door so as to cover the speaker (speaker DD25R) provided on the opening / closing door from the back side is provided.
The medal auxiliary storage (overflow bucket OF) is arranged at a predetermined distance from the side wall (side wall G2) of the main body.
A medal spill prevention member (overflow guide 8020) is provided so as to fill the gap between the medal auxiliary storage and the side wall.
The speaker cover (speaker cover DD25R1) is provided at a position facing the medal auxiliary storage (overflow bucket OF) in a state where the opening / closing door is closed with respect to the main body portion.
The medal auxiliary storage and the speaker cover are in contact with or close to each other in a state where the opening / closing door is closed with respect to the main body.
A game machine characterized by that.

According to the game machine 1 according to the eighth embodiment, the medal auxiliary storage (overflow bucket OF) is arranged at a predetermined distance from the side wall (side wall G2) of the main body (cabinet G). A medal spill prevention member (overflow guide 8020) is provided so as to fill the gap between the medal auxiliary storage (overflow bucket OF) and the side wall (side wall G2). That is, in a state where the medal auxiliary storage (overflow bucket OF) is arranged at a regular position, the medal spill prevention member (overflow guide 8020) is arranged so as to come into contact with the medal auxiliary storage (overflow bucket OF). Has been done.

Therefore, after the medals stored in the medal auxiliary storage (overflow bucket OF) are manually ejected by the clerk of the game store, the medal auxiliary storage (overflow bucket OF) is properly discharged in the main body (cabinet G). When returning to the position, place the medal auxiliary storage (overflow bucket OF) near the entrance of the main body (cabinet G) (front of the regular position) so that it comes into contact with the medal spill prevention member (overflow guide 8020). Just do it. If the opening / closing door (lower door mechanism DD) is closed in this state, the speaker cover (speaker cover DD25R1) hits the medal auxiliary storage (overflow bucket OF), so that the medal auxiliary storage (overflow bucket OF) becomes the main body (cabinet). It is pushed to the rear of G). As a result, the medal auxiliary storage (overflow bucket OF) is housed in the regular position, so that the work of arranging the medal auxiliary storage (overflow bucket OF) in the regular position can be easily performed.

Here, in a state where the opening / closing door (lower door mechanism DD) is closed with respect to the main body (cabinet G), the medal auxiliary storage (overflow bucket OF) and the speaker cover (speaker cover DD25R1) are in contact with each other or If the medal auxiliary storage (overflow bucket OF) and the speaker cover (speaker cover DD25R1) are separated from each other, the medal assistance is provided before the opening / closing door (lower door mechanism DD) is completely closed. The state in which the storage (overflow bucket OF) and the speaker cover (speaker cover DD25R1) are in contact with each other is released. As a result, the medal auxiliary storage (overflow bucket OF) may not be sufficiently pushed by the speaker cover (speaker cover DD25R1), and the medal auxiliary storage (overflow bucket OF) may stop ahead of the normal position. There is. According to the game machine 1 according to the eighth embodiment, the medal auxiliary storage (overflow bucket OF) is pushed by the speaker cover (speaker cover DD25R1) until the medal auxiliary storage (overflow bucket OF) reaches the normal position. Since it is possible to continue, the medal auxiliary storage (overflow bucket OF) can be arranged at a regular position while avoiding such a situation.

In the present invention, "contact or close contact" refers to a state of substantially contact. "Almost in contact" means not only the state in which the medal auxiliary storage (overflow bucket OF) and the speaker cover (speaker cover DD25R1) are in complete contact, but also the medal auxiliary storage (overflow bucket OF). The concept includes a state in which the distance from the speaker cover (speaker cover DD25R1) is sufficiently smaller than the size of the medal auxiliary storage (overflow bucket OF). Specifically, in the present invention, the distance between the medal auxiliary storage (overflow bucket OF) and the speaker cover (speaker cover DD25R1) is 1/10 or less of the length in the front-rear direction in the medal auxiliary storage (overflow bucket OF). (Or, 1/20 or less, 1/30 or less, 1/50 or less, etc.). For example, the distance between the medal auxiliary storage (overflow bucket OF) and the speaker cover (speaker cover DD25R1) may be 2 cm or less (or 1 cm or less, 5 mm or less, 2 mm or less, etc.).

(48-2) The gaming machine according to (48-1).
The medal spill prevention member (overflow guide 8020) has a first surface (contact surface 8020a) in contact with or close to the medal auxiliary storage, and the first surface above the medal auxiliary storage. It has a second surface (upper side surface 8020b) formed so as to project to the side opposite to the side surface wall.
It is characterized by that.

As described above, if the open / close door (lower door mechanism DD) is closed with the medal auxiliary storage (overflow bucket OF) placed near the entrance of the main body (cabinet G) (front of the regular position), the speaker Where the cover (speaker cover DD25R1) hits the medal auxiliary storage (overflow bucket OF), the impact when the speaker cover (speaker cover DD25R1) hits the medal auxiliary storage (overflow bucket OF) causes the medal auxiliary storage (overflow). If the bucket OF) pops out upward, the medal auxiliary storage (overflow bucket OF) may not be arranged in the proper position. In this regard, according to the game machine 1 according to the eighth embodiment, the medal spill prevention member (overflow guide 8020) is in contact with or in close proximity to the medal auxiliary storage (overflow bucket OF). In addition to the 8020a), it has a second surface (upper side surface 8020b) formed above the medal auxiliary storage (overflow bucket OF). Therefore, when the medal auxiliary storage (overflow bucket OF) tries to pop out upward, the upward movement of the medal auxiliary storage (overflow bucket OF) is the second surface (overflow guide 8020) of the medal spill prevention member (overflow guide 8020). It is regulated by the upper side surface 8020b) and can prevent the medal auxiliary storage (overflow bucket OF) from popping out.

In particular, according to the game machine 1 according to the eighth embodiment, the upper side surface 8017c of the overflow cover 8017 is formed at a position higher than the main surface 8017b (the surface on which the overflow bucket OF is placed) (FIG. (See 285), for example, as shown in FIG. 296, the bottom of the overflow bucket OF is placed on the boundary portion between the upper side surface 8017c of the overflow cover 8017 and the forward inclined surface 8017e (the rear side is higher than the front side). It is considered that the overflow bucket OF may be placed while the overflow bucket OF is tilted as described above. When the lower door mechanism DD is closed in such a state, there is a high possibility that the overflow bucket OF will pop out upward due to the impact when the speaker cover DD25R1 hits the overflow bucket OF. According to the gaming machine 1 according to the eighth embodiment, even in such a case, the presence of the upper side surface 8020b of the overflow guide 8020 can prevent the overflow bucket OF from popping out.

Further, according to the gaming machine 1 according to the eighth embodiment, a rear protruding portion 8034 projecting rearward from each of the right side and the left side is formed on the upper rear side of the overflow bucket OF (see FIG. 292). .. Therefore, when the overflow bucket OF moves upward and hits the upper side surface 8020b of the overflow guide 8020, the rear protruding portion 8034 comes into contact with the upper side surface 8020b. As a result, the front portion of the overflow bucket OF is lifted with the contact point between the rear protruding portion 8034 and the upper side surface 8020b as a fulcrum, and the tilted state of the overflow bucket OF is corrected. As a result, the overflow bucket OF can be efficiently arranged at a regular position.

Further, according to the game machine 1 according to the eighth embodiment, the detection plate 8011 and the noise filter bracket 8012 are attached to the back wall G3 of the cabinet G, and the medal detection piece 8011a and the ground portion 8012a are connected to the cabinet. It protrudes forward in G (see FIG. 281). If the upper side surface 8020b of the overflow guide 8020 is not provided and the overflow bucket OF pops out in an unintended direction when the lower door mechanism DD is closed, the detection piece 8011a and the ground portion 8012a of the overflow bucket OF It is not inserted properly into the detection piece insertion hole 8010a and the ground insertion hole 8010b (the part of the back surface 8010 of the overflow bucket OF where the detection piece insertion hole 8010a and the ground insertion hole 8010b are not formed, the detection piece 8011a, and (Collision with the ground portion 8012a), the overflow bucket OF, the detection piece 8011a, and the ground portion 8012a may be damaged. According to the gaming machine 1 according to the eighth embodiment, the overflow bucket OF can be arranged at a regular position while avoiding such a situation.

Further, according to the gaming machine 1 according to the eighth embodiment, the contact surfaces (first front surface 8033a and second front surface 8033b) with the speaker cover DD25R1 in the overflow bucket OF and the overflow bucket OF in the speaker cover DD25R1. The contact surfaces (first bottom surface DD25R1a and second bottom surface DD25R1b) each have two surfaces having a step, and the overflow bucket OF and the speaker cover DD25R1 are in contact with each of the two surfaces having the step. It is configured to touch. As a result, the impact when the speaker cover DD25R1 hits the overflow bucket OF can be alleviated, and the force for pushing the overflow bucket OF backward can be transmitted in a well-balanced manner.

Further, for example, when the lower door mechanism DD is closed in a state where the bottom of the overflow bucket OF is placed on the upper side surface 8017c of the overflow cover 8017 (a state substantially parallel to the main surface 8017b), the speaker cover DD25R1 is placed on the overflow bucket OF. At the time of hitting, the first front surface 8033a of the overflow bucket OF is located above the speaker cover DD25R1. Therefore, the first bottom surface DD25R1a of the speaker cover DD25R1 does not correspond to the first front surface 8033a of the overflow bucket OF, but the second bottom surface DD25R1b of the speaker cover DD25R1 corresponds to the second front surface 8033b of the overflow bucket OF. Therefore, even when the overflow bucket OF is placed in such a state, the overflow bucket OF can be appropriately pushed backward by the second bottom surface DD25R1b of the speaker cover DD25R1.

Further, according to the game machine 1 according to the eighth embodiment, the length of the overflow bucket installation portion 8015 in the left-right direction is longer than the length of the main surface 8017b of the overflow cover 8017 in the left-right direction. Therefore, when the overflow cover 8017 is placed on the overflow bucket installation portion 8015, the left side portion and the right side portion of the overflow bucket installation portion 8015 protrude to the left and right from the main surface 8017b of the overflow cover 8017, respectively. It is in a (exposed) state (see FIG. 283). Further, the length of the overflow bucket OF in the left-right direction is also slightly longer than the length of the main surface 8017b of the overflow cover 8017 in the left-right direction. Therefore, in a state where the overflow bucket OF is installed in the overflow bucket installation portion 8015, most of the bottom portion of the overflow bucket OF is in contact with the main surface 8017b of the overflow cover 8017, while the left and right portions of the overflow bucket OF are. , Each slightly protrudes to the left and right from the main surface 8017b of the overflow cover 8017 (see FIGS. 286 and 287). Since the main surface 8017b of the overflow cover 8017 exists above the overflow bucket installation portion 8015 by the thickness thereof, the portion protruding to the left and right of the overflow bucket OF and the overflow bucket installation portion 8015 A gap is formed between the exposed portion and the exposed portion. Even in the process of pushing the overflow bucket OF from the vicinity of the entrance of the cabinet G to the rear, such a gap is maintained (a state in which the overflow bucket OF and the overflow bucket installation portion 8015 are separated from each other), and the overflow bucket OF is maintained. Moves backward without contacting the overflow bucket installation portion 8015. Further, the right side surface (upper peripheral edge portion 8032) of the overflow bucket OF comes into contact with the overflow guide 8020, but the left side surface of the overflow bucket OF does not come into contact with other members. The upper surface of the overflow bucket OF is also separated from the upper side surface 8020b of the overflow guide 8020 and does not come into contact with other members. That is, in the game machine 1 according to the eighth embodiment, when arranging the overflow bucket OF at a regular position, a rail-shaped member (guide rail) capable of adjusting the moving direction of the overflow bucket OF is not used. It is supposed to be.

As described above, according to the game machine 1 according to the eighth embodiment, the overflow bucket OF can be arranged at a regular position by pushing the overflow bucket OF with the speaker cover DD25R1. Therefore, it is not necessary to provide a guide rail member or the like for guiding the overflow bucket OF to a regular position, and the cost can be reduced.

The first to eighth embodiments have been described above. In the above-described embodiment, the case where the present invention is applied to a pachislot gaming machine has been described, but the present invention can also be applied to other gaming machines (for example, pachinko gaming machines, slot machines, etc.).

Although the first to eighth embodiments of the present invention have been described above, they merely exemplify specific examples and do not particularly limit the present invention, and specific configurations of each means and the like are appropriately redesigned. It is possible. In addition, the effects described in the embodiments of the present invention merely list the most preferable effects arising from the present invention, and the effects according to the present invention are limited to those described in the embodiments of the present invention. is not.

Moreover, in the above-mentioned detailed description, the characteristic parts have been mainly described so that the present invention can be understood more easily. The present invention is not limited to the embodiments described in the detailed description described above, and can be applied to other embodiments, and the scope of application thereof is diverse. In addition, the terms and usages used in the present specification are used to accurately explain the present invention, and are not used to limit the interpretation of the present invention. Further, those skilled in the art will find it easy to infer other configurations, systems, methods and the like included in the concept of the present invention from the concept of the invention described in the present specification. Therefore, the description of the scope of claims must be regarded as including an equal structure without departing from the scope of the technical idea of the present invention. In addition, the purpose of the abstract is to simplify the technical content and essence of this application by the Japan Patent Office, general public institutions, and engineers belonging to this technical field who are not familiar with patents, legal terms, or technical terms. It is intended to be able to make a prompt judgment through a thorough investigation. Therefore, the abstract is not intended to limit the scope of the invention to be evaluated by the statement of claims. Further, in order to fully understand the object of the present invention and the peculiar effect of the present invention, it is desired that the interpretation is made with full consideration of the documents and the like already disclosed.

The detailed description described above includes processing performed on the computer. The above explanations and expressions are described for the purpose of being understood by those skilled in the art most efficiently. In the present specification, each process used to derive the result of 1 should be understood as a self-consistent process. Further, in each process, electrical or magnetic signals are transmitted / received, recorded, and the like. In the processing in each processing, such signals are expressed by bits, values, symbols, letters, terms, numbers, etc., but it should be noted that these are used only for convenience of explanation. There is a need. In addition, the processing in each processing may be described in terms common to human behavior, but the processing described in the present specification is, in principle, executed by various devices. In addition, other configurations required to perform each process are self-evident from the above description.

1 Game machine 21 Cabinet A Display unit B Illumination light device C Screen device D Fixed screen mechanism E1 Front screen mechanism F1 Reel screen mechanism UD Upper door mechanism DD Lower door mechanism

Claims (2)

A medal auxiliary storage that stores medals overflowing from the hopper device that stores medals,
A main body that houses the medal auxiliary storage and has an opening on the front,
An opening / closing door that can be opened / closed with respect to the main body
A speaker cover attached to the opening / closing door so as to cover the speaker provided on the opening / closing door from the back side is provided.
The medal auxiliary storage is arranged at a predetermined distance from the side wall of the main body.
A medal spill prevention member is provided so as to fill the gap between the medal auxiliary storage and the side wall.
The speaker cover is provided at a position facing the medal auxiliary storage in a state where the opening / closing door is closed with respect to the main body portion.
In a state where the opening / closing door is closed with respect to the main body, the medal auxiliary storage and the speaker cover come into contact with each other or come close to each other.
The medal spill prevention member has a first surface having an inclination that rises toward the side wall side.
A game machine characterized by that. A medal auxiliary storage that stores medals overflowing from the hopper device that stores medals,
A main body that houses the medal auxiliary storage and has an opening on the front,
An opening / closing door that can be opened / closed with respect to the main body
A speaker cover attached to the opening / closing door so as to cover the speaker provided on the opening / closing door from the back side is provided.
The medal auxiliary storage is arranged at a predetermined distance from the side wall of the main body.
A medal spill prevention member is provided so as to fill the gap between the medal auxiliary storage and the side wall.
The speaker cover is provided at a position facing the medal auxiliary storage in a state where the opening / closing door is closed with respect to the main body portion.
In a state where the opening / closing door is closed with respect to the main body, the medal auxiliary storage and the speaker cover come into contact with each other or come close to each other.
The medal spill prevention member projects from a first surface in contact with or close to the medal auxiliary storage and above the medal auxiliary storage with respect to the first surface on the side opposite to the side wall. With a second surface formed so as to:
A game machine characterized by that.